Dodge 2006 Dakota Automobile User Manual

Sommer\ Corporate\ Media\ AG
Bild in der Größe
215x70 mm einfügen
Ê6/t-qJË
2215841381
Order No. 6515 2186 13 Part No. 221 584 13 81 USA Edition A 2007
Operator’s Manual S-Class
Operator’s Manual
S-Class
S 550
S 600
Our company and staff congratulate you
on the purchase of your new
Mercedes-Benz.
앫
Please read this manual carefully, then
return it to your vehicle where it will be
handy for your reference.
Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in our company
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your desire to own an automobile that will be as
easy as possible to operate and provide
years of service.
앫
Please follow the recommendations
contained in this manual. They are designed to acquaint you with the operation of your Mercedes-Benz.
앫
Please pay attention to the warnings
and cautions contained in this manual.
They are designed to help improve the
safety of the vehicle operator and occupants.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To help assure your driving pleasure,
and also the safety of you and your passengers, we ask you to make a small investment of time:
We extend our best wishes for many miles
of safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company
Contents
Introduction .......................................
Product information.............................
Operator’s Manual ...............................
Service and warranty information ..
Important notice for California
retail buyers and lessees of
Mercedes-Benz automobiles ..........
Maintenance ..................................
Roadside Assistance ......................
Change of address or ownership....
Operating your vehicle outside
the USA or Canada.........................
Where to find it....................................
Symbols...............................................
Operating safety ..................................
Proper use of the vehicle ...............
Problems with your vehicle..................
Reporting safety defects......................
Reporting safety defects ................
Vehicle data recording.........................
Information regarding electronic
recording devices...........................
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
16
17
18
19
19
20
21
21
22
22
At a glance .......................................... 23
Exterior view......................................... 24
Cockpit................................................. 26
Instrument cluster ................................ 28
Control systems ................................... 30
Center console ..................................... 32
Upper part ...................................... 32
Lower part ...................................... 33
Automatic climate control .................... 34
Overview ......................................... 34
Automatic climate control panel,
front................................................ 36
Overhead control panel ........................ 37
Driver’s door control panel ................... 38
Rear door control panel........................ 39
Storage compartments......................... 40
Rear passenger compartment .............. 42
Safety and Security ...........................
Occupant safety ...................................
Air bags ..........................................
Occupant Classification System .....
Seat belts .......................................
Luxury active head restraints
(S 600 only) ....................................
Preventive occupant safety
(PRE-SAFE®) ...................................
Children in the vehicle ....................
Override switch for rear
passenger compartment.................
Panic alarm ..........................................
Activating........................................
Deactivating....................................
Driving safety systems .........................
ABS.................................................
Adaptive Brake ...............................
Adaptive Brake Lights
(S 600 and USA only) .....................
BAS.................................................
BAS Plus* .......................................
EBP .................................................
ESP® ...............................................
43
44
45
50
55
59
60
61
67
68
68
68
69
69
70
70
71
71
71
72
Contents
Anti-theft systems................................
Immobilizer.....................................
Anti-theft alarm system..................
Tow-away alarm .............................
Canceling the alarm .......................
75
75
75
76
76
Control systems ................................
COMAND operating safety...................
COMAND introduction .........................
Availability of functions while
the vehicle is in motion ..................
Switching COMAND on or off .........
COMAND components ...................
Operating COMAND .......................
Main menus of COMAND ...............
COMAND FM/AM radio.......................
Submenu overview .........................
Switching to radio mode ................
Switching wavebands.....................
Selecting stations/channels ..........
Saving stations...............................
Station name display......................
77
78
79
79
79
79
84
89
93
93
94
94
94
96
97
COMAND satellite radio* (USA only) ... 98
Submenu overview......................... 98
Introduction to Satellite radio ........ 98
Switching to satellite radio............. 99
Main satellite radio menu............. 100
Selecting program category ......... 100
Tuning in channels ....................... 100
Saving channels ........................... 102
Show program info....................... 103
Channel update............................ 103
Calling Sirius Service Center ........ 103
COMAND audio CD/
audio DVD/MP3 ................................ 104
Safety precautions ....................... 104
Notes about MP3 mode ............... 104
Notes about audio DVD
operation...................................... 106
Notes about CDs/DVDs .............. 106
Notes about handling CDs/
DVDs............................................ 107
Inserting CDs and DVDs............... 107
Inserting a PCMCIA card .............. 108
Ejecting CDs and DVDs................ 109
Ejecting a PCMCIA card ...............
Submenu overview.......................
Switching to audio CD,
audio DVD or MP3 mode .............
Stop function ...............................
Pause function .............................
Selecting CD/DVD/MP3 media .
Selecting a track ..........................
Fast forward/rewind....................
Selecting a folder.........................
Setting the audio format ..............
Playback options..........................
COMAND telephone* ........................
Safety precautions .......................
General notes ..............................
Switching telephone on or off ......
Activating telephone mode ..........
Telephone keypad........................
“911” emergency call ..................
Entering the PIN...........................
Entering the PIN2.........................
Entering the PUK/PUK2..............
Entering the unlock code .............
109
110
111
112
112
112
113
113
113
114
114
115
115
115
116
117
117
117
119
119
119
119
Contents
Telephone submenu overview ...... 120
Main telephone menu .................. 121
Mailbox ........................................ 121
Call lists ....................................... 122
Incoming call................................ 124
Making an outgoing call ............... 125
Functions during a single-call
connection ................................... 127
Transferring a call ........................ 128
COMAND phone book.................. 129
SMS messages (Short Message
Service)........................................ 137
COMAND navigation (introduction).... 140
Safety precautions ....................... 140
Map software ............................... 140
Updating the map software.......... 141
Updating process ......................... 141
Loading a DVD into the
DVD changer................................ 142
Updating ...................................... 142
General notes............................... 144
Input restrictions.......................... 146
Navigation system menu overview 147
Calling up the map display and
switching to navigation mode ...... 148
Basic settings............................... 150
COMAND navigation system
(entering a destination) ...................... 153
Entering a destination by address. 153
Entering a destination from
the destination memory................ 172
Entering a destination from
the list of last destinations............ 174
Entering a destination from
the map ........................................ 174
Entering a stopover....................... 175
COMAND navigation system
(Point of interest entry) ...................... 177
Entering a POI in the surrounding
area .............................................. 177
Entering a POI in the surroundings
of a given town ............................. 177
Entering a POI in a different
region............................................ 177
Designating a POI category........... 178
Entering a POI from the map......... 184
COMAND navigation system
(route guidance) ................................. 185
Route guidance ............................. 185
Examples of displays and announcements for a driving maneuver ....... 185
Example of a display without
driving maneuvers ........................ 187
Destination or destination area
reached ........................................ 187
Partially digitized areas................. 188
Off-road and off-map .................... 189
Navigation announcements .......... 191
COMAND navigation system
(during route guidance) ...................... 192
Cancel route guidance.................. 192
Continuing cancelled route
guidance ....................................... 192
Route browser .............................. 192
Displaying route information......... 193
Detour function............................. 194
COMAND navigation system
(destination memory) ......................... 195
Saving a destination in the
destination memory...................... 195
Deleting a destination from the
destination memory...................... 196
Own address................................. 197
Contents
COMAND navigation system
(last destinations) ..............................
Saving a destination permanently
in the destination memory ...........
Saving the vehicle position in
the list of last destinations ...........
Saving the crosshair position in
the list of last destinations ...........
Deleting one of the last
destinations .................................
COMAND address book .....................
General notes...............................
Address book menu overview ......
Calling up the address book.........
Selecting an entry in the main
address book display....................
Creating a new address book
entry.............................................
Deleting an entry..........................
Searching for an address book
entry.............................................
Displaying a complete address
book entry....................................
Displaying of a complete phone
book entry in the mobile phone....
Changing an entry ........................
201
201
201
201
201
202
202
202
202
202
203
204
204
206
207
207
Calling a number saved in
an entry........................................
Starting route guidance to
an entry........................................
Voice entries ................................
Saving a phone book entry from
mobile phone in the COMAND
address book ...............................
Importing data from external
Bluetooth devices ........................
COMAND system settings .................
Systems settings menu overview .
Display settings............................
Time settings................................
Voice Control* settings................
Setting the system language........
Assigning the favorite button .......
Bluetooth settings........................
Reset............................................
COMAND vehicle menu .....................
Setting night security illumination
Locator lighting on/off.................
Exterior mirror convenience
settings ........................................
Automatic locking on/off.............
209
209
210
211
212
213
213
213
213
215
216
216
217
219
220
220
221
222
223
Activating easy-entry/exit feature
Setting interior ambient lighting ..
Setting interior lighting delayed
switch-off .....................................
Extending or retracting rear
window sunshade ........................
Trunk opening-height restriction
on/off ..........................................
Switching on/of the tow-away
alarm............................................
COMAND automatic climate control .
Setting temperature.....................
Adjusting air distribution..............
Adjusting air volume ....................
Central climate control menu via
COMAND .....................................
Operating rear climate control*
from the front ..............................
COMAND seats .................................
Operating seats via COMAND ......
Lumbar support ...........................
Multicontour seats*, front ...........
Drive-dynamic multicontour
seats, front*.................................
224
225
226
227
227
228
229
230
230
230
231
234
236
236
237
237
240
Contents
Instrument cluster control system.....
Multifunction display....................
Multifunction steering wheel........
Menus ..........................................
Trip menu.....................................
Navi menu....................................
Audio menu..................................
Telephone menu*.........................
Assistance menu*........................
Service menu ...............................
Settings menu..............................
Voice Control* operating safety ........
Voice Control* introduction...............
Spelling ........................................
Command types...........................
Active System ..............................
Controls .......................................
Symbols .......................................
Voice Control* telephone ..................
Telephone operation ....................
Telephone commands ..................
Voice Control* navigation..................
Important notes ...........................
Navigation operation....................
Navigation commands..................
241
241
242
243
245
246
248
249
252
253
254
257
258
259
259
259
260
261
262
262
263
269
269
270
270
Dialog for entering a complete
address ......................................... 271
Commands for entering parts
of an address ................................ 276
Voice Control* address book ............. 279
COMAND address book overview . 279
Operation with address book
not open (global)........................... 279
Operation with address book
open (local) ................................... 279
Operating and using address
book.............................................. 280
Available commands with the
address book not open ................. 280
Available commands with the
address book open ....................... 281
Voice Control* radio........................... 282
Radio operation ............................ 282
Radio commands .......................... 282
Voice Control* CD/
DVD changer/MP3............................. 286
Operation...................................... 286
Commands.................................... 286
Voice Control* command list ............. 288
Command list................................ 288
Voice Control* troubleshooting.......... 299
Help function ................................ 299
Help commands............................ 299
Help window ................................. 299
Entering digits and spelling........... 299
What to do if ... ............................. 300
Voice Control* individualization ......... 302
Controls in detail.............................. 303
Locking and unlocking ....................... 304
SmartKey...................................... 304
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* ....... 306
Checking batteries in the SmartKey
or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO..... 311
Loss of the SmartKey or SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO ......................... 311
Opening doors from the inside ..... 312
Power closing assist for doors
and trunk lid ................................. 313
Automatic central locking............. 313
Locking and unlocking
from the inside ............................. 314
Contents
Starter switch positions .....................
SmartKey .....................................
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.......
Seats..................................................
Seat adjustment...........................
Seat heating* ...............................
Seat ventilation* ..........................
Head restraints.............................
Multicontour seats*, rear .............
Easy-entry/exit feature ................
Steering wheel ...................................
Steering wheel adjustment...........
Heated steering wheel* ...............
Mirrors ...............................................
Interior rear view mirror ...............
Exterior rear view mirrors.............
Power folding exterior rear view
mirrors .........................................
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors ...
Activating exterior rear view
mirror parking position.................
Memory function................................
Storing positions into memory .....
Recalling positions from memory .
Storing exterior rear view mirror
parking position ...........................
315
315
316
318
318
322
323
324
327
328
330
330
331
332
332
332
333
334
335
336
337
337
338
Fastening the seat belts ....................
Proper use of seat belts ...............
Seat belt height adjustment.........
Lighting..............................................
Exterior lamp switch.....................
Combination switch .....................
Corner-illuminating lamps ............
Hazard warning flasher ................
Interior lighting.............................
Courtesy lighting ..........................
Door entry lamps .........................
Trunk lamp ...................................
Windshield wipers..............................
Switching on/off windshield
wipers ..........................................
Intermittent wiping.......................
Single wipe...................................
Wiping with windshield washer
fluid..............................................
Power windows..................................
Opening and closing power
windows .......................................
Rear side window sunshades* .....
Summer opening feature..............
Convenience closing feature ........
339
341
341
342
342
346
347
348
348
350
350
350
351
351
352
352
352
353
353
355
355
356
Driving and parking ...........................
Starting the engine ......................
Driving off ....................................
Turn signals..................................
Problems while driving .................
Parking.........................................
Turning off the engine ..................
Releasing seat belts.....................
Automatic transmission.....................
Gear selector lever.......................
Shifting procedure .......................
Automatic transmission positions
Gear ranges .................................
Driving tips...................................
Automatic shift program ..............
Steering wheel gearshift control ..
Emergency operation
(Limp-Home Mode) ......................
Instrument cluster .............................
Adjusting instrument cluster and
COMAND display illumination ......
Coolant temperature gauge .........
Tachometer..................................
Outside temperature indicator.....
Fuel gauge ...................................
359
359
361
362
362
363
365
366
367
367
369
370
372
373
374
375
377
378
378
378
379
379
379
Contents
Driving systems .................................
Cruise control ..............................
DISTRONIC Plus* .........................
Airmatic (S 550 only) ...................
Active Body Control (ABC)*..........
Parktronic system* ......................
Park Assist* .................................
Dynamic Rear View Monitor*.......
Night View Assist* .......................
Automatic climate control .................
Deactivating climate control
system .........................................
Operating climate control system
in automatic mode .......................
Setting temperature.....................
Adjusting air volume ....................
Front defroster.............................
Rear window defroster .................
Maximum cooling MAXCOOL
(USA only) ....................................
Air recirculation mode..................
Residual engine heat and
ventilation ....................................
380
380
385
401
403
405
409
413
420
424
428
428
429
429
429
430
430
431
433
Front passenger compartment
adjustable air vents....................... 433
Rear passenger compartment
adjustable air vents....................... 434
Rear passenger compartment
climate control*............................ 434
Trunk .................................................. 436
Opening trunk ............................... 436
Closing trunk ................................ 437
Trunk emergency release.............. 440
Power tilt/sliding sunroof................... 441
Opening and closing power
tilt/sliding sunroof........................ 441
Synchronizing ............................... 442
Panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel*............................... 443
Roller sunblinds ............................ 443
Opening and closing panorama
roof with power tilt/sliding panel.. 444
Synchronizing ............................... 446
Loading and storing............................ 447
Roof rack* .................................... 447
Loading instructions ..................... 447
Storage compartments ................. 448
Cup holders .................................. 452
Trunk ............................................ 453
Useful features................................... 455
Sun visors ..................................... 455
Vanity mirror in rear...................... 455
Rear window sunshade ................. 456
Ashtrays........................................ 456
Cigarette lighters .......................... 457
Power outlet ................................. 458
Telephone* ................................... 459
Tele Aid......................................... 462
Garage door opener...................... 470
Infrared reflecting windshield ....... 475
Contents
Operation .........................................
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) .........
Driving instructions............................
Drive sensibly – save fuel .............
Drinking and driving .....................
Pedals ..........................................
Power assistance .........................
Brakes ..........................................
Driving off.....................................
Parking .........................................
Tires .............................................
Hydroplaning ................................
Tire traction..................................
Tire speed rating ..........................
Winter driving instructions ...........
Standing water .............................
Passenger compartment ..............
Driving abroad..............................
Control and operation of radio
transmitters..................................
Catalytic converter .......................
Emission control...........................
Coolant temperature ....................
477
478
479
479
479
479
479
480
481
481
482
483
483
484
484
485
486
486
486
487
488
488
At the gas station ..............................
Refueling ......................................
Check regularly and before
a long trip.....................................
Engine compartment .........................
Hood ............................................
Engine oil .....................................
Transmission fluid level................
Active Body Control* (ABC*)
fluid level......................................
Coolant level ................................
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system...........
Tires and wheels................................
Important guidelines ....................
Tire care and maintenance...........
Direction of rotation.....................
Loading the vehicle ......................
Recommended tire inflation
pressure.......................................
Checking tire inflation pressure ...
Tire labeling..................................
Load identification .......................
489
489
490
492
492
494
497
497
497
498
500
500
501
503
503
509
511
518
521
DOT, Tire Identification Number
(TIN) .............................................
Maximum tire load .......................
Maximum tire inflation pressure ..
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards (U.S. vehicles).............
Tire ply material ...........................
Tire and loading terminology........
Rotating tires ...............................
Winter driving ....................................
Winter tires ..................................
Snow chains.................................
Maintenance......................................
Maintenance service indicator
message ......................................
Calling up the maintenance
service indicator display ..............
Resetting the maintenance
service indicator ..........................
Vehicle care.......................................
Cleaning and care of vehicle ........
522
523
523
524
525
526
529
530
530
531
532
532
533
533
534
534
Contents
Practical hints .................................
What to do if …?.................................
Lamps in instrument cluster ........
Air bag off indicator lamp.............
Vehicle status messages in the
multifunction display....................
Where will I find ...? ...........................
First aid kit ...................................
Vehicle jack, vehicle tool kit,
luggage bowl, Minispare wheel ....
Unlocking/locking in an emergency..
Unlocking the vehicle...................
Locking the vehicle ......................
Mechanically releasing the
electric parking brake ..................
Opening/closing in an emergency.....
Power tilt/sliding sunroof or
panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel* ........................
543
544
544
555
557
611
611
611
614
614
615
616
617
617
Resetting activated head restraints
(S 600 only)........................................ 618
Replacing SmartKey batteries ............ 619
SmartKey/SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* ............................... 619
Replacing bulbs .................................. 621
Bulbs............................................. 622
Replacing bulbs for front lamps .... 623
Replacing wiper blades....................... 627
Placing wiper arms in vertical
position......................................... 627
Removing wiper blades ................. 628
Installing wiper blades .................. 628
Flat tire............................................... 629
Preparing the vehicle .................... 629
Mounting the Minispare wheel...... 629
Batteries............................................. 634
Disconnecting starter battery ....... 636
Removing starter battery .............. 637
Charging battery ........................... 637
Reinstalling starter battery ........... 638
Reconnecting starter battery ........ 638
Jump starting...................................... 639
Towing the vehicle.............................. 642
Installing towing eye bolt .............. 644
Fuses.................................................. 645
Aids for replacing fuses ................ 646
Fuse boxes in engine
compartment ................................ 646
Fuse boxes in passenger
compartment ................................ 647
Emergency engine shut-down....... 648
Contents
Technical data..................................
Parts service ......................................
Warranty coverage.............................
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet......................
Identification labels............................
Layout of poly-V-belt drive .................
S 550 ...........................................
S 600 ...........................................
Engine................................................
Rims and tires....................................
Same size tires.............................
Mixed size tires ............................
Minispare wheel ...........................
Electrical system................................
Main dimensions and weights............
Main dimensions ..........................
Weights ........................................
649
650
651
651
652
653
653
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
660
660
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. .........
Capacities ....................................
Engine oils....................................
Engine oil additives ......................
Air conditioning refrigerant ..........
Brake fluid....................................
Premium unleaded gasoline .........
Fuel requirements ........................
Gasoline additives ........................
Coolants.......................................
Windshield and headlamp
washer system .............................
661
661
663
663
663
663
664
664
665
665
668
Technical terms............................... 669
Index................................................. 679
Introduction
Product information
왔 Product information
Please observe the following in your own
best interest:
We recommend using Genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts as well as conversion
parts and accessories explicitly approved
by us for your vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine
their reliability, safety and special suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
We are unable to make an assessment for
other products and therefore cannot be
held responsible for them, even if in individual cases an official approval or authorization by governmental or other agencies
should exist. Use of such parts and accessories could adversely affect the safety,
performance or reliability of your vehicle.
Please do not use them.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts as well as
conversion parts and accessories approved by us are available at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center where you will
receive comprehensive information, also
on permissible technical modifications,
and where proper installation will be performed.
13
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
This Operator’s Manual contains a great
deal of useful information. We urge you to
read it carefully and familiarize yourself
with the vehicle before driving.
For your own safety and longer service life
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the instructions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you
or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual.
Therefore, you may find explanations for
optional equipment not installed in your
vehicle. If you have any questions about
the operation of any equipment, your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to demonstrate the proper procedures.
14
We continuously strive to improve our
product, and ask for your understanding
that we reserve the right to make changes
in design and equipment. Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in
this Operator’s Manual might differ from
your vehicle.
Service and warranty information
앫
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Optional equipment is also described in
this manual, including operating instructions wherever necessary. Since they are
special-order items, the descriptions and
illustrations herein may vary slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehicle.
앫
Emission System Warranty
앫
Emission Performance Warranty
앫
California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control System
Warranty
(California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont only)
앫
State Warranty Enforcement Laws
(Lemon Laws)
If there are any equipment details that are
not shown or described in this Operator’s
Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will be glad to inform you of correct
care and operating procedures. The Operator’s Manual and Maintenance Booklet
are important documents and should be
kept with the vehicle.
The Service and Warranty Information
Booklet contains detailed information
about the warranties covering your
Mercedes-Benz, including:
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Important notice for California retail
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz
automobiles
Under California law you may be entitled to
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund
of the purchase price or lease price, if
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix
one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by
its express warranty after a reasonable
number of repair attempts. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of
the vehicle or the accumulation of
18 000 miles (approx. 29 000 km) on the
odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs
first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following occurs:
repair two or more times, and you have
directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,
LLC in writing of the need for its repair,
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than
category (1) has been subject to repair
four or more times and you have directly notified us in writing of the need for
its repair, or
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a
cumulative total of more than
30 calendar days.
Maintenance
The Maintenance Booklet describes all the
necessary maintenance work which should
be performed at regular intervals.
Always have the Maintenance Booklet with
you when you take the vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for service. The service advisor will record each
service in the booklet for you.
Written notification should be sent to us,
not a dealer, at Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC,
Customer Assistance Center,
One Mercedes Drive, Montvale,
NJ 07645-0350.
(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is
likely to cause death or serious bodily
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to
15
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Roadside Assistance
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program provides factory trained technical
help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to
the toll-free Roadside Assistance number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Representatives
24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
For additional information refer to the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure in your vehicle literature
portfolio.
Change of address or ownership
If you change your address, be sure to
send in the “Change of Address Notice”
found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer
16
Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It
is in your own interest that we can contact
you should the need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all
literature with the vehicle to make it available to the next operator.
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used
Car” found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes,
or Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
앫
unleaded gasoline for vehicles with catalytic converters may not be available;
the use of leaded fuels will damage the
catalysts,
앫
gasoline may have a considerably lower octane rating, and improper fuel can
cause engine damage.
Certain Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe under our European Delivery Program. For details, consult
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
write to:
In the USA:
Operating your vehicle outside the USA
or Canada
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that:
In Canada:
앫
service facilities or replacement parts
may not be readily available,
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Introduction
Where to find it
왔 Where to find it
This Operator’s Manual is designed to provide comprehensive support information
for you, the vehicle operator. Each section
has its own reference color.
At a glance
Here you will find an overview of all the
controls that can be operated in the vehicle’s interior.
Safety and Security
Here you will find descriptions of the safety
and security features of your vehicle.
Control systems
Here you will find detailed information
about the operation of the COMAND system, instrument cluster control system
and Voice Control*.
Controls in detail
Technical data
Here you will find detailed information
about the equipment installed in your vehicle. This section also describes technical
innovations.
All important technical data for your vehicle can be found in this section.
Indexes
Operation
Here you will find all the information you
need for the proper operation of your vehicle.
Practical hints
This section provides fast assistance for
dealing with problems you may encounter.
The glossary provides explanations of the
most important technical terms.
The table of contents and the index are designed to help you find information quickly
and easily.
The following publications are part of your
vehicle documentation:
앫
this Operator’s Manual
앫
the Maintenance Booklet
Separate operating instructions will be
provided as required depending on the
equipment options installed in your vehicle.
17
Introduction
Symbols
Trademarks:
Warning!
G
앫
ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are registered
trademark of DaimlerChrysler.
앫
HomeLink®
is a registered trademark
of Prince, a Johnson Controls
Company.
앫
SIRIUS and related marks are trademarks of Sirius Satellite Radio Inc.
! Highlights hazards that may result in damage to your vehicle.
앫
LOGIC7® is a registered trademark of
Harman International Industries, Incorporated.
i Helpful hints or further information you may
The following symbols are found in this
Operator’s Manual:
*
18
Optional equipment is identified
with an asterisk. Since standard
equipment varies between models,
the descriptions and illustrations in
this manual may differ slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehicle.
Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life,
or the health or life of others.
컄
Page
컄컄
This continuation symbol marks
an interrupted warning which
will be continued on the next
page.
컄컄
This continuation symbol marks
an interrupted procedure which
will be continued on the next
page.
->
In the glossary of technical
terms, this symbol is used to indicate cross-references to term
definitions.
Display
Words appearing in the multifunction display and COMAND
display are printed in the type
shown here.
find useful.
왘
This symbol points to instructions for
you to follow.
왘
A number of these symbols appearing
in succession indicates a multiple-step
procedure.
This symbol tells you where to
look for further information on a
topic.
Introduction
Operating safety
왔 Operating safety
Warning!
G
Work improperly carried out on electronic
components and associated software could
cause them to cease functioning. Because
the vehicle’s electronic components are interconnected, any modifications made may
produce an undesired effect on other systems. Electronic malfunctions could seriously impair the operating safety of your
vehicle.
See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for repairs or modifications to electronic
components.
Other improper work or modifications on the
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
the operating safety of the vehicle.
Some safety systems only function while the
engine is running. You should therefore never turn off the engine while driving.
Warning!
G
Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody
or tires/wheels, for example when running
over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole,
may cause serious damage and impair the
operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a
sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that damage to your
vehicle has occurred, you should turn on
your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow
down, and drive with caution to an area
which is a safe distance from the road.
Inspect the vehicle underbody and
tires/wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or other qualified maintenance or repair facility for further inspection or repairs.
Proper use of the vehicle
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
are familiar with the following information
and rules:
앫
the safety precautions in this manual
앫
the “Technical data” section in this
manual
앫
traffic rules and regulations
앫
motor vehicle laws and safety standards
Warning!
G
Various warning labels are attached to your
vehicle. These warning labels are intended
to make you and others aware of various
risks. You should not remove any of these
warning labels unless explicitly instructed to
do so by information on the label itself. Removal of any of these labels may cause you
and others to be unaware of certain risks
which may result in an accident and/or personal injury.
19
Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is
not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if necessary contact us
at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario, M4G 4C9
20
Introduction
Reporting safety defects
왔 Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966.”
Reporting safety defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
21
Introduction
Vehicle data recording
Information regarding electronic
recording devices
(Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951)
Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system,
may transmit some data in certain accidents.
This information helps, for example, to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve vehicle safety.
DaimlerChrysler may access the information and share it with others
앫
for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes
앫
with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee
앫
in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency
앫
for use in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler, its affiliates or sales/service organization and/or
앫
as otherwise required or permitted by law.
Please check the Tele Aid subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted
via that system.
22
At a glance
Exterior view
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Control systems
Center console
Automatic climate control
Overhead control panel
Driver’s door control panel
Rear door control panel
Storage compartments
Rear passenger compartment
23
At a glance
Exterior view
24
At a glance
Exterior view
Item
Page
1 Trunk
Item
6 Exterior rear view mirror
Page
Item
Page
334
a Headlamp cleaning system
346
앫
Unlocking
436
Parking position
335
b Front lamps
622
앫
Opening and closing
436
7 Towing eye bolt
644
c Windshield wipers
351
앫
Minispare wheel
629
앫
Vehicle tool kit
611
Wiper blades, replacing
627
655
Wiper blades, cleaning
540
d Window, cleaning
540
Checking tire inflation
pressure
511
489
앫
Minispare wheel
613
앫
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
441
664
앫
Flat tire
629
앫
Panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel*
443
622
3 Rear window, defrosting
430
Gasoline
8 Rims and tires
642
앫
2 Rear lamps
4 Fuel filler flap
General information
5 Doors
e Roofs
9 Hood, opening
492
앫
Locking and unlocking
304
Engine oil
494
앫
Opening and closing
312
Coolant
497
25
At a glance
Cockpit
26
At a glance
Cockpit
Item
Page
1 Combination switch
Turn signals
362
앫
Windshield wipers
351
앫
High beam
346
앫
Cornering lamps
347
2 Lever for
앫
Cruise control
380
앫
DISTRONIC Plus*
385
3 Horn
5 Instrument cluster
Page
8 Control panel with
앫
4 Multifunction steering wheel
Item
242
28
6 Steering wheel gearshift control
375
7 Gear selector lever for
automatic transmission
359
앫
Front passenger front
air bag indicator lamp
앫
Vehicle level control
switch
앫
Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) switch
앫
Parktronic*/Park Assist*
deactivation switch
앫
Swivel COMAND display
앫
COMAND/instrument
cluster illumination
Item
c Glove box lock
53
401,
403
73
408,
408
81
378
Page
448
d Cover of compartment with
앫
CD changer
107
앫
PCMCIA card slot
108
e Center console, lower part
f Starter switch
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
33
315
316
g Steering wheel adjustment
330
Heated steering wheel*
331
h Headlamp washer button
346
9 COMAND display
79
j Parking brake
364
a Overhead control panel
37
k Hood lock release
492
424
l Door control panel
39
32
m Night View Assist*
420
n Exterior lamp switch
342
b Automatic climate control
Center console, upper part
27
At a glance
Instrument cluster
28
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Item
1 Coolant temperature gauge
Page
378
2 Fuel gauge with:
Item
Page
;
Brake warning
USA only
lamp
3
Canada only
545
< Seat belt telltale
550
553
362
Fuel tank reserve warning
lamp
550
A High beam headlamp
indicator lamp
346
- ABS indicator lamp
544
H Combination low tire
pressure*/TPMS malfunction telltale*
= SRS indicator lamp
552
L
407,
411
K
3 Parktronic*/Park Assist*
warning indicator for left
front area
4 Speedometer with:
0
Parking brake
USA only
warning or indi!
cator lamps
Canada only
546
Left/right turn
signal indicator
lamps
6 Gear position/range indicator
Page
370
7 Tachometer with:
v ESP® warning lamp
549
l Distance warning
lamp*
397,
549
5 Parktronic*/Park Assist*
warning indicator for right
front area
Item
407,
411
± Engine malfunction
indicator lamp
547
8 Selected program mode indicator
370
9 Main menu for control system, multifunction display
241
a Outside temperature
379
b Display with:
Additional speedometer
255
: Distance warner*
397,
252
29
At a glance
Control systems
30
At a glance
Control systems
Item
1 L back/to deactivate
Voice Control*
Page
242
260
4 s to take a call
to dial a number
t to end a call
to reject an incoming
call
2 $ scroll up
% scroll down
& scroll to the right
Page
6 Instrument cluster illumination
249
7 Swivel COMAND display
8 COMAND display illumination
9 COMAND display
ç volume down
# confirm selection
241
F mute function
5 ! to accept a call/
to activate Voice
Control*
Item
249
æ volume up
( scroll to the left
3 Multifunction display
Item
124
260
Page
378
81
378
80
a CD changer
107
b PCMCIA card slot
108
c COMAND shortcut buttons
80
d COMAND controller
82
31
At a glance
Center console
Upper part
Item
Page
1 Automatic climate control
panel, front
36
2 Alarm system indicator lamp
75
3 Cover of compartment with
앫
CD changer
107
앫
PCMCIA card slot
108
4 Cover of compartment with:
32
앫
Ashtray
456
앫
Lighter
457
5 Cup holder
452
At a glance
Center console
Lower part
Item
Page
Item
Page
1 Favorite button
216
6 Hazard warning flasher
348
2 Rear head restraints retract
button
325
7 Seat operation via COMAND:
236
3 Program mode selector
switch for:
374
앫
automatic transmission
shift program
앫
suspension tuning of
Airmatic (only S 550) or
ABC*
앫
앫
Lumbar support
237
앫
Multicontour seat*
237
앫
Drive-dynamic
multicontour seat*
240
8 Shortcut button for:
engine control
4 Shortcut button for:
앫
radio
앫
CD/DVD
111
5 Back button
87
94
앫
telephone*
115
앫
navigation
148
9 COMAND controller
82
a COMAND on/off switch
79
b Volume adjustment
89
c Mute function
89
d Telephone keypad
117
33
At a glance
Automatic climate control
Overview
34
At a glance
Automatic climate control
Item
Page
1 Left side defroster vent, fixed
Item
Page
Item
Page
2 Left side air vent, adjustable
6 Right center air vent, adjustable
b Left rear center air vent,
adjustable
3 Left center air vent, adjustable
7 Right side defroster vent,
fixed
c Right rear center air vent,
adjustable
8 Right side air vent, adjustable
d Thumbwheel for right rear
center air vents
434
e Rear climate control panel*
434
4 Thumbwheel for air volume
control for left center air vent
433
5 Thumbwheel for air volume
control for right center air
vent
433
9 Front climate control panel
a Thumbwheel for left rear center air vents
36
434
35
At a glance
Automatic climate control
Automatic climate control panel, front
Item
Page
1 AUTO mode for air distribution and volume, left
428
2 Temperature control, left
429
3 Manual fan speed adjustment, left
429
4 Front defroster
429
36
Item
Page
5 Air recirculation
431
6 Climate control on/off
Item
Page
429
428
9 Manual fan speed adjustment, right
7 Residual engine heat and
ventilation (REST)
433
a Temperature control, right
429
428
8 Rear window defroster
430
b AUTO mode for air distribution and volume, right
At a glance
Overhead control panel
왔 Overhead control panel
Item
Page
1 Eyeglasses compartment
449
2 Left reading lamp on/off
Item
Page
443
348
8 Opening/closing rear roller
sunblinds
3 Rear interior lighting on/off
348
9 Right reading lamp on/off
348
4 Front interior lighting on/off
348
a Rear view mirror
332
5 Power tilt/sliding sunroof or
tilt/sliding panel*
441
441
b Garage door opener
470
6 Tele Aid (emergency call system) button
462
앫
Tele Aid (emergency call
system)
462
7 Interior lighting control
348
앫
Telephone*
459
앫
Voice Control*
255
c Hands-free microphone for
37
At a glance
Driver’s door control panel
Item
38
Page
1 Inside door handle
312
2 Central unlocking switch
312
3 Central locking switch
312
4 Memory function (for storing
seat, exterior mirror, and
steering wheel settings)
336
5 Selector button for front
passenger seat
321
6 Seat heating
322
Seat ventilation*
323
7 Seat adjustment
318
Item
8 Exterior rear view mirrors adjustment
Mirror folding function
Page
332
333
9 Switches for opening/ closing
side windows
353
Switches for opening/ closing
rear door window sunshades*
355
a Remote trunk opening/closing* switch
436
b Override switch for rear passenger compartment
67
At a glance
Rear door control panel
왔 Rear door control panel
Item
Page
1 Selection switch for right
front passenger seat adjustment*1
320
2 Memory function* (for storing
seat settings) (Canada only)
Item
Page
6 Button for extending/retracting panorama roof sunblind*
443
7 Switch for extending/retracting rear window sunshade*
456
336
312
8 Switches for opening/closing
side windows
353
3 Inside door handle
4 Seat adjustment
318
355
5 Seat heating*
322
Switches for opening/closing
rear side window sunshades*
Seat ventilation*
1
323
This switch is located on the right rear passenger
side only.
39
At a glance
Storage compartments
40
At a glance
Storage compartments
Item
Page
Item
1 Glove box
448
a Ruffled storage pocket
2 Document holder in sun visor
455
b Door pocket
3 Door pocket
4 Ruffled storage pocket
451
5 Door pocket
Ashtray
6 Side storage pocket in trunk
Holder for Operator’s Manual
pouch
7 Additional storage spaces under the trunk floor
453
8 Side storage pocket in trunk
Item
Page
451
h Front center armrest with
storage compartments
448
c Document holder in sun visor
455
452
d Ashtray
456
j Cup holder in the rear center
armrest
Cigarette lighter
456
Page
457
Cup holder under the rear
center storage compartment*
452
e Eyeglasses compartment in
overhead control panel
449
k Rear center armrest with storage compartment
450
f Parcel net in front passenger
footwell
449
l Rear storage box
451
g Front passenger seat storage
compartment with first aid kit
611
m Cup holder in the front center
console
452
n Driver’s seat storage compartment
449
9 Door pocket
Ashtray
456
41
At a glance
Rear passenger compartment
Item
42
Page
1 Cup holder under the rear
center storage compartment*
452
2 Cup holder in the rear center
armrest
452
3 Control panel for rear multicontour seats*
327
4 Rear center armrest with storage compartment
450
5 Rear storage box
451
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm
Driving safety systems
Anti-theft systems
43
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
In this section you will learn the most important facts about the restraint systems
of the vehicle.
The restraint systems are
앫
Seat belts (컄 page 55)
앫
Child restraints (컄 page 61)
앫
Lower anchors and tethers for children
(LATCH) (컄 page 64)
Additional protection potential provide
앫
앫
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
with
앫
Air bags (컄 page 45)
앫
Air bag control unit (with crash
sensors)
앫
Emergency tensioning device (ETD)
for seat belts (컄 page 58)
앫
Seat belt force limiter (컄 page 58)
Preventive occupant safety
(PRE-SAFE®) (컄 page 60)
44
Air bag system components with
앫
The front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp (컄 page 53)
앫
Front passenger seat with Occupant
Classification System (OCS)
(컄 page 50)
The SRS components are in operational
readiness when the = indicator lamp is
not lit when the engine is running.
A malfunction in the system has been
detected if the = indicator lamp:
앫
As independent systems, their protective
functions work in conjunction with each
other.
fails to go out not later than approximately 4 seconds after the engine was
started
앫
does not come on at all
i For information on infants and children trav-
앫
comes on after the engine was started
or while driving
eling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in
the vehicle” (컄 page 61).
The SRS system conducts a self-test when
the ignition is switched on and in regular
intervals while the engine is running. This
facilitates early detection of malfunctions.
The = indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster (컄 page 28) comes on when the
ignition is switched on and goes out no later than a few seconds after the engine has
been started.
Warning!
G
Modifications to or work improperly conducted on restraint systems (such as seat
belts and anchors, emergency tensioning
devices, seat belt force limiters or air bags)
or their wiring, as well as tampering with interconnected electronic systems, can lead
to the restraint systems no longer functioning as intended.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Air bags or emergency tensioning devices,
for example, could deploy inadvertently or
fail to deploy in accidents although the deceleration threshold for air bag deployment
is exceeded. Therefore, never modify the restraint systems. Do not tamper with electronic components or their software.
Warning!
G
In the event that the = indicator lamp
comes on during driving or does not come
on at all, the SRS self-check has detected a
malfunction. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may
not deploy when needed in an accident,
which could result in serious or fatal injury,
or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury.
In addition, improper work on the SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative
or causing unintended air bag deployment.
Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If it is necessary to modify an air bag system
to accommodate a person with disabilities,
contact your local authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) for details.
Air bags
Warning!
G
Air bags are designed to reduce the potential of injury and fatality in certain frontal impacts (front air bags), side impacts (side
impact air bags and head protection window
curtain air bags) or rollovers (head protection window curtain air bags). However, no
system available today can totally eliminate
injuries and fatalities.
The deployment of the air bags temporarily
releases a small amount of dust from the air
bags. This dust, however, is neither injurious
to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in
the vehicle. The dust might cause some temporary breathing difficulty for people with
asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid
this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.
45
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
앫
To reduce the risk of injury when the front
air bags inflate, it is very important for the
driver and front passenger to always be in a
properly seated position and to wear their
respective seat belt.
For maximum protection in the event of a
collision always be in normal seated position
with your back against the backrest. Fasten
your seat belt and make sure that it is properly positioned on your body (컄 page 339).
Since the air bag inflates with considerable
speed and force, a proper seating and hands
on steering wheel position will help to keep
you at a safe distance from the air bag.
Occupants who are unbelted, out of position
or too close to the air bag can be seriously
injured or killed by an air bag as it inflates
with great force in the blink of an eye:
앫
46
Sit properly belted in a nearly upright
position with your back against the seat
backrest.
Adjust the driver’s seat as far as possible rearward, still permitting proper operation of vehicle controls. The distance
from the center of the driver’s breastbone to the center of the air bag cover
on the steering wheel must be at least
10 inches (25 cm) or more. You should
be able to accomplish this by a combination of adjustments to the seat and
steering wheel. If you have any problems, please see an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫
Do not lean your head or chest close to
the steering wheel or dashboard.
앫
Keep hands on the outside of steering
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside the rim can increase the risk and
potential severity of hand/arm injury
when driver’s front air bag inflates.
앫
Adjust the front passenger seat as far as
possible rearward from the dashboard
when the seat is occupied.
앫
Always sit nearly upright, properly use
the seat belts and use an appropriately
sized infant or toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and
weight of the child.
Failure to follow these instructions can
result in severe injuries to you or other
occupants.
If you sell your vehicle, it is important that
you make the buyer aware of this safety
information. Be sure to give the buyer this
Operator’s Manual.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
Accident research shows that the safest
place for children in an automobile is in the
rear seat.
It should be noted that with respect to both
front and rear side impact air bags there is a
possibility for a side impact air bag related
injury if occupants, especially children, are
not properly seated or restrained when next
to a side impact air bag which needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do its
job.
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
follow these guidelines:
(1) Always sit nearly upright, properly use
the seat belts and for children 12 years
old and under, use an appropriately
sized infant or toddler restraint or
booster seat recommended for the size
and weight of the child.
(2) Always wear seat belts properly.
i Air bags are designed to deploy only in certain frontal impacts (front air bags), and in side
impacts (side impact and head protection window curtain air bags) which exceed preset
thresholds, and in certain rollovers (head protection window curtain air bags). Only during these
events will they provide their supplemental protection.
Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
emergency tensioning device and
air bag
Warning!
앫
Damaged seat belts or belts that were
highly stressed in an accident must be
replaced and their anchoring points
must also be checked. Only use belts installed or supplied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫
Air bags and pyrotechnic emergency
tensioning devices (ETDs) are designed
to function on a one-time-only basis. An
air bag or ETD that is deployed must be
replaced. PRE-SAFE® has electrically
operated reversible pre-tensioners in
addition to the pyrotechnic ETDs.
앫
Do not pass belts over sharp edges.
They could tear.
앫
Do not make any modification that could
컄컄
change the effectiveness of the belts.
The driver and passengers should always wear
their seat belts. Otherwise it is not possible for
air bags to provide their supplemental protection.
In case of other types of impacts and impacts below air bag deployment thresholds, air bags will
not deploy. The driver and passenger will then be
protected to the extent possible by a properly
fastened seat belt. A properly fastened seat belt
is also needed to provide the best possible protection in a rollover.
We caution you not to rely on the presence of the
air bags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt.
It is important to your safety and that of your passengers that you replace deployed air bags and
repair any malfunctioning air bags to make sure
the vehicle will continue to provide supplemental
crash protection for occupants.
G
47
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄
앫
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this
may severely weaken them. In a crash
they may not be able to provide adequate protection.
앫
No modifications of any kind may be
made to any components or wiring of
the SRS. This includes changing or removing any component or part of the
SRS, the installation of additional trim
material, badges, etc. over the steering
wheel hub, front passenger front air bag
cover, outboard sides of the seat backrests, door trim panels, or door frame
trims, and installation of additional
electrical/electronic equipment on or
near SRS components and wiring. Keep
area between air bags and occupants
free from objects (e.g. packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.).
앫
48
Do not hang items such as coat hangers
from the coat hooks or handles over the
door. These items may turn into projectiles and cause head and other injuries
when window curtain air bag is deployed.
앫
Air bag system components will be hot
after an air bag has inflated. Do not
touch.
앫
Never place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
앫
In addition, improper repair work on the
SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS
inoperative or causing unintended air
bag deployment. Work on the SRS must
therefore only be performed by qualified
technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫
For your protection and the protection
of others, when scrapping the air bag
unit or emergency tensioning device,
our safety instructions must be followed. These instructions are available
from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
앫
Given the considerable deployment
speed, required inflation volume, and
the textile structure of the air bags,
there is the possibility of abrasions or
other, potentially more serious injuries
resulting from air bag deployment.
Warning!
G
Only use seat covers which have been
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for
your vehicle model. Using other seat covers
may interfere with or prevent the
deployment of the front side impact air bags
or the rear side impact air bags*. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for availability.
When you sell your vehicle we strongly
urge you to give notice to the subsequent
owner that it is equipped with an SRS by
alerting them to the applicable section in
the Operator’s Manual.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Front air bags
based on the rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as assessed by the air bag control unit
Side impact air bags
On the front passenger-side, the front air bag deployment is additionally influenced by the passenger’s weight category as identified by the
Occupant Classification System (OCS)
(컄 page 50).
The lighter the front passenger-side occupant,
the higher the vehicle deceleration rate required
for the second stage inflation of the air bag.
1 Driver air bag
2 Front passenger front air bag
Driver and front passenger front air bags
are deployed:
The air bags will not deploy in impacts
which do not exceed the system’s deployment thresholds. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belts.
The passenger front air bag will only be
deployed if:
앫
in the event of certain frontal impacts
앫
if impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
앫
independently of the side impact air
bags
앫
i The front air bags in this vehicle have been
designed to inflate in two stages. This allows the
air bag to have different rates of inflation that are
the 59 indicator lamp in
the center console is not lit
(컄 page 53)
앫
the impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold
앫
the system, based on OCS weight sensor readings, senses that the front
passenger seat is occupied
1 Front side impact air bag
2 Rear side impact air bag
The side impact air bags are deployed:
앫
in impacts exceeding a preset deployment threshold
앫
on the impacted side of the vehicle
앫
independently of the front air bags
The front passenger side impact air bag 1
will not deploy if the OCS senses that the
front passenger seat is empty and the front
passenger seat belt is not fastened (latch
plate is not inserted into the buckle). With
an empty front passenger seat and the
49
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
seat belt fastened (latch plate properly inserted into buckle) the front passenger
side impact air bag will deploy regardless
of the empty seat.
앫
on the impacted side of the vehicle
앫
independently of the front air bags
앫
in certain vehicle rollovers
The side impact air bags are not deployed
in impacts which do not exceed the system’s deployment threshold.
The side window curtain air bags are not
deployed in impacts which do not exceed
the system’s deployment threshold.
Window curtain air bags
The window curtain air bags fill up the area
indicated by the arrows.
Occupant Classification System
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
automatically turns the front passenger
front air bag on or off based on the classified occupant weight category determined
by weight sensor readings from the front
passenger seat.
1 Window curtain air bag
The side window curtain air bags are deployed:
앫
in impacts exceeding a preset deployment threshold
50
i The system does not deactivate the front
passenger side impact air bag, the window curtain air bag and the emergency tensioning device.
Occupants must sit properly belted in a
nearly upright position with their back
against the seat backrest and feet on the
floor to be correctly classified. If the occupant’s weight is transferred to another
object in the vehicle (e.g. by leaning on
armrests), the OCS may not be able to
properly approximate the occupant’s
weight category.
Furthermore, the occupant weight may appear to increase or decrease due to
objects hanging on the seat, other passengers pushing on the seat, objects lodged
underneath the seat or stuffed between
seat and middle console or between seat
and door or due to objects applying pressure on the back of the seat. Always make
sure that the seat has clearance in all
directions at all times.
i If your seat, including your trim cover and
cushion needs to be serviced in any way, take
the vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Only seat accessories approved by
Mercedes-Benz may be used.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Both driver and the front passenger should
always use the 59 indicator
lamp as an indication of whether or not the
front passenger is properly positioned.
Warning!
G
If the 59 indicator lamp illuminates when an adult or someone larger than
a small individual is in the front passenger
seat, have the front passenger re-position
himself or herself in the seat until the
59 indicator lamp goes out, or
check whether objects are caught under or
around the seat.
More information about air bag display messages (컄 page 562).
In the event of a collision, the air bag control
unit will not allow front passenger front air
bag deployment when the OCS classified
the front passenger seat occupant as being
up to or less than the weight of a typical
12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or if the front passenger seat is
sensed as being empty.
When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant is classified as being up
to or less than the weight of a typical
12-month-old child in a standard child
restraint, the 59 indicator
lamp will illuminate when the engine is started and remain illuminated, indicating that
the front passenger front air bag is deactivated.
When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat is classified as being empty, the
59 indicator lamp will illuminate when the engine is started and remain
illuminated, indicating that the front
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant is classified as being
heavier than the weight of a typical
12-month-old child seated in a standard
child restraint or as being a small individual
(such as a young teenager or a small adult),
the 59 indicator lamp will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds when
the engine is started and then, depending on
occupant weight sensor readings from
the seat, remain illuminated or go out. With
the 59 indicator lamp illuminated, the front passenger front air bag is
deactivated. With the 59 indicator lamp out, the front passenger front air
bag is activated.
When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant is classified as an adult or
someone larger than a small individual, the
59 indicator lamp will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds when the
engine is started and then go out, indicating
that the front passenger front air bag is
activated.
If the 59 indicator lamp is illuminated, the front passenger front air bag is
deactivated and will not be deployed.
If the 59 indicator lamp is not
illuminated, the front passenger front air
bag is activated and will be deployed:
앫
in the event of certain frontal impacts
앫
if impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
51
컄컄
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄
앫
independently of the side impact air
bags.
If the front passenger air bag is deployed,
the rate of inflation will be influenced by:
앫
the rate of relevant vehicle deceleration
as assessed by the air bag control unit
앫
front passenger’s weight category as
identified by the Occupant Classification
System (OCS).
Warning!
G
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend
that children be placed in the rear seats
whenever possible. Regardless of seating
position, children 12 years old and under
must be seated and properly secured in an
appropriate infant or child restraint
recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
52
The infant or child restraint must be properly
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors
and top tether strap, fully in accordance
with the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
앫
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on
the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front
passenger front air bag inflates in a
collision which could occur under some
circumstances, even with the air bag
technology installed in your vehicle.
The only means to completely eliminate
this risk is to never place a child in a
rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat. We therefore strongly recommend
that you always place a child in a rearfacing child restraint in the back seat.
앫
If you must install a rear-facing child
restraint on the front passenger seat
because circumstances require you to
do so, make sure that the
59 indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front passenger front air bag is deactivated. Should
the 59 not illuminate or go
out while the restraint is installed,
please check installation. Periodically
check the 59 indicator
lamp while driving to make sure the
59 indicator lamp is illuminated.
Children can be killed or seriously injured by
an inflating air bag. Note the following important information when circumstances require you to place a child in the front
passenger seat:
앫
Your vehicle is equipped with air bag
technology designed to turn off the front
passenger front air bag in your vehicle
when the system senses the weight of a
typical 12-month-old child or less along
with the weight of a standard appropriate child restraint on the front passenger seat.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
If the 59 indicator lamp
goes out or remains out, do not transport a child on the front passenger seat
until the system has been repaired. A
child in a rear-facing child restraint on
the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front passenger front air bag inflates.
앫
If you have to place a child in a
forward-facing child restraint on the
front passenger seat, move the seat as
far back as possible, use the proper
child restraint recommended for the
age, size and weight of the child, and secure child restraint with the vehicle’s
seat belt according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. For
children larger than the typical
12-month-old child, the front passenger
front air bag may or may not be
activated (컄 page 51).
i Deployment of the driver front air bag does
not mean that the front passenger front air bag
also should have deployed.
The 59 indicator lamp is located on the dashboard to the right of the
instrument cluster.
The Occupant Classification System (컄 page 50)
may have determined:
앫
that the seat was empty or occupied by the
weight up to or less than that of a typical
12-month-old child seated in a standard
child restraint – both instances where the
system suppresses deployment of the front
passenger front air bag even though the impact met the criteria and was of sufficient
severity to deploy the driver front air bag.
앫
that the seat was occupied by a small individual (such as a young teenager or a small
adult) or a child weighing more than the
weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a
standard child restraint – instances where
the system may suppress deployment of the
front passenger front air bag even though
the impact met the criteria and was of sufficient severity to deploy the driver front air
bag.
1 Indicator lamp
The 59 indicator lamp 1 will
be illuminated, except with the SmartKey
removed from the starter switch or with
the starter switch in position 0
(컄 page 317).
53
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
If the = indicator lamp and the
59 indicator lamp are lit at the
same time, there is a malfunction in the
Occupant Classification System. The front
passenger front air bag will be deactivated
in this case.
In order to ensure proper operation of the
air bag system and OCS:
앫
앫
Have the system checked as soon as
possible by qualified technicians.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Do not place more than 4.4 lbs (2 kg)
into the ruffled storage bag on the back
of the front passenger seat. Otherwise,
the OCS may not be able to properly
approximate the occupant weight
category.
앫
Do not place objects under and/or
around the front passenger seat.
앫
Do not hang anything from or attach any
items to the seats.
54
앫
Do not stuff objects such as books between the middle console and the front
passenger seat.
앫
Do not move the front passenger seat
backwards against stiff objects.
앫
Sit properly belted in a nearly upright
position with your back against the seat
backrest.
앫
Do not lean on the armrests or lift yourself from the seat by using the handle
over the door as this may cause the OCS
to be unable to correctly approximate
the occupant weight category.
앫
Only have the seat repaired or replaced
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫
Read and observe all warnings in this
chapter.
Self-test Occupant Classification System
After turning the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once or
twice (컄 page 317), the 59
indicator lamp 1 located in the center
console illuminates. If an adult occupant is
properly sitting on the front passenger
seat and the system senses the occupant
as being an adult, the 59 indicator lamp will illuminate and go out after
approximately 6 seconds.
If the seat is not occupied and the system
senses the front passenger seat as being
empty, the 59 indicator lamp
will illuminate and not go out.
Warning!
G
If the 59indicator lamp should
not illuminate, the system is not functioning.
You must see an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center before seating any child on the front
passenger seat.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
For more information, see the “Practical
hints” section (컄 page 555).
Warning!
G
Never place anything between seat cushion
(e.g. pillow), since it reduces the effectiveness of the Occupant Classification System.
The bottom of the child seat must make full
contact with the passenger seat cushion. An
incorrectly mounted child seat could cause
injuries to the child in case of an accident,
instead of increasing protection for the
child.
Seat belts
When the engine is started, the seat belt
telltale < illuminates for a maximum of
6 seconds and a warning chime sounds to
remind you and your passengers to fasten
your seat belts.
If after these 6 seconds, the driver’s or the
front passenger’s seat belt (with the front
passenger seat occupied) are not fastened
with all doors closed,
앫
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of child seats.
앫
and the vehicle speed does not exceed
15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt
telltale < remains illuminated for as
long as either the driver’s or front
passenger’s seat belt is not fastened.
and the vehicle speed exceeds
15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt
telltale < starts flashing and a
warning chime sounds with increasing
intensity until both the driver’s and
front passenger’s seat belt are fastened, or for a maximum of 60 seconds
from the time the vehicle speed
exceeded 15 mph (25 km/h) if either
the driver’s or front passenger’s seat
belt remains unfastened.
If the driver’s or front passenger’s seat
belt remains unfastened after
60 seconds, the seat belt telltale <
stops flashing and the warning chime
stops sounding. The seat belt
telltale < then continues to be illuminated for as long as either the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt are
not fastened.
The seat belt telltale < will only go out
if both the driver’s and the front passenger’s seat belt (with the front passenger
seat occupied) are fastened, or the vehicle
is standing still and a front door is opened.
For more information, see “Practical hints”
(컄 page 550).
Always wear your seat belt. All vehicle
occupants always need to have their seat
belts fastened and wear them properly.
55
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
In addition, applicable motor vehicle safety
laws require you to wear seat belts. Even
where this is not the case, we strongly
recommend that all vehicle occupants
have their seat belts fastened and wear
them properly.
For more information, see “Fastening the
seat belts” (컄 page 339).
i For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in
the vehicle” (컄 page 61).
Warning!
G
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure all of your passengers
are properly restrained, even those sitting in
the rear and pregnant women.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident. You and your passengers should
always wear seat belts.
56
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are properly wearing
your seat belt. Air bags can only protect as
they are designed if the occupants are properly wearing their seat belts.
Warning!
G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or
even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a nearly upright position and the
belt is properly positioned on the body.
Warning!
G
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Make
sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt.
Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time.
Warning!
G
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced
and their anchoring points must also be
checked.
Only use seat belts which have been
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Do not make any modifications to the seat
belts. This can lead to unintended activation
of the ETDs or to failure.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
belt force limiters), and front seat knee
bolsters. The system is designed to enhance the protection offered to properly
belted occupants in certain frontal (front
air bags and ETD with belt force limiters)
and side (side impact and window curtain air bags) impacts which exceed preset deployment thresholds and in
certain rollovers (window curtain air
bags and ETD).
Have all work carried out only by qualified
technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
G
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
앫
앫
앫
Seat belts can only work when used
properly. Never wear seat belts in any
other way than as described in this section, as that could result in serious injuries in case of an accident.
Each occupant should wear their seat
belt at all times, because seat belts help
reduce the likelihood of and potential
severity of injuries in accidents, including rollovers. The integrated restraint
system includes SRS (driver air bag, passenger front air bag, side impact air
bags, head protection window curtain
air bags for side windows), ETD (seat
belt emergency tensioning device with
앫
Never wear the shoulder belt under your
arm, against your neck or off your shoulder. In a frontal crash, your body would
move too far forward. That would increase the chance of head and neck injuries. The belt would also apply too
much force to the ribs or abdomen,
which could severely injure internal organs such as your liver or spleen.
Never wear belts over rigid or breakable
objects in or on your clothing, such as
eyeglasses, pens, SmartKeys, etc., as
these might cause injuries.
앫
Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips and not across the abdomen. If the belt is positioned across your
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries
in a crash.
앫
Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at time. Do not fasten a seat belt
around a person and another person or
other objects.
앫
Belts should not be worn twisted. In a
crash, you wouldn’t have the full width
of the belt to distribute impact forces.
The twisted belt against your body could
cause injuries.
앫
Pregnant women should also use a
lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
should be positioned as low as possible
on the hips to avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen.
앫
Never place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
컄컄
seat.
57
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄
앫
When using a seat belt to secure infant
or toddler restraints or children in
booster seats, always follow the child
seat manufacturer's instructions.
Emergency tensioning device (ETD),
seat belt force limiter
The seat belts for the front and rear outer
seats are equipped with emergency tensioning devices and belt force limiters.
The ETD is designed to activate in the
following cases:
앫
in frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding the system deployment threshold
앫
in certain vehicle rollovers
앫
if the restraint systems are operational
and functioning correctly,
see = indicator lamp (컄 page 552)
58
i The ETDs for the front seats will only acti-
G
vate if the front seat belt is fastened (latch plate
properly inserted into buckle).
Warning!
The ETDs for the rear outer seats will activate
with or without the respective seat belt fastened.
A pyrotechnic emergency tensioning device
(ETD) that was activated must be replaced.
In an impact, emergency tensioning
devices remove slack from the belts in
such a way that the seat belts fit more
snugly against the body. Belt force limiters,
when activated, are employed to help
reduce the peak force exerted by the seat
belts on occupants during a crash.
When disposing of the pyrotechnic emergency tensioning device, our safety instructions must be followed. These are available
at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
PRE-SAFE® has electrically operated
reversible pre-tensioners that do not require
replacement after activation.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Luxury active head restraints
(S 600 only)
The active head restraints are intended to
offer the driver and front passenger increased protection from head and neck injury. In the event of a rear-end collision,
the active head restraints on the driver’s
and front passenger’s seats are designed
to move forward in the direction of travel,
providing the head with increased support
earlier on in the collision sequence. The active head restraints move forward whether
the seat is occupied or not.
Warning!
G
Only use seat or head restraint covers which
have been tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model.
Using other seat or head restraint covers
may interfere with or prevent the activation
of the active head restraints. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for availability.
Do not attach any objects (e.g. hangers) to
the head restraint posts. Otherwise, the active head restraints may not be able to function properly or offer the intended degree of
protection in the event of an accident.
Warning!
G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that it is as close to
the head as possible and the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the head
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for
injury to the head and neck in the event of
an accident or similar situation.
erwise, the luxury active head restraints
cannot offer any additional protection in
the event of another rear-end collision.
For information on resetting the activated
active head restraints, see “Resetting activated head restraints (S 600 only)”
(컄 page 618).
You cannot remove the active head restraint on the driver’s and passenger’s
seats.
For removal contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
For information on head restraint adjustment, see “Head restraints” (컄 page 324).
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.
If the luxury active head restraints have
been triggered in an accident, the luxury
active head restraints must be reset. Oth-
59
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
PRE-SAFE® takes action in the following instances:
Preventive occupant safety
(PRE-SAFE®)
앫
Warning!
G
The PRE-SAFE® system is intended to reduce the effects of an accident on properly
seat-belted vehicle occupants. Despite
having the PRE-SAFE® system in your vehicle, the possibility of injuries occurring as a
result of an accident cannot be eliminated.
Therefore, you should always drive carefully
and adjust your driving to the prevailing
road, weather, and traffic conditions.
Your vehicle automatically takes preventive measures to better protect the occupants in the following hazardous
situations.
60
앫
If the vehicle is equipped with power
adjustable rear seats* and the passenger outer seats are in an unfavorable
position, they will be adjusted to a better position.
앫
It increases the air pressure in the air
pockets (on the sides of the seat cushion and backrest) of the multicontour*
and/or drive-dynamic front seats*.
앫
If the vehicle is understeering or oversteering, the tilt/sliding sunroof and
the side windows also close until only a
small gap remains.
Emergency braking situations, e.g.
when BAS (컄 page 71) is activated or
when
BAS Plus* (컄 page 71) is strongly intervening.
앫
앫
Critical dynamic driving situations, e.g.
when the vehicle is understeering or
oversteering because it has exceeded
its physical limitations.
Evasive steering maneuvers at speeds
above 19 mph (30 km/h).
When you are driving faster than 19 mph
(30 km/h), PRE-SAFE® takes the following
measures in such situations:
앫
The front seat belts are pre-tensioned
electrically.
앫
If the OCS senses that the front passenger seat is occupied and the seat is
in an unfavorable position, it will be
adjusted to a better position.
Once the hazardous situation is over without an accident occurring, PRE-SAFE®
loosens the belt pre-tension and decreases the air pressure in the air pockets of the
multicontour and drive-dynamic seats*.
You can readjust all of the settings made
by PRE-SAFE®.
i If the closing procedure of the tilt/sliding
sunroof or door windows is blocked, the tilt/sliding sunroof or door windows will stop and open
slightly.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
If the seat belts do not release:
왘
Adjust the backrest or seat slightly to
the rear until the seat belt tension is diminished.
The locking mechanism releases.
Warning!
G
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system. The children could
! When moving the seat, make sure there are
앫
injure themselves on parts of the vehicle
no items in the footwell or behind the seats. Otherwise you could damage the seats.
앫
be seriously or fatally injured through
excessive exposure to extreme heat or
cold
Children in the vehicle
If an infant or child is traveling with you in
the vehicle:
앫
앫
Secure the child using an infant or child
restraint appropriate to the age and
size of the child.
Make sure the infant or child is
properly secured at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
Do not expose the child restraint system to
direct sunlight. The child restraint system’s
metal parts, for example, could become very
hot, and the child could be burned on these
parts.
If children open a door, they could
앫
injure other persons
앫
get out of the car and injure themselves
or be injured by following traffic
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the
passenger compartment or trunk unless
they are firmly secured in place. For more information, see “Loading and storing”
(컄 page 447) section of the “Controls in detail” chapter.
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo
increases a child’s risk of injury in the event
of
앫
strong braking maneuvers
앫
sudden changes of direction
앫
an accident
61
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Infant and child restraint systems
We recommend all infants and children be
properly restrained at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
All lap-shoulder belts except the driver’s
seat belt have special seat belt retractors
for secure fastening of child restraints.
To fasten a child restraint, follow child
restraint instructions for mounting. Then
pull the shoulder belt out completely and
let it retract. During seat belt retraction, a
ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate
that the special seat belt retractor is activated. The belt is now locked. Push down
on child restraint to take up any slack.
To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and
let seat belt retract completely. To deactivate the special seat belt retractor for the
front passenger seat, the front passenger
seat must be in the most backward position. The seat belt can again be used in the
usual manner.
62
Warning!
G
Never release the seat belt buckle while the
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat
belt retractor will be deactivated.
i Information on child seats with mounting fittings for tether anchorages (컄 page 64).
For information on LATCH-type child seat
mounts (컄 page 65).
! The use of infant or child restraints is required by law in all 50 states, the District of Columbia, the U.S. territories and all Canadian
provinces.
Infants and small children should be seated in an
appropriate infant or child restraint system properly secured by a lap/shoulder belt or, if so
equipped, a top tether anchorage point and a
child restraint lower anchorage system that
complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 and 210.2.
A statement by the child restraint manufacturer
of compliance with this standard can be found
on the instruction label on the restraint and in
the instruction manual provided with the restraint.
When using any infant or child restraint system,
make sure to carefully read and follow all manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.
Please read and observe warning labels affixed
to the inside of the vehicle and to infant or child
restraints.
Warning!
G
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend
that children be placed in the rear seats
whenever possible. Regardless of seating
position, children 12 years old and under
must be seated and properly secured in an
appropriate infant, or toddler restraint, or
booster seat recommended for the size and
weight of the child.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The infant or child restraint must be properly
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors
and top tether strap, fully in accordance
with the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
앫
Always sit nearly upright, properly use the
seat belts and use an appropriately sized infant or toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
Children can be killed or seriously injured by
an inflating air bag. Note the following important information when circumstances
require you to place a child in the front
passenger seat:
앫
Your vehicle is equipped with air bag
technology designed to turn off the front
passenger front air bag in your vehicle
when the OCS senses the weight of a
typical 12-month-old child or less along
with the weight of a standard
appropriate child restraint on the front
passenger seat.
The only means to completely eliminate
this risk is to never place a child in a
rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat. We therefore strongly recommend
that you always place a child in a
rear-facing child restraint in the back
seat.
앫
If the 59 indicator lamp
goes out or remains out, do not transport a child on the front passenger seat
until the system has been repaired.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on
the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front
passenger front air bag inflates in a
collision which could occur under some
circumstances, even with the air bag
technology installed in your vehicle.
If you must install a rear-facing child
restraint on the front passenger seat because circumstances require you to do
so, make sure that the 59
indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating
that the front passenger front air bag is
deactivated. Should the
59 indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while the restraint is installed, please check installation.
Periodically check the 59
indicator lamp while driving to make
sure the lamp is illuminated.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on
the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front passenger front air bag inflates.
앫
If you have to place a child in a forward-facing child restraint on the front
passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible, use the proper child
restraint recommended for the age, size
and weight of the child, and secure child
restraint with the vehicle’s seat belt according to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions. For children larger than the
typical 12-month-old child, the front
passenger front air bag may or may not
be activated (컄 page 51).
63
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
Infants and small children should never
share a seat belt with another occupant.
During an accident, they could be crushed
between the occupant and seat belt.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle
and/or the child is not properly secured in
the child restraint.
Children too big for a toddler restraint must
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat may be
necessary to achieve proper belt positioning
for children over 41 lbs until they reach a
height where a lap/shoulder belt fits
properly without a booster.
64
When the child restraint is not in use,
remove it from the vehicle or secure it with
the seat belt to prevent the child restraint
from becoming a projectile in the event of
an accident.
Installation of infant and child restraint
systems
This vehicle is equipped with tether anchorages for a top tether strap at each of
the rear seating positions.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system. Unsupervised children in a child restraint system may use
vehicle equipment and may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.
1 Cover of top anchorage ring
왘
Bring the rear power seat backrest* to
a fully upright position (컄 page 320).
왘
Remove cover 1 from anchorage ring.
왘
Store cover 1 in a convenient place
(e.g. glove box).
왘
Guide tether strap between head restraint and top of seat back.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Head restraints must be positioned such
that the top tether strap can pass freely
between the head restraint and top of seat
back.
왘
Make sure the tether strap is not twisted.
Once the top tether anchorage hook is attached, the child restraint itself can be secured. Tighten the top tether strap
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
왘
Reinstall cover after removing the
tether strap.
Warning!
2 Hook
3 Anchorage ring
왘
Securely fasten hook 2, which is part
of the tether strap, to anchorage
ring 3.
i For safety reasons, make sure hook 2 has
attached to ring 3 beyond the safety catch, as
illustrated.
G
Vehicles with adjustable rear seats/bench*:
Never adjust the rear seat position after installing the child restraint. Adjusting the rear
seat position after installing the child restraint could damage the child restraint
and/or introduce undesirable slack or tension into the seat belt and loosen or misposition the child restraint, lessening the
effectiveness of the child restraint and thus
increasing the chance or severity of injury in
an accident.
Child seat anchors – LATCH type
This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
type anchors (at each of the rear seats) for
the installation of a LATCH child seat with
the matching anchor fittings.
If you have not installed a child seat, the
LATCH anchor are covered with an upholstery blend.
1 Indicates the position of the anchors
2 Anchors
3 Upholstery blend
4 Installation device
컄컄
65
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄 왘
Bring the rear power seat backrest* to
its fully upright position (컄 page 320).
왘
Fold upholstery blend 3 upward.
왘
Turn installation device 4 to a vertical
position so that upholstery blend 3
does not fold down.
왘
Install child seat according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
A rigid connection is established between the child seat and the body of
the vehicle.
Do not adjust rear power seat*/bench*
position after installing child restraint.
Warning!
G
Vehicles with adjustable rear seats/bench*:
Never adjust the rear seat position after installing the child restraint. Adjusting the rear
seat position after installing the child restraint could damage the child restraint
and/or introduce undesirable slack or tension into the seat belt and loosen or misposition the child restraint, lessening the
effectiveness of the child restraint and thus
increasing the chance or severity of injury in
an accident.
i The child seat must be firmly attached in the
right and left side anchor fittings.
Make sure the seat belt for the center seat can
operate freely with a child seat installed.
Non-LATCH type child seats may also be used
and can be installed using the vehicle’s seat belt
system. Install child seat according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
66
Warning!
G
Children too big for a toddler restraint must
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position. Position shoulder belt across chest and
shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat
may be necessary to achieve proper belt positioning for children over 41 lbs until they
reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits
properly without a booster.
Install child seat according to manufacturer’s instructions.
The child seat must be firmly attached in
right and left side anchors 2.
An incorrectly mounted child seat may come
loose during an accident which could result
in serious injury or death to the child.
Damaged or impact damaged child seats or
child seat mounting fittings must be replaced.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Override switch for rear passenger
compartment
The override switch is located on the driver’s door.
Warning!
G
Activate the override switch when children
are riding in the back seats of the vehicle.
You can disable select functions in the rear
passenger compartment for added safety
(for instance when you have children riding
in the rear passenger compartment).
The children may otherwise injure themselves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the window opening.
You can disable the following functions in
the rear passenger compartment:
앫
rear door window operation
(컄 page 353)
앫
adjustment of front passenger seat
from the rear* (컄 page 320)
1 Override switch
2 Indicator lamp
앫
rear center console lighter
(컄 page 458)
왘
앫
sunblinds for panorama roof*
(컄 page 443)
앫
rear window sunshade (컄 page 456)
and rear side window sunshades
(컄 page 355)
Activating: Press switch 1.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on. The functions in the rear are disabled.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
i Operation of the rear door windows with the
switches located in the driver’s door is still possible.
왘
Deactivating: Press switch 1 again.
Indicator lamp 2 goes out. The functions in the rear are enabled again.
67
Safety and Security
Panic alarm
i USA only:
Activating
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
왘
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
1 Â button
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Deactivating
왘
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
or
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Press  button again.
or
왘
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
68
An audible alarm and flashing exterior
lamps will operate briefly.
i Canada only:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
Press and hold  button for at least
1 second.
왘
Insert the SmartKey or the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO* in starter switch.
Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button (컄 page 317).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
be inside the vehicle.
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
왔 Driving safety systems
This section contains information about
Adaptive Brake Lights as well as the following driving safety systems:
Always adjust your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
The ABS is functional above a speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
of road surface conditions.
앫
ABS (Antilock Brake System)
i In winter operation, the maximum effective- On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will re-
앫
Adaptive Brake
앫
BAS (Brake Assist System)
앫
BAS Plus* (Brake Assist System Plus*)
ness of the ABS, Adaptive Brake, BAS,
BAS Plus*, EBP, ESP® and ETS is only achieved
with winter tires (컄 page 530), or snow chains
as required.
앫
EBP (Electronic Brake Proportioning)
앫
ESP®
앫
ETS (Electronic Traction System)
ABS
(Electronic Stability Program)
Warning!
G
The following factors increase the risk of accidents:
앫
Excessive speed, especially in turns
앫
Wet and slippery road surfaces
앫
Following another vehicle too closely
The ABS, BAS, BAS Plus*, EBP, ESP® and
ETS cannot reduce this risk.
spond even to light brake pressure.
The - indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster (컄 page 28) comes on when you
switch on the ignition (컄 page 315). It goes
out when the engine is running.
Braking
Warning!
G
Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pumping the brake pedal defeats the purpose of
the ABS and significantly reduces braking
effectiveness.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
the brake pressure so that the wheels do
not lock during braking. This allows you to
maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
At the instant one of the wheels is about to
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the
brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in
the regulating mode.
왘
Keep firm and steady pressure on the
brake pedal while experiencing the pulsation.
Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure
yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
namely braking power and the ability to
steer the vehicle.
69
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and
functions as a reminder to take extra care
while driving.
Emergency brake maneuver
왘
Keep continuous full pressure on the
brake pedal.
Warning!
G
When the ABS is malfunctioning, the BAS,
BAS Plus*, ESP® and ETS are also switched
off.
When the ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels
may lock during hard braking, reducing
steering capability and extending the braking distance.
Warning!
G
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency
70
beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. The ABS cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle too
closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
For more information, see “Practical hints”
(컄 page 544).
Adaptive Brake
Adaptive Brake provides a high level of
braking safety as well as increased braking
comfort.
Adaptive Brake Lights (S 600 and
USA only)
Depending on vehicle production date the
brake lamps flash in quick intervals while
you are braking in order to signal to cars
behind you that
앫
you are braking strongly at a speed of
more than 30 mph (50 km/h)
앫
you are braking with the aid of BAS or
BAS Plus*
If you bring the car to a complete stop by
hard braking at a speed of more than
40 mph (70 km/h), the hazard warning
flasher automatically comes on as soon as
the vehicle is at a standstill. While the vehicle is stationary, the brake lamps are continuously lit up. Once you drive faster than
6 mph (10 km/h) afterward, the hazard
warning flasher goes out.
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
BAS
Warning!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
emergency situations. If you apply the
brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically
provides full brake boost, thereby potentially reducing the braking distance.
왘
Apply continuous full braking pressure
until the emergency braking situation is
over.
The ABS will prevent the wheels from
locking.
When you release the brake pedal, the
brakes function again as normal. The BAS
is then deactivated.
Warning!
G
When the BAS is malfunctioning, the brake
system is still functioning normally, but without the additional brake boost available that
BAS would normally provide in an emergency braking maneuver. Therefore, the braking
distance may increase.
G
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes
and tires or the traction afforded. The BAS
cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
For more information, see “Practical hints”
section (컄 page 544).
BAS Plus*
BAS Plus operates in emergency braking
situations and uses radar sensors to assess the traffic situation.
When you step quickly on the brake pedal
in an emergency braking situation,
BAS Plus automatically regulates the
brake pressure to a level that is suitable for
the traffic situation.
If BAS Plus requires a particularly high
brake pressure, PRE-SAFE® is activated at
the same time.
왘
Step on the brake pedal until the emergency braking situation is over.
During this process, ABS prevents the
wheels from locking up.
Once you take your foot off the brake pedal or when there is no longer a risk of collision, the brake pedal functions again as
usual. BAS Plus is deactivated.
EBP
The Electronic Brake Proportioning (EBP)
enhances braking effectiveness by allowing the rear brakes to supply a greater proportion of the braking effort in straight line
breaking without a loss of vehicle stability.
71
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Warning!
G
When the EBP is malfunctioning, the ABS,
BAS, BAS Plus*, ESP® and ETS are also
switched off.
If the EBP is malfunctioning, the brake system will still function with full brake boost.
However, the rear wheels could lock up during emergency braking situations, for example. You could lose control of the vehicle and
cause an accident. Adapt your driving style
to the changed driving characteristics.
works to stabilize the vehicle. The ESP® is
especially useful while driving off and on
wet or slippery road surfaces. The ESP®
also stabilizes the vehicle during braking
maneuvers.
The ESP® warning lamp v in the instrument cluster flashes when the ESP® is engaged.
The ESP® warning lamp v in the instrument cluster comes on when you switch on
the ignition (컄 page 315). It goes out when
the engine is running.
G
ESP®
Warning!
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) is
operational as soon as the engine is running and monitors the vehicle’s traction
(force of adhesive friction between the
tires and the road surface) and handling.
Never switch off the ESP® when you see the
ESP® warning lamp v flashing in the instrument cluster. In this case proceed as follows:
The ESP® recognizes when a wheel is spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By applying brakes to the appropriate wheel and
by limiting the engine output, the ESP®
72
앫
While driving off, apply as little throttle
as possible.
앫
While driving ease up on the accelerator.
앫
Adapt your speed and driving style to
the prevailing road conditions.
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid.
The ESP® cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speed.
Warning!
G
The ESP® cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase the traction afforded. The ESP®
cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESP® equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
i DISTRONIC Plus* is switched off when the
ESP® engages.
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
i The ESP® will only function properly if you
use wheels of the recommended tire size
(컄 page 655).
! Because of the ESP’s® automatic operation,
the engine and ignition must be shut off
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button* in position 0
or 1) when
앫
the parking brake is being tested on a brake
test dynamometer
앫
the vehicle is being towed with the
front/rear axle raised
Active braking action through the ESP® may otherwise seriously damage the brake system.
For more information, see “Practical hints”
section (컄 page 549) and (컄 page 582).
ETS
The Electronic Traction System is a component of ESP®.
The Electronic Traction System (ETS) improves the vehicle’s ability to utilize available traction, especially under slippery
road conditions. The brakes are applied to
the spinning wheel and power is transferred to the wheel(s) with traction.
Switching off the ESP®
Warning!
The ESP® warning lamp v in the instrument cluster starts to flash at any vehicle
speed, as soon as a tire loses traction and
the wheel begins to spin.
The ESP® should not be switched off during
normal driving other than in the circumstances described below. Disabling of the
system will reduce vehicle stability in standard driving maneuvers.
When you switch off the ESP®, the ETS is
still enabled.
Warning!
G
If you are driving too fast, the Electronic
Traction System cannot reduce the risk of
an accident.
The ETS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle.
i If the yellow ESP® warning lamp v
comes on while driving, the ETS is being
switched off temporarily to prevent overheating
of the drive wheel brakes. In addition, the message “ESP Currently unavailable See Oper. Manual” appears in the multifunction display.
G
To improve the vehicle’s traction, turn off
the ESP® in driving situations where it
would be advantageous to have the drive
wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for
better grip such as:
앫
when driving with snow chains
앫
in deep snow
앫
in sand or gravel
! Turn the ESP® on immediately if the aforementioned circumstances do not apply anymore.
i DISTRONIC Plus* cannot be activated when
the ESP® has been switched off.
73
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
When you switch off the ESP®
앫
the ESP® does not stabilize the vehicle
앫
the engine output is not limited, which
allows the drive wheels to spin and
thus cut into surfaces for better grip
앫
the traction control will still brake a
spinning wheel
앫
the ESP® continues to operate when
you are braking
i When the ESP® is switched off and one or
more drive wheels are spinning, the ESP® warning lamp v in the instrument cluster flashes.
However, the ESP® will then not stabilize the vehicle.
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an ex-
tended period with the ESP® switched off. This
may cause serious damage to the drivetrain
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Switching on the ESP®
왘
The ESP® warning lamp v in the instrument cluster goes out.
1 ESP® off/on
왘
Press ESP® switch 1 until the ESP®
warning lamp v in the speedometer
comes on.
The ESP® is switched off.
Warning!
G
When the ESP® warning lamp v is illuminated continuously, the ESP® is switched
off.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and to the non-operating
status of the ESP®.
74
Press ESP® switch 1.
You are now again in normal driving
mode with the ESP® switched on.
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
왔 Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer
Anti-theft alarm system
i If the alarm stays on for more than
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized
persons from starting your vehicle.
Once the alarm system has been armed, a
visual and audible alarm is triggered when
someone opens:
30 seconds, a call to the Response Center is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system
(컄 page 462) provided Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated, and that necessary mobile phone, power supply and GPS
coverage are available.
Activating
왘
With the SmartKey: Remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch.
왘
With the KEYLESS-GO*: Turn off the
engine (컄 page 317) and open the driver’s door.
Deactivating
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
앫
a door
앫
the trunk
앫
the hood
The alarm will stay on even if the activating
element (a door, for example) is immediately closed.
The alarm system will also be triggered
when
i Starting the engine will also deactivate the
앫
the vehicle is raised
immobilizer.
앫
the vehicle is opened with the
mechanical key
앫
a door is opened from the inside
In case the engine cannot be started (yet the vehicle’s battery is charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
To cancel the alarm after it has been triggered, see “Canceling the alarm”
(컄 page 76).
1 Indicator lamp
왘
Arming: Lock your vehicle with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*.
The turn signal lamps flash three times
to indicate that the alarm system is activated. The indicator lamp 1 flashes
to indicate that the alarm system is
armed.
컄컄
75
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
컄컄 i If the turn signal lamps does not flash three
times one of the following elements may not be
properly closed:
앫
a door
앫
the trunk
Close the respective element and lock the vehicle again.
왘
i If the alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, a call to the Response Center is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system
(컄 page 462) provided Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated and that necessary mobile phone, power supply and GPS
coverage are available.
왘
Disarming: Unlock your vehicle with
the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*.
The turn signal lamps flash once to indicate that the alarm system is disarmed.
i The alarm system will rearm automatically
again after approximately 40 seconds if no door
was opened.
Tow-away alarm
Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual
and audible alarm will be triggered when
someone attempts to raise the vehicle.
To cancel the alarm after it has been triggered, see “Canceling the alarm”
(컄 page 76).
76
Arming: Lock your vehicle with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*.
The tow-away alarm is automatically
armed after about 30 seconds.
왘
Disarming: Unlock your vehicle with
the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*.
i When you unlock your vehicle, the tow-away
protection disarms automatically.
To switch off the tow-away alarm, see
“Switching on/of the tow-away alarm”
(컄 page 228).
Canceling the alarm
To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
왘
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
왘
Press the Œ or ‹ button on the
SmartKey.
In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
be within 3 ft. (1 m) of the vehicle.
The tow-away alarm remains disarmed until you
lock your vehicle again.
To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm
feature, switch off the tow-away alarm before towing the vehicle, or when parking on
a surface subject to movement, such as a
ferry or auto train.
Grasp an outside door handle.
왘
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button (컄 page 317).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
be inside the vehicle.
Control systems
COMAND operating safety
COMAND address book
COMAND introduction
COMAND system settings
COMAND FM/AM radio
COMAND vehicle menu
COMAND satellite radio* (USA only)
COMAND automatic climate control
COMAND
audio CD/audio DVD/MP3
COMAND seats
COMAND telephone*
Voice Control* operating safety
COMAND navigation (introduction)
Voice Control* introduction
COMAND navigation system
(entering a destination)
Voice Control* telephone
COMAND navigation system
(Point of interest entry)
COMAND navigation system
(route guidance)
COMAND navigation system
(during route guidance)
COMAND navigation system
(destination memory)
COMAND navigation system
(last destinations)
Instrument cluster control system
Voice Control* navigation
Voice Control* address book
Voice Control* radio
Voice Control*
CD/DVD changer/MP3
Voice Control* command list
Voice Control* troubleshooting
Voice Control* individualization
77
Control systems
COMAND operating safety
Warning!
G
Any alteration of electronic components or
software can cause malfunctions.
Radio, satellite radio* (USA only), amplifier,
CD changer, navigation module, telephone
and voice control systems* are interconnected. Therefore, if one of the components
is not operational, or has not been removed/ replaced properly, the function of
other components could be impaired.
Such conditions might seriously impair the
operating safety of your vehicle.
We recommend to have any service work on
electronic components carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
78
Warning!
G
Warning!
G
In order to avoid distraction which could
lead to an accident, the driver should enter
system settings while the vehicle is at a
standstill, and operate the system only
when permitted by road, weather and traffic
conditions.
While the navigation system provides directional assistance, the driver must remain focused on safe driving behavior, especially
attention to traffic and street signs, and
should utilize the system’s audio cues while
driving.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/ h), your car covers a
distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
The navigation system does not supply any
information on stop signs, yield signs, traffic
regulations or traffic safety rules. Their observance always remains in the driver’s personal responsibility. DVD maps do not cover
all areas nor all routes within an area.
COMAND supplies you with information to
help you select your route more easily and
guide you conveniently and safely to yourdestination. For safety reasons, we encourage the driver to stop the vehicle in a safe
place before answering or placing a call, or
consulting the COMAND screen to read navigational maps, instructions, or downloaded
information.
Control systems
COMAND introduction
왔 COMAND introduction
Availability of functions while the vehicle is in motion
Switching COMAND on or off
왘
For safety reasons, certain COMAND functions are not available while the vehicle is
in motion or they are only available to a
limited extent. You will notice this, for example, by the fact that certain menu items
cannot be selected or that the COMAND
display shows a corresponding message.
COMAND components
Press the o shortcut button in the
center console (컄 page 80).
In your vehicle, COMAND can be used to
operate:
COMAND calls up the menu last selected.
앫
audio functions
앫
the navigation system
앫
the telephone* and communication
functions (SMS*)
앫
various vehicle settings
i When you switch off COMAND, you also
switch off the currently playing audio source.
During a telephone call, you cannot switch off
COMAND.
COMAND consists of the following:
앫
COMAND shortcut buttons
앫
COMAND display
앫
telephone* keypad
앫
COMAND controller
79
Control systems
COMAND introduction
COMAND shortcut buttons
i During Dynamic Rear View Monitor* operation (컄 page 413) it is not possible to operate
the COMAND shortcut buttons.
Function
1 P Favorite button
Page
216
2 M Shortcut button for:
앫
radio
앫
CD/DVD
111
3 L Back button
87
4 O Seat menu
236
Use the COMAND shortcut buttons to select main menus directly.
94
COMAND display
In the COMAND display, you will find the
function currently selected and the corresponding menus. The COMAND display is
divided into several areas.
5 N Shortcut button for:
앫
telephone*
115
앫
Navi
148
6 o COMAND on/off
button
79
7 , Volume control
89
8 F Mute button
89
Example:
왘
Switching directly to Radio or CD
menu: Press M once or twice.
1 Status line
2 Main menus
3 Main area
4 Submenus
5 Climate control settings
A white bar under the main menus 2 indicates the active area.
Once you have selected a main menu 2,
the main area 3 is active.
80
Control systems
COMAND introduction
i The layout of the menus may vary depending
on your vehicle’s equipment. This manual shows
the menus for a fully equipped vehicle.
Adjusting COMAND display and instrument cluster illumination
Swiveling COMAND display
Instrument cluster multifunction
display
This section describes features and controls via the COMAND controller, display
and shortcut buttons only.
Please refer to the “Instrument cluster
control system” section of this manual
(컄 page 241) for function descriptions and
operation of the instrument cluster multifunction display and multifunction steering
wheel buttons as they relate to COMAND
features described in this section.
1 To adjust instrument cluster illumination and multifunction display
2 To adjust COMAND display
왘
Brightening illumination: Turn
knob 1 or 2 clockwise.
왘
Dimming illumination: Turn knob 1
or 2 counterclockwise.
1 Button for swiveling display to the left
2 Button for swiveling display to the right
You can swivel the COMAND display to the
left or right. The buttons are on the
right-hand side of the instrument cluster.
81
Control systems
COMAND introduction
Telephone keypad*
COMAND controller
With the help of the telephone keypad, you
can use your mobile phone if it is inserted
in the cradle (컄 page 460).
Use the COMAND controller to select
menu functions shown on the COMAND
display.
You can operate the COMAND controller
as follows:
앫
press briefly or press and hold
앫
rotate to the left or right
앫
slide to the left, right, up, down or
diagonally
In this way, you can move through the
menus, select menu items or exit menus.
You can move through the menus either by
rotating or sliding the controller.
1 Telephone keypad
2 Folding cover
1 COMAND controller
Operating COMAND controller
82
Control systems
COMAND introduction
Symbol
n
ymz
qmr
omp
How to use the COMAND controller
Function
왘
앫
Select menu item.
앫
Exit full-screen image with Navi.
왘
Press and hold until the selected ac- 앫 Save a station.
tion has been carried out.
앫 Accept a destination for navigation.
왘
Rotate.
왘
Slide.
앫
Move through vertical or horizontal menus.
앫
Move through text.
앫
Program settings.
앫
Move through vertical menus.
앫
Exit horizontal menus.
왘
Slide and hold.
앫
Move through a navigation map.
왘
Slide.
앫
Move through horizontal menus.
앫
Exit vertical menus.
앫
Fast forward or reverse for audio CD or audio DVD playback.
앫
Move through a navigation map.
앫
Move through a navigation map.
왘
wmx
Press briefly.
왘
Slide and hold.
Slide and hold.
83
Control systems
COMAND introduction
Operating COMAND
Menu overview
The illustration below shows the structure
of the main menus and their main menus.
Commands/menus
Navi
84
Each main menu has a main menu. Each
menu item in the main menu in turn has
several submenu items.
Page Audio
Page Telephone*
Page Vehicle
Page
Map Display
150 FM/AM Radio
93 Telephone*
115 Exterior Lighting Delayed Switch-off
220
Mode
152 Sat Radio*
(USA only)
98 Address Book*
202 Locator Lighting
221
116 Exterior Mirror Convenience Settings
222
CD
104 Telephone OFF*
DVD-Audio
104
Automatic Locking
223
MP3
104
Easy Entry/Exit Feature
224
Interior Lighting Delayed Switch-off
226
Interior Ambient Light
225
Rear Window Sunshade*
227
Trunk Opening-height Restriction
227
Tow-away Alarm
228
Audio OFF
92
Control systems
COMAND introduction
Calling up the main menu
Vertical menus
Horizontal menus
Illustration: audio main menu
왘
Moving through the menu:
Slide rmq or rotate ymz.
왘
You can call up the main menu of a main
menu in the following manner:
Moving through the menu:
Slide omp or rotate ymz.
왘
Selecting a menu item: Press n.
왘
Selecting a menu item: Press n.
왘
Moving to the main menu line:
Slide qm.
왘
왘
왘
Selecting a main menu: Slide omp or
rotate ymz.
Exiting a menu without making a selection: Slide omp in the opposite direction of the list orientation or press
back button L.
Exiting a menu without making a selection: Slide rmq in the opposite direction of the list orientation or press
back button L.
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
85
Control systems
COMAND introduction
Entering characters
Deleting individual characters
Accepting first entry
왘
왘
Select and press ) repeatedly in the
bottom line.
Deleting entire words or numbers
왘
Press n until you exit the character
entry window.
Selecting list item
Press and hold ) in the bottom line
until the word or number is deleted.
Exiting character entry
Illustration: entering a navigation destination
Selecting characters
왘
Slide omp or rotate ymz.
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
COMAND completes your entry as
soon as it can be clearly identified. In
this case, you do not need to switch to
the list.
86
왘
Select and press “Back” in the bottom
line.
or
왘
Press back button L in the center
console (컄 page 80).
Switching to the list
왘
Slide qm.
Illustration: list of towns and cities for navigation
1 Symbol for other selection options
(e.g. county)
왘
or
왘
Select and press ? in the second line
from the bottom.
왘
To exit list, slide om to select “Back”.
Selecting a line: Slide rmq or
rotate ymz.
Control systems
COMAND introduction
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
Additional selection options are available for list entries featuring
symbol 1. For example, cities marked
with symbol 1 indicate that the selected country has more than one city featuring that name. Confirming such a list
entry opens up another submenu.
Back button
왘
Switching to the next highest menu:
Press L briefly.
COMAND switches to the next highest
menu level within the currently active
operating mode.
왘
Switching to the main menu: Press
and hold L.
You will hear a signal, and COMAND
switches to the main menu of the currently active operating mode.
Example of how to use COMAND
In the descriptions below, the main menus
always serve as the starting point for locating the individual menu items.
If you already see one of the submenus on
the screen (e.g. the “Audio” “Audio” “Radio” submenu), it is not necessary to
perform the first steps.
The individual steps for the above-mentioned example are described below.
왘
Switching to the main menu line:
Slide qm.
왘
Selecting “Audio” main menu:
Slide omp or rotate ymz.
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
The audio operating mode last selected
appears.
Example:
“Audio” “Audio” “FM/AM Radio” “Radio” “Save Station”
1 Back button
i In the COMAND display, you will see the
submenu previously called up for each main
menu.
컄컄
87
Control systems
COMAND introduction
컄컄 왘
왘
Selecting “Audio” in the main menu:
Slide qm.
왘
Select “Save Station” from selection
list by rotating ymz or sliding rmq.
Confirming selection: Press n.
왘
Select desired position.
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
A selection list with the functions of the
“Audio” main menu appears.
왘
Selecting “Radio”: Slide mr or
rotate ymz.
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
The Radio menu appears.
왘
Selecting “FM/AM Radio”:
Slide qm or rotate ymz.
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
The Radio main menu appears.
88
The selected station is saved at the
designated position. The display
switches back to the Radio display.
Control systems
COMAND introduction
Main menus of COMAND
i The components and operating principles of
COMAND can be found on (컄 page 79).
Switching off navigation announcements entirely
왘
Canceling navigation message:
Briefly press F shortcut button during an announcement.
왘
Switching off navigation messages:
Press and hold F during an announcement until the announcement is
switched off.
Sound
왘
Muting: Press the F shortcut button in the center console (컄 page 80).
The sound of the current audio source
is switched on or is muted.
i When the sound is muted, you will see the
symbol F in the status line. When you
change the audio source, the sound is automatically switched on. You will be able to hear announcements from the navigation system even
when the sound is muted.
You will see the message “The driving
instructions have been muted.” for a
short while.
i The announcements remain switched off
even if you start a new route guidance or if
COMAND is switched off/on with the o button.
If you switch COMAND off by removing the
SmartKey from the starter switch and then
switch the ignition back on after more than
3 minutes, the announcements are automatically switched back on.
Adjusting volume
1 Thumbwheel
왘
Adjusting: Turn , thumbwheel.
The volume of the currently selected
audio source changes.
89
Control systems
COMAND introduction
Volume of navigation announcements
Selecting sound settings
Adjusting treble or bass
You can adjust the volume of the navigation announcements independently from
the volume of the respective audio source.
You can select different sound settings for
each individual audio source. The respective sound menu can be found via the submenu for which you wish to make settings.
왘
During a navigation announcement:
왘
turn thumbwheel ,
The setting last selected is indicated by
an outlined bar.
Example:
“Audio” “Audio” “FM/AM Radio” “Sound”
or
왘
Select “Sound” “Treble” or “Bass”.
press æ or ç on the multifunction steering wheel.
Adjusting volume for telephone calls
In hands-free mode, you can adjust the volume of a telephone call while the call is
currently active.
Adjusting treble and bass
During a telephone call:
1 Setting last selected
2 Current setting
왘
turn thumbwheel ,
왘
press æ or ç on the multifunction steering wheel.
Changing setting: Slide rmq or
rotate ymz until desired treble or bass
setting is reached.
왘
Exiting menu: Press n, L or
Slide omp.
or
왘
The setting is saved.
90
Control systems
COMAND introduction
Adjusting balance or fader
Balance is used to determine whether the
sound focus should be shifted toward the
driver’s side or the passenger’s side.
Fader is used to determine whether the
sound focus should be shifted toward the
front or rear of the vehicle
왘
Select “Sound” “Balance/Fader”.
The setting last selected is indicated by
an outlined bar.
왘
왘
1 Current setting indicated by orange
cross-hair symbol
Exiting menu: Press n or L.
The setting is saved.
Surround sound
With surround sound, you can choose between “LOGIC7® ON” and “LOGIC7® OFF”.
Harman/kardon LOGIC7® surround sound
is available for the following operating
modes:
앫
Adjusting balance and fader
Changing setting: Slide rmq or omp
until desired balance/fader setting is
reached.
Audio DVD (MLP, DTS, PCM, and Dolby
Digital audio formats)
앫
Audio CD
앫
MP3
앫
Radio (FM, AM, WB,
Satellite* (USA only))
앫
PCMCIA
i Since some DVDs contain both stereo as
well as multi-channel audio formats, it may be
necessary to adapt the audio format
(컄 page 114).
i The “LOGIC7® ON” function of the har-
man/kardon LOGIC7® surround sound system
makes it possible to play discrete 5.1 and stereo
recordings with optimal surround sound for every passenger. Music on CDs or audio DVDs with
high-resolution surround formats such as MLP,
DTS or Dolby Digital is played back optimally.
For an ideal sound experience on all seats,
LOGIC7® distributes 5.1 surround information
via the 13-channel system architecture. The result is a sound as intended by the sound engineers during the original recording.
harman/kardon LOGIC7® converts all two-channel stereo sound material into multi-channel surround sound. With the help of LOGIC7®,
surround information stored during the original
recording are read out and distributed through
the 13 channels. No effects are created during
this process; only that which was already there
becomes audible.
In addition, harman/kardon LOGIC7® moves the
perceived sound source away from the individual
loudspeakers, thus generating a natural 360°
sound experience for every passenger.
91
Control systems
COMAND introduction
i By selecting “LOGIC7® OFF”, all compatible
왘
formats as they are present on the medium are
played back. Due to the vehicle’s spatial characteristics, an optimal sound experience is not ensured on all seats.
Selecting a setting: Slide rmq or
rotate ymz.
왘
Saving setting: Press n
Adjusting surround sound
With surround sound, you can choose between “LOGIC7® ON” and “LOGIC7® OFF”.
왘
Select “Sound” “3D Sound”.
Adjusting surround sound
1 Current setting
92
The setting is saved and the menu is
closed.
왘
Exiting menu without saving changes: Press L or slide omp.
i Please note the following:
앫
For an ideal sound experience at all seats,
the balance and fader should be adjusted to
the center of the passenger compartment
with LOGIC7® switched on.
앫
The best sound results are achieved by playing high-quality audio CDs and audio DVDs.
앫
For MP3 tracks, the bit rate should be at
least 128kBit/s.
앫
Surround sound does not function for
mono-signal sources.
앫
In the event of poor radio reception quality,
e.g. inside a tunnel, you should switch off
LOGIC7®, as a dynamic switch from Stereo
to Mono could occur, resulting in temporary
sound distortion.
앫
With some stereo recordings, the resulting
sound may deviate from conventional stereo
playback.
Switching off/on the audio source
i When you insert an audio CD or audio DVD,
it automatically becomes the active audio
source.
왘
Switching off: Select “Audio” “Audio” “Audio OFF”.
The audio source is switched off; “Audio OFF” appears in the display.
왘
Switching on: Select “Audio”, then the
desired audio source.
or
왘
Load CD/DVD (컄 page 107) or a
PCMCIA card (컄 page 108).
Control systems
COMAND FM/AM radio
왔 COMAND FM/AM radio
Submenu overview
i The components and operating principles of
COMAND can be found on (컄 page 79).
Radio
(except Weather Band)
Presets
(except Weather Band)
Channel
(only Weather Band)
FM or AM or WB
Sound
Station List
(in FM waveband only)
Autostore
Channel list
Switch to FM waveband
Treble
Save Station
Preset station list
Switch to AM waveband
Bass
Frequency Entry
Show Station Info
(in FM waveband only)
Switch to Weather Band Balance/Fader
3D Sound
93
Control systems
COMAND FM/AM radio
Switching to radio mode
Switching wavebands
왘
You can switch between the FM, AM and
WB (Weather Band) wavebands.
Select “Audio” “Audio” “FM/AM
Radio”.
왘
or
왘
Press the M shortcut button once or
twice.
The radio display appears once you
have switched to radio mode. You will
hear the station/channel last tuned in
in the previously selected waveband,
provided that the station/channel can
be received.
i The number of times you have to press the
M shortcut button depends on the operating
mode currently selected.
You will hear the station last tuned in
on the selected waveband.
Illustration: radio mode in FM waveband
1 Main area with frequency display
2 Preset position of selected station
3 Frequency of selected station
4 Name of selected station
5 Sound settings
6 To switch to Weather Band
7 To switch to AM waveband
8 Selected waveband
9 Preset options
a Radio options
i Station name display 4 is available for the
FM waveband and can only be seen when it is
switched on (컄 page 97) and if the station transmits a name.
94
Select “Audio” “Audio” “FM/AM
Radio” “FM” or “AM” or “WB”.
Selecting stations/channels
You have the following selection options:
앫
The station list
앫
The search function
앫
The station presets
앫
The manual frequency entry
앫
The channel list
Selecting stations using the station list
i The station list is only available for the FM
waveband. It contains all the stations that can be
currently received and is sorted by station frequencies.
Control systems
COMAND FM/AM radio
왘
Select “Audio” “Audio” “FM/AM
Radio” “FM”.
Selecting stations using station presets
Selecting stations by entering the frequency manually
왘
Select “Radio” “Station List”.
i This function is not available for Weather
i This function is not available for Weather
The station list appears. The dot R in
front of a list entry indicates the currently selected station. A number in
front of the list entry indicates the preset position in the station preset memory.
Band.
Band.
왘
Select a station by rotating ymz or
sliding qmr and press n.
왘
Select “Audio” “Audio” “FM/AM
Radio” “FM” or “AM”.
왘
Select “Audio”“Audio”“FM/AM
Radio”“FM” or “AM”.
왘
Select “Presets”.
왘
Select “Radio”“Frequency Entry”.
or
왘
The preset menu appears. The dot R
in front of a preset position indicates
that the currently selected station is
saved there.
Selecting stations/channels using the
search function
왘
Slide omp or rotate ymz when the
main area is selected.
Depending on the direction in which
the controller is being slid or rotated,
the system searches upward or downward and stops at the next receivable
station/channel.
Press n when the main area is selected.
왘
Select station preset by rotating ymz
or sliding qmr and press n.
The menu for manual frequency entry
appears.
왘
Exiting menu without making an entry: Press L back button in the center console (컄 page 80).
왘
Increasing or decreasing number:
Slide qmr or rotate ymz.
i You can only select currently permitted
numbers.
왘
Selecting the next number:
Slide mp.
왘
Confirming frequency entry:
Press n.
COMAND tunes in to the frequency entered.
컄컄
95
Control systems
COMAND FM/AM radio
컄컄 i If you enter a frequency in the AM waveband
which is outside the frequency range, COMAND
tunes in to the next lowest frequency.
You have the following options:
앫
Saving stations manually
앫
Saving stations using Autostore
Selecting channels using the channel
list
Saving stations manually
i This function is only available for Weather
Option 1
Band.
왘
Select “Audio” “Audio” “FM/AM
Radio” “WB” “Channel”.
or
왘
Press n when the main area is selected.
The channel list appears. The dot R in
front of a list entry indicates the currently selected channel.
왘
Select channel by rotating ymz or
sliding qmr and press n.
Saving stations
i Twenty stations can be saved in each waveband except for Weather Band.
96
왘
Select “Audio” “Audio” “FM/AM
Radio” “FM” or “AM”.
왘
Select “Radio ” “Save Station”.
Option 2
왘
Press n when the main area is selected.
Option 3
왘
Select “Audio” “Audio” “FM/AM
Radio” “FM” or “AM”.
왘
Select “Presets”.
All three of these will call up a station
preset screen. The dot R in front of a
preset position indicates that the currently selected station is saved there.
왘
Selecting a preset position:
Slide qmr or rotate ymz.
Saving a station to a selected preset position
If you have called up the station preset
screen using option 1:
왘
Press n briefly.
In options 2 and 3:
왘
Press and hold n until you hear a signal.
The station is saved.
Control systems
COMAND FM/AM radio
Saving using autostore
i This function is not available for Weather
Band. The Autostore function saves receivable
stations as presets in order of their reception
quality. All stations saved manually in the preset
memory will be lost if COMAND finds 20 stations. If COMAND finds less than 20 stations, for
example 9, then the stations saved in preset positions 1 – 9 will be over written.
Station name display
i In the FM waveband, COMAND can show
the name of the station currently tuned in. Station name display 1 can only be seen when it is
switched on and if the station transmits a name.
The display is switched on or off, depending on the previous setting. When
the display is switched on, a checkmark appears in front of the
“Show Station Info” menu item.
Option 1
왘
Press n when the main area is selected.
왘
Select “Autostore”.
Option 2
왘
Select “Audio” “Audio” “FM/AM
Radio” “FM” or “AM”.
왘
Select “Presets” “Autostore”.
1 Station name display
왘
Switching the station name display
on/off: Select “Audio” “Audio” “FM/AM Radio” “FM” “Radio” “Show Station Info”.
Option 3
왘
Select “Audio” “Audio” “FM/AM
Radio” “Radio” “Save Station” “Autostore”.
97
Control systems
COMAND satellite radio* (USA only)
Submenu overview
i The components and operating principles of
COMAND can be found on (컄 page 79).
Sat Radio
Presets
Info
Category
Sound
Channel List
Station presets
Show program info
Select category
Treble
Save Channel
Bass
Channel Entry
Balance/Fader
Service
3D Sound
Introduction to Satellite radio
i A subscription to Sirius satellite radio service provider is required for the satellite radio operation described in this chapter. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details
and availability for your vehicle.
Sirius Satellite Radio provides 100 channels, so called streams, of digital-quality
radio, among others music, sports, news,
and entertainment free of commercials.
Sirius Satellite Radio uses a fleet of
98
high-power satellites to broadcast 24
hours per day, coast-to-coast, in the contiguous US.
This diverse, satellite-delivered programming is available for a monthly subscription fee.
For more information and service availability call the Sirius Service Center
(컄 page 103), or go to
www.siriusradio.com.
i Satellite radio service may be unavailable or
interrupted from time to time for a variety of reasons, such as environmental or topographic conditions and other things we can’t control. Service
might also not be available in certain places
(e.g., in tunnels, parking garages, or within or
next to buildings) or near other technologies. In
such situations, the satellite radio’s main menu
shows the “Acquiring signal...” screen. At this
point, the radio’s functions are restricted to
manual channel number entry (컄 page 101) and
service info display (컄 page 103).
Control systems
COMAND satellite radio* (USA only)
Switching to satellite radio
왘
Select “Audio” “Audio” “Sat Radio”.
or
왘
Satellite radio service is not activated
Only the preview channel is activated
The telephone number of the Sirius Service
Center and the twelve-digit electronic serial number (SIRIUS-ID) of the particular receiver are displayed.
The satellite radio preview channel appears.
Press the M shortcut button once or
twice. The Satellite radio menu appears
if it was the last active radio mode.
The screen which then appears depends on the activation status of the
satellite radio service.
The following options are possible:
앫
Satellite radio service is not activated
앫
Only the preview channel is activated
앫
Satellite radio service is fully activated
i If only the preview channel is activated, you
This information is required when calling
the Sirius Service Center for an activation
request.
cannot tune in another channel. If you try to do
this, you will see the screen described in the section “Satellite radio service is not activated”
(컄 page 99).
i Credit card information is also required for
Satellite radio service is fully activated
your application. The activation process takes
approximately 5 to 10 minutes after calling the
Sirius Service Center.
왘
Closing screen: Press n.
The main satellite radio menu appears. You
will hear the channel last tuned in, provided that it can be received.
99
Control systems
COMAND satellite radio* (USA only)
Main satellite radio menu
1 Main area with channel display
2 Preset position of selected channel
3 Selected channel
4 Selected program category
5 Sound settings
6 To select program category
7 Channel number of selected channel
8 Other channel information
9 Preset options
a Satellite radio options
i Main area 1 can show all channels included in your subscription. Which channels are
shown depends on the selected program category 4.
Note that categories and channels shown in illustrations are dependent on programming content
delivered by the service provider. Programming
content is subject to change.
Therefore, channel and categories shown in illustrations and descriptions contained in this manual may differ from the channels and categories
delivered by the service provider.
Selecting program category
Select category by rotating ymz or
sliding qmr and press n.
When selecting a channel using the
channel search function or the channel
list, you have access to the channels
you subscribe to and which are included in the selected category.
i When you select the category “All Channels”, you have access to all the channels you
subscribe to, regardless of category, when you
are tuning in a channel using the channel search
function or the channel list.
i The channels are categorized. Categories al- Tuning in channels
low you to tune to stations broadcasting a certain type of program.
왘
You have the following selection options:
Select “Audio” “Audio” “Sat Radio” “Category”.
앫
The channel search function
앫
The channel presets
The category list appears.
앫
The manual channel number entry
앫
The channel list
i If only the preview channel is activated, only
certain categories are available on the list. Which
categories these are depend on the service provider.
100
왘
Control systems
COMAND satellite radio* (USA only)
Tuning in channels using channel
search function
왘
The preset menu appears. The dot R
in front of a preset position indicates
that this is the channel currently selected and being listened to.
i This function is not possible when only the
preview channel is activated. If you try to tune in
a channel in this instance, you will see the
screen described in the section “Satellite radio
service is not activated” (컄 page 99).
왘
Press n when the main area is selected.
왘
or
Select “Audio” “Audio” “Sat Radio” “Presets”.
Closing message: Press n.
i This function is not possible when only the
preview channel is activated. If you try to tune in
a channel in this instance, you will see the
screen described in the section “Satellite radio
service is not activated” (컄 page 99).
Depending on the direction in which
the controller is being pressed or rotated, the system searches upward or
downward and stops at the next receivable channel.
Tuning in channels using channel presets
왘
Tuning in channels using manual channel number entry
Slide omp or rotate ymz when the
main area is selected.
i Which channels are found by the channel
search function depends on which channels you
have subscribed to and the program category
you have selected (컄 page 100).
If the channel is no longer available or
only the preview channel is activated,
you will see the message “Invalid Channel”.
왘
왘
Select station preset and briefly
press n.
Select “Audio” “Audio” “Sat Radio” “Sat Radio” “Channel Entry”.
The menu for manual channel number
entry appears.
COMAND tunes in the corresponding
channel as long as it is included in your
subscription and is still available.
왘
Exiting menu without making an entry: Press L back button in the center console (컄 page 80).
If the channel is not included in your
subscription, you will see the message
described in the section “Satellite radio
service is not activated” (컄 page 99).
왘
Increase or decreasing number:
Slide qmr or rotate ymz.
왘
Selecting next number: Slide omp. 컄컄
101
Control systems
COMAND satellite radio* (USA only)
컄컄 왘
Confirming channel entry: Press n.
Further operation depends on whether
the selected channel number is valid or
if the channel is included in your subscription.
Tuning in channels using the channel
list
왘
The channel list appears. The dot R in
front of a list entry indicates the currently selected channel.
Channel number is valid and channel is
included in subscription
COMAND tunes in the channel entered.
Channel number is invalid
You will see the message “Invalid Channel”.
왘
Closing message: Press n.
Channel number is valid but channel is
not included in subscription
You will see the screen described in the
section “Satellite radio service is not activated” (컄 page 99).
왘
Closing display: Press n.
102
Select “Audio” “Audio” “Sat Radio” “Sat Radio” “Channel List”.
왘
Option 2
왘
Press n when the main area is selected.
Option 3
왘
Select “Audio” “Audio” “Sat Radio” “Presets”.
All three of these will call up a preset
menu. The dot R in front of a preset
position indicates that this is the channel currently selected and being listened to.
Select channel by rotating ymz or
sliding qmr and press n.
i The contents of the channel list depends on
which channels are included in your subscription
and which program category you have selected
(컄 page 100). If only the preview channel is activated, the channel list contains only the preview
channel.
Saving channels
i There are twenty preset positions available.
Option 1
왘
Select “Audio” “Audio” “Sat Radio” “Sat Radio” “Save Channel”.
왘
Selecting a preset position:
Slide qmr or rotate ymz.
Control systems
COMAND satellite radio* (USA only)
Saving a channel to a selected preset
position
앫
Artist of the track currently being
played
If you have called up the channel preset
screen using option 1:
앫
Name of current track
왘
formation is displayed on the screen. COMAND
shows no more than two lines per item of information. If an item of information is too long,
COMAND shortens it.
Press n briefly.
In options 2 and 3:
왘
Press and hold n until you hear a signal.
The channel is saved.
Show program info
왘
Select “Audio” “Audio” “Sat Radio” “Info”.
i If the program provider does not offer any information, the “Info” menu item cannot be selected.
i The program provider determines what in-
왘
Closing screen: Slide omp or
press n.
Calling Sirius Service Center
i It may be necessary to call the Sirius Service
Center if, for example:
앫
You want to cancel the subscription or
re-subscribe at a later date
앫
You forget to pay the bill
앫
You sell the car to another person
왘
Select “Audio” “Audio” “Sat Radio” “Sat Radio” “Service”.
The telephone number of the Sirius
Service Center and the twelve-digit
electronic serial number (SIRIUS-ID) of
the particular receiver are displayed.
Channel update
The service provider may conduct a channel update.
During the update, the message “Updating
channels...” will appear on the display.
No functions can be operated in satellite
radio mode during the update.
왘
Closing screen: Slide omp or
press n.
You will see a screen that may contain the
following information:
앫
Selected program category
앫
Selected channel
103
Control systems
COMAND audio CD/audio DVD/MP3
Safety precautions
Warning!
Warning!
G
COMAND is classified as a Class 1 laser
product. You must not open the casing.
There is a risk of exposure to invisible laser
radiation if you open the casing, or if the
casing is faulty or damaged.
COMAND does not contain any parts that
you are able to maintain yourself. For safety
reasons, all maintenance work must be carried out by qualified technicians.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
104
G
Only carry out the following when the vehicle is stationary:
앫
Inserting a disc
앫
Ejecting a disc
There is a risk of accident by being distracted from road and traffic conditions if you
load a CD/DVD while the vehicle is in motion.
Notes about MP3 mode
Permissible media for MP3 files
앫
CD-R and CD-RW
앫
DVD+R and DVD+RW
앫
DVD-R and DVD-RW
앫
PCMCIA card (컄 page 108)
Permissible file systems
앫
ISO9660/Joliet for CDs
앫
UDF for DVDs
앫
FAT16 or FAT32 for PCMCIA cards with
storage medium
Multisession CDs
For multisession CDs, the first session
type of the CD determines how COMAND
will process the CD.
For example, if the first session type is according to the audio CD standard and the
second session type is according to the
data CD standard containing MP3 tracks,
COMAND will treat the CD as a conventional audio CD. This means that it is only
possible to access the audio CD tracks.
Access to the MP3 tracks is not possible.
Similarly, if the first session type is according to the data CD standard containing
MP3 tracks and the second session type is
according to the audio CD standard, COMAND will treat the CD as a data CD. This
Control systems
COMAND audio CD/audio DVD/MP3
means that it is only possible to access the
MP3 tracks. Access to the audio CD tracks
is not possible.
File structure on a disc
When you create an MP3 disc, the MP3
tracks can be organized in folders. A folder
can also contain other folders. A disc can
contain a maximum of 255 folders. Each
folder can contain a maximum of
255 tracks and 255 folders. A disc can
contain a maximum of 4,000 tracks. Usually this number will not be reached because
each minute of an MP3 track requires approximately 1 MB of storage space.
Track and folder names
When you create an MP3 disc, you can assign names to the MP3 tracks and folders.
COMAND uses these names for the corresponding display in MP3 mode. Empty folders or folders which contain data other
than MP3 tracks are not displayed by
COMAND.
If MP3 files are saved in the root directory
itself, the root directory will also be treated
as a folder. COMAND will then show the
name of the root directory as the folder
name.
You must observe the following when assigning track names:
앫
Track names must have at least one
character.
앫
Track names must have the extension
“mp3”.
앫
There must be a period between the
track name and the extension.
Example of a correct track name:
Track1.mp3
i COMAND does not support ID3 tags.
Permissible MP3 formats
COMAND supports the MPEG1 Audio Layer 3 format.
i This format is generally known as “MP3”.
Permissible bit and sampling rates
앫
Fixed and variable bit rates up to
320 kbit/s
앫
Sampling rates of 24 kHz – 48 kHz
i Only use MP3 tracks with a bit rate of at
least 128 kbit/s and a sampling rate of at least
44.1 kHz. Smaller rates can cause a noticeable
deterioration in sound quality. This is especially
the case if you have activated a surround sound
function.
Notes on copyright
The music tracks that you create for MP3
mode and can play back in MP3 mode are
generally subject to copyright protection in
accordance with the applicable international and national regulations.
In many countries, reproductions are not
permitted without the prior consent of the
copyright holder, not even for private use.
Make sure that you know the applicable
copyright regulations and that you comply
with these.
105
Control systems
COMAND audio CD/audio DVD/MP3
If you own these rights yourself, e.g. for
your own compositions and recordings, or
the copyright holder has granted you permission, these restrictions do not apply.
Notes about audio DVD operation
COMAND can playback commercially
available, prerecorded audio DVDs that
bear the following label. You will usually
find the label on the DVD booklet, the inlay,
or the DVD itself.
i Audio DVDs differ from recordable DVD-R,
DVD+R, DVD-RW and DVD+RW discs.
i COMAND cannot playback video DVDs.
Data on audio DVDs are stored either in
uncompressed format or in lossless compressed format. The sound quality on audio DVDs is therefore better than on
recordable DVDs that contain MP3 data
because the MP3 format uses a lossy type
of compression.
106
You cannot delete data from or record
additional data to commercially available,
prerecorded audio DVDs.
Please note the following information
about CDs/DVDs and pay special attention to the notes on copied and/or
self-written CDs/DVDs.
Notes about CDs/DVDs
i Audio CDs with copy protection are not
compatible with the CD audio standard and
therefore may not be able to be played by
COMAND.
There may be playback problems when playing
copied discs.
There is a large variety of discs, disc-writing software and writers available. This variety means
that there is no guarantee that the system will be
able to play discs that you have written/copied
yourself.
There may be playback problems if you use CD-R
or CD-RW type discs you have copied yourself
with a storage capacity of more than 700 MB.
These CDs are not compatible with currently applicable standards.
! Do not affix stickers or labels to the discs.
These could peel away and damage COMAND.
COMAND is designed to hold discs which comply with the IEC 60908 standard. You can therefore only use discs with a maximum thickness of
1.3 mm.
If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that contain
data on both sides (DVD on one side and audio
data on the other), they cannot be ejected and
can damage COMAND.
Do not use discs with an 8-cm diameter, even if
they have an adapter.
Only use round discs with a 12-cm diameter.
Control systems
COMAND audio CD/audio DVD/MP3
Notes about handling CDs/DVDs
앫
Only hold discs by the edge.
앫
Handle discs carefully to prevent playback problems.
앫
Avoid getting scratches, fingerprints
and dust on discs.
앫
Clean discs from time to time with a
commercially-available cleaning cloth.
Do not wipe them with a circular motion, but only in straight lines from the
center outwards.
앫
Only use a pen designed for such a purpose to label discs.
앫
Place discs back in their boxes after
use.
앫
Protect discs from heat and direct sunlight.
Inserting CDs and DVDs
Warning!
Loading the CD/DVD changer
G
The CD/DVD changer can hold up to a total of 6 audio CDs or DVDs.
Only insert a CD or DVD when the vehicle is
stationary. There is a risk of accident by being distracted from road and traffic conditions if you load a CD/DVD while the vehicle
is in motion.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
i If the CD/DVD has a printed side, this must
face upwards when the CD/DVD is inserted. If
neither side is printed, the side to be played
should face downwards.
1 Disc slot
2 Load button (all magazine trays)
3 Magazine tray buttons 1 – 6
i Each magazine tray button 3 indicates the
status of the corresponding magazine tray by
means of an LED.
앫
LED off = magazine tray is empty
앫
LED constantly lit = magazine tray is loaded
앫
LED flashes = CD/DVD changer requesting
disc to be loaded
107
Control systems
COMAND audio CD/audio DVD/MP3
Loading an individual magazine tray
왘
왘
Press desired magazine tray button 3.
The DVD changer switches to the next
empty magazine tray.
If a disc is loaded, it will be ejected.
왘
Take disc out of slot 1.
왘
Wait until LED for magazine tray
button 3 which you pressed flashes
quickly.
왘
Insert disc into slot 1.
The DVD changer draws the disc in and
begins playback if:
앫
it has been loaded correctly
앫
it is a permissible type of disc
Insert disc into slot 1.
i If a disc is not inserted within approx.
15 seconds COMAND resumes playback of the
last disc.
왘
Repeat last two steps until all trays are
loaded.
The DVD changer will play the last disc
you loaded if:
앫
it has been loaded correctly
앫
it is a permissible type of disc
Inserting a PCMCIA card
Loading all six magazine trays
왘
Press load button 2.
The DVD changer checks the load status of all magazine trays and switches
to the first empty tray.
왘
Wait until LED for corresponding magazine tray button 3 flashes quickly.
108
i COMAND supports commercially available
PCMCIA cards or PCMCIA card adapters with
storage media that may not be designed for the
temperatures which occur in the vehicle. You
should therefore remove the PCMCIA card from
the vehicle when not in use since extreme temperatures could damage these devices.
1 Slot for PCMCIA card
왘
Insert PCMCIA card into slot 1.
The side with the contact must point
towards the slot.
If the PCMCIA card contains a storage
medium with MP3 tracks, COMAND
switches to MP3 mode.
Control systems
COMAND audio CD/audio DVD/MP3
Ejecting CDs and DVDs
Warning!
i If you eject one disc while playing another
G
Only eject a disc when the vehicle is stationary. You may otherwise be distracted from
the traffic conditions and could cause an accident.
Ejecting a PCMCIA card
disc, the DVD changer interrupts playback. Playback continues once the disc has been ejected.
왘
Ejecting one disc: Press desired magazine tray button 2.
왘
Take disc out of slot 1.
If you do not take the disc out of
slot 1, the DVD changer will draw it
back in automatically approx. 15 seconds.
Ejecting from the DVD changer
왘
왘
Ejecting all discs: Press eject
button 3.
1 Eject button
2 Slot for PCMCIA card
The DVD changer switches to the first
loaded tray and ejects the disc.
왘
Take disc out of slot 1.
Press eject button 1 twice.
The PCMCIA card is ejected.
왘
Take PCMCIA card out of slot 2.
The DVD changer switches to the next
loaded magazine tray and ejects the
disc.
1 Disc slot
2 Magazine tray buttons 1 – 6
3 Eject button (all discs)
왘
Repeat last step until magazine is empty.
109
Control systems
COMAND audio CD/audio DVD/MP3
Submenu overview
i The components and operating principles of
COMAND can be found on (컄 page 79).
CD or DVD-A or MP3
Pause/Stop/Play
Tracks/Track
(audio DVD mode only) List/Tracks A-Z
Normal Track Sequence Pause playback
Show track list
(audio CD mode and
audio DVD mode)
Random Tracks
Stop playback
Display alphabetical
track listing
(MP3 mode only)
Random folder
(MP3 mode only)
Restart playback
Repeat folder
(MP3 mode only)
110
Folders
Changer
(MP3 mode only)
Sound
Select folder
Treble
Select medium
Bass
Balance/Fader
3D Sound
Control systems
COMAND audio CD/audio DVD/MP3
Switching to audio CD, audio DVD or
MP3 mode
왘
Example display in audio CD mode
Example display in audio DVD mode
1 Current playback option
2 Track number
3 Disc number
4 Disc name (only if saved on the disc)
5 Track name (only if saved on the disc)
6 Track time
7 Graphic time and track display
8 Sound settings
9 Medium selection
a To call up track listing
b Disc type
c Playback options
1 Current playback option
2 Track number
3 Disc number
4 Disc name (only if saved on the disc)
5 Track name (only if saved on the disc)
6 Track time
7 Graphic time and track display
8 Sound settings
9 Medium selection
a To call up track listing
b Stop function
c Pause (“Play” appears if paused)
d Disc type
e Playback options
Load CD/DVD (컄 page 107) or
PCMCIA card (컄 page 108).
or
왘
Select “Audio” “Audio”, then “CD” or
“DVD-Audio” or “MP3”.
or
왘
Press the M shortcut button once or
twice.
i The M shortcut button takes you directly
to the previously set disc mode (audio CD,
audio DVD or MP3-CD/DVD). The number of
times you have to press the shortcut button depends on the previously set mode.
111
Control systems
COMAND audio CD/audio DVD/MP3
Example display in MP3 mode
Stop function
i This function is only available in audio DVD
The “Pause” screen changes to “Play”.
왘
mode.
1 Current playback option
2 Medium type
3 Disc number (not on PCMCIA card)
4 Track name
5 Current folder path
6 Current folder
7 Track time
8 Graphic time and track display
9 Sound settings
a Medium selection
b Folder listing
c Track listing
d Playback options
112
왘
Stopping playback: Select “Audio” “Audio” “DVD-Audio” “Stop”.
왘
Restarting playback: Select “Audio”
“Audio” “DVD-Audio” “Play”.
Continuing playback: Select “Audio”
“Audio” “DVD-Audio” “Play”.
The “Play” screen changes to “Pause”.
Selecting CD/DVD/MP3 media
왘
Select “Audio” “Audio”.
Playback starts at the beginning of the
DVD.
왘
Select “CD”, “DVD-Audio” or “MP3”.
Pause function
왘
In audio CD, audio DVD and MP3 mode
or
왘
Pausing playback:
Press F briefly.
왘
왘
Continuing playback: Press F
again briefly.
Only in audio DVD mode
왘
Pausing playback:
Select “Audio” “Audio” “DVD-Audio” “Pause”.
COMAND begins playback.
In audio CD, audio DVD and MP3
mode: Select “Changer”.
In audio CD and audio DVD mode
only: Press n when the main area is
selected.
The media list appears. The dot R indicates the current medium.
왘
Select a medium or folder.
COMAND changes the medium.
Control systems
COMAND audio CD/audio DVD/MP3
Selecting a track
왘
Skipping forwards or backwards to
a track (in CD or DVD mode only): rotate ymz.
i Skipping forwards through the tracks skips
to the next track. Skipping backwards through
the tracks skips to the beginning of the current
track if the track has been playing for more than
8 seconds. If the track has been playing for less
than 8 seconds, it skips to the start of the previous track.
If you have switched on the “Random Tracks”
playback option, the order of the tracks is random.
Selecting from the track list
왘
Select “Audio” “Audio”.
왘
Select “CD” or “DVD-Audio” or “MP3”.
왘
Select “Tracks”, “Tracks A-Z” or “Track
list”.
or
왘
왘
Press n when main area is selected.
The track list of the current folder appears.
The track list of the current folder appears. The dotR indicates the current
track.
Selecting by skipping to tracks
왘
Only in MP3 mode: Press n when the
main area is selected.
This is what the illustration in the right
column is showing as well.
Select a track by rotating ymz or sliding qmr.
i In MP3 mode, the list shows all the tracks in
alphabetical order.
Fast forward/rewind
왘
Select main area.
왘
Slide and hold omp until desired place
is reached.
Selecting a folder
i This function is only available in audio MP3
mode.
왘
Select “Audio” “Audio” “MP3” “Folder”.
1 Back folder symbol
2 Current track symbol
3 Track symbol
왘
Selecting one folder higher: Select
the Q symbol.
The display changes to the next folder
up in the folder structure on the disc.
or
113
Control systems
COMAND audio CD/audio DVD/MP3
i The tracks on an audio DVD can be stored in
앫
“Random Folder” (in MP3 mode only)
Tracks in the active folder and any subfolders playback in random order.
앫
“Repeat Folder” (in MP3 mode only)
Tracks in the active folder will be repeated until you switch the function
off.
왘
Selecting an option: Select “Audio”
“Audio”.
왘
Select “CD”, “DVD-Audio” or “MP3”.
various audio formats. The number of audio formats depends on the audio DVD.
왘
Select “Audio” “Audio” “DVD-Audio” “Group”.
i The “Group” menu item cannot be selected
if only one audio format is saved on the DVD.
1 Back folder symbol
2 Current folder symbol
3 Folder symbol containing tracks
왘
왘
Selecting a folder: Select desired folder.
You will see the tracks in the folder.
왘
The list of available audio formats appears.
A dot R indicates the format currently selected.
Changing setting: Slide qmr or
rotate ymz.
Exiting menu: Slide omp.
Playback options
Select a track.
The track is played and the corresponding folder is now the active folder.
The following options are available:
앫
“Normal Track Sequence”
Tracks playback in the order on the
disc (e.g. track 1, 2, 3, etc.).
앫
“Random Tracks”
Tracks playback in a random order
(e.g. track 3, 8, 5, etc.).
Setting the audio format
This function lets you choose the audio format that you would like COMAND to play
and is only available in DVD-AUDIO mode.
114
The option list appears. A dot R indicates which option is switched on.
왘
Select an option and press n.
The option is switched on. For all options except “Normal Track Sequence”,
you will see a corresponding indicator
in the main area.
i The “Normal Track Sequence” option is automatically activated when you select a different
medium. If an option is activated, it remains activated after COMAND is switched on/off.
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
왔 COMAND telephone*
Safety precautions
Warning!
Warning!
G
G
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a cellular telephone while driving.
Whether or not prohibited by law, for safety
reasons, the driver should not use the cellular telephone while the vehicle is in motion.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location before
placing or answering a call.
If you nonetheless choose to use the cellular
phone while driving, please use the handsfree feature and be sure to pay attention to
the traffic situation at all times. Use the cellular phone only when road, weather and
traffic conditions permit.
General notes
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
앫
there is insufficient network coverage
앫
you move from one transmitter/receiver area (cell) into another and no channels are free or the cell is full
Calls disconnected while the vehicle is
in motion
A call may be disconnected if:
Operating options
i The components and operating principles of
COMAND can be found on (컄 page 79) and
(컄 page 87).
If the mobile phone is inserted in the cradle, you can use the mobile phone functions with the following devices:
앫
COMAND/telephone keypad
앫
Multifunction steering wheel
앫
Voice Control*
앫
Bluetooth headset
i In order for the functions described in this
section to work correctly, the Bluetooth headset
must be linked to COMAND (컄 page 217).
Please make sure any Bluetooth headset linked
with the mobile phone is switched off or that the
headset is linked with COMAND before you use
the functions described in this section.
The descriptions in this section assume
that the mobile phone is inserted in the
cradle. Exceptions to this are clearly stated.
115
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
Unless otherwise indicated, the descriptions and illustrations in this section refer
to COMAND and the telephone keypad.
Operation using the mobile phone and
Bluetooth headset is described in the respective separate Operating Instructions.
Functional restrictions
You will not be able to use the telephone,
or you may have to wait a while, in the following situations:
앫
Caller ID
COMAND can display the telephone number and the name of the caller, e.g. for an
incoming call and also in other menus or
displays.
For the telephone number to be displayed,
the caller must transmit their telephone
number.
This is also the case for name displays. For
this, the telephone number and the name
of the caller must also be saved in the mobile phone book.
116
If the telephone has not yet logged into
the network.
The telephone automatically tries to
log into a network. If no network is
available, you will also not be able to
make a “911” emergency call.
If you attempt to make an outgoing call,
the “No Service” message will appear
for a short while.
앫
If the mobile phone is not inserted in
the cradle.
앫
SIM card is not inserted in GSM type
phone
Switching telephone on or off
왘
Switching on: insert mobile phone
into cradle when COMAND is switched
on.
or
왘
Switch on the mobile phone
(see mobile phone operating instructions).
왘
Switching off: Select “Telephone” “Telephone” “Telephone OFF”.
or
왘
Switch off mobile phone (see mobile
phone operating instructions).
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
Activating telephone mode
왘
Select “Telephone” “Telephone” “Telephone”.
or
왘
Press s on telephone keypad.
Telephone keypad
With the telephone keypad you can:
앫
Enter and clear numbers and special
characters
앫
Reject, accept, connect and end calls
왘
Entering characters: Select “Telephone” “Telephone” “Telephone”.
왘
Fold up cover 2.
왘
Enter characters using A - #.
i You can enter the * character by
1 Telephone keypad
2 Folding cover
“911” emergency call
Warning!
G
The “911” emergency call system is a public
service. Using it without due cause is a criminal offense.
i This function places a call to the local 911
provider. It does not initiate a Tele Aid call.
pressing > once. Pressing this button again
within 1.5 seconds enters the + character.
The following conditions must be fulfilled
in order to make a “911” emergency call:
왘
Deleting individual characters:
Press *.
앫
The phone is switched on
앫
A mobile network is available
왘
Deleting an entire word or number:
Press and hold * until the word or
number is deleted.
앫
There is a valid SIM card in the phone
(not necessary in all mobile networks)
i If no SIM card is inserted in the mobile
phone, you can only initiate a “911” emergency
call by using COMAND and the mobile phone.
If you cannot make an emergency call, you
must initiate rescue measures yourself.
The “911” emergency call is a public service. Any misuse is punishable by law.
117
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
Placing a “911” emergency call before
entering PIN/PIN2, PUK/PUK2 or unlock code
Placing a “911” emergency call after
entering PIN/PIN2, PUK/PUK2 or unlock code
Entering the number using the COMAND
controller
Entering the number using the COMAND
controller
왘
Select “Telephone” “Telephone” “Telephone” “Dial 911”.
Entering the number using the telephone keypad
왘
Enter digits 9-1-1 (컄 page 117).
왘
Press s.
118
왘
Confirming the emergency call
After the digits have been entered, you will
see the question “Do you want to dial the
911 emergency number?”.
왘
Select “Telephone” “Telephone” “Telephone”.
왘
Select all the digits in sequence.
왘
Select “S”.
Entering the number using the telephone keypad
왘
Enter digits 9-1-1 (컄 page 117).
왘
Press s.
Use COMAND controller to select
“Yes”.
The telephone makes the connection.
왘
Wait until the emergency call center
answers and describe the emergency
situation.
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
Entering the PIN
Entering the PIN2
Entering the unlock code
i The PIN entry applies only to GSM mobile
phones.
i The PIN2 entry applies only to GSM mobile
Many mobile phones can be protected
from unauthorized use with an unlock code
(see mobile phone operating instructions).
If you wish to use the phone functions
when the unlock code is active, a screen
appears requesting that you enter the unlock code. You cannot use the phone functions (except “911” emergency call) until
you have entered the unlock code.
Entering using the COMAND controller
phones.
The phone may request the PIN2 in order
to use certain functions. A corresponding
message appears in the display.
왘
Select “Telephone” “Telephone” “Telephone”.
왘
Entering: Select all the digits in sequence.
Entering the PUK/PUK2
왘
Deleting a digit: Select ) and briefly
press n.
i The PUK/PUK2 entry applies only to GSM
왘
Deleting an entire number: Select )
and press and hold n until the number
is deleted.
왘
Confirming an entry: Press n.
Entering using the telephone keypad
왘
Entering: Enter digits (컄 page 117).
왘
Confirming an entry: Press n or
press s.
왘
Enter PIN2 digits into mobile phone.
mobile phones.
왘
Proceed in the same way as entering
the PIN (컄 page 119).
If you enter the PIN or PIN2 incorrectly
three times, the SIM card will be locked.
A corresponding message appears in the
display. It is necessary to enter the
PUK/PUK2 to unlock it. The PUK and/or
PUK2 are provided by your telephone service provider.
왘
Enter PUK/PUK2 digits into mobile
phone.
119
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
Telephone submenu overview
i The components and operating principles of
COMAND can be found on (컄 page 79).
Name
Call lists
(only when the mobile (not during a call)
phone is inserted in the
cradle)
DTMF
(only during a call)
Mic OFF/ON
(only during a call)
Text message
(not during a call)
Display COMAND phone Display call list selection:
book
앫 Calls received
Send numerical sequence
Switch hands-free microphone on/off
Call up SMS inbox
앫
120
Calls dialed
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
Main telephone menu
왘
Calling up main menu: Select “Telephone” “Telephone” “Telephone”.
or
왘
Press s on the telephone keypad
(컄 page 117).
i If you press s when the main telephone
menu has already been called up, the “Calls Dialed” list will appear (컄 page 122).
1 Numbers/characters to enter telephone number
2 Symbol
mailbox
for new voice message in
3 Symbol
for unread SMS messages in SMS inbox (컄 page 137)
4 Signal strength and network status
display
앫
Network status “READY” = mobile
phone is logged in with its own
provider’s network
앫
Network status “READY ROAM” =
mobile phone is logged in with another provider’s network
앫
Network status “No Service” = No
network available
Mailbox
The
symbol in the example illustration
above indicates that your mailbox contains
new voice messages. You will have to call
the mailbox in order to retrieve the messages.
You can call your mailbox by:
앫
Speed dialing (컄 page 126)
앫
Entering a telephone number using the
telephone keypad (컄 page 125)
앫
Entering the telephone number using
the COMAND controller (컄 page 125)
i Once connection with your mailbox has
been established, the mailbox system will guide
you through the next steps.
5 To show COMAND phone book
(“Name”) (컄 page 129)
6 To call up text message (SMS)
(컄 page 137)
7 To display call list selection
(컄 page 122)
121
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
You will see the telephone number of caller 6 if
Call lists
COMAND can display the following calls in
separate lists:
앫
Calls received
앫
Calls dialed
calls as well as missed calls.
Illustration: list of incoming calls
The corresponding list appears.
1 To close list
2 To switch list display (“123” or “ABC”)
3 To call up options
4 Name or telephone number of a caller
5 Unknown caller
6 Telephone number of a caller
i The “Calls Received” and “Calls Dialed”
i In the list of calls received, you will see the
왘
Select “Call List” from main telephone
menu.
왘
Select “Calls Received” or “Calls Dialed”.
menu items do not function if the respective list
has no entries.
The “Call List” menu item does not function if
neither list has any entries.
122
the caller transmitted the telephone number
앫
no caller data is saved in either the COMAND
address book or the phone book on the mobile phone
An unknown caller 5 has not transmitted his or
her telephone number.
i The list of incoming calls contains received
Calling up a list
앫
name of caller 4 if
앫
the caller transmitted the telephone number
앫
the name and telephone number are saved
in the COMAND address book or in the
phone book on the mobile phone
앫
the telephone number is saved in the same
way in which the caller transmits it
i In the list of dialed calls, you will see the
name of the person called if you have saved his
or her telephone number and name in the
COMAND address book or in the phone book on
the mobile phone. If no data has been saved, you
will see the telephone number.
왘
Switching to list display: Select
“123” or “ABC”.
The display changes to telephone number or name display.
왘
Closing list: Slide omp and
select “Back”.
왘
Selecting a list entry: Slide qmr or
rotate ymz and select entry.
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
Displaying details of a list entry
COMAND can also show a shortened list
entry in its entirety.
왘
Select list entry (컄 page 122).
왘
Slide omp and select “Options” “Details”.
The detailed view appears.
왘
Closing detailed view: Slide qmr or
omp or press n.
Saving a list entry in the address book
i List entries that show a telephone number
are neither saved in the COMAND address book,
nor in the phone book on the mobile phone. You
can save such entries in the COMAND address
book. You can also save list entries in the
COMAND address book which have already been
saved in the phone book on the mobile phone.
Saving as a new entry in the COMAND
address book
왘
Slide omp or rotate ymz and select
list entry (컄 page 122).
왘
Select “Options” “Save” “New Entry”.
i “Save” does not function if the selected list
entry is already saved in the COMAND address
book.
왘
Select a number category, e.g. “Home”.
왘
Select a telephone category, e.g. “Land
Line”.
왘
Select “Save”.
The input menu appears with the data
fields. The data field for the telephone
number is filled in automatically. The
data field for the last name is also filled
in automatically if the entry to be saved
contains a name.
왘
If you would like to save the entry
now: Select ?.
1 Data field
2 Input mark (cursor)
3 Input characters
왘
If you want to change the available
characters: Proceed as described in
the “Changing data field” paragraph in
the “Assigning a New Entry in the Address Book” section (컄 page 133).
Adding to an existing entry in the
COMAND address book
왘
Slide omp or rotate ymz and select
list entry (컄 page 122).
왘
Select “Options” “Save” “Add”.
123
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
If four numbers are saved for the entry
you are searching for, a prompt will appear asking whether you want to overwrite one of the existing numbers.
i “Save” does not function if the selected list
entry is already saved in the COMAND address
book.
왘
왘
왘
Select a number category to add,
e.g. “Home”.
Select a telephone category to add,
e.g. “Land Line”.
왘
Search for desired entry.
왘
COMAND overwrites the selected number with the new data.
Use the mobile phone (see mobile
phone operating instructions).
or
Rejecting or accepting the call
왘
왘
Rejecting: Select “Reject”.
or
Press t on the telephone keypad or
on the multifunction steering wheel.
i If you have a CDMA/TDMA mobile phone
and reject a call, only the ring tone will stop. The
call itself can only be ended by the caller.
124
or
Select the number to be overwritten.
for an COMAND address book entry in the
“Searching for an address book entry” section
(컄 page 204).
왘
Press s on the telephone keypad or
on the multifunction steering wheel.
Press 0 on the multifunction steering wheel.
Incoming call
COMAND saves the data if there are
fewer than four numbers assigned to
the entry you are searching for in the
selected number category.
왘
왘
i There is a detailed description of searching
Press n when you have finished
searching.
Accepting: Select “Accept”.
or
Select “Yes” or “No”.
If you select “Yes”, a selection list will
appear containing the four existing
numbers.
Select “Save”.
The search menu for COMAND address
book entries appears.
왘
왘
왘
왘
Use the Bluetooth headset
(see headset operating instructions).
i The use of a Bluetooth headset requires
Bluetooth to be activated and the Bluetooth
headset to be authorized (컄 page 217).
If you have accepted the call using
COMAND, the telephone keypad, the multifunction steering wheel or the mobile
phone, the call will be conducted via the
hands-free system. The volume of the call
can be adjusted (컄 page 89).
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
If you have accepted the call using the
Bluetooth headset, the call will be conducted via the headset.
Further operating functions can be found
in the “Functions during a single-call connection” section (컄 page 127).
You can also accept a call if the
COMAND display is showing a screen other than the telephone mode screen. After
accepting the call, you will see the caller’s
data in a window.
왘
Closing window: Slide qmr or omp
or press n.
Making an outgoing call
i If you place an outgoing call and receive a
busy signal, the telephone automatically starts
to redial as long as the provider and the mobile
phone support this function (see mobile phone
operating instructions).
While the call is connecting, you can also send
character strings (컄 page 127).
Entering the telephone number using
the COMAND controller
왘
왘
왘
왘
왘
Switching screen to telephone
mode: Call up main telephone menu
(컄 page 121).
Entering digits: Select desired digits
by rotating ymz or sliding omp and
press n.
Deleting individual digits: Select )
and briefly press n.
Deleting an entire telephone number: Select ) and press and hold n
until the telephone number is deleted.
i A detailed description of how to enter digits
using the telephone keypad can be found on
(컄 page 82).
왘
Redial
왘
Switching screen to telephone
mode: Call up main telephone menu
(컄 page 121).
왘
Use COMAND controller to select
“S”.
or
왘
Connecting a call: Select “S”.
왘
Press s on the telephone keypad
(컄 page 82).
The list of dialed numbers appears. The
most recently dialed number is at the
top.
Entering a telephone number using the
telephone keypad
왘
Connecting a call: Press s.
Switching screen to telephone
mode: Call up main telephone menu
(컄 page 121).
왘
Select desired entry.
왘
Connecting a call: Press n.
Use telephone keypad to enter digits.
i If the list of dialed calls contains no entries,
the “S” menu item cannot be selected and the
s button on the telephone keypad does not
function.
125
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
Placing a call to a call list entry or
COMAND phone book entry
Calling up speed-dial presets using the
COMAND controller
왘
왘
Call up a call list and select an entry
(컄 page 122).
or
왘
Call up COMAND phone book and select an entry (컄 page 129).
왘
Connecting a call: Press n.
왘
Speed dialing
You can save telephone numbers in the
speed-dial preset locations on the mobile
phone and call up the speed-dial presets
(see mobile phone operating instructions).
왘
i By default, the mailbox number is preset in
or
the speed dial memory unless you have modified
it. For more information on the mailbox
(컄 page 121).
왘
You can also call up speed-dial numbers
using COMAND.
i Operation during call connection depends
on the speed-dial preset position called up.
126
Switching screen to telephone
mode: Call up main telephone menu
(컄 page 121).
왘
Calling up speed-dial numbers using the
telephone keypad
왘
Switching screen to telephone
mode: Call up main telephone menu
(컄 page 121).
왘
Single-digit numbers: Press and hold
A - 9 buttons.
Entering number of a speed-dial preset: Select all the digits in sequence.
왘
Deleting individual digits:
Select ) and briefly press n.
왘
Deleting entire number:
Select ) and press n until the
number is deleted.
Connecting a call (speed-dial presets 1 -99): Select “S”.
Connecting a call (speed-dial presets 100 - 999): Select “#” after the
digits “S”.
In both cases, the telephone connects
the call to the saved telephone number. If the speed-dial memory contains
no telephone numbers, you will see a
corresponding message.
Deleting message: Press n.
or
왘
Single- and two-digit numbers: Enter
number using the A - 9 buttons.
왘
Press s.
or
왘
Three-digit numbers: Enter number
using the A - 9 buttons.
왘
Press #, and then s.
In all three cases, COMAND connects
the call to the saved telephone number. If the speed-dial memory contains
no telephone numbers, you will see a
corresponding message.
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
왘
Deleting message: Press n.
Functions during a single-call connection
i The name of the person you are speaking
with can only be seen in display 7 if his or her
telephone number and name have been saved in
the COMAND address book or phone book on
the mobile phone. The telephone number must
also be saved in the same way in which the person you are talking to transmits it.
Switching the hands-free microphone
on or off
왘
Switching screen to telephone
mode: Call up main telephone menu
(컄 page 121).
왘
Switching off microphone:
Select “Mic OFF” and press n.
Illustration: telephone mode during a call
1 Symbol
for active telephone connection (also visible in other operating
modes)
2 Signal strength display
3 To switch hands-free microphone on or
off
4 Length of call display
5 To send character strings
6 To end a call
7 Person you are calling
Press F shortcut button.
Press F shortcut button.
The > symbol disappears.
Sending a character string via DTMF
i This function is not possible with every mobile phone. If the mobile phone supports the
function, you can use it during the call connection and also during a call.
Answering machines or other devices can
be controlled by character strings (e.g. for
remote query functions).
Sending character strings via the DTMF
menu
왘
or
왘
왘
During a call, select “DTMF”.
The DTMF dialing display appears.
If the microphone is switched off,
the > symbol appears in the main area.
왘
Switching on microphone:
Select “Mic ON”.
or
127
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
i Telephone numbers containing the + char-
Transferring a call
acter may impair the function.
왘
Switching back to the call display:
Select “Y”.
Sending character strings via the telephone keypad
왘
1 Back to the call display
2 Character entry
3 To call up the phone book
왘
Sending individual characters:
Rotate ymz or slide omp and select
desired character.
Each character you select can be seen
in the main area and is sent immediately.
왘
Sending a phone book entry as a
character string: Select “Name”.
왘
Select desired phone book entry.
The entry is immediately sent as a character string.
128
Press corresponding button on telephone keypad.
Each character you select is immediately sent.
i The + character may impair the function.
The call transfer is controlled by pressing
the PTT button on the Bluetooth headset
(see headset operating instructions). Normally, it is sufficient to press the PTT button once, but under certain circumstances
you may have to press it a second time.
Ending a call: Select “4 END” in the
call display.
Press t on the telephone keypad or
on the multifunction steering wheel.
Exception: “Switching the hands-free microphone on or off” function (컄 page 127).
or
왘
i The use of a Bluetooth headset requires
Bluetooth to be activated and the Bluetooth
headset to be authorized (컄 page 217).
Once the call has been transferred to the
Bluetooth headset, all the functions will be
available to you which are described in the
“Functions during a single-call connection”
section (컄 page 127).
Ending an active call
왘
From the hands-free system to the
Bluetooth headset
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
From the Bluetooth headset to the
hands-free system
From the mobile phone to the
hands-free system
On most Bluetooth headsets, you press the
PTT button on the headset twice quickly to
transfer the call (see headset operating instructions).
왘
From the hands-free system to the mobile phone
왘
왘
If the mobile phone has a folding upper section: flip upper section open.
Take mobile phone out of cradle.
The “No telephone inserted” message
appears on the COMAND display. Subsequent operation is only possible using the mobile phone.
Insert mobile phone into cradle.
Once the call has been transferred to
the hands-free feature, all the functions
will be available to you which are described in the “Functions during a single-call connection” section
(컄 page 127).
If any of the telephone numbers of a phone
book entry in the mobile phone are the
same as an address book entry, COMAND
will only display the address book entry.
If the entries are not the same, the COMAND phone book will show the phone
book entry in the mobile phone.
Calling up the COMAND phone book
왘
COMAND phone book
The COMAND phone book contains both
the COMAND address book entries and
mobile phone entries that have at least
one telephone number.
Select “Telephone” “Telephone” “Telephone” “Name”.
The COMAND phone book appears.
The COMAND address book entries are
permanently available even when a mobile
phone is not inserted in the cradle.
When the mobile phone is inserted in the
cradle, COMAND will read the phone book
entries in the mobile phone and compares
them with the COMAND address book entries.
129
컄컄
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
Entries with category symbol 1 come
from the mobile phone. The following category symbols are possible:
컄컄
Illustration: a phone book with name display and smart speller activated
1 Category symbol
2 Upper entry from address book (without category symbol)
3 Symbol + for several telephone numbers (subentries) under the main entry
4 Symbol
for summarized entries
from the mobile phone with the same
name but different telephone numbers
5 Smart speller
6 Voice
entry symbol
7 To close the phone book
130
앫
= symbol for “Mobile” category
앫
= symbol for “Home” category
앫
= symbol for “Work” category
앫
= symbol for “Fax” category
앫
= symbol for “Pager” category
앫
= symbol for “Main” category or for
unknown category or for phone entries
that are saved on the SIM card of a
GSM mobile phone
Entries without a category symbol or with
the
symbol come from the COMAND
address book.
Entries with the
symbol contain a voice
entry. Voice entries can be added to the
address book (컄 page 210). This function
is available in vehicles with Voice Control*.
Switching between the smart speller
and the list
왘
Switching from the smart speller to
the list: Slide mq repeatedly or press
n until the smart speller is hidden.
or
왘
Rotate ymz or slide omp and
select ?.
The smart speller is hidden.
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
i The following options are available under
Closing the COMAND phone book
“Options” menu item 4:
왘
In the smart speller, select “Back”.
앫
Displaying details about an entry
(컄 page 132)
앫
Creating a new entry in the address book
(컄 page 133)
앫
Deleting an entry (컄 page 134)
앫
Saving a phone book entry from mobile
phone in the address book (컄 page 134)
Selecting an entry in the COMAND
phone book
Illustration: list of phone book entries with
name display and hidden smart speller
앫
Adding a telephone number to an address
book entry (컄 page 136)
Selecting entries using the smart speller
1 Back to smart speller
2 To switch phone book display (“123” or
“ABC”)
3 Symbol + for several telephone numbers (subentries) under the main entry,
subentry list is closed
4 To call up options
5 Symbol / for open subentry list
6 List of phone book entries
7 Subentry list with category symbols
and telephone numbers
왘
Switching from the list to the smart
speller: Select “Back” from the list.
or
왘
Press back button L in the center
console (컄 page 80).
왘
Changing phone book display in the
list: Select “123” or “ABC”.
or
왘
Press back button L in the center
console (컄 page 80).
왘
Switch from the list to the smart speller
if necessary.
왘
Changing smart speller language:
Select !.
왘
Select desired language.
컄컄
The screen changes to telephone number or name display.
131
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
컄컄 왘
Changing smart speller character
set: Select #.
Depending on the previous setting, you
will change to letters with special characters or to numbers with special characters.
왘
왘
Entering characters: Select the characters of the entry you are searching
for one by one.
왘
왘
If necessary, switch from the smart
speller to the list.
왘
Rotate ymz or slide qmr until the desired entry is highlighted.
Deleting an entire entry: Select )
and press and hold n until the entry is
deleted.
Canceling search: Switch from the
smart speller to the list.
The entry at the top of the list is automatically highlighted.
Closing detailed view: Slide qmr or
omp or press n or back button L
in the center console (컄 page 80).
Starting to dial the number of an entry
Select entry (컄 page 131).
Selecting subentries
왘
Press n.
왘
or
Select an entry with the + symbol and
press n.
The + symbol changes to / and the
subentries are displayed.
왘
Rotate ymz or slide qmr until the desired subentry is highlighted.
왘
Press s on the telephone keypad.
A list appears if the entry contains subentries.
왘
Select desired subentry.
왘
Press n again.
Displaying details of an entry
or
COMAND can also show a shortened entry
in its entirety. For entries featuring subentries, the detailed view is only available for
the subentries and not for the main entry.
왘
왘
Select entry (컄 page 131).
왘
Select “Options” “Details”.
The detailed view appears.
132
왘
왘
Deleting individual characters: Select ) and briefly press n.
Each time you enter or delete a character, the closest match will be displayed
at the top of the list.
왘
Selecting using the list
Press s on the telephone keypad.
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
Assigning a New Entry in the Address
Book
i This function is used to create a new entry in
the address book and to enter the data (first
name, last name and telephone number) manually.
왘
Select “Options” “New Entry” in the
COMAND phone book list.
왘
Selecting a number category:
Select a category, e.g. “Home”.
왘
Selecting a telephone category:
Select a category, e.g. “Land Line”.
왘
Confirming selection: Select “Save”.
The input menu appears with the data
fields.
왘
Toggling upper and lower case for
the input characters: Select & or
(.
왘
Changing language for the input
characters: Select !.
왘
Select desired language.
왘
Changing character set for the input
characters: Select #.
Depending on the previous setting, you
will change to letters with special characters or to numbers with special characters.
1 Data field
2 Input mark (cursor)
3 Input characters
왘
Changing data field: Slide qmr repeatedly until desired data field is highlighted.
or
왘
Select [ or ] repeatedly until desired data field is highlighted.
왘
Entering data into a field: Select all
characters one by one from the input
characters line 3.
왘
Displaying special characters as input characters: Select ! “Symbols”.
왘
Returning input characters to normal characters: Select ! the
desired language.
왘
Moving cursor in the data field:
Select Y or Z.
133
컄컄
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
컄컄 왘
왘
Deleting individual characters:
Select ) and briefly press n.
The deletion rules may vary, depending on
the entry selected:
Saving a phone book entry from the
mobile phone in the address book
The character to the left of the cursor is
deleted.
앫
i This function is used to save an existing
phone book entry from the mobile phone in the
address book. The following options are available:
Deleting an entire entry: Select )
and press and hold n until the entry is
deleted.
왘
Saving an entry: Select ?.
왘
Canceling an entry: Select “Back”.
앫
If one of the data fields contains data, a
prompt will appear asking whether you
want to save the entry.
왘
왘
Upper entry selected from the address
book:
the entry is deleted from the COMAND
phone book and also from the address
book, if the address book entry only
contains telephone numbers.
Subentry of an address book entry selected:
the subentry is deleted from the
COMAND phone book and from the address book.
Select “Yes” or “No”.
왘
Deleting: Select entry (컄 page 131).
The entry will either be saved or
not, depending on your selection.
왘
Select “Options” “Delete”.
Deleting an entry
i It is not possible to delete a phone book entry from the mobile phone using the COMAND
phone book.
A prompt appears asking whether the
entry should be deleted.
왘
Select “Yes” or “No”.
Once “Yes” has been selected, the entry will be deleted according to the
rules mentioned above.
앫
Saving as a new address book entry
앫
Adding a telephone number to an existing
address book entry
Saving as a new address book entry
왘
i All entries with the following category symbols are phone book entries in the mobile phone.
앫
= symbol for “Mobile” category
앫
= symbol for “Home” category
앫
= symbol for “Work” category
앫
= symbol for “Fax” category
앫
= symbol for “Pager” category
앫
= symbol for “Main” category
왘
134
Select phone book entry from mobile
phone (컄 page 131).
Select “Options” “Save” “New Entry”.
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
왘
Selecting a number category:
Select a category, e.g. “Home”.
왘
Selecting a telephone category:
Select a category, e.g. “Land Line”.
왘
Confirming selection: Select “Save”.
The input menu appears with the data
fields. The data field for the telephone
number is filled in automatically. The
data field for the last name is also filled
when the entry to be saved contains a
name.
1 Data field
2 Input mark (cursor)
3 Input characters
왘
Proceed as described in the “Changing
data field” paragraph in the “Assigning
a New Entry in the Address Book” section (컄 page 133).
Adding a telephone number to an existing address book entry
왘
Select phone book entry from mobile
phone (컄 page 131).
i All entries with the following category symbols are phone book entries in the mobile phone.
앫
= symbol for “Mobile” category
앫
= symbol for “Home” category
앫
= symbol for “Work” category
앫
= symbol for “Fax” category
앫
= symbol for “Pager” category
앫
= symbol for “Main” category
왘
Select “Options” “Save” “Add”.
왘
Selecting a number category:
Select a category, e.g. “Home”.
왘
Selecting a telephone category:
Select a category, e.g. “Land Line”.
왘
Confirming selection: Select “Save”.
The search menu for address book entries appears.
왘
Search for desired entry using smart
speller function.
i There is a detailed description of how to
search for an address book entry in the “Searching for an address book entry” section
(컄 page 204).
왘
After selecting an entry, press n.
If there are fewer than four numbers
assigned to the selected entry in the
selected number category, COMAND
will save the data.
If four numbers are saved for the selected entry, a prompt will appear asking whether you want to overwrite one
of the existing numbers.
왘
Select “Yes” or “No”.
If you select “Yes”, a selection list will
appear containing the four existing
numbers.
컄컄
135
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
컄컄 왘
Select number to be overwritten.
왘
왘
COMAND overwrites the selected number with the new data.
Selecting a number category:
Select a category, e.g. “Home”.
Entering digits: Select all digits one
by one from the input characters.
왘
Selecting a telephone category:
Select a category, e.g. “Land Line”.
왘
Moving cursor in the data field:
Select Y or Z.
왘
Confirming selection: Select “Save”.
왘
Deleting individual digits: Select )
and briefly press n.
Adding a telephone number to an address book entry
i This function is used to add a telephone
number to an existing address book entry. The
telephone number can be entered manually.
왘
Select address book entry
(컄 page 131).
If four numbers are saved for the entry
in the selected number category, a
prompt will appear asking whether one
of the existing numbers should be overwritten.
왘
i All entries with the
symbol or without a
symbol are address book entries.
왘
i “Add Number” does not function if you have
selected the main entry for an address book entry with subentries.
왘
왘
Deleting an entire number:
Select ) and press and hold n until
the number is deleted.
왘
Saving entry: Select ?.
왘
Canceling an entry: Select “Back”.
Select “Yes” or “No”.
If you select “Yes”, a selection list
will appear containing the four existing numbers.
Select “Options” “Add Number”.
The digit to the left of the cursor is deleted.
Select number to be overwritten.
The input menu appears with the data
field for entering the new telephone
number.
If you have already entered data, a
prompt will appear asking whether the
entry should be saved.
왘
Select “Yes” or “No”.
The entry will either be saved or
not, depending on your selection.
136
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
SMS messages (Short Message
Service)
Inbox
Calling up the SMS inbox
SMS functions
왘
The main telephone menu appears.
The following functions are available:
앫
Receive
앫
Read
Select “Telephone” “Telephone”.
i “Text Message” does not function if the
SMS inbox contains no SMS messages. The SMS
inbox only shows the messages which are received while the mobile phone is inserted in the
cradle.
The following conditions must be fulfilled
in order to use the functions:
앫
The mobile phone is inserted in the cradle and switched on
앫
The PIN has been entered (only GSM
mobile phones)
앫
The mobile phone is logged into a mobile network
앫
Mobile phone phone book must be
downloaded and available in COMAND
1 Symbol
for unread messages in the
SMS inbox
i The
symbol only appears for those messages which are received while the mobile phone
is inserted in the cradle.
왘
1 Date and time the highlighted SMS
message was received
2 To call up options
3 Highlighted SMS message
4 Symbol
for unread SMS message
5 Back to main telephone menu
Select “Text Message”.
The SMS inbox appears.
137
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
i The SMS messages are sorted by the date
and time they were received. The most recent
message is at the top of the list.
If the name and telephone number of the sender
is saved in the address book or phone book of
the mobile phone, you will see the name of the
sender in the SMS inbox. Otherwise, you will see
the telephone number of the sender.
Selecting an SMS message
왘
Calling an SMS sender
왘
Select SMS message “Options” “Call”.
The telephone connects the call.
Saving SMS sender as new COMAND
address book entry
왘
Rotate ymz or slide qmr and then
press n.
Selecting an SMS message: in the
SMS inbox, select a message “Options” “Save Number” “New Entry”.
Showing abbreviated sender display in
full
왘
Selecting a number category:
Select a category, e.g. “Home”.
Select SMS message “Options” “Details”.
왘
Selecting a telephone category:
Select a category, e.g. “Land Line”.
The detailed view appears.
왘
Saving: Select “Save”.
왘
왘
Closing detailed view: Slide qmr or
press n.
138
The input menu appears with the data
fields. The data field for the telephone
number is filled in automatically.
1 Data field
2 Input mark (cursor)
3 Input characters
왘
Proceed as described in the “Changing
data field” paragraph in the “Assigning
a New Entry in the Address Book” section (컄 page 133).
Adding an SMS sender’s telephone number to an existing address book entry
왘
Selecting an SMS message: in the
SMS inbox, select a message “Options” “Save Number” “Add”.
Control systems
COMAND telephone*
왘
Proceed as described in the “Selecting
a number category” paragraph in the
“Adding a telephone number to an existing address book entry” section
(컄 page 135).
Exiting the SMS inbox
왘
Select “Back”.
Using data in a text message
i If the SMS message contains telephone
numbers or navigable address data, you can select this data and place a telephone call or transfer the address data to the navigation system.
왘
Selecting data from the text:
Rotate ymz or slide qmr.
왘
Using data: Press n “Use”.
The main telephone menu appears.
If you have selected a telephone number, the telephone connects the call.
If you have selected a navigable address, it is transferred to the navigation
system.
Reading an SMS message
왘
In the SMS inbox, select an SMS message and press n.
The SMS message appears.
Calling an SMS sender
왘
Press n “Call”.
Saving SMS sender as new address book
entry
i This function is not possible with all SMS
senders.
왘
Press n “Save Number” “New
Entry”.
왘
Proceed as described in the “Selecting
a number category” paragraph in the
“Saving SMS sender as new address
book entry” section (컄 page 138).
Adding an SMS sender’s telephone number to an existing address book entry
왘
Press n “Save Number” “Add”.
왘
Proceed as described in the “Selecting
a number category” paragraph in the
“Adding a telephone number to an existing address book entry” section
(컄 page 135).
The telephone connects the call.
i This function is not possible with all SMS
senders.
Closing an SMS message and returning
to SMS inbox
왘
Press n “Back”.
139
Control systems
COMAND navigation (introduction)
Safety precautions
Warning!
G
For safety reasons, only enter a destination
when the vehicle is stationary. When the vehicle is in motion, a passenger should enter
the destination. Study manual and select
route before driving.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
COMAND calculates the route to the destination without taking account of the following, for example:
앫
Traffic lights
앫
Stop and right-of-way signs
앫
Parking or stopping prohibited areas
앫
Lane merging
앫
Other road and traffic rules and regulations
앫
Narrow bridges
140
COMAND may give incorrect navigation
commands if the data in the digital map
does not correspond with the actual
road/traffic situation. DVD maps do not
cover all areas nor all routes within an area.
For example, if the traffic routing has been
changed or the direction of a one-way road
has been reversed.
For this reason, you must always observe
applicable road and traffic rules and regulations during your journey. Road and traffic
rules and regulations always have priority
over the navigation commands generated by
the system.
Warning!
G
Navigation announcements are intended to
direct you while driving without diverting
your attention from the road and driving.
Please always use this feature instead of
consulting the map display for directions.
Consulting the symbols or map display for
directions may cause you to divert your attention from driving and increase your risk
of an accident.
Map software
The digital maps generated by the map
software become outdated in the same
way as conventional road maps. Optimum
route guidance can only be provided by the
navigation system in conjunction with the
most up-to-date map software.
Information about new map software versions can be obtained from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Control systems
COMAND navigation (introduction)
Updating the map software
Updating process
You can update the map software yourself
using a DVD.
The updating process has the following
phases:
Notes about handling DVDs
앫
Only hold discs by the edge.
앫
Handle discs carefully to prevent read
problems.
앫
Avoid getting scratches, fingerprints
and dust on discs.
앫
Use a commercially-available cleaning
cloth to clean discs. Do not wipe them
with a circular motion, but only in
straight lines from the center outwards.
앫
Place discs back in their boxes after
use.
앫
Protect discs from heat and direct sunlight.
앫
Loading a DVD into the DVD changer
(컄 page 142)
앫
Updating process (컄 page 142)
i The updating process can take between 10
and 60 minutes, depending on the size of the
map software. If the radio was switched on before you started the updating process, you can
still adjust the volume. You can also use
COMAND to operate the automatic air conditioning and to cancel the process. Other functions
are not operational.
If possible, carry out the update when the vehicle
is stationary.
i If you carry out the update with the engine
switched off and the vehicle battery has insufficient power, COMAND may automatically switch
off during the process in order to protect the battery. If this occurs, restart the update with the
engine running period. Similarly, if the SmartKey
position is unintentionally switched to 0, restart
the update.
Warning!
G
Never leave the engine running in an enclosed space. The exhaust gases contain
carbon monoxide. Inhaling exhaust gases
constitutes a health hazard and could lead
to loss of consciousness or even death.
141
Control systems
COMAND navigation (introduction)
Loading a DVD into the DVD changer
왘
Press one of the magazine tray
buttons 2.
If a disc is loaded, it will be ejected.
왘
Take disc out of slot 1.
왘
Wait until LED for magazine button 2
which you pressed flashes quickly.
왘
Slide DVD into slot 1 with printed side
facing upwards.
COMAND loads the DVD.
1 Disc slot
2 Magazine tray buttons 1 – 6
Updating
앫
LED off = magazine tray is empty
After you have loaded the DVD, you will
see a message to the effect that the disc
does not contain a recognizable audio format.
앫
LED constantly lit = magazine tray is loaded
왘
앫
LED flashes = CD/DVD changer requesting
disc to be loaded
왘
Switch on COMAND (컄 page 79).
i Each magazine tray button 2 indicates the
status of the corresponding magazine tray by
means of an LED.
142
Confirming message: Press n.
COMAND checks whether the map
software on the DVD is compatible with
the vehicle’s navigation system and
whether it is compatible with the current system software.
Map software is compatible with the
navigation system and the current system software
COMAND now checks whether the map
data on the DVD is already installed.
Map data is not yet installed
You will see a comparison of the version
statuses in the display and a prompt will
appear asking whether you want to continue with the update.
왘
Select “Yes” or “No”.
If you select “No”, COMAND automatically ejects the DVD and the map data
is not updated.
If you select “Yes”, the map data is updated.
왘
Take DVD out of the slot.
Control systems
COMAND navigation (introduction)
Map data is already installed
i If the update is canceled, the navigation sys-
You will see a message that the map data
is already installed and a prompt will appear asking you whether you want to continue with the update.
tem remains fully operational with the previous
map data. You can restart the update at a later
date. It will then continue from the point where it
was canceled.
왘
왘
Select “Yes” or “No”.
If you select “No”, COMAND automatically ejects the DVD and the map data
is not updated.
왘
Take DVD out of slot.
If you select “Yes”, the existing map
data is saved again.
왘
Updating the map data
While the update is running, you will see a
message to this effect and a progress bar.
The progress bars fills up from left to right
during the update.
If the update is successfully completed, you will see a message to this effect.
1 Progress bar
You can either cancel the update or allow
it to run to the end without canceling.
왘
왘
Canceling an update on the single
DVD drive: Press eject button 2.
Canceling an update on the DVD
changer: Press corresponding magazine tray button 2.
To allow the update to run to the
end without canceling: take no further action.
왘
Confirming message: Press n.
COMAND ejects the DVD.
왘
Take DVD out of slot.
The update is complete.
The DVD will be ejected in both cases.
If the update is not successfully completed, you will see a message that the map
update is not possible.
Take DVD out of slot.
왘
Confirming message: Press n.
COMAND ejects the DVD.
왘
Take DVD out of slot.
143
Control systems
COMAND navigation (introduction)
Map software is not compatible with
the navigation system
General notes
tional with the previous map data.
The update may not be successfully completed for the following reasons:
You will see a message that the update is
not possible.
앫
왘
Operational readiness of the navigation
system following a system software
update by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center
i The navigation system remains fully opera-
DVD dirty or scratched
왘
왘
앫
앫
왘
Take DVD out of slot.
왘
Load a DVD which is compatible with
the vehicle’s navigation system.
Restart update.
Overheating due to excessive temperatures in the vehicle interior
왘
Wait until vehicle interior has
cooled down.
왘
Restart update.
The storage medium (hard disk) integrated in COMAND is defective.
왘
COMAND ejects the DVD.
Clean DVD.
See the “Notes about handling
DVDs” section (컄 page 141).
Consult an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Confirming message: Press n.
Map software is not compatible with
the current system software
You will see a message that the system
software and the map software are not
compatible.
왘
Confirming message: Press n.
COMAND ejects the DVD.
왘
Take DVD out of slot.
왘
Have the system software updated at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i The map software cannot be updated until
the system software has been updated.
144
After a system software update by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the installed map software may no longer be
compatible. If this is the case, the navigation system will not be operational.
You will know if this is the case, when the
following message will appear when you
switch to navigation mode: “The system
software has been updated. The map software must be updated now. Please insert
the DVD with the map software.”
왘
Updating map software: Proceed as
described in the “Updating the map
software” section (컄 page 141). Use
map software which is compatible with
the system software.
Control systems
COMAND navigation (introduction)
i Please note that the update must be allowed
to run to the end in this case. If you interrupt it,
the navigation system will continue to be non-operational.
Initial use or use following a system
software update
In both these cases, the navigation system
must determine the position of the vehicle.
You may have to drive for a while before
precise route guidance is possible.
GPS reception
Correct functioning of the navigation system depends on GPS reception, among
other things. In certain situations, GPS reception may be impaired, there may be interference or there may be no reception at
all, e.g. in tunnels, in multistory parking garage or due to snow on the GPS antenna. If
there is snow on the GPS antenna, you
should remove it. The GPS antenna is at
the back of the vehicle roof.
Route guidance after vehicle transportation
COMAND has to redetermine the position
of the vehicle if the vehicle has been transported (e.g. by ferry, by train or after towing).
Positioning takes place automatically even
when COMAND is switched off. The duration varies from one case to another.
Route guidance may be restricted as follows during vehicle positioning:
앫
Navigation announcements, route
guidance displays and displayed street
names are not consistent with the actual location of the vehicle.
앫
COMAND does not generate navigation
announcements.
앫
Instead of the route guidance displays,
you see the “Off Road” display and a direction arrow. The direction arrow
shows the compass heading to the destination.
When positioning is complete, route guidance is once again possible using navigation announcements and route guidance
displays.
Interrupting the journey during route
guidance
The following applies if you interrupt the
journey during route guidance and continue the journey later:
앫
COMAND resumes route guidance automatically if you continue the journey
within 2 hours.
앫
Route guidance is canceled if you continue the journey after more than
2 hours. It will be necessary to resume
the canceled route guidance manually
(컄 page 192).
i The journey is interrupted if you park the vehicle and switch off COMAND.
The journey is continued when you switch
COMAND back on and start driving on.
145
Control systems
COMAND navigation (introduction)
Hard disk errors
COMAND has an integrated hard disk on
which the map software is saved.
If an area of the hard disk has an error,
COMAND can no longer access the map
data in this area, for example, when calculating a route.
The message “Navigation Unavailable.
Please refer to the operating instructions.”
appears.
왘
Deleting message: Switch COMAND
off and back on.
i If you switch the navigation system off/on,
it will be operational again until it has to access
the faulty area of the hard disk again. The message will then appear again. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Units of measurement
The units of measurement in navigation
mode are identical to those set in the instrument cluster.
146
Input restrictions
The input restrictions are imposed starting
at a particular vehicle speed. The restrictions are canceled as soon as the speed
drops below a certain value.
When the restriction is active, certain operations or entries are not possible.
You will notice this by the fact that some
menu items cannot be selected or certain
operations will not be possible.
Control systems
COMAND navigation (introduction)
Navigation system menu overview
i The components and operating principles of
COMAND can be found on (컄 page 79).
Guide
Route
Position
(only with route guidanc
e active)
6
Destination
(only with route guidanc
e active)
Select a special destina- 앫 Call up route info
앫 Call up the save posi- Repeat the current navition from the current map
tion memory function gation announcement
앫 Call up route browser
view
앫 Center the map on
앫 Call up the detour
the vehicle’s position
function
앫 Center the map on
the destination position
Select:
앫
a destination
앫
stopover
앫
save destination
앫
cancel route guidance
147
Control systems
COMAND navigation (introduction)
Calling up the map display and switching to navigation mode
왘
Press the N shortcut button once or
twice.
i The number of times you have to press the
N shortcut button depends on the operating
mode currently selected.
or
왘
In the main menu line, select “Navi”.
Illustration: map with route guidance inactive and with the menu system shown
Both of these will call up the map display. You will see the map with the
menu system either shown or hidden.
1 Current vehicle position
Illustration: map with route guidance inactive and with the menu system hidden
(full screen mode)
1 Current vehicle position
2 Set map orientation (컄 page 150)
3 Map scale selected (컄 page 149)
Hiding or showing the menu system
왘
Hiding: Slide qm.
The “Full Screen” menu item appears in
the main area of the display; it is automatically selected.
왘
Press n.
The menu system is hidden. The map
can be seen in the full screen.
148
Control systems
COMAND navigation (introduction)
왘
Showing: Press n in the full-screen
map display.
Adjusting the map scale
i It is only possible to adjust the map scale
with the menu system hidden (full-screen map
display).
왘
Saving current vehicle position as destination in last destinations list
왘
Showing menu system, if necessary: Press n.
왘
Saving: Select “Position” “Save Position”.
COMAND saves the current vehicle position as a destination in the last destinations (컄 page 201).
Rotate ymz until the desired map
scale is set.
Moving the map
i It is only possible to move the map with the
menu system hidden.
왘
1 Currently set map scale as number
2 Scale
3 Currently set map scale as a needle on
the scale
4 Previously set value before calling up
the scale
As soon as you rotate ymz, scale 2
appears. Rotating clockwise zooms in,
rotating counterclockwise zooms out.
1 Crosshair
2 Details of the crosshair position
3 Map scale
i Display 2 may be the name of a road, for
Slide qmr, omp or wmx.
example, provided the digital map contains the
necessary data.
A crosshair appears on the map.
If no data is available, display 2 shows:
앫
the coordinates of the crosshair if the
geo-coordinate display is switched on
(컄 page 151) and the GPS signal is strong
enough
앫
no display if the geo-coordinate display is
switched off (컄 page 151)
149
Control systems
COMAND navigation (introduction)
Adjusting the map scale
왘
Rotate ymz.
Rotating clockwise zooms in, rotating
counterclockwise zooms out.
Saving crosshair position as destination
in last destinations list
왘
Showing menu system, if necessary: Press n.
왘
Saving: Select “Position” “Save Position”.
COMAND saves the crosshair position
as a destination in the last destinations
list (컄 page 201).
Hiding the crosshair
왘
왘
Press back button L in the center
console (컄 page 80).
The crosshair disappears and the map
is centered on the vehicle position.
or
150
Set the map to the vehicle or destination position, see the explanation below.
Centering the map on the vehicle or
destination position
i If you have moved the map, you can use this
Basic settings
i You can make the following settings regardless of whether route guidance is active or inactive.
Map orientation
function to rapidly return the map to the position
of the vehicle or destination. It is only possible to
center the map on the destination position when
route guidance is active.
왘
Centering on the vehicle’s position:
Select “Navi” “Position” “Vehicle
Position Map”.
1 Current map orientation
The following may be displayed:
or
왘
Press L when the crosshair is displayed.
왘
Centering on the destination:
Select “Navi” “Position” “Destination Position Map”.
앫
8 = “Heading Up” (the map is displayed so that the direction of travel is
always up; the orange point of the icon
points north)
앫
9 = “North Up” (the map view is displayed so that north is always up)
Control systems
COMAND navigation (introduction)
왘
Setting map orientation:
Select “Navi” “Navi” “Map Display”.
The map display list appears. A dot R
indicates the current setting.
왘
Select “North Up” or “Heading Up”.
왘
Exiting menu: Slide omp.
The map orientation changes accordingly.
Setting POI symbols
You can set which points of interest (POIs)
should be displayed as symbols in the
map. POIs are garages, hotels, movie theaters or restaurants, for example.
i Depending on the map scale on the map,
POI symbols may not be visible on the map although their display is activated. In addition, POI
symbols may be covered by the map’s labels.
The following settings are possible:
앫
“Standard symbols” (symbol determined by the factory settings)
앫
“Personal symbols” (you can determine
the symbols yourself)
앫
“No symbols”
왘
Adjusting: Select “Navi” “Navi” “Map Display”.
The map display list appears. A dot R
indicates the current setting.
왘
Select “Standard symbols”, “Personal
symbols” or “No symbols”.
i The list shows all symbols that are contained
in the digital map across all states (USA) and/or
provinces (CDN). Not all POIs in all states (USA)
or in all provinces (CDN) are available, however.
Certain POI symbols may not be displayed on the
map, even if the symbol display is switched on.
왘
Exiting menu: Slide omp or press
back button L in the center console
(컄 page 80).
Geo-coordinate display
If you select “Personal symbols”, the
list of POIs appears.
왘
Switching POI symbol display on
or off: Select the desired POI.
The corresponding symbol displays
are switched on or off, depending
on the previous status. A checkmark indicates which status is active. You can switch on the symbol
displays for more than one POI.
Illustration: map with geo-coordinate display switched on
1 Current height above sea level
2 Number of GPS satellites from which
signals for positioning can be received
3 Coordinate display
151
Control systems
COMAND navigation (introduction)
The map display list appears.
i There must be sufficient GPS reception for
displays 1, 2 and 3 to be shown. Height display 1 is an approximation because the navigation system uses the GPS signals for the
calculation.
Display options with geo-coordinate display switched on
If the crosshair is displayed on the map
view (map was moved manually), only display 3 is visible.
It shows either the coordinates of the
crosshair or other data on the crosshair
position, e.g. a street name. The digital
map must contain relevant data in order
for this other data to be displayed.
i If there is no crosshair on the map view, displays 1, 2 and 3 are visible. Display 3
shows the coordinates of the current vehicle position.
Switching the geo-coordinate display on
or off
왘
Select “Navi” “Navi” “Map Display”.
152
왘
왘
Select “Coordinates”.
Depending on the previous status, the
mode is switched on or off. A checkmark indicates that the mode is
switched on. It is possible to switch on
more than one mode.
The geo-coordinate display is switched
on or off, depending on the previous
status. A checkmark indicates which
status is active.
왘
Exiting menu: Slide omp or press
back button L in the center console
(컄 page 80).
Setting route mode
i This function allows you to set the following
options for route guidance:
앫
“Minimize Highways”
앫
“Minimize Toll Roads”
앫
“Minimize Tunnels”
앫
“Minimize Ferries/Motorail”
왘
Select “Navi” “Navi” “Mode”.
The mode list appears.
Switching mode on or off:
Select desired modes.
왘
Exiting menu: Slide omp or press
back button L in the center console
(컄 page 80).
COMAND will verify whether it can incorporate the modes if you select them
with route guidance active.
If it can, COMAND calculates a new
route while incorporating the modes
selected.
If it cannot, you will see and hear a corresponding message.
왘
Select “OK”.
COMAND calculates a new route.
Only those modes which can be incorporated are used.
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)
왔 COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)
Warning!
G
For safety reasons, only enter a new destination when the vehicle is stationary.
Entering a destination by address
i It is not possible to enter an address when
the vehicle has exceeded a certain speed. As
soon as the vehicle speed drops below a certain
value, the function is available again.
i It is possible to enter a destination regard-
i If Russian or Chinese is set as the system
less of whether route guidance is active or inactive.
language, the address must be entered using
Latin letters. Setting the system language
(컄 page 216).
The following destination entry options are
available:
앫
Entering a destination by address
앫
Entering a destination from the destination memory
앫
Entering a destination from the list of
last destinations
앫
Entering a destination from the map
앫
Entering a stopover
앫
Entering a POI
To enter an address you may proceed as
follows:
앫
Enter state (USA) or province (CDN),
street and town/city
앫
Enter state (USA) or province (CDN),
town/city and street
앫
Enter state (USA) or province (CDN),
town/city and center
앫
Enter state (USA) or province (CDN),
zip code and center
앫
Enter state (USA) or province (CDN),
zip code and street
i As additional information to the street entry,
you can enter either a house number or an intersection.
A zip code entry replaces the town/city entry.
Calling up the address input menu
왘
Select “Navi” “Destination” “Address Entry”.
The address input menu appears. It
shows a state (USA) or a province
(CDN). Which state or province is
shown depends on the vehicle’s location.
1 State (USA) or province (CDN)
153
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)
Menu items in the address input menu
Some menu items will not or not yet be
available, depending on the sequence in
which you enter the address and the data
version.
Example: If you have not made any entries,
menu items “House No.”, “Center”, “Intersection”, “POI”, “Start” and “Save” will not
yet be available. And the “Zip Code” menu
item will not be available if the digital map
does not contain any zip codes.
Entering a state (USA)
i You can only enter those states which are
saved on the digital map.
왘
In the address input menu, select
“State/Prov” “States (U.S.)”.
A list of states appears with input characters; the input characters are automatically activated.
154
List of states with input characters
1 Top list entry based on the input data
up to that point
2 Characters entered by the user
3 Characters automatically added by the
system
4 Clear last character entry
5 Currently selectable characters
6 Currently non-selectable characters
7 Input characters
8 List of states
9 Currently selected characters
i In the list of input characters 7, you can
only select currently selectable characters.
Which characters are included depends on the
sequence in which you have entered your destination and the data version of the digital map.
While the numbers are being selected as
described below, the top list entry 1 always shows the state which best corresponds to the input data as it has been
entered up to that point.
At the same time, COMAND automatically
supplements characters 2 entered by the
user with other likely input characters 3.
왘
Selecting characters: Slide omp or
rotate ymz.
왘
Confirming character selection:
Press n.
왘
Deleting individual characters:
Select ) in the bottom line and
press n.
왘
Deleting an entire entry: Select ) in
the bottom line and press n until the
entire entry is deleted.
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)
왘
Canceling an entry: Select “Back” in
the bottom line and press n.
List of states without input characters
or
왘
Press back button L in the center
console (컄 page 80).
As soon as COMAND can clearly attribute
the characters entered to a state, the input
characters 7 disappear automatically.
You see the list of states without the input
characters. Here you can confirm the current entry or make another selection.
During character entry, you can also manually switch to the list of states without input characters at any time.
왘
Switching manually to list of states
without input characters: Slide qm.
왘
왘
Select ? in the second line from the
bottom and press n.
Canceling selection: Select “Back” by
sliding om and press n.
or
왘
Press back button L in the center
console (컄 page 80).
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
or
왘
Selecting a state: Slide qmr or
rotate ymz.
The following menu items are now available:
앫
“Map”: Entering a destination from the
map (컄 page 174)
앫
“State/Prov”: re-enter state (USA) or
province (CDN)
앫
“Town”: Entering a town or city
(컄 page 159)
앫
“Street”: Entering a street
(컄 page 161)
앫
“Zip Code”: Entering the zip code
(컄 page 157)
i It is not possible to enter zip codes if the digital map does not contain any zip codes for the
selected state.
왘
Continuing destination entry:
Select one of the menu items mentioned above.
The address input menu appears again.
It shows the abbreviation for the selected state.
155
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)
Entering a province (Canada)
i It is not possible to enter a zip code if the
왘
digital map does not contain any zip codes for
the selected province (CDN).
In the address input menu, select
“State/Prov” “Provinces (Canada)”.
A list of provinces appears.
왘
앫
“Map”: Entering a destination from the
map (컄 page 174)
앫
“State/Prov”: re-enter state (USA) or
province (CDN)
Quick access to most recently entered
states (USA) or provinces (CDN)
앫
“Town”: Entering a town or city
(컄 page 159)
왘
앫
“Street”: Entering a street
(컄 page 161)
앫
“Zip Code”: Entering the zip code
(컄 page 157)
왘
Select desired province.
The address input menu appears again.
It shows the abbreviation for the selected province.
The following menu items are now available:
앫
“Map”: Entering a destination from the
map (컄 page 174)
앫
“State/Prov”: re-enter state (USA) or
province (CDN)
앫
“Town”: Entering a town or city
(컄 page 159)
앫
“Street”: Entering a street
(컄 page 161)
앫
“Zip Code”: Entering the zip code
(컄 page 157)
156
The following menu items are now available:
Continuing destination entry:
Select one of the menu items mentioned above.
In the address input menu
“State/Prov” “Last States/Provinces”.
The list of most recently entered states
(USA) or provinces (CDN) appears. The
last entry is at the top of the list.
왘
Select desired state (USA) or desired
province (CDN).
The address input menu appears again.
It shows the abbreviation for the selected state (USA) or province (CDN).
i It is not possible to enter a zip code if the
digital map does not contain any zip codes for
the selected state (USA) or province (CDN).
왘
Continuing destination entry:
Select one of the menu items mentioned above.
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)
Entering the zip code
List of zip codes with input characters
i It is not possible to enter a zip code if you
have already entered other address data aside
from the state (USA) or province (CDN).
You can only enter those zip codes which are
saved on the digital map.
The available zip codes depend on the state
(USA) or province (CDN) most recently entered.
왘
In the address input menu, select “Zip
Code”. A list of zip codes appears with
input characters; the input
characters 4 are automatically activated.
1 Top list entry based on the input data
up to that point
2 Numbers entered by the user
3 Numbers automatically added by the
system
4 Input characters
5 Currently selectable numbers
6 Currently selected numbers
7 Currently non-selectable numbers
8 List of zip codes
i In the list of input characters 4, you can
only select numbers which can be currently entered. Which characters are included depends
on the sequence in which you have entered your
destination and the data version of the digital
map.
While the numbers are being selected as
described below, the top list entry 1 always shows the zip code which best corresponds to the input data as it has been
entered up to that point.
At the same time, COMAND automatically
supplements numbers 2 entered by the
user with other likely numbers 3.
왘
Selecting numbers: Slide omp or
rotate ymz.
왘
Confirming number selection:
Press n.
왘
Deleting individual numbers:
Select ) in the bottom line and
press n.
왘
Deleting an entire entry: Select ) in
the bottom line and press n until the
entire entry is deleted.
컄컄
157
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)
컄컄 왘
Canceling an entry: Select “Back” in
the bottom line and press n.
List of zip codes without input characters
or
왘
During character entry, you can also manually switch to the list of zip codes without
input characters at any time.
Switching manually to list of zip
codes without input characters:
Slide qm.
왘
Selecting a zip code: Slide qmr or rotate ymz.
왘
Canceling selection: Select “Back”
and press n.
or
왘
or
왘
앫
Street and if necessary, house number,
town/city, state (USA) or province
(CDN)
앫
Town/city, state (USA) or province
(CDN) and zip code
앫
State (USA) or province (CDN) and zip
code
Press back button L in the center
console (컄 page 80).
As soon as COMAND can clearly attribute
the numbers entered to a zip code, input
characters 4 disappear. You see the list
of zip codes without the input characters.
Here you can confirm the current entry or
make another selection.
왘
It shows one of the following items of information:
Select ? in the second line from the
bottom and press n.
158
왘
Press back button L in the center
console (컄 page 80).
Confirming selection: Press n.
You will see the address input menu
again.
i The street and, if necessary, the house number, will then appear as soon as COMAND can attribute the zip code to an appropriate address.
Which of the following menu items are now
available depends on the situation, or may
depend on the data version of the digital
map. The menu items which are not available cannot be selected.
앫
“Map”: using the map to enter a destination (컄 page 174)
i In this case, using the map for destination
entry is based on the town or city seen in the address input menu.
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)
앫
“Street”: entering a street
(컄 page 161)
앫
“Center”: entering a center
(컄 page 164)
앫
“POI”: entering a point of interest
(컄 page 177)
i In this case, entering a POI is based on the
town or city seen in the address input menu.
앫
“Save”: saving a destination in the destination memory (컄 page 195)
앫
“Start”: starting the route calculation
(컄 page 171)
왘
Continuing or completing destination entry: Select one of the menu
items mentioned above.
Entering a town or city
i You can only enter those towns or cities
which are saved on the digital map.
It is not possible to enter a town or city when you
have already entered a street which COMAND
can clearly attribute to a town or city.
If COMAND cannot clearly attribute a previously
entered street to a town/city, only those towns
or cities are available which have a street of that
name.
If you have not yet entered a street before entering the town or city, towns or cities within the
state (USA) or province (CDN) previously entered are available.
왘
In the address input menu, select
“Town”.
The list of towns/cities appears either
with or without the input characters
(컄 page 160).
Whether or not the input characters appear depends on how many towns or
cities are available for the desired state
(USA) or province (CDN).
List of towns or cities with input characters
When this list appears, the input characters 4 are automatically activated.
1 Top list entry based on the input data
up to that point
2 Characters entered by the user
3 Characters automatically added by the
system
4 Input characters
5 Currently non-selectable characters
6 Currently selectable character
7 List of towns/cities
8 Currently selected character
159
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)
i In the list of input characters 4, you can
only select currently selectable characters.
Which characters are included depends on the
sequence in which you have entered your destination and the data version of the digital map.
왘
Selecting characters: Slide omp or
rotate ymz.
왘
Confirming character selection:
Press n.
왘
The top list entry 1 at first shows either
the town or city in which the vehicle is currently located or the town or city which
best corresponds to the input data as it
has been entered up to that point.
왘
Deleting individual characters:
Select ) in the bottom line and
press n.
or
왘
Deleting an entire entry: Select ) in
the bottom line and press n until the
entire entry is deleted.
왘
Canceling an entry: Select “Back” in
the bottom line and press n.
i The current town or city is shown if:
앫
you have accepted the current state (USA) or
province (CDN) when entering the state
(USA) or province (CDN)
앫
and if you select town/city entry immediately afterward
As soon as you enter a character from input characters 4, the top list entry 1
shows the town or city that best corresponds to the input data as it has been entered up to that point.
At the same time, COMAND automatically
supplements characters 2 entered by the
user with appropriate characters 3.
160
During character entry, you can also manually switch to the list of towns/cities without input characters at any time.
왘
Switching manually to the list of
towns/cities without input characters: Slide qm.
Select ? in the second line from the
bottom and press n.
List of towns/cities without input characters
or
왘
Press back button L in the center
console (컄 page 80).
As soon as COMAND can clearly attribute
the characters entered to a town or city,
the input characters 4 disappear automatically. You see the list of towns or cities
without the input characters. Here you can
confirm the current entry or make another
selection.
1 Symbol for more selection options
왘
Selecting a town or city: Slide qmr
or rotate ymz.
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)
왘
Canceling selection: Select “Back”
and press n.
or
왘
왘
Press back button L in the center
console (컄 page 80).
Confirming selection: Press n.
Towns/cities with symbol 1 mean
that there is more than one in the selected state (USA) or province (CDN).
Confirming one of these towns/cities
will take you to a further sub-selection.
Which of the following menu items are now
available depends on the situation, or may
depend on the data version of the digital
map. The menu items which are not available cannot be selected.
앫
“Map”: using the map to enter a destination (컄 page 174)
i In this case, using the map for destination
entry is based on the town or city seen in the address input menu.
앫
“Street”: entering the street
(컄 page 161)
If there are no other selection options, the
address input menu appears again.
앫
“House No.”: entering the house number (컄 page 166)
It shows one of the following items of information:
앫
“Center”: entering the center
(컄 page 164)
앫
Town/city and state (USA) or province
(CDN)
앫
“Intersection”: entering the intersection (컄 page 169)
앫
Street, town/city and state (USA) or
province (CDN)
앫
“POI”: entering a point of interest
(컄 page 177)
i The street is visible if you have entered it before entering the town or city.
i In this case, entering a POI is based on the
town or city seen in the address input menu.
앫
“Save”: saving a destination in the destination memory (컄 page 195)
앫
“Start”: starting the route calculation
(컄 page 171)
왘
Continuing or completing destination entry: Select one of the menu
items mentioned above.
Entering a street
i It is not possible to enter a street if:
앫
you have already entered a center
앫
you have already entered a zip code that
COMAND can clearly attribute to a street
i You can only enter those streets which are
saved on the digital map.
If you have not entered a town or city before entering the street, only those streets within the
state (USA) or province (CDN) previously entered are available. If you have already entered a
town or city, streets within that town or city are
available.
If you have entered a zip code before entering
the street, only those streets within the zip code
area are available.
161
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)
왘
In the address input menu, select
“Street”.
The list of streets appears either with
or without the input characters
(컄 page 163). Whether or not the input
characters appear depends on how
many streets are available for the selected town or city.
Street list with input characters
When this list appears, the input characters 6 are automatically activated.
The top list entry 1 first shows the street
first alphabetically and best corresponds
to the input data as it has been entered up
to that point.
1 Top list entry based on the input data
up to that point
2 Characters entered by the user
3 Characters automatically added by the
system
4 Currently non-selectable characters
5 Currently selectable character
6 Input characters
7 Street list
8 Currently selected character
162
i In the list of input characters 6, you can
only select currently selectable characters.
Which characters are included depends on the
sequence in which you have entered your destination and the data version of the digital map.
As soon as you enter a character from input characters 6, the top list entry 1
shows the street which best corresponds
to the input data as it has been entered up
to that point.
At the same time, COMAND automatically
supplements characters 2 entered by the
user with appropriate characters 3.
왘
Selecting characters: Slide omp or
rotate ymz.
왘
Confirming character selection:
Press n.
왘
Deleting individual characters:
Select ) in the bottom line and
press n.
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)
왘
Deleting an entire entry: Select ) in
the bottom line and press n until the
entire entry is deleted.
왘
Canceling an entry: Select “Back” in
the bottom line and press n.
Street list without input characters
It shows one of the following items of information:
or
왘
If there are no other selection options,
the address input menu appears again
after the confirmation.
Press back button L in the center
console (컄 page 80).
앫
Street and state (USA) or province
(CDN)
앫
Street, town/city and state (USA) or
province (CDN)
As soon as COMAND can clearly attribute
the characters entered to a street, the input characters 6 disappear. You see the
street list without the input characters.
Here you can confirm the current entry or
make another selection.
1 Symbol for more selection options
i The town or city is visible if you have entered
왘
Selecting a street: Slide qmr or
rotate ymz.
it before entering the street, or if COMAND can
clearly attribute the street entered to a town or
city.
왘
During character entry, you can also manually switch to the street list without input
characters at any time.
Canceling selection: Select “Back”
and press n.
or
왘
Switching manually to the street list
without input characters: Slide qm.
or
왘
Select ? in the second line from the
bottom and press n.
왘
Press back button L in the center
console (컄 page 80).
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
Streets with symbol 1 run through
several suburbs. Confirming one of
these streets takes you to a further
sub-selection.
Which of the following menu items are now
available depends on the situation, or may
depend on the data version of the digital
map. The menu items which are not available cannot be selected.
앫
“Map”: using the map to enter a destination (컄 page 174)
i In this case, using the map for destination
entry is based on the town or city seen in the address input menu.
163
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)
앫
“House No.”: entering the house number (컄 page 166)
앫
“Intersection”: entering the intersection (컄 page 169)
i Entering an intersection is restricted to
streets within the vicinity of the street entered.
앫
“POI”: entering a point of interest
(컄 page 177)
Entering a center
List of centers with input characters
i It is not possible to enter a center if:
When this list appears, the input characters 7 are automatically activated.
앫
you have not yet entered a town or city
앫
you have already entered a street
앫
you have already entered a zip code that
COMAND can clearly attribute to an address
town or city seen in the address input menu.
You can only enter those centers which are
saved on the digital map.
Depending on the previous entry, centers are
available either for the town/city entered or the
zip code area entered.
앫
왘
i In this case, entering a POI is based on the
“Save”: saving a destination in the destination memory (컄 page 195)
앫
“Start”: starting the route calculation
(컄 page 171)
왘
Continuing or completing destination entry: Select one of the menu
items mentioned above.
164
In the address input menu, select “Center”.
The list of centers appears either with
or without the input characters
(컄 page 165). Whether or not the input
characters appear depends on how
many centers are available in the selected town or city.
1 Top list entry based on the input data
up to that point
2 Characters entered by the user
3 Characters automatically added by the
system
4 Currently non-selectable characters
5 Currently selectable character
6 Currently selected character
7 Input characters
8 List of centers
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)
i In the list of input characters 7, you can
only select currently selectable characters.
Which characters are included depends on the
sequence in which you have entered your destination and the data version of the digital map.
While the characters are being selected as
described below, the top list entry 1 always shows the center which best corresponds to the input data as it has been
entered up to that point.
At the same time, COMAND automatically
supplements characters 2 entered by the
user with appropriate characters 3.
왘
Selecting characters: Slide omp or
rotate ymz.
왘
Confirming character selection:
Press n.
왘
왘
Deleting individual characters:
Select ) in the bottom line and
press n.
Deleting an entire entry: Select ) in
the bottom line and press n until the
entire entry is deleted.
왘
Canceling an entry: Select “Back” in
the bottom line and press n.
List of centers without input characters
or
왘
Press back button L in the center
console (컄 page 80).
As soon as COMAND can clearly attribute
the characters entered to a center, the input characters 7 disappear. You see the
list of centers without the input characters.
Here you can confirm the current entry or
make another selection.
During character entry, you can also manually switch to the list of centers without
input characters at any time.
왘
Switching manually to the list of
centers without input characters:
Slide qm.
or
왘
Select ? in the second line from the
bottom and press n.
왘
Selecting a center: Slide qmr or
rotate ymz.
왘
Canceling selection: Select “Back”
and press n.
or
왘
Press back button L in the center
console (컄 page 80).
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
After the confirmation, the address input menu appears again. It shows the
center, town/city and state (USA) or
province (CDN).
165
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)
Which of the following menu items are now
available may depend on the data version
of the digital map. The menu items which
are not available cannot be selected.
앫
“Map”: using the map to enter a destination (컄 page 174)
i In this case, using the map for destination
entry is based on the center seen in the address
input menu.
앫
“POI”: entering a point of interest
(컄 page 177)
Entering a house number
i The house number can only be entered after
the street has been entered.
You can only enter those house numbers which
are saved on the digital map. The digital map
does not contain all house numbers for all
streets.
How the house number is entered depends
on whether you have already entered just
the street or both the street and the town
or city (컄 page 167).
i In this case, entering a point of interest is
With only the street entered previously
based on the center seen in the address input
menu.
When COMAND can clearly allocate the
street to a town or city, the house number
appears without input characters. Select a
house number from the list (컄 page 169).
앫
“Save”: saving a destination in the destination memory (컄 page 195)
앫
“Start”: starting the route calculation
(컄 page 171)
왘
Continuing or completing destination entry: Select one of the menu
items mentioned above.
166
When COMAND cannot clearly allocate the
street to a town or city, a house number
screen appears. You can now enter a
house number.
1 Numbers entered by the user
2 Input characters
3 Currently selected number
왘
Selecting numbers: Slide omp or
rotate ymz.
왘
Confirming number selection:
Press n.
왘
Deleting individual numbers:
Select ) in the bottom line and
press n.
왘
Deleting an entire entry: Select ) in
the bottom line and press n until the
entire entry is deleted.
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)
왘
Canceling an entry: Select “Back” in
the bottom line and press n.
In both cases, the address input menu
shows the house number, street,
town/city and state (USA) or province
(CDN).
or
왘
Press back button L in the center
console (컄 page 80).
왘
Confirming entry: Select ? in the
second line from the bottom and
press n.
If COMAND cannot clearly attribute the
house number to a town or city, the
town/city input menu appears.
왘
Entering town: Proceed as described in the “Entering a town or
city” section (컄 page 159).
After the town or city has been entered, the address input menu appears again.
If COMAND can clearly attribute the
house number to a town or city, the address input menu also appears.
Which of the following menu items are now
available may depend on the data version
of the digital map. The menu items which
are not available cannot be selected.
앫
“Map”: using the map to enter a destination (컄 page 174)
i In this case, using the map for destination
entry is based on the town or city seen in the address input menu.
앫
왘
Continuing or completing destination entry: Select one of the menu
items mentioned above.
With the street and town/city previously
entered
왘
In the address input menu, select
“House No.”.
The list of house numbers appears either with or without the input characters (컄 page 169). Whether or not the
input characters appear depends on
how many house numbers are available
in the selected street.
“POI”: entering a point of interest
(컄 page 177)
i In this case, entering a POI is based on the
town or city seen in the address input menu.
앫
“Save”: saving a destination in the destination memory (컄 page 195)
앫
“Start”: starting the route calculation
(컄 page 171)
167
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)
List of house numbers with input characters
When this list appears, the input characters 4 are automatically activated.
i In the list of input characters 4, you can
only select currently selectable characters.
Which characters are included depends on the
sequence in which you have entered your destination and the data version of the digital map.
While the numbers are being selected as
described below, the top list entry 3 always shows the house number which best
corresponds to the input data as it has
been entered up to that point.
At the same time, COMAND automatically
supplements numbers 1 entered by the
user with appropriate numbers 2.
1 Numbers entered by the user
2 Numbers automatically added by the
system
3 Top list entry based on the input data
up to that point
4 Input characters
5 Currently non-selectable numbers
6 Currently selected number
7 Currently selectable numbers
8 List of house numbers
168
왘
Selecting numbers: Slide omp or
rotate ymz.
왘
Confirming number selection:
Press n.
왘
Deleting individual numbers:
Select ) in the bottom line and
press n.
왘
Deleting an entire entry: Select ) in
the bottom line and press n until the
entire entry is deleted.
왘
Canceling an entry: Select “Back” in
the bottom line and press n.
or
왘
Press back button L in the center
console (컄 page 80).
As soon as COMAND can clearly attribute
the numbers entered to a house number,
the input characters 4 disappear. You see
the list of house numbers without the input
characters. Here you can confirm the current entry or make another selection.
During number entry, you can also manually switch to the list of house numbers without input characters at any time.
왘
Switching manually to the list of
house numbers without input characters: Slide qm.
or
왘
Select ? in the second line from the
bottom and press n.
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)
List of house numbers without input
characters
Which of the following menu items are now
available may depend on the data version
of the digital map. The menu items which
are not available cannot be selected.
앫
“Map”: using the map to enter a destination (컄 page 174)
i In this case, using the map for destination
entry is based on the town or city seen in the address input menu.
앫
왘
Selecting house numbers:
Slide qmr or rotate ymz.
왘
Canceling selection: Select “Back”
and press n.
i In this case, entering a POI is based on the
town or city seen in the address input menu.
앫
“Save”: saving a destination in the destination memory (컄 page 195)
앫
“Start”: starting the route calculation
(컄 page 171)
왘
Continuing or completing destination entry: Select one of the menu
items mentioned above.
or
왘
Press back button L in the center
console (컄 page 80).
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
After the confirmation, the address input menu appears again. It shows the
house number, street, town/city and
state (USA) or province (CDN).
“POI”: entering a point of interest
(컄 page 177)
Entering an intersection
i The intersection can only be entered after
the street has been entered.
You can only enter those intersections which are
saved on the digital map.
왘
In the address input menu, select “Intersection”.
The list of intersections appears either
with or without the input characters
(컄 page 171). Whether or not the input
characters appear depends on how
many intersections are available for the
selected street.
169
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)
List of intersections with input characters
When this list appears, the input characters 4 are automatically activated.
1 Top list entry based on the input data
up to that point
2 Characters entered by the user
3 Characters automatically added by the
system
4 Input characters
5 Currently non-selectable characters
6 Currently selectable character
7 List of intersections
8 Currently selected character
170
i In the list of input characters 4, you can
only select currently selectable characters.
Which characters are included depends on the
sequence in which you have entered your destination and the data version of the digital map.
왘
Canceling character entry:
Select “Back” in the bottom line and
press n.
or
While the characters are being selected as
described below, the top list entry 1 always shows the intersection which best
corresponds to the input data as it has
been entered up to that point.
At the same time, COMAND automatically
supplements characters 2 entered by the
user with appropriate characters 3.
왘
왘
Selecting characters: Slide omp or
rotate ymz.
왘
Confirming character selection:
Press n.
During character entry, you can also manually switch to the list of intersections
without input characters at any time.
왘
왘
Deleting individual characters:
Select ) in the bottom line and
press n.
or
왘
Deleting an entire entry: Select ) in
the bottom line and press n until the
entire entry is deleted.
Press back button L in the center
console (컄 page 80).
As soon as COMAND can clearly attribute
the characters entered to an intersection,
the input characters 4 disappear. You see
the list of intersections without the input
characters. Here you can confirm the current entry or make another selection.
왘
Switching manually to the list of intersections without input characters: Slide qm.
Select ? in the second line from the
bottom and press n.
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)
List of intersections without input characters
왘
Press back button L in the center
console (컄 page 80).
앫
“Save”: saving a destination in the destination memory (컄 page 195)
왘
If the town/city input menu appears: Enter a town or city.
앫
“Start”: starting the route calculation
왘
Continuing or completing destination entry: Select one of the menu
items mentioned above.
i A detailed description of how to enter a town
or city can be found in the “Entering a town or
city” section (컄 page 159).
왘
Selecting an intersection: Slide qmr
or rotate ymz.
왘
Confirming selection: press n.
Either the address input menu appears
again, or the town/city input menu.
i The town/city input menu appears if the intersection entered cannot be clearly attributed
to a town or city.
왘
or
Canceling selection: Select “Back”
and press n.
After the town or city has been entered,
the address input menu appears again.
Starting the route calculation
Which of the following menu items are now
available may depend on the data version
of the digital map. The menu items which
are not available cannot be selected.
all the necessary address data has been entered.
앫
“Map”: using the map to enter a destination (컄 page 174)
i In this case, using the map for destination
entry is based on the town or city seen in the address input menu.
앫
“POI”: entering a point of interest
(컄 page 177)
i You cannot start the route calculation until
왘
After entering the destination, select
“Start”.
The route calculation will start if route
guidance has not already been activated.
If route guidance has already been activated, a prompt will appear asking
whether you want to end the current
route guidance.
컄컄
i In this case, entering a POI is based on the
town or city seen in the address input menu.
171
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)
컄컄 왘
Select “Yes” or “No”.
If you select “Yes”, COMAND will stop
the route guidance and start the route
calculation for the new destination.
If you select “No”, COMAND will continue with the active route guidance.
The new destination is discarded.
During the route calculation, an arrow
will indicate the linear direction to the
destination. Below this, you will see the
message “Calculating Route”.
Once the route has been calculated,
route guidance begins (컄 page 185).
i Route calculation requires a certain amount
of time. The time depends on the distance from
the destination, for example.
COMAND calculates the route using the digital
map data. The calculated route may differ from
the actual road situation, e.g. due to road construction or incomplete map data. Please make
sure that you observe the notes about the digital
map (컄 page 140).
172
Entering a destination from the destination memory
왘
Select “Navi” “Destination” “From Memory”.
The destination memory list appears either with or without the input characters (컄 page 173). Whether the input
characters appear depends on the
number of entries in the destination
memory.
i The destination memory always contains an
entry called “My Address”. You can save your
home address, for example, under this entry
(컄 page 195).
Destination memory list with input
characters
When this list appears, the input characters 4 are automatically activated.
1 Top list entry based on the input data
up to that point
2 Characters entered by the user
3 Characters automatically added by the
system
4 Input characters
5 Currently non-selectable characters
6 Destination memory list
7 Currently selected character
8 Currently selectable characters
i In the list of input characters 4, you can
only select currently selectable characters.
Which characters are included depends on the
sequence in which you have entered your destination and the content of the destination memory.
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)
While the characters are being selected as
described below, the top list entry 1 always shows the destination which best
corresponds to the input data as it has
been entered up to that point.
At the same time, COMAND automatically
supplements characters 2 entered by the
user with appropriate characters 3.
왘
Changing language for the input
characters: Select !.
왘
Select desired language.
왘
Changing character set for the input
characters: Select #.
Depending on the previous setting, you
will change to letters with special characters or to numbers with special characters.
왘
왘
Selecting characters: Slide omp or
rotate ymz.
Confirming character selection:
Press n.
왘
Deleting individual characters:
Select ) in the bottom line and
press n.
왘
왘
Deleting an entire entry: Select ) in
the bottom line and press n until the
entire entry is deleted.
or
왘
Canceling an entry: Select “Back” in
the bottom line and press n.
or
왘
왘
Switching manually to the destination memory list without input characters: Slide qm.
Select ? in the second line from the
bottom and press n.
Destination memory list without input
characters
Press back button L in the center
console (컄 page 80).
As soon as COMAND can clearly attribute
the characters entered to a destination,
the input characters 4 disappear.
You see the destination memory list without input characters. Here you can confirm
the current entry or make another selection.
You can also manually switch to the destination memory list without input characters at any time.
왘
Selecting a destination: Slide qmr or
rotate ymz.
왘
Canceling selection: Press back button L in the center console
(컄 page 80).
컄컄
or
173
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)
컄컄 왘
Select “Back” and press n.
i The “Back” menu item is only present if this
list was called up from the list with input characters.
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
왘
Starting route calculation:
Select “Start”, see also (컄 page 171).
Entering a destination from the list of
last destinations
Entering a destination from the map
i Depending on the factory settings of the vehicle, it may not be possible to enter a destination while the vehicle exceeds a preset speed. As
soon as the vehicles speed drops to below the
preset speed, the function is available again.
You can enter a destination via the map if the digital map does not contain the address of the destination, but the destination must be within the
area of the digital map.
Calling up the map
왘
Select “Navi” “Destination” “From Last Destinations”.
왘
The list of last destinations appears.
The most recent destination is at the
top of the list.
왘
Select desired destination.
왘
Starting route calculation:
Select “Start”, see also (컄 page 171).
In the address input menu, select
“Map” (컄 page 153).
You will see the map with a crosshair.
The map is set to the address set in the
address input menu.
or
왘
Select “Navi” “Destination” “Via Map”.
You will see the map with a crosshair.
174
1 Crosshair
2 Details of the crosshair position
3 Map scale
i Display 2 may be the name of a road, for
example, provided the digital map contains the
necessary data.
If no data is available, display 2 shows:
앫
the coordinates if the geo-coordinate display
is switched on (컄 page 151)
앫
no display if the geo-coordinate display is
switched off (컄 page 151)
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)
Moving the map and selecting the destination
왘
Moving map: Slide qmr, omp or
wmx.
왘
Adjusting map scale: rotate ymz.
Rotating clockwise enlarges the map,
rotating counterclockwise reduces it.
왘
Selecting a destination: Press n.
If the crosshair is located off the edge
of the digital map, a route cannot be
calculated to this destination and you
will see the message “The destination is
located off the map.”.
If the destination can be attributed, you
will see the address of the destination.
If not, you will see the display “Destination from map”.
왘
Entering predefined destinations
왘
Select “Navi” “Destination” “Stopover”.
If a stopover has already been entered,
you can change it.
Starting route calculation:
Select “Start”, see also (컄 page 171).
왘
Entering a stopover
i When route guidance is active, you can enter a stopover. Stopovers can be predefined destinations from the following predefined
categories:
앫
“Mercedes-Benz Center”
앫
“Hospital”
왘
Select “OK”.
앫
“Gas station”
왘
Move the map and select a destination
again.
앫
“Parking lot”
앫
“Restaurant”
If the destination is within the limits of
the digital map, COMAND attempts to
attribute the destination to the map,
which can take approximately
2 seconds.
However, you can also enter destinations other
than the predefined ones.
i You can use the stopover function to influence the route guidance calculation to the main
destination. When you have reached your stopover, COMAND automatically calculates the
route to the main destination.
Changing: Select “Change Stopover”.
You can now select a category.
왘
Selecting a category:
Select category, e.g. “Gas station”.
COMAND first looks for destinations
within the immediate vicinity of the vehicle and near the vehicle’s route. If
there are no destinations available
there, COMAND searches for destinations in an area around the vehicle position.
If COMAND does not find any destinations, you will see a message to this effect.
왘
Select “OK”.
You can now select a different category.
컄컄
175
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)
컄컄
The left-hand part of the display shows
the destinations on the map. The destination marked in the list is highlighted
in the map.
왘
Selecting a destination: Select the
desired destination from list.
The address of the destination appears.
왘
왘
왘
왘
Select “Navi” “Destination” “Stopover”.
Entering: Select “Other”.
176
앫
“Address Entry”
앫
“From Memory”
앫
“From Last Destinations”
앫
“From POIs”
Select a menu item.
Subsequent destination entries may differ,
depending on your selection:
앫
“Address Entry” selection:
왘
앫
Starting route calculation:
Select “Start”, see also (컄 page 171).
Entering another destination as a stopover
왘
You can select between the following
menu items:
If COMAND finds destinations, you will
see a list of the destinations and details
of how far away they are in the
right-hand side of the display. The information about how far away the destinations are can take a few seconds to
be displayed.
앫
Starting route calculation: after entering a destination, select “Start”
(컄 page 171).
Changing a stopover
If a stopover has already been entered, you
can change it.
왘
Select “Navi” “Destination” “Stopover” “Change Stopover”.
왘
Enter another destination as a stopover.
“From Memory” selection:
Deleting the stopover
왘
If a stopover has already been entered, you
can delete it.
Enter a destination from the destination memory (컄 page 172).
“From Last Destinations” selection:
왘
앫
Enter a destination by address
(컄 page 153).
왘
Enter a special destination
(컄 page 177).
Enter a destination from the list of
last destinations (컄 page 174).
“From POIs” selection:
왘
Select “Navi” “Destination” “Stopover” “Delete Stopover”.
COMAND deletes the stopover and calculates the route to the main destination.
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (Point of interest entry)
왔 COMAND navigation system (Point of interest entry)
Entering a POI in the surrounding area
왘
왘
In the map view while the menu system
is displayed, select (컄 page 148) “Destination” “From POIs” “Current
Position”.
Continue with designating the POI category (컄 page 178).
Entering a POI in the surroundings of a
given town
왘
The town/city input menu appears.
왘
Then proceed as described in the “Entering a town or city” section
(컄 page 159).
왘
After entering the town or city, continue with designating the POI category
(컄 page 178).
왘
In the map view while the menu system
is displayed, select (컄 page 148) “Destination” “From POIs” “Other
Town”.
If necessary, enter state (USA)
(컄 page 154) or province (CDN)
(컄 page 154).
Entering a POI in a different region
i This function gives you quick access to POIs
which are of national interest in the state (USA)
or province (CDN) you have selected. The following categories may be available:
앫
“AIRPORT”
앫
“BORDER CROSSING”
앫
“HIGHWAY ACCESS”
Option 2
Not all categories are available in all states (USA)
or provinces (CDN).
왘
Enter an address in the address input
menu (컄 page 153).
왘
왘
Select “POI”.
왘
Continue with designating the POI category (컄 page 178).
Option 1
왘
Entering town: Select “Town”.
In the map view while the menu system
is displayed, select “Destination” “From POIs” “Global POI”
(컄 page 148).
The category list appears. The state
(USA) or province (CDN) currently selected is shown in the first list entry. 컄컄
177
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (Point of interest entry)
컄컄 왘
Selecting another state (USA) or
province (CDN): Select the first list
entry.
A list of states/provinces appears.
왘
Select desired state (USA) or province
(CDN).
Designating a POI category
The categories and POIs available depend
on the distance from the vehicle position
you have set for the POI.
앫
If there are no POIs for the selected
state (USA) or province (CDN), you will
see a corresponding message.
왘
Closing message: Select “OK”.
You can again select a state (province).
If there are POIs, you will see the category list again.
왘
Proceed as described in the “Selecting
a category” paragraph in the “Main category list without input characters”
section (컄 page 180).
178
If you have entered more than the state
(USA) or province (CDN) and the town
or city, alphabetically sorted categories
and POIs sorted by distance within a
radius of about 12 mi around the address entered are available.
You can extend the search radius and
the category selection using the list options (컄 page 183).
앫
POI in the surrounding area:
categories sorted alphabetically and
POIs sorted by distance within a radius
of about 12 mi around the vehicle position are available. You can extend the
search radius using the list options
(컄 page 183).
POI within a given town:
If you have only entered the state (USA)
or province (CDN) and the town or city,
alphabetically sorted categories and alphabetically sorted POIs within the
town/city are available.
앫
POIs in a different region:
Alphabetically sorted categories and
alphabetically sorted POIs are available.
Entering a category
Depending on the number of available categories, the main category list appears for
category entry either with or without input
characters (컄 page 180).
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (Point of interest entry)
Main category list with input characters
When this list appears, the input characters 5 are automatically activated.
i In the list of input characters 5, you can
only select currently selectable characters.
Which characters are included depends on the
sequence in which you have entered your destination and the data version of the digital map.
While the characters are being selected as
described below, the top list entry 1 always shows the category which best corresponds to the input data as it has been
entered up to that point.
1 Top list entry based on the input data
up to that point
2 Characters entered by the user
3 Characters automatically added by the
system
4 Symbol for available POIs or other
available subcategories
5 Input characters
6 Currently non-selectable characters
7 Currently selectable character
8 Currently selected character
9 Main category list
At the same time, COMAND automatically
supplements characters 2 entered by the
user with appropriate characters 3.
왘
Selecting characters: Slide omp or
rotate ymz.
왘
Confirming character selection:
Press n.
왘
Deleting individual characters:
Select ) in the bottom line and
press n.
왘
Deleting an entire entry: Select ) in
the bottom line and press n until the
entire entry is deleted.
왘
Canceling an entry: Select “Back” in
the bottom line and press n.
or
왘
Press back button L in the center
console (컄 page 80).
As soon as COMAND can clearly attribute
the characters entered to a category, the
input characters 5 disappear.
You see the list of main categories without
the input characters. Here you can confirm
the current entry or make another selection.
You can also manually switch to the main
category list without input characters at
any time.
왘
Switching manually to the main category list without input characters:
Slide qm.
or
왘
Select ? in the second line from the
bottom and press n.
179
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (Point of interest entry)
Main category list without input characters
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
Main categories with symbol 2 contain either POIs or subcategories. Further operation depends on whether the
selected main category contains subcategories or only POIs.
Selected main category contains subcategories:
Example illustration: main category list for
POIs in the surrounding area
1 Category
2 Symbol for available POIs or other
available subcategories
Selecting such a main category opens a list
of subcategories. The illustration below
shows by way of example the “RESTAURANT” main category with available subcategories 4.
1 Main category
2 To show all POIs for all subcategories
under category 1
3 Symbol for available POIs
4 Subcategory
왘
Selecting a subcategory: Slide qmr
or rotate ymz.
Canceling selection: Select “Back”
and press n.
왘
Selecting a main category: Slide
qmr or rotate ymz.
왘
왘
Canceling selection: Select “Back”
and press n.
or
or
왘
Press back button L in the center
console (컄 page 80).
180
왘
Press back button L in the center
console (컄 page 80).
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (Point of interest entry)
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
POI list
i Displays 1 and 2 are not visible if you
After selecting a subcategory, a list of
POIs appears. It contains the POIs
available within the search radius of
the subcategory.
Depending on the situation, COMAND first
shows the following list or the POI list with
input characters.
have already entered a POI within a particular
town or city. Displays 1 and 2 are static; they
do not change while you are driving.
i If you have selected list item 2, the POI list
contains all POIs for all subcategories within the
search radius of main category 1.
The illustration below shows by way of example the POI list for the “RESTAURANT”
main category, “FRENCH CUISINE” subcategory within the surrounding area.
Selected main category contains no subcategories, but only POIs:
In the POI list, you can either select a POI
or enter the name of the POI.
Selecting a POI
왘
Select desired POI.
The POI list disappears and the address
of the POI appears.
Selecting such a main category immediately opens a list of POIs. The POI list contains the available POIs within the search
radius of the main category.
왘
Back to POI list: Select “Back” and
press n.
or
1 Compass heading to the destination
2 Linear distance to the destination
3 Special destination
왘
Press back button L in the center
console (컄 page 80).
왘
Starting route calculation:
Select “Start”, see also (컄 page 171).
181
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (Point of interest entry)
Entering name of POI
POI list with input characters
While the characters are being selected as
described below, the top list entry 1 always shows the POI that best corresponds
to the input data as it has been entered up
to that point.
At the same time, COMAND automatically
supplements characters 2 entered by the
user with appropriate characters 3.
i For POIs in other regions, this list also shows
왘
Selecting characters: Slide omp or
rotate ymz.
왘
Confirming character selection:
Press n.
왘
Deleting individual characters:
Select ) in the bottom line and
press n.
왘
Deleting an entire entry: Select ) in
the bottom line and press n until the
entire entry is deleted.
i In the list of input characters 4, you can
왘
only select currently selectable characters.
Which characters are included depends on the
sequence in which you have entered your destination and the data version of the digital map.
Canceling an entry: Select “Back” in
the bottom line and press n.
or
왘
Select “Options” “Spell”.
The POI list appears with input characters; the input characters are automatically activated.
the compass heading to the destination as well
as the linear distance to the destination, as in the
previous illustration.
182
1 Top list entry based on the input data
up to that point
2 Characters entered by the user
3 Characters automatically added by the
system
4 Input characters
5 Currently selectable character
6 Currently non-selectable characters
7 POI list
8 Currently selected character
왘
Press back button L in the center
console (컄 page 80).
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (Point of interest entry)
As soon as COMAND can clearly attribute
the characters entered to a POI, the input
characters 4 disappear.
POI list without input characters
Options in category and POI lists
You see the POI list without input characters. Here you can confirm the current entry or make another selection.
You can also manually switch to the POI
list without input characters at any time.
왘
Switching manually to the POI list
without input characters: Slide qm.
왘
or
왘
Select ? in the second line from the
bottom and press n.
List options
왘
Selecting a destination: Slide qmr or
rotate ymz.
Canceling selection: Select “Back”
and press n.
or
왘
Press back button L in the center
console (컄 page 80).
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
왘
Starting route calculation:
Select “Start”, see also (컄 page 171).
If you enter a POI in the surrounding area,
initially, only categories and POIs within a
radius of approx. 12 mi around the vehicle
position are available.
The same applies if you enter a POI within
a given town or city and have previously
entered more than the state (USA) or province (CDN) and the city or town.
If you expand the list, the search radius increases to around 90 mi. This gives you access to all categories and POIs within a
radius of about 90 mi.
왘
Expanding list: In one of the lists select “Options” “Expand Search” lists,
select.
The list is expanded.
183
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (Point of interest entry)
Options only in POI lists
왘
Displaying details of the selected
entry: Select “Options” “Details”.
The POI closest to the center of the
screen is automatically marked.
If there are no POIs available, the
“Back” menu item is automatically
highlighted and you cannot select other menu items.
왘
Selecting a POI: Select “Next” or “Previous”.
The next or the previous POI is marked.
왘
Displaying details of the selection:
Select “Details”.
왘
Entering a POI from the map
Starting route calculation:
Select “Start”, see also (컄 page 171).
i If the crosshair is shown on the map, you
A prompt appears asking whether the
POI should be used as the destination.
The detailed view appears.
왘
Closing detailed view: Select “OK”.
can enter POIs in the vicinity of the crosshair.
If the crosshair is not shown on the map, you can
enter POIs in the vicinity of the vehicle’s current
position.
왘
왘
If you select “Yes”, the route calculation begins. If you select “No”, you can
select a new POI.
Select “Guide” in the map view with the
menu system displayed (컄 page 148).
You will see POI symbols on the map,
depending on whether POIs are available and which map scale is set.
The scale at which the symbols are displayed on the map varies according to
the symbol.
You can set which symbols COMAND
should display (컄 page 151).
184
Select “Yes” or “No”.
1 Highlighted POI
2 Information about the highlighted POI
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (route guidance)
왔 COMAND navigation system (route guidance)
Route guidance
Warning!
G
COMAND calculates the route to the destination without taking account of the following, for example:
For this reason, you must always observe
applicable road and traffic rules and regulations during your journey. Road and traffic
rules and regulations always have priority
over the navigation commands generated by
the system.
COMAND guides you to the destination using navigation commands in the form of
audible navigation announcements and
route guidance displays.
앫
Traffic lights
앫
Stop and right-of-way signs
앫
Parking or stopping prohibited areas
앫
Lane merges
i The route guidance displays can only be
앫
Other road and traffic rules and regulations
seen if the display is switched to navigation
mode.
앫
Narrow bridges
If, for any reason, you do not follow the
navigation commands or if you leave the
calculated route, COMAND automatically
calculates a new route to the destination.
COMAND may give incorrect navigation
commands if the data in the digital map
does not correspond with the actual
road/traffic situation. For example, if the
traffic routing has been changed or the direction of a one-way road has been reversed.
Roads that have time restrictions (e.g.
closed on Sundays and public holidays) are
not considered for route guidance, if the
digital map contains the relevant information.
Examples of displays and announcements for a driving maneuver
Driving maneuvers have three phases:
앫
Preparation phase
앫
Announcement phase
앫
Maneuver phase
If the map data contains the relevant information, COMAND tries to avoid roads that
only have limited access, e.g. roads closed
to through-traffic and non-residents.
185
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (route guidance)
Preparation phase
Announcement phase
COMAND prepares you for the upcoming
driving maneuver. Based on the example
display below, the driving maneuver is announced with the “Prepare to turn left”
message. The display is not split and
shows the map over the full screen.
COMAND announces the next driving maneuver. Based on the example display below, the driving maneuver is announced
700 feet in advance with the “Turn left in
700 feet to your destination” message.
The display is divided in two. In the left
half, you see the normal map view. In the
right half, there is either an enlarged view
of the area surrounding the intersection
(intersection zoom) or simply a symbol for
the next driving maneuver.
The following example illustration shows
the intersection zoom in the right half.
1 Point at which the driving maneuver
takes place (light blue dot)
2 Route (highlighted blue)
3 Current vehicle position; the triangle
points in the vehicle’s direction of travel
186
1 Next road
2 Driving maneuver (turn left)
3 Graphical representation of the distance to the driving maneuver
4 Point at which the driving maneuver
takes place (light blue dot, shown in
both the left and right displays)
5 Information about distance to the next
driving maneuver
6 Route (highlighted in blue; shown in
both the left and right displays)
7 Current vehicle position; the triangle indicates the vehicle’s direction of travel
(shown in both the left and right displays)
8 Street on which you are currently driving, if included on the digital map
9 Destination
i The filled-in section of distance graphic 3
gets shorter the nearer you get to the announced
driving maneuver.
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (route guidance)
Maneuver phase
COMAND announces the next driving maneuver. Based on the example display below, the driving maneuver is announced
150 feet in advance with the “Now turn
left” message. The display is also split into
two halves, as for the announcement
phase.
Example of a display without driving
maneuvers
Once you have reached your destination,
you will hear the announcement “You have
reached the destination”. For certain POIs
(airports or highway junctions), you will
hear the announcement “You have reached
the destination area”. In addition, you will
see a corresponding display and route
guidance is automatically ended.
i Once the maneuver is completed, COMAND
automatically switches back to the non-split
screen.
1 Graphical representation of the distance to the next driving maneuver
2 Information about distance to the next
driving maneuver
Destination or destination area
reached
1 Main destination <
2 Stopover = (only visible if a stopover
has been entered)
3 Route (highlighted blue)
4 Current vehicle position; the triangle indicates the vehicle’s direction of travel
5 Set map orientation – for an explanation and settings, see (컄 Seite 150)
6 Set scale – for an explanation and settings, see (컄 Seite 149)
1 Destination on the map
2 Destination flag
187
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (route guidance)
Partially digitized areas
If the destination is within a partially
digitized area
i The digital map may contain areas that are
G
COMAND guides you through fully digitized
areas for as long as possible. Route guidance is conducted in the usual manner, i.e.
with navigation announcements and route
guidance displays.
Due to incomplete digitization, the route
shown on the map may differ from the actual
road/traffic situation.
Before the vehicle reaches a partially digitized area, COMAND notifies you of this
with the following announcements:
only partially digitized although they are within a
digitized region.
Warning!
If you follow the route shown on the map, for
example, it is possible that you could drive
the wrong way down a one-way street or
that a street cannot be driven on.
When using route guidance in a partially digitized area, you must therefore be sure to
observe all relevant traffic regulations and
the course of the road.
All relevant traffic regulations and the
course of the road always take priority over
the route shown on the map.
188
앫
“Be prepared to enter an area where
turn by turn guidance cannot be provided.”
앫
“In 700 feet you will enter an area
where turn by turn guidance cannot be
provided.”
i The indicated distance can be seen here by
way of example. In reality, it may be different.
앫
“You are about to enter an area where
turn by turn guidance cannot be provided.”
i When you call up the route info to this type
of destination, (컄 page 193) the following data
shown there may differ from the actual situation:
앫
Distance to the destination
앫
Estimated driving time to the destination
앫
Estimated arrival time
Route guidance within a partially digitized area
If you start route guidance in this type of
area, you will hear the following announcement: “You are currently in an area where
turn by turn guidance cannot be provided.”
Route guidance is provided by means of a
direction arrow showing the compass
heading to the destination. COMAND will
not generate automatic navigation announcements.
If you try to call up an announcement manually, (컄 page 191) you will hear the announcement “You are currently in an area
where turn by turn guidance cannot be provided.”.
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (route guidance)
During route guidance, the display is divided. On the right-hand side you will see the
direction arrow showing the compass
heading to the destination.
On the left-hand side of the display you will
see the map with the suggested route. The
suggested route is highlighted blue. However, it may not be possible to follow the
suggested route because, for example, the
road is closed or not open for car traffic.
If, during route guidance, COMAND leads
you back into a fully digitalized area, route
guidance will simply continue in the usual
manner.
Off-road and off-map
Route guidance to an off-road destination
Warning!
G
The COMAND navigation system may direct
you to off-road routes that your vehicle may
not be capable of traversing through without
damaging your tires, wheels or vehicle. It is
the driver’s sole responsibility to determine
the suitability of the route. Off-road routes
may be of varying conditions and their appropriateness for use may be affected by
various factors such as time of day, time of
year and immediate weather conditions that
cannot be judged or taken into consideration by the COMAND system.
COMAND can guide you to destinations
within the area covered by the digital map,
even if a destination is not located at a
road known to the system.
These destinations are shown as off-road
destinations, which you can enter using
the map, for example.
In these cases, COMAND guides you for as
long as possible with navigation announcements and displays on roads known to the
system.
Shortly before you reach the last known
the point to leave the digitized road network, you will hear the announcement “The
destination is nearby. Follow the arrow on
the display”.
You will then see an arrow that indicates
the direction to the off-road destination.
When the off-road destination is close to
the road, “Area of dest. reached” appears
in addition below the arrow.
The section of the route from the last
known point on the map to the off-road
destination is indicated with a dashed line
after a certain length. It simply shows the
direction to the off-road destination without taking account of any type of obstacles
in the way.
189
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (route guidance)
Route guidance from an off-road location to a destination
If there is no road available on map at current position of the car, vehicle is off road.
COMAND is also able to guide you to a destination from such a location.
1 Current vehicle position; the triangle indicates the vehicle’s direction of travel
2 Off-road section of the route
3 Off-road destination
4 Direction arrow, shows compass heading to destination
On the off-road section of the route, direction arrows showing the compass heading
to the destination guide you. You will also
see the “Direction to destination” display.
The route is highlighted blue from the nearest road known to the system.
At the start of the route guidance, you will
see the “Off Road” message and a direction arrow. The direction arrow shows the
compass heading to the actual destination.
As soon as the vehicle is back on a road
known to the system, route guidance continues in the usual way.
The route is highlighted blue from the nearest road known to the system.
The road layout may differ from the data on
the digital map, due to road construction
measures, for example.
As soon as the vehicle is back on a road
known to the system, route guidance continues in the usual way.
Route guidance from an off-map location to a destination
If the vehicle position is outside the area
covered by the digital map, then the vehicle is in an off-map location.
COMAND is also able to guide you to a destination from such a location.
190
At the start of the route guidance, you will
see the “Off Map” message and a direction
arrow. The direction arrow shows the compass heading to the actual destination.
Off-road during route guidance
In such cases, the system cannot allocate
the vehicle’s position to the digital map
and the vehicle is therefore in an off-road
position.
The “Off Road” message and an arrow
showing the compass heading to the destination appear on the display.
As soon as the system can allocate the vehicle position’s to the map again, route
guidance continues in the usual way.
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (route guidance)
왘
Navigation announcements
Warning!
G
Navigation announcements are intended to
direct you while driving without diverting
your attention from the road and driving.
Please always use this feature instead of
consulting the map display for directions.
Consulting the symbols or map display for
directions may cause you to divert your attention from driving and increase your risk
of an accident.
i If Russian or Chinese is set as the system
language, the navigation announcements are in
English. You will find how to set the system language on (컄 page 216).
Navigation announcements are muted during
telephone calls. You can, however, call up a current announcement at any time. You can also
call up a current announcement at any time if
you have missed an announcement.
Calling up a current announcement:
Select “Navi” 6.
or
왘
Press P favorite button if the button
has been programmed with this function.
i You will find the button programming on
(컄 page 216).
왘
Canceling navigation message:
Briefly press F shortcut button during an announcement.
왘
Switching off navigation messages:
Press and hold F during an announcement until the announcement is
switched off.
You will see the message “The driving
instructions have been muted.” for a
short while.
i The announcements remain switched off
even if you start a new route guidance or if
COMAND is switched off/on with the o button.
If you switch COMAND off by removing the
SmartKey from the starter switch and then
switch the ignition back on after more than
3 minutes, the announcements are automatically switched back on.
왘
Switching navigation announcements back on manually:
Select “Navi” 6.
왘
Adjusting volume of the messages:
adjust the volume during an automatic
announcement (컄 page 89).
or
왘
Call up an announcement manually using “Navi” 6 and adjust the volume (컄 page 89).
Route guidance is already active.
191
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (during route guidance)
Cancel route guidance
왘
Select “Destination” “Cancel Route
Guidance” in map view with the menu
system displayed (컄 page 148).
Continuing cancelled route guidance
왘
Select “Destination” “Continue
Route Guidance” in map view with the
menu system displayed (컄 page 148).
Route browser
i The information 3 about the marked route
i The route browser shows an overview of the
section shows the street name and the length of
the route section. Marked route section 1 is always highlighted in white and outlined in red.
route. You can use the route browser to move
along the route section by section and view information about and details of each section of the
route.
왘
Select “Route” “Route Browser” in
map view with the menu system displayed (컄 page 148).
The route browser appears.
COMAND calculates the route.
1 Highlighted route section
2 Current vehicle position; the triangle indicates the vehicle’s direction of travel
3 Information about the highlighted route
section
192
왘
Displaying next or previous route
section: Select “Next” or “Previous”.
왘
Increasing or reducing size of the
map: Select ; or :.
왘
Closing route browser:
Select “Back”.
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (during route guidance)
Displaying route information
왘
i COMAND uses the time set in COMAND as
the basis for calculating the estimated arrival
time. The clock must be set correctly in
COMAND (컄 page 213). The calculation of the
estimated arrival time does not additionally take
into account whether Daylight Saving Time or
standard time is applicable at the destination. If
the destination is in a different time zone, arrival
time display 8 is in local time. This is indicated
by “LT” in the display.
Select “Route” “Route Info” in map
view with the menu system displayed
(컄 page 148).
The route information appears.
Example display with main destination and
stopover
1 Distance to the destination
2 Symbol = for stopover
3 Abbreviation for province (CDN) or
state (USA)
4 Town/city
5 Street
6 Symbol < for main destination
7 Estimated driving time to the destination
8 Estimated arrival time
The following data cannot be seen until the route
calculation has been completed:
앫
Distance to destination 1
앫
Estimated arrival time 8
앫
Estimated remaining travel time 7
If the destination is located within a partially digitized area, the following data may differ from the
facts:
앫
Distance to destination 1
앫
Estimated arrival time 8
앫
Estimated remaining travel time 7
왘
Closing route info: Slide omp or
press back button L in the center
console (컄 page 80).
193
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (during route guidance)
Detour function
왘
Starting route calculation:
Select “Start”, see also (컄 page 171).
i The detour function blocks a section of the
왘
Deleting blockage: Select “Navi” “Route” “Detour” “Delete”.
왘
Select “Back”.
route ahead of you. You can set the length of the
blockage. If possible, COMAND calculates a detour route.
i The Detour function may direct you to
off-road routes. See Off-road and Off-map for additional routes and cautions (컄 page 189).
왘
Select “Route” “Detour” in map view
with the menu system displayed
(컄 page 148).
The detour function display appears.
왘
Setting length of the blockage:
Select “More” or “Less” until the desired length is set.
194
1 Blocked route section
2 Current vehicle position; the triangle indicates the vehicle’s direction of travel
3 Information about the blocked route
section
i Blocked route section 1 is always highlighted in red/white. The information about blocked
route section 3 shows which section of the
route is blocked and the length of the blocked
section.
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (destination memory)
왔 COMAND navigation system (destination memory)
Saving a destination in the destination
memory
i This function also saves the destination in
the address book. There COMAND creates an
address book entry containing complete, navigable address data. You can then select this entry
in the address book and start navigation to the
address.
Saving after the address has been entered
왘
Select “Save” after entering the address (컄 page 153).
Saving a destination from the list of last
destinations
왘
Select desired destination.
The address of the destination is displayed.
왘
Select “Save”.
Select desired category, e.g. “Home”.
COMAND saves the destination in the
destination memory as your own address.
Select “Navi” “Destination” “From Last Destinations”.
The list of last destinations appears.
왘
왘
Saving a destination with a name
왘
Select “Save new entry”.
왘
Select desired category, e.g. “Home”.
The input menu appears with the data
fields and the input characters.
You can now select save options.
Selecting save options
You can now select save options.
Saving a destination without a name
Saving during route guidance
왘
Select “Destination” “Save Destination” during route guidance.
왘
Select “Save Without Name”.
COMAND saves the destination in the
destination memory and uses the address as the destination name.
You can now select save options.
or
왘
Select “Save as ’My Address’.”
1 Selected data field with input mark
(cursor)
2 Input characters
195
컄컄
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (destination memory)
컄컄 왘
Entering data: Proceed as described
in the “Changing the data field” operating step in the “Creating a new address
book entry” section (컄 page 203).
왘
If the selected address book entry does
not yet contain any navigable address
data, COMAND saves the data.
Assigning a destination to an address
book entry
i This function assigns the complete, naviga-
If the selected address book entry already contains navigable address data,
you will see a question asking you if the
previous data should be overwritten.
ble address data to an already existing address
book entry. You can then select this entry in the
address book and start navigation to the address
from there.
왘
Select “Assign Address Book Entry”.
왘
Select desired category, e.g. “Home”.
The menu appears for searching for an
address book entry.
Select desired address book entry. Proceed as described in the “Searching for
an address book entry” section
(컄 page 204).
왘
Deleting a destination from the destination memory
왘
Select “Navi” “Destination” “From Memory”.
Depending on the number of entries in
the destination memory, you will see
the destination memory list with or
without input characters.
Select “Yes” or “No”.
If you select “Yes”, COMAND saves the
data.
Example illustration: destination memory
list without input characters
196
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (destination memory)
i If the navigable address data of the destination to be deleted has also been assigned to an
address book entry, COMAND deletes the data
there as well. If the corresponding address book
entry does not contain any further data, such as
telephone numbers, COMAND deletes the entire
address book entry.
Own address
Example illustration: destination memory
list with input characters
1 Input characters
왘
왘
Select desired destination. Proceed as
described for destination entry in the
“Entering a destination from the destination memory” section (컄 page 172).
Select “Delete” after selecting the destination to be deleted.
A prompt appears asking whether you
want to delete the destination.
왘
Select “Yes” or “No”.
If you select “Yes”, COMAND deletes
the destination.
i The destination memory always contains an
entry called “My Address”. You can save your
home address, for example, under this entry.
Assigning your address for the first
time or changing your own address
Example illustration: destination memory
list without input characters
In the destination memory list without input characters, the “My Address” entry is
automatically highlighted.
컄컄
Assigning and/or changing your own address
왘
Select “Navi” “Destination” “From Memory”.
Depending on the number of entries in
the destination memory, you will see
the destination memory list with or
without input characters.
197
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (destination memory)
왘
컄컄
Destination memory list with input
characters: Slide qm repeatedly until
the input characters disappear.
The list entry “My Address” is automatically highlighted as long as you have
not entered any characters using the
input characters.
왘
Example illustration: destination memory
list with input characters
1 Input characters
In the destination memory list with input
characters 1, the input characters are automatically activated.
왘
Destination memory list without input characters: Press n immediately.
or
198
왘
If you have entered characters
from the list of input characters:
Rotate ymz or slide qm repeatedly
until the list entry “My Address” is
highlighted.
Entering an address manually
왘
or
왘
If you want to change your own address: Select “Change” “Save new
entry”.
In both cases, the address input menu
appears.
왘
Enter the address. Proceed as described for destination entry in the “Entering a destination by address”
section (컄 page 153).
왘
Select “Save” after entering the address.
Press n.
Further operation depends on whether
you want to enter the address manually
or use an address book entry as your
own address.
If you want to assign your own address for the first time: Select “Save
new entry”.
Your address is saved.
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (destination memory)
Using the address book entry as your
own address
왘
If you want to assign your own address for the first time:
Select “Assign Address Book Entry”.
or
왘
If you want to change your own address: Select “Change” “Assign Address Book Entry”.
In both cases, the menu appears for
searching for an address book entry.
왘
Select desired address book entry. Proceed as described in the “Searching for
an address book entry” section
(컄 page 204).
Once the address data is complete and
if it matches the digital map data,
COMAND saves the entry as your own
address in the destination memory.
If address data is still missing or if it
cannot be found on the digital map, a
message appears indicating that the
address is incomplete.
왘
Closing message: Select “OK”.
i In the address book entry, the town/city
and street must be spelled in the same way as
the destination entry so that the data matches
the digital map data.
In order for the state (USA) or province (CDN) to
match the map data, you may either enter the
entire name or the abbreviation in the address
book.
왘
Selecting a state (USA) or province
(CDN): Select desired state (USA) or
province (CDN) from the list.
왘
Entering a town: Proceed as described for destination entry in the “Entering a town or city” section
(컄 page 159).
왘
Entering a street: Proceed as described for destination entry in the “Entering a street” section (컄 page 161).
왘
Entering a house number: Proceed
as described for destination entry in
the “Entering a house number” section
(컄 page 166).
Examples:
앫
Florida or FL
앫
Colorado or CO
앫
Alberta or AB
앫
Ontario or ON
Depending on which data is missing or
cannot be found on the digital map, you
must now either:
앫
Select a state (USA) or province (CDN)
앫
or enter a town/city
앫
or enter a street
앫
or enter a house number
If all data is available and matches the
digital map data, you can save the address.
왘
Saving: Select “Save”.
199
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (destination memory)
Displaying your own address
왘
Select “Navi” “Destination” “From Memory”.
The destination memory list appears either with or without the input characters. Whether the input characters
appear depends on the number of entries in the destination memory.
왘
왘
Press n.
Press n.
왘
If your own address has already been
assigned, you will see the menu for
starting route guidance with your own
address data.
왘
Slide qm repeatedly until the input
characters disappear.
The list entry “My Address” is automatically highlighted as long as you have
not entered any characters using the
input characters.
Exiting menu: Select “Back”.
왘
Destination memory list with input characters
Destination memory list without input
characters
왘
If you have entered characters
from the list of input characters:
Rotate ymz or slide qm repeatedly
until the list entry “My Address” is
highlighted.
Press n.
If your own address has already been
assigned, you will see the menu for
starting route guidance with your own
address data.
왘
1 Input characters
In the destination memory list without input characters, the “My Address” entry is
automatically highlighted.
200
In the destination memory list with input
characters 1, the input characters are automatically activated.
Exiting menu: Select “Back”.
Control systems
COMAND navigation system (last destinations)
왔 COMAND navigation system (last destinations)
i COMAND automatically saves the last destinations for which the route calculation was
launched. It is stored in the “last destinations”
memory. If this memory is full, COMAND deletes
the oldest destination. You can also save one
destination from the list of last destinations in
the destination memory. It will be saved there
permanently.
Saving a destination permanently in
the destination memory
왘
Proceed as described in the “Saving a
destination from the list of last destinations” section (컄 page 195).
Saving the vehicle position in the list of
last destinations
왘
왘
Centering map on the vehicle’s position: Select “Navi” “Position” “Vehicle Position Map”.
Saving: Select “Navi” “Position” “Save Position”.
COMAND saves the current vehicle position as a destination in the list of last
destinations.
Saving the crosshair position in the list
of last destinations
왘
Showing menu system, if necessary: Press n.
왘
Select “Position” “Save Position”.
COMAND saves the crosshair position
as a destination in the list of last destinations.
Deleting one of the last destinations
왘
The list of last destinations appears.
왘
Select desired destination.
The address of the destination appears.
i If you have manually moved the map, you
will see a crosshair on the map (컄 Seite 149).
You can save the crosshair position as a destination in the list of last destinations.
Select “Navi” “Destination” “From Last Destinations”.
왘
Select “Delete”.
왘
Select “Yes” or “No”.
201
Control systems
COMAND address book
General notes
Address book menu overview
The address book contains the entries that
are saved in the COMAND address book
memory. The entries are permanently
available even if the phone is not inserted
in the cradle*. When you insert the mobile
phone into the cradle*, COMAND reads-in
the phone book entries saved in the mobile
phone and stores the entries as a separate
list from the COMAND address book. This
list is a copy of the phone’s phone book.
This can take several minutes, depending
on how many entries the phone book and
the address book contain. After the read-in
process, the COMAND compares the
phone book entries with the address book
entries. If all of the telephone numbers of a
phone book entry in the mobile phone are
present in an address book entry, the address book shows only the address book
entry. If not, the address book also shows
the phone book entry in the mobile phone.
i The components and operating principles of
202
COMAND can be found on (컄 page 79).
Search
New Entry
Search for an address book entry
Create new address
book entry
Calling up the address book
왘
Select “Telephone” “Telephone” “Address Book”.
The main address book display appears. If the address book already contains entries, you will see the data of an
entry.
Illustration: address book entry
i For phone book entries in the mobile phone
that contain a name and a telephone number,
you will see the name and the number. If a phone
book entry in the mobile phone contains several
telephone numbers, you will see the message
“Multiple Numbers” instead of a telephone number.
Selecting an entry in the main address
book display
왘
Slide omp or rotate ymz until the
main area is selected.
Control systems
COMAND address book
왘
Creating a new address book entry
i Please observe the following when creating
a new address book entry:
You can define your own address in the destination memory in navigation mode. When defining
the address, you can transfer data already entered as an address book entry.
In the address book entry, the town/city and
street must be spelled in the same way as the
destination entry so that the data matches the
digital map data.
In order for the state (province) to match the
map data, its complete name or abbreviation
may be entered.
Examples:
앫
Florida or FL
앫
Colorado or CO
앫
Alberta or AB
앫
Ontario or ON
왘
Select “Telephone” “Telephone” “Address Book” “New Entry”.
The input menu appears with the data
fields and the input characters.
Changing data field: Slide rmq repeatedly until desired entry is highlighted.
or
왘
Select [ or ] repeatedly until desired entry is highlighted.
왘
Entering data into a field:
Select desired characters one by one
from the input characters.
왘
Toggling upper and lower case for
the input characters: Select & or
(.
왘
Changing language for the input
characters: Select !.
왘
Select desired language.
왘
Changing character set for the input
characters: Select #.
Illustration: input menu for private data
1 To switch between work and home
data (
or
symbol)
2 Selected data field with input mark
(cursor)
3 Display of set data type – in example
display, home data is set (
symbol
and “Home” display)
4 Input characters
왘
Switching between private and
business data: Select symbol 1.
The display switches to private or business data, depending on the previous
status.
Depending on the previous setting, you
will change to letters with special characters or to numbers with special characters.
컄컄
203
Control systems
COMAND address book
컄컄 왘
왘
Moving cursor in the data field:
Select Y or Z.
Deleting individual characters:
Select ) and briefly press n.
The character to the left of the cursor is
deleted.
왘
Deleting an entire entry: Select )
and press and hold n until the entry is
deleted.
왘
Saving an entry: Select ?.
왘
Canceling an entry: Select “Back”.
If one of the data fields contains new
data, a prompt will appear asking
whether you want to save the entry.
왘
Select “Yes” or “No”.
The entry will either be saved or
not, depending on your selection.
204
Deleting an entry
Searching for an address book entry
i You cannot delete phone book entries from
왘
the mobile phone.
왘
Search for desired entry (컄 page 204).
왘
Select “Options” “Delete”.
Select “Telephone” “Telephone” “Address Book” “Search”.
The search menu appears with the
smart speller.
A deletion prompt appears.
왘
Select “Yes” or “No”.
The entry will either be deleted or not,
depending on your selection.
1 Symbol
for complete address data
from the navigation system
2 Symbol
for summarized entries
from the mobile phone with the same
name but different telephone numbers
3 Category symbol
4 Smart speller
5 Symbol
for voice entry
6 Back to the main address book display
Control systems
COMAND address book
Entries with category symbol 3 come
from the mobile phone. The following category symbols are possible:
Entries with the
symbol contain complete, navigable address data from the navigation system that correspond to digital
map data. It is possible to quickly start
route guidance to these types of entry
(컄 page 209).
앫
= symbol for “Mobile” category
앫
= symbol for “Home” category
앫
= symbol for “Work” category
앫
= symbol for “Fax” category
Switching from the smart speller to the
list
앫
= symbol for “Pager” category
왘
앫
= symbol for “Main” category or for
unknown category or for phone entries
that are saved on the SIM card of a
GSM mobile phone
Entries without a category symbol or with
the
or
symbols come from the
COMAND address book. All other entries
come from the mobile phone and are only
visible when the mobile phone is in the cradle*.
Entries with the
symbol contain a voice
entry (컄 page 210). It is possible to add
voice entries in vehicles with Voice Control*.
Slide mq repeatedly or press n until
the smart speller is hidden.
왘
Changing smart speller language:
Select !.
왘
Select desired language.
왘
Changing smart speller character
set: Select #.
Depending on the previous setting, you
will change to letters with special characters or to numbers with special characters.
왘
Entering characters: Select the characters one by one of the entry you are
searching for.
왘
Deleting individual characters:
Select ) and briefly press n.
or
왘
Select ?.
Switching from the list to the smart
speller
왘
Searching
Searching via the smart speller
왘
Each time you enter or delete a character, the closest match will be displayed
at the top of the list.
Select “Back” from the list.
왘
Deleting an entire entry: Select )
and press and hold n until the entry is
deleted.
컄컄
Switch from the list to the smart speller
if necessary.
205
Control systems
COMAND address book
컄컄 왘
Canceling search: Switch from the
smart speller to the list (컄 page 205).
The entry at the top of the list is automatically highlighted.
왘
Going back to main address book
display: If necessary, switch from the
list to the smart speller (컄 page 205)
and select “Back” in the smart speller.
왘
Select an address book entry in the
main address book menu
(컄 page 202).
i The options available under “Options” menu
item 4 depend on which data field 3 is selected. The following options may be available:
왘
Press n.
앫
Displaying abbreviated content in full
(컄 page 207)
The detailed view appears.
앫
Changing an address book entry
((컄 page 207)
앫
Changing the description of a telephone
number data field (컄 page 208)
앫
Adding a telephone number data field
(컄 page 208)
Searching via the list
왘
If necessary, switch from the smart
speller to the list (컄 page 205).
앫
Calling a number saved in an entry
(컄 page 209)
왘
Rotate ymz or slide qmr until desired
entry is highlighted on the list.
앫
Starting route guidance to an entry
(컄 page 209)
앫
Options for voice entries (컄 page 210)
Illustration: detailed view for private data
Displaying a complete address book entry
Searching for the desired entry
왘
Search for an address book entry
(컄 page 204).
or
206
1 To go back to the previous menu
2 To switch between work and home
data (
symbol or
)
3 Selected data field
4 Display of set data type – in example
display, home data is set (
symbol
and “Home” display)
5 To call up options
Switching between private or business
data
왘
Select symbol 2.
The display switches to private or business data, depending on the previous
status.
Control systems
COMAND address book
Selecting a different data field
왘
Rotate ymz or slide qmr.
Displaying abbreviated content in full
왘
왘
Select “Options” “Details”.
왘
Select a phone book entry from the
mobile phone using the COMAND
address book menu (컄 page 202).
i The options available under “Options” menu
Press n.
앫
Changing a a phone book entry in the mobile
phone (컄 page 207)
The detailed view appears.
앫
Calling a number saved in an entry
((컄 page 209)
앫
Saving a phone book entry from mobile
phone in the address book (컄 page 212)
item 4 depend on which data field 3 is selected. The following options may be available:
The display is shown in full.
왘
Closing entire display: Slide qmr or
omp or press n.
Closing the detailed view
Closing the detailed view
왘
왘
Select “Back”.
Displaying of a complete phone book
entry in the mobile phone
Changing an entry
Searching for the desired entry
1 To go back to the previous menu
2 Category symbol
3 Display for phone book entry in mobile
phone
4 To call up options
왘
i If a phone book entry in the mobile phone
i The mobile phone must be inserted in the
cradle*.
or
Search for phone book entry in mobile
phone (컄 page 204).
Select “Back”.
has more than one telephone number, you will
see all telephone numbers with the respective
category symbol 2 in the detailed view.
i You cannot change address book entries
that come from the phone book in the mobile
phone.
Changing an address book entry
왘
Search for an address book entry
(컄 page 204) then, select “Options” “Change”.
컄컄
or
207
Control systems
COMAND address book
컄컄 왘
COMAND saves the data if there are
fewer than four numbers assigned to
the entry you are searching for in the
selected number category.
Display the details of an address book
entry (컄 page 206) then, select “Options” “Change Content”.
The input menu appears with the data
fields.
왘
Proceed as described in the “Switching
between private and business data”
paragraph in the Creating a new address book entry section (컄 Seite 203).
Otherwise, you will see a prompt asking whether one of the existing numbers should be overwritten.
왘
i This function is not possible for phone book
entries in the mobile phone.
왘
왘
Display the details of an entry and highlight the telephone number data field
(컄 page 206).
Select “Options” “Change Entry
Name”.
왘
Select a number category, e.g. “Home”.
왘
Select a telephone category, e.g. “Land
Line”.
왘
Select “Save”.
208
왘
Display the details of an entry and highlight the telephone number data field
(컄 page 206).
왘
Select “Options” “Add Number”.
왘
Select a number category, e.g. “Home”.
왘
Select a telephone category, e.g. “Land
Line”.
왘
Select “Save”.
Select “Yes” or “No”.
If you select “Yes”, a selection list will
appear containing the four existing
numbers.
Changing the description of a telephone number data field
왘
Select number to be overwritten.
COMAND overwrites the selected number with the new data.
Adding to a telephone number data
field
i One address book entry may contain up to
four data fields for private telephone numbers
and four data fields for business telephone numbers.
This function is not possible for phone book entries in the mobile phone.
COMAND adds the data field to the entry if
there are fewer than four numbers assigned to the entry in the selected number
category. You can now enter a number into
the data field.
왘
Proceed as described from the “Entering data into a field” operating step in
the Creating a new address book entry
section (컄 Seite 203).
If four numbers are already saved for the
entry in the selected number category, a
prompt will appear asking whether one of
the data fields should be overwritten.
Control systems
COMAND address book
왘
Select “Yes” or “No”.
왘
If you select “Yes”, a selection list will
appear containing the four data fields.
왘
Select field to be overwritten.
COMAND deletes the number of the selected field. You can now enter a new
number into the data field.
왘
Proceed as described from the “Entering data into a field” operating step in
the Creating a new address book entry
section (컄 Seite 203).
Calling a number saved in an entry
i To do this, COMAND must be equipped with
Select “Options” “Call”.
In both cases, the telephone* connects
the call.
Address data is complete and matches
digital map
If “Navigate” is selected, the navigation
system starts the route calculation.
Starting route guidance to an entry
왘
Search for an address book entry
(컄 page 204).
왘
Display the details of an entry and highlight the address data field
(컄 page 206).
왘
Select “Options” “Navigate”.
or
왘
Press n.
Address data is incomplete or does not
match digital map
i For the route calculation, the navigation system requires the correct spellings of the state
(province), the town/city or zip code, the street
and under some circumstances, the house number. The town/city and street must be spelled in
the same manner as the destination entry.
The state (province) can be spelled as an entire
name or as an abbreviation.
Examples:
a telephone*. The mobile phone must be inserted in the cradle*.
i Pressing n only functions if one of the ad-
앫
Florida or FL
dress data fields contains data.
앫
Colorado or CO
왘
Further operation depends on whether the
address data is complete and matches the
digital map data of the navigation system.
It does not match, for example, if it is not
spelled in the same way as the destination
entry.
앫
Alberta or AB
앫
Ontario or ON
왘
or
Display the details of an entry and highlight the telephone number data field
(컄 page 206).
Press n.
If “Navigate” is selected, a message appears indicating that the address is incomplete.
왘
Closing message: Select “OK”.
209
Control systems
COMAND address book
Depending on which data is missing or
cannot be found on the digital map, you
must now either:
앫
select a state (province)
앫
select a county
앫
or enter a town/city
앫
or enter a street
앫
or enter a house number
왘
Selecting a state (province):
Select desired state (province) from
the list.
왘
Selecting a county: Select desired
county from the list.
왘
Entering a town: Proceed as described for destination entry in the “Entering a town or city” section
(컄 page 159).
왘
Entering a street: Proceed as described for destination entry in the “Entering a street” section (컄 page 161).
210
왘
Entering a house number: Proceed
as described for destination entry in
the “Entering a house number” section
(컄 page 166).
i If you have added data, COMAND saves your
additions. This means that you do not need to
re-enter this additional data later on.
The COMAND memory saves the additional data
in a special field, which cannot be displayed. The
data, which you have entered in the address
book initially in the display, remains unchanged.
If all data is available and matches the digital map data, the navigation system starts
the route calculation.
Voice entries
i For voice entries, your vehicle must be
equipped with Voice Control*. You can not add
voice entries for address book entry that come
from the phone book in the mobile phone.
Adding or changing a voice entry
i You can add one voice entry per address
book entry.
왘
Search for the address book entry with
or without a voice entry (컄 page 204).
왘
Select “Options” “Voice Name” “Add” or “Change”.
Subsequent operation is controlled by
voice. Voice Control* guides you
through the dialogs.
Control systems
COMAND address book
Deleting a voice entry
Saving a phone book entry from mobile
phone in the COMAND address book
왘
Search for the address book entry with
a voice entry (컄 page 204).
왘
Select “Options” “Voice Name” “Delete”.
Saving a phone book entry from mobile
phone as new address book entry
A deletion prompt appears.
i The mobile phone must be inserted in the
왘
Select “Yes” or “No”.
COMAND deletes the voice entry depending on your selection.
왘
왘
Search for the address book entry with
a voice entry (컄 page 204).
Select “Options” “Voice Name” “Read Aloud”.
Select “Save”.
The input menu appears with the data
fields. The name and the telephone
number are entered automatically.
cradle* and the COMAND have read out the mobile phone book data. This can take several minutes, depending on how many entries each
phone book contains.
Listening to a voice entry
왘
왘
Search for phone book entry in mobile
phone (컄 page 204).
or
왘
Display details of a phone book entry in
the mobile phone (컄 page 206).
왘
Select “Options” “Save” “New Entry”.
왘
Select a number category, e.g. “Work”.
왘
Select a telephone category, e.g. “Mobile”.
You will hear the voice entry.
1 Data field
2 Input mark (cursor)
3 Input characters
왘
Proceed as described in the “Changing
a data field” paragraph in the “Creating
a new address book entry” section
(컄 Seite 203).
211
Control systems
COMAND address book
Saving a phone book entry from the
mobile phone in an existing address
book entry
왘
cradle*.
Search for a phone book entry in the
mobile phone (컄 page 204).
왘
or
왘
Display details of a phone book entry in
the mobile phone (컄 page 206).
왘
Select “Options” “Save” “Add”.
왘
Select a number category, e.g. “Home”.
왘
Select a telephone category, e.g. “Land
Line”.
왘
Select “Save”.
The search menu for address book entries appears.
왘
Search for desired entry.
i There is a detailed description of how to
search for an address book entry in the “Searching for an address book entry” section
(컄 page 204).
212
The external device must be able to
send vCards by Bluetooth.
앫
The external device is inside the vehicle, switched on and authorized
(컄 page 217).
왘
Select “Yes” or “No”.
Importing: Start data transfer on the
external device (see operating instructions of the device concerned).
If you select “Yes”, a selection list will
appear containing the four existing
numbers.
If there is no address book entry with
the same first name and last name,
COMAND imports the data.
Select the number to be overwritten.
If there is already an address book entry with the same first name and last
name, a prompt will appear asking
whether the existing data should be
overwritten.
COMAND saves the data if there are
fewer than four numbers assigned to
the selected entry in the selected number category. Otherwise, you will see a
prompt asking whether one of the existing numbers should be overwritten.
i The mobile phone must be inserted in the
왘
앫
After selecting an entry, press n.
왘
COMAND overwrites the selected number with the new data.
Importing data from external Bluetooth
devices
You can import vCards from external Bluetooth devices into the address book.
Please keep the following in mind:
앫
Bluetooth is activated in COMAND
(컄 page 217) and in the device concerned.
왘
Select “Yes” or “No”.
The existing address book entry will be
overwritten or not, depending on your
selection.
Control systems
COMAND system settings
왔 COMAND system settings
Systems settings menu overview
i The components and operating principles of
COMAND can be found on (컄 page 79).
Display
(컄 page 213)
Time
(컄 page 213)
Voice Control*
(컄 page 215)
Language
(컄 page 216)
Favorite
(컄 page 216)
Services
(컄 page 217)
Reset
(컄 page 213)
Display settings
Time settings
Voice Control*
settings
Language
settings
Assign favorite
button
Bluetooth
settings
Reset COMAND to
factory settings
Display settings
i In the “Automatic” setting, COMAND ana-
왘
Select “Vehicle” “System Settings”
“Time” “Time”.
Switching the display on or off
lyzes the automatic vehicle light sensor and
switches between the display design automatically.
왘
Switching off: Select “Vehicle” “Display OFF”.
Selecting hour or minute(s):
Slide omp.
Time settings
왘
Switching back on: Rotate ymz or
slide qmr.
Setting value: Rotate ymz or
slide qmr.
Setting the time
왘
Saving setting: Press n.
i The correct time must be set for the follow-
i The increment value for setting the minutes
ing navigation system functions to operate correctly:
depends on the situation. If GPS reception is
available, it is 30 minutes. If GPS reception is not
available, it is one minute.
왘
왘
Setting the display design
왘
왘
Select “Vehicle” “System Settings”
“Display”.
앫
Select “Day Mode” or “Night Mode” or
“Automatic”.
Route guidance on routes with time-dependent traffic guidance
앫
Calculation of estimated arrival time
213
Control systems
COMAND system settings
Setting the time zone and switching between Daylight Saving Time and standard time
i The correct time zone and Daylight Saving
Time/standard time must be set for the following navigation system functions to operate correctly:
앫
Route guidance on routes with time-dependent traffic guidance
앫
Calculation of estimated arrival time
왘
Setting time zone: Select “Vehicle” “System Settings” “Time” “Time
Zone”.
The country list appears. The dot R in
front of a list entry indicates the current
setting.
왘
왘
Subsequent operation depends on:
앫
whether your navigation system has
GPS reception
앫
which country you have previously set.
왘
You have switched the function on or
off. A checkmark appears when the
function is switched on.
You may either:
앫
manually switch between “Daylight
Savings Time (Summer)” and “Standard
time (Winter)” in a list
or
앫
switch automatic Daylight Saving Time
to standard time changeover (and vice
versa) on or off.
왘
Switching manually: Select “Daylight
Savings Time (Summer)” or “Standard
time (Winter)”.
Switching automatic changeover on
or off: Select “Automatic Daylight Savings Time”.
왘
Saving setting and exit the menu:
Slide omp.
i If you have switched off the automatic
changeover function, you must change Daylight
Saving Time to standard time and vice versa
yourself.
Setting the date
왘
Select “Vehicle” “System Settings”
“Time” “Date”.
왘
Selecting month, day or year:
Slide omp.
A time zone list may also be displayed,
depending on the country selected.
왘
Setting value: Rotate ymz or
slide qmr.
Select desired time zone.
왘
Saving setting: Press n.
Select the country in which you are currently driving.
214
The dot R in front of a list entry indicates the current setting.
Control systems
COMAND system settings
Setting the time/date format
왘
Select “Vehicle” “System Settings”
“Time” “Format”.
The format list appears. The dots R in
front of the list entries indicate the current setting.
왘
Changing format setting:
Select desired format.
왘
Saving setting and exit the menu:
Slide omp.
Voice Control* settings
Switching help window on or off
왘
Select “Vehicle” “System Settings”
“Voice Control”.
왘
Select “Help Window”.
You can switch the help window on or
off. A checkmark appears when the
help window is switched on.
Individualization
왘
Using individualization, you can fine-tune
Voice Control* to your own voice and thus
improve voice recognition. The ability of
the system to recognize the commands of
other users does not deteriorate as a result.
If you select “No”, the first part of individualization begins.
If you select “Yes”, an information display will be shown with audio instruction.
왘
Individualization consists of two parts. You
train the system to recognize digits in the
first part and specific commands in the
second part.
with the vehicle stationary. After starting the
session, the system will guide you through the individualization by means of acoustic instructions.
왘
Select “Vehicle” “System Settings”
“Voice Control” “Start new individualization”.
A prompt appears asking whether you
would like further information.
Closing display: Select “OK”.
The first part of individualization begins.
At the end of the first part, you will see
a prompt asking whether you want to
begin the second part.
Starting new individualization
i It is only possible to start individualization
Select “Yes” or “No”.
왘
Select “Yes” or “No”.
If you select “No”, individualization will
be canceled. The data from the first
part is saved automatically.
If you select “Yes”, the second part begins.
Individualization is completed at the end of
the second part. You will see a message to
this effect. The data from the second part
is saved automatically.
215
Control systems
COMAND system settings
Canceling during the first or second part
of individualization
왘
Select “Cancel”.
Setting the system language
왘
A prompt appears asking whether you
really do want to cancel.
왘
Select “Yes” or “No”.
If you select “Yes”, individualization will
be canceled. The data from the part at
which you exited is not saved.
If you select “No”, the part at which you
stopped begins again.
Select “Vehicle” “System Settings”
“Language”.
왘
Changing setting: Select desired language.
Select “Yes” or “No”.
216
앫
“Display OFF”
You can use the favorite button to
switch the COMAND display on or off.
앫
“Tow-away Alarm”
You can use the favorite button to activate or deactivate the tow-away
alarm*.
앫
“Repeat Navigation Command”
You can use the favorite button to recall the last command issued by the
navigation system.
왘
Select “Vehicle” “System Settings”
“Favorite”.
Assigning the favorite button
Select “Vehicle” “System Settings”
“Voice Control” “Delete individualization”.
The individualization data will either be
deleted or not, depending on your selection.
“Rear Window Sunshade”
You can use the favorite button to extend or retract the rear window sunshade. This is the default setting.
The language is set.
A prompt appears asking whether you
really do want to delete.
왘
앫
The language list appears. A dot R indicates the current setting.
Deleting existing individualization data
왘
You can assign the following predefined
functions to the favorite button P:
1 Favorite button
The list of predefined functions appears.
The dot R in front of the list entry indicates the current setting.
Control systems
COMAND system settings
왘
Changing setting: Rotate ymz and
select desired function.
왘
Saving setting and exit the menu:
Press n.
Bluetooth settings
General information about Bluetooth
Bluetooth technology is the standard for
short-range wireless data transmission of
up to approximately 10 meters. Bluetooth
can be used to exchange vCards or make
calls using a headset.
Activate or deactivate Bluetooth
왘
Connecting Bluetooth devices
i To connect a Bluetooth device, the Bluetooth function must be activated in COMAND
and in the device concerned. The Bluetooth device must also be set to “visible” or “findable” in
order for COMAND to find and display it. For the
setting procedures, please see the operating instructions for the Bluetooth device.
Calling up the Bluetooth device list and
searching for devices
왘
When you call up the list for the first
time after switching on COMAND, the
search for devices in the reception
range starts automatically. You will see
a display to this effect.
It is possible to establish a Bluetooth connection between COMAND and the following types of device:
앫
Mobile phone (only for transferring
business cards)
앫
Headset
앫
Laptop/PDA
Select “Vehicle” “System Settings”
“Services” “Deactivate Bluetooth”.
You can connect up to twelve devices to
COMAND but only one device can be active at a time.
You have activated or deactivated Bluetooth. A checkmark appears when
Bluetooth is deactivated.
The connection process includes searching for the device and its subsequent authorization.
Calling up the list: Select “Vehicle” “System Settings” “Services” “Search for Bluetooth devices”.
The device list appears after a short
while.
왘
Canceling search:
Select “Cancel”.
The second time you call up the list, and
each time thereafter, the device list appears immediately if COMAND has not
been switched off and on again in the
meantime.
왘
Starting search manually:
select “Update”.
217
Control systems
COMAND system settings
The device list can contain the following
devices:
앫
All detected devices, whether authorized or not.
앫
All authorized devices, whether detected or not.
1 Authorized and detected device – device and padlock symbol are the same
color
2 Device which was not detected, but
which has been authorized in the past
– device and padlock symbol are different colors (the device may be switched
off or not in the vehicle, for example)
3 Newly detected device - not yet authorized (no symbol)
218
i If the device list already contains twelve au-
Authorizing a Bluetooth device
thorized devices, you must revoke authorization
for one of the authorized devices. Then you must
switch this device off and then restart the
search. Any new devices for which you would like
to search will otherwise not appear in the list.
왘
Call up Bluetooth device list
(컄 page 217).
왘
Select unauthorized device.
왘
Select “Authorize”.
Displaying details of a Bluetooth device
왘
Call up Bluetooth device list
(컄 page 217).
왘
Select desired device.
왘
Select “Details”.
The detailed display for this device appears.
왘
Closing detailed display: Slide qmr
or press n.
The input menu for the passkey appears.
i The passkey is any one to sixteen-digit number which you can set yourself. You must enter
the same number in COMAND and also in the device to be authorized.
i On devices which do not have an input keypad (e.g. headsets), the passkey is predetermined. In this case, it is not necessary to enter
the number on the device itself. You will usually
find the passkey in the operating instructions for
the device.
Control systems
COMAND system settings
왘
Entering passkey into COMAND:
Select the digits one by one.
왘
Deleting digits: Select ) and briefly
press n.
왘
Canceling entry into COMAND:
select “Back”.
왘
Confirming entry into COMAND:
Select ?.
왘
If necessary, enter the same passkey
into the Bluetooth device (see the operating instructions for the device).
The device is authorized.
De-authorizing a Bluetooth device
왘
Call up Bluetooth device list
(컄 page 217).
왘
Select authorized device.
왘
Select “De-authorize”.
A prompt appears asking whether you
really want to de-authorize this device.
왘
Reset
i You can reset COMAND back to its factory
settings.
In this case, all personal data (e.g. address book
entries, entries in the destination memory and
the list of last destinations of the navigation system), among other things, is deleted.
Select “Yes” or “No”.
Select “Vehicle” “System Settings”
“Reset”.
If you select “Yes”, the device will be
de-authorized.
A prompt appears asking whether you
really want to reset.
i If you de-authorize a device which has been
authorized in the past and which is not detected
in the search, this device will no longer be displayed in the device list.
Devices which have been authorized in the past
but which are not detected in the search are either not switched on or not in the vehicle.
왘
왘
Select “Yes” or “No”.
If you select “Yes” another prompt will
appear asking whether you really want
to reset.
왘
Select “Yes” or “No”.
If you select “Yes”, COMAND will be reset and restarted.
219
Control systems
COMAND vehicle menu
In this menu, you can program the following vehicle functions:
Function
Page
Setting night security illumination
Selecting “Exterior Lighting Delayed
Switch-off” menu: Slide omp or
rotate ymz.
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
왘
Selecting length of time: Slide qmr
or rotate ymz.
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
(Exterior Lighting Delayed Switch-off)
i The components and operating principles of
Exterior Lighting Delayed
Switch-off
220
Locator Lighting
221
Exterior Mirror Convenience Settings
222
Automatic Locking
223
Easy Entry/Exit Feature
224
Interior Ambient Light
225
The exterior lighting automatically goes
out after the delayed switch-off time has
expired.
Interior Lighting Delayed
Switch-off
226
You can select:
Rear Window Sunshade
227
Trunk Opening-height Restriction
227
Tow-away Alarm
228
COMAND can be found on (컄 page 79).
Use this function to set whether and how
long you would like the exterior lighting to
illuminate during darkness after exiting the
vehicle and all doors closed.
앫
“0 sec.”, the delayed switch-off feature
is deactivated
앫
“15 sec.”, “30 sec.”, “45 sec.”, or
“60 sec.”, the delayed switch-off feature is activated
i You can reactivate this function within
or
왘
Select “Vehicle” “Vehicle” “Exterior Lighting Delayed Switch-off”.
10 minutes by opening a door.
A selection list appears.
왘
The current setting is indicated by a
dot R.
Select “Vehicle”.
The main area is active.
220
왘
Control systems
COMAND vehicle menu
Locator lighting on/off
i The components and operating principles of
COMAND can be found on (컄 page 79).
왘
Selecting length of time: Slide qmr
or rotate ymz.
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
To activate night security illumination:
왘
Select delayed switch-off period (see
above).
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position * before turning off the engine.
If you do not open a door after unlocking
the vehicle with the SmartKey, the lamps
will switch off automatically after approximately 40 seconds.
With the locator lighting feature activated
and the exterior lamp switch in position
*(컄 page 346), the following lamps will
switch on during darkness when the vehicle is unlocked from the outside:
왘
왘
Selecting “Locator Lighting” function: Slide omp or rotate ymz.
앫
Parking lamps
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
앫
Tail lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Front fog lamps
앫
Door entry lamps in the mirror
앫
Side marker lamps
왘
Switching locator lighting on or off:
Press n.
Select “Vehicle”.
The main area is active.
The locator lighting switches off when the
driver’s door is opened.
컄컄
or
221
Control systems
COMAND vehicle menu
컄컄 왘
Select “Vehicle” “Vehicle” “Locator Lighting”.
A checkmark appears when the locator
lighting is switched on.
Exterior mirror convenience settings
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
왘
Selecting “Fold in automatically
when locking” or “Lower mirror
when reversing”: Rotate ymz.
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
왘
Slide omp to exit.
i The components and operating principles of
COMAND can be found on (컄 page 79).
In the “Exterior Mirror Convenience Settings” menu, you can switch the following
exterior mirror functions on or off:
왘
앫
Exterior mirrors automatically fold in
when the vehicle is locked
앫
Exterior mirror on front passenger’s
side automatically tilts downward
when the vehicle is reversing
Make sure the function “Locator Lighting” is set.
왘
Select “Vehicle”.
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position * when exiting the vehicle.
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
To activate locator lighting:
왘
왘
222
The main area is active.
Selecting “Exterior Mirror Convenience Settings” menu: Slide omp or
rotate ymz.
or
Control systems
COMAND vehicle menu
왘
왘
Select “Vehicle” “Vehicle” “Exterior mirror Convenience Settings”.
Automatic locking on/off
왘
A selection list appears.
i The components and operating principles of
or
Selecting a function: Slide qmr or
rotate ymz.
A checkmark appears in the corresponding box when the option has
been selected.
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
왘
Slide omp to exit.
COMAND can be found on (컄 page 79).
Use this function to activate or deactivate
the automatic central locking
(컄 page 313). With the automatic central
locking system activated, the vehicle is
centrally locked at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).
왘
왘
Switching automatic locking on or
off: Press n.
Select “Vehicle” “Vehicle” “Automatic Locking”.
A checkmark appears when automatic
locking is switched on.
Select “Vehicle”.
The main area is active.
왘
Selecting “Automatic Locking” function: Slide omp or rotate ymz.
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
왘
Slide omp to exit.
223
Control systems
COMAND vehicle menu
Activating easy-entry/exit feature
i The components and operating principles of
COMAND can be found on (컄 page 79).
Use this function to activate and deactivate the easy-entry/exit feature
(컄 page 328).
The following settings are available for the
easy-entry/exit feature:
OFF
The easy-entry/exit
feature is deactivated.
Steering Column Both the steering col& Seat
umn and the driver’s
seat are moved.
Warning!
G
To cancel seat/steering wheel movement,
do one of the following:
앫
Press seat adjustment switch
(컄 page 319).
앫
Move steering column stalk
(컄 page 330).
앫
Press one of the memory position buttons or the memory button M
(컄 page 337).
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver’s door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
224
Confirming selection: Press n.
or
왘
Select “Vehicle” “Vehicle” “Easy
Entry/Exit Feature”.
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
A selection list appears.
왘
Select “Vehicle”.
The main area is active.
You must make sure no one can become
trapped or injured by the moving steering
wheel and driver’s seat when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated.
왘
왘
Selecting “Easy Entry/Exit Feature”
menu: Slide omp or rotate ymz.
The current setting is indicated by a
dot R.
Control systems
COMAND vehicle menu
왘
Selecting a setting: Slide qmr or
rotate ymz.
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
Setting interior ambient lighting
i The components and operating principles of
COMAND can be found on (컄 page 79).
You can adjust the brightness of the interior lighting on a scale of “0” (off) to “5”
(bright).
왘
Adjusting brightness: Slide omp or
rotate ymz.
왘
Adjusting brightness: Slide qmr or
rotate ymz.
왘
Select “Vehicle”.
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
The main area is active.
or
왘
Selecting “Interior Ambient Light”
menu: Slide omp or rotate ymz.
왘
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
Select “Vehicle” “Vehicle” “Interior Ambient Light”.
225
Control systems
COMAND vehicle menu
Setting interior lighting delayed
switch-off
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
왘
A selection list appears.
A selection list appears.
The current setting is indicated by a
dot R.
i The components and operating principles of
COMAND can be found on (컄 page 79).
Select “Vehicle” “Vehicle” “Interior Lighting Delayed Switch-off”.
The current setting is indicated by a
dot R.
Use this function to set whether and how
long you would like the interior lighting to
remain lit during darkness after you have
removed the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
You can select:
앫
“0 sec.”, the delayed switch-off feature
is deactivated
앫
“15 sec.”, “30 sec.”, “45 sec.”, or
“60 sec.”, the delayed switch-off feature is activated
왘
Select “Vehicle”.
The main area is active.
왘
Selecting “Interior Lighting Delayed
Switch-off” menu: Slide omp or
rotate ymz.
226
왘
왘
or
Selecting length of time: Slide qmr
or rotate ymz.
왘
Selecting length of time: Slide qmr
or rotate ymz.
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
Confirming selection: Press n.
Control systems
COMAND vehicle menu
Extending or retracting rear window
sunshade
Trunk opening-height restriction on/off
i The components and operating principles of
COMAND can be found on (컄 page 79).
i The components and operating principles of
COMAND can be found on (컄 page 79).
You can select whether the trunk lid should
open fully or only to the height of the roof.
This function is used to extend or retract
the rear sunshade.
i If you operate the rear-window sunshade via
COMAND or by using the favorite button
(컄 page 216), this takes precedence over the
buttons for the rear window sunshade in the rear
doors (컄 page 456).
i You can program this function using the fa-
vorite button (컄 page 216).
왘
The main area is active.
왘
Extending or retracting rear window
sunshade: Press n.
or
왘
i At temperatures below -4°F (-20°C), the
rear window sunshade is switched off.
왘
Select “Vehicle”.
Select “Vehicle” “Vehicle” “Rear-window Sunshade”.
왘
Selecting “Trunk Opening-height Restriction” function: Slide omp or
rotate ymz.
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
or
Select “Vehicle”.
The main area is active.
왘
Selecting “Rear-window Sunshade”
function: Slide omp or rotate ymz.
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
컄컄
227
Control systems
COMAND vehicle menu
컄컄 왘
Select “Vehicle” “Vehicle” “Trunk
Opening-height Restriction”.
A checkmark appears when the trunk
opening-height restriction is switched
on.
Switching on/of the tow-away alarm
i The components and operating principles of
COMAND can be found on (컄 page 79).
i You can program the tow-away alarm func-
tion (컄 page 216) using the favorite button in the
center console.
When you press the favorite button, you can
switch the functions on or off.
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm
feature (컄 page 76), switch off the
tow-away alarm before towing the vehicle,
or when parking on a surface subject to
movement, such as a ferry or auto train.
왘
or
왘
Select “Vehicle” “Vehicle” “Tow-away Alarm”.
A checkmark appears when the
tow-away alarm is switched on.
Select “Vehicle”.
The main area is active.
왘
Selecting “Tow-away Alarm” function: Slide omp or rotate ymz.
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
왘
228
Confirming selection: Press n.
Control systems
COMAND automatic climate control
왔 COMAND automatic climate control
i The components and operating principles of
COMAND can be found on (컄 page 79).
Warning!
G
and pages in the “Controls in detail” part
(컄 page 424) Otherwise the windows could
fog up, impairing visibility and endangering
you and others.
When operating the automatic climate control, the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents can be very
hot or very cold (depending on the set temperature). This may cause burns or frostbite
to unprotected skin in the immediate area of
the air vents.
You can operate the automatic climate
control via COMAND or via the buttons on
the front and rear* automatic climate control panel (컄 page 424).
Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the air
vents. If necessary, use the air distribution
adjustment (컄 page 230) to direct the air to
air vents in the vehicle interior that are not
in the immediate area of unprotected skin.
Function
Warning!
G
Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on the following pages
The automatic climate control menu is
called up via the climate control settings.
The following automatic climate control
functions can be operated via COMAND:
Page
Temperature
230
Air distribution
230
Air volume
230
Switching off cooling (“AC ”)
231
Central climate control (“Mono”)
232
Footwell temperature
232
Air flow from air vents
233
Rear climate control*
234
OFF
Climate control settings with functions
(submenus)
1 Temperature, left
2 Air distribution, left
3 Air volume, left
4 Central menu, climate control
5 Air volume, right
6 Air distribution, right
7 Temperature, right
229
Control systems
COMAND automatic climate control
Setting temperature
Use the temperature controls %$
(컄 page 426) in the center console or
COMAND climate control settings to separately adjust the air temperature on each
side of the passenger compartment.
왘
Select climate control settings Temperature, left or right and then
press n.
왘
Exiting menu: Press n, back
button L in the center console
(컄 page 80) or slide omp.
왘
The symbol for air distribution changes.
The direction and size of the arrows
represent the air distribution.
The setting is saved.
Adjusting air distribution
Changing air distribution:
Rotate ymz.
왘
You can adjust the air distribution separately for the driver’s and front passenger’s
side.
Exiting menu: Press n, back
button L in the center console
(컄 page 80) or slide omp.
The setting is saved.
i When you change the air distribution, the au- Adjusting air volume
tomatic function of the climate control system is
switched off.
왘
왘
Changing temperature: Slide qmr or
rotate ymz.
230
Select climate control settings Air
distribution, left or right.
Use buttons Q (컄 page 426) in the center console or COMAND climate control
settings to separately adjust the air volume on each side of the passenger compartment.
i When you change the air volume, the automatic function of the climate control system is
switched off.
왘
Select climate control settings Air
volume, left or right.
Control systems
COMAND automatic climate control
tral menu. The following functions can only
be operated in the central climate control
menu via COMAND:
Switching off cooling (“AC ”)
231
Central climate control (“Mono”)
232
Footwell temperature
232
The cooling function, only operational
when the engine is running, cools the vehicle interior down to the selected temperature. The cooling function also
dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior,
thus preventing the windows from fogging
up.
Air flow from air vents
233
i Condensation may drip out from underneath
Rear climate control
234
the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication
of a malfunction.
Function
Page
OFF
왘
Changing air volume: Slide qmr or
rotate ymz.
왘
Exiting menu: Press n, back
button L in the center console
(컄 page 80) or slide omp.
Switching cooling on or off
왘
Select climate control settings Central menu.
The “ACOFF” function is used to permanently switch off the cooling function of the automatic climate control system.
The setting is saved.
Warning!
Central climate control menu via
COMAND
The central climate control menu is in the
center of the climate control settings.
When the automatic climate control is
switched on, you will see “on” in the cen-
G
If you turn off the cooling function, the
vehicle will not be cooled when weather
conditions are warm. The windows can fog
up more quickly. Window fogging may
impair visibility and endanger you and
others.
231
Control systems
COMAND automatic climate control
왘
Select climate control settings Central climate control menu.
왘
Selecting “ACOFF”: Slide qmr or
rotate ymz.
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
A checkmark appears when the cooling
is switched off.
Selecting “Mono” mode
“Mono” is used to adjust the climate zones
for the entire vehicle at the same time.
When the “Mono” function is switched on
and you change the climate on the driver’s
side, these changes will be carried out in
the same manner for all climate zones.
change an automatic climate control
setting for the front passenger’s side
using COMAND
앫
operate a button from the automatic
climate control for the front passenger’s side
앫
operate one of the buttons for the rear
climate control system.
Select climate control settings Central climate control menu.
왘
Selecting “Mono”: Slide qmr or
rotate ymz.
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
Adjusting footwell temperature
A checkmark appears when the function has been selected.
i In automatic mode, this setting optimizes
the footwell temperature when outside temperatures are low.
The “Footwell Temperature” function is
used to adjust the temperature difference
between the footwell and the rest of the
passenger compartment.
! If the air conditioning cannot be turned on
again, this indicates that the air conditioning is
losing refrigerant. The compressor has turned itself off.
232
앫
왘
“ACOFF” appears in the central menu of
the climate control settings.
Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The “Mono” function is automatically
switched off when you:
왘
Exiting menu: Press back button L
in the center console (컄 page 80) or
slide omp.
The higher the selected value, the higher
the temperature in the footwell will be.
왘
Select climate control settings Central climate control menu.
Control systems
COMAND automatic climate control
왘
Selecting “Footwell Temperature”:
Slide qmr or rotate ymz and then
press n.
Adjusting air flow from air vents
i In automatic mode, this setting optimizes
the air flow when outside temperatures are high.
The “Airflow” setting defines air distribution and air volume in automatic mode:
앫
“Focused” (default setting, increased
air flow)
앫
“Medium” (reduced air flow)
앫
“Diffuse” (minimal air flow)
i When the interior ambient temperature of
왘
Changing temperature difference:
Slide qmr or rotate ymz.
왘
Exiting menu: Press n, back
button L in the center console
(컄 page 80) or slide omp.
The setting is saved.
the vehicle is very hot and the automatic climate
control is cooling the interior, the setting for air
flow is temporarily overridden.
왘
왘
Changing air flow: Slide qmr or
rotate ymz.
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
Select climate control settings Central climate control menu “Airflow”.
A selection list appears.
The current setting is indicated by a
dot R.
233
Control systems
COMAND automatic climate control
Operating rear climate control* from
the front
The “Rear)” function is used to operate the rear climate control via COMAND
and the buttons on the center console control unit (컄 page 434).
In the climate control settings, “)”
appears in the central menu. The rear
climate control can be operated from
the front.
Switching on rear climate control operation from the front
왘
Select climate control settings Central climate control menu.
왘
Selecting “Rear)”: Slide qmr or
rotate ymz.
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
Climate control settings, rear climate control
1 Rear temperature, left
2 Rear air distribution, left
3 Rear air volume
4 Central menu for rear climate control
5 Rear air distribution, right
6 Rear temperature, right
The rear climate control is operated in the
same manner as the climate control system for the driver’s and front passenger’s
side (컄 page 229).
234
Central menu for rear climate control
In the central menu for the rear climate
control, you can:
앫
switch back to operating the front climate control system
앫
switch off the rear climate control
앫
switch the automatic function of the
rear climate control from automatic to
manual
왘
Select climate control settings Central climate control menu.
Control systems
COMAND automatic climate control
Switching off rear climate control operation from the front
왘
Select climate control settings Central climate control menu.
The current setting is indicated by a
dot R.
왘
Selecting “Front Climate Control”:
Slide qmr or rotate ymz.
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
Switching off rear climate control
왘
왘
The current setting is indicated by a
dot R.
왘
왘
The climate control settings shows the
climate control settings for the driver
and front passenger.
Select climate control settings Central climate control menu.
Switching on the automatic function of
the rear climate control
Selecting “Rear Climate Control
OFF”: Slide qmr or rotate ymz.
Select climate control settings Central climate control menu.
The current setting is indicated by a
dot R.
왘
Selecting “Rear Automatic”:
Slide qmr or rotate ymz.
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
Confirming selection: Press n.
The rear climate control is switched off.
The automatic function of the rear climate control is switched on.
235
Control systems
COMAND seats
When adjusting the seats, observe the
safety notes in the section “Seats”
(컄 page 318).
Selecting a seat
You must first select the seat for which you
would like to make adjustments.
Operating seats via COMAND
i The components and operating principles of
COMAND can be found on (컄 page 79).
The following seat adjustments can be
made via COMAND:
Settings
Example illustration (vehicles with Drive-dynamic multicontour seat*)
Page
Lumbar support
237
Multicontour seat*, front
237
1 Seat menu button
Drive-dynamic multicontour
seat*
240
왘
왘
왘
Selecting seat: Slide omp or
rotate ymz.
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
Press O.
The main area is active.
Exiting menu
Switching to the bottom menu line:
Slide qmr.
There are several ways to exit the multicontour seat menu.
왘
Press O again.
or
왘
or
236
Press any shortcut button.
Control systems
COMAND seats
왘
Select another main menu from the
main menu line.
왘
Select seat (컄 page 236).
i When you adjust the multicontour seat,
왘
Adjusting lumbar support:
Slide omp or rotate ymz until desired
setting is reached.
noises may result from pumping air into or releasing air out of the air chambers.
Lumbar support
To support the spine, you can adjust the
curvature of the front seat backrests.
왘
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
앫
sides of seat cushion
왘
Switching to the bottom menu line:
Slide omp.
앫
thigh support
앫
sides of backrest
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
앫
backrest curvature in lumbar area
앫
backrest curvature in shoulder area
앫
seat firmness
Press O.
The main area of the COMAND display
is active. A scale appears.
i After you have pressed O, the seat last
adjusted is active.
Multicontour seats*, front
Adjusting sides of seat cushion
has been activated, the air
i If
pressure in the air chambers (on the sides of the
seat cushion and backrest) of the front multicontour seats is increased.
This function is used to adjust the air
chambers in the sides of the seat cushion.
왘
Select seat (컄 page 236).
To support the spine, you can individually
adjust the backrest contour of the front
seats by regulating the air pressure in the
air chambers of the multicontour seat.
왘
Selecting “Seat sides”: Slide omp or
rotate ymz.
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
PRE-SAFE®
1 Scale
2 Cursor
3 Current seat
4 Current setting
You can adjust the following air chambers:
The settings are made on the COMAND
display.
A scale appears.
컄컄
237
Control systems
COMAND seats
왘
컄컄
Confirming selection: Press n.
왘
A scale appears.
1 Scale
2 Cursor
3 Current setting
왘
Slide qmr or rotate ymz until desired
setting is reached.
왘
Saving setting: Press n.
This function is used to adjust the air
chambers for the thighs.
왘
Select seat (컄 page 236).
왘
Selecting “Thighs”: Slide qmr or
rotate ymz.
238
A scale appears.
왘
Slide qmr or rotate ymz until desired
setting is reached.
왘
Slide qmr or rotate ymz until desired
setting is reached.
왘
Saving setting: Press n.
왘
Saving setting: Press n.
Adjusting backrest sides
Adjusting thigh support
Confirming selection: Press n.
This function is used to adjust the air
chambers in the backrest sides.
왘
Select seat (컄 page 236).
왘
Selecting “Seatback Sides”:
Slide qmr or rotate ymz.
Adjusting backrest curvature in lumbar
area
This function is used to adjust the air
chambers in the lumbar area of the backrest.
왘
Select seat (컄 page 236).
왘
Selecting “Lumbar”: Slide omp or
rotate ymz.
Control systems
COMAND seats
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
Cross-hairs appear. You can use them
to make two settings:
앫
vertical: shift the point of greatest
curvature upward or downward
앫
horizontal: adjust the degree of
curvature
Adjusting backrest curvature in shoulder area
This function is used to adjust the air
chambers in the shoulder area of the backrest.
왘
Select seat (컄 page 236).
왘
Selecting “Shoulders”: Slide omp or
rotate ymz.
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
Adjusting seat firmness
왘
Select seat (컄 page 236).
왘
Selecting “Seat Firm.”: Slide omp or
rotate ymz.
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
A scale appears. You can choose between:
A scale appears.
왘
Slide qmr or omp until desired setting
is reached.
왘
Saving setting: Press n.
왘
Slide qmr or rotate ymz until desired
setting is reached.
왘
Saving setting: Press n.
앫
“0”: off
앫
“1”: level 1
앫
“2”: level 2
왘
Slide qmr or rotate ymz until desired
setting is reached.
왘
Saving setting: Press n.
239
Control systems
COMAND seats
Drive-dynamic multicontour seats,
front*
왘
For information on manual multicontour
seat settings, see “Multicontour seats*,
front” (컄 page 237).
i If PRE-SAFE® has been activated, the air
pressure in the air chambers (sides of seat cushion and backrest) of the drive-dynamic multicontour seats is increased.
Confirming selection: Press n.
왘
A scale appears. You can choose between:
Selecting “Pulse Mode”: Slide omp
or rotate ymz.
왘
Confirming selection: Press n.
앫
“0”: off
앫
“1”: level 1
앫
“2”: level 2
A list appears. You can choose between different types of massage:
The Drive-dynamic multicontour seat automatically adjusts the lateral support provided by the backrest to your driving style.
The Drive-dynamic multicontour seat electronically controls the air pressure in the
air chambers of the backrest side bolsters.
This function improves driving comfort and
pleasure.
왘
Select seat (컄 page 236).
왘
Selecting “Driv. dyn. seat”:
Slide omp or rotate ymz.
The current setting is indicated by a
solid circle.
왘
Slide qmr or rotate ymz until desired
setting is reached.
왘
Saving setting: Press n.
Pulse mode
왘
240
Select seat (컄 page 236).
왘
Slide qmr or rotate ymz until desired
setting is reached.
왘
Saving setting: Press n.
i Depending on the setting, the massage
function runs for about 7 to 10 minutes.
Control systems
Instrument cluster control system
왔 Instrument cluster control system
The control system is activated as soon as
the SmartKey in the starter switch is
turned to position 2 or as soon as the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
(컄 page 317) is in position 2. The control
system enables you to:
앫
call up information about your vehicle
앫
change vehicle settings
For example, you can use the control system to find out when your vehicle is next
due for service, to call up statistical data
on your vehicle, and much more.
Warning!
G
Multifunction display
A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
conditions must always be his/her primary
focus when driving.
For your safety and the safety of others, selecting features through the multifunction
steering wheel should only be done by the
driver when traffic and road conditions permit it to be done safely.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
1 Line for main menus
2 Text field in multifunction display
Settings, functions, submenus as well as
any malfunctions are shown to you in the
text field.
The control system relays information to
the multifunction display.
241
Control systems
Instrument cluster control system
Multifunction steering wheel
The displays in the multifunction display
and the settings in the control system are
controlled using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.
1 Multifunction display
2 s to take a call
to dial a number
t to end a call
to reject an incoming call
æ volume up
ç volume down
F mute
3 ! to accept a call
activate Voice Control*
4 L back/cancel Voice Control*
5 $ scroll up
% scroll down
& scroll to the right
( scroll to the left
# confirm selection
The information available in the multifunction display is arranged in menus, each
containing a number of functions or submenus. For example, in the “Settings”
menu, you will find functions for making
242
settings to your vehicle. There are functions for calling up information and for
making settings to your vehicle.
It is helpful to think of the menus as being
arranged in a circular pattern:
왘
Press & or ( repeatedly to
switch menus.
The number of menus available in the system depends on which optional equipment
is installed in your vehicle.
Press button L to return to the next
highest menu level.
From a menu’s highest level, you will always see the screen from the “Trip” menu
that was last active. When you press L
again, you switch to the standard display
(컄 page 245).
For information about warning and malfunction messages appearing in the multifunction display (컄 page 557).
Control systems
Instrument cluster control system
Commands/submenus
Menus
Trip (컄 page 245)
Navi (컄 page 246)
Audio (컄 page 248)
Standard display
Show route guidance instruc- Select radio station
tions, current direction traveled
Telephone* (컄 page 249)
Answer a call
Fuel consumption statistics after start
Select satellite radio chanel* Dial a number from the phone
(USA only)
book
Fuel consumption statistics
since the last reset
Operate CD changer/DVD-Au- Redialing
dio/MP3
Call up range
End a call or reject an incoming
call
Digital speedometer
243
Control systems
Commands/submenus
Instrument cluster control system
Assistance* (컄 page 252)
Service (컄 page 253)
Displaying the distance graphic*
(DISTRONIC Plus*)
Call up vehicle malfunction, warning
Set daytime running lamp mode (USA only)
and system status messages stored in
memory
Distance warning function*
activating/deactivating
Check tire inflation pressure
Switch on the Dynamic Rear View Moni- Call up maintenance service display
tor* automatically
i The headings used in the menus table are
designed to facilitate navigation within the system and are not necessarily identical to those
shown in the control system displays.
244
Settings (컄 page 254)
Switch additional speedometer on or off
Switch radar sensors* on or off
Check engine oil level*
The first function displayed in each menu will automatically show you which part of the system
you are in.
Control systems
Instrument cluster control system
Trip menu
i The menu overview can be found on
Fuel consumption statistics after start
왘
(컄 page 243).
In the “Trip” menu, you can show an additional display for the speedometer and call
up or reset your vehicle’s statistical data.
왘
Press ( or & to select the “Trip”
menu.
Fuel consumption statistics since last
reset
왘
Press ( or & to select the “Trip”
menu.
왘
Press % or $ to select “After reset”.
Press % to select “After start”.
Standard display
In the standard display, the trip odometer
and main odometer are shown in the multifunction display.
왘
Press ( or & to select the “Trip”
menu.
1 Distance driven since start
2 Time elapsed since start
3 Average speed since start
4 Average fuel consumption since start
reset when you turn off the vehicle’s engine for
more than four hours (컄 page 365).
1 Distance driven since last reset
2 Time elapsed since last reset
3 Average fuel consumption since last reset
4 Average speed since last reset
i If you turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2
i After 9999 hours or 99,999 miles (kilome-
i All values that are based on the last start are
1 Main odometer
2 Trip odometer
again during this time, the values will not be reset. After 999 hours or 9999 miles (kilometers),
the fuel consumption statistics after start are automatically reset.
ters), the fuel consumption statistics since last
reset are automatically reset.
245
Control systems
Instrument cluster control system
Resetting fuel consumption statistics
Distance to empty
왘
Press ( or & to select the “Trip”
menu.
왘
Press ( or & to select the “Trip”
menu.
왘
Press % or $ to select the function you wish to reset.
왘
Press % or $ to select “Range”.
왘
In the display you will see the calculated range based on the current fuel tank
level.
Press #.
Digital speedometer
왘
Press ( or & to select the “Trip”
menu.
왘
Press % or $ to select the digital
speedometer.
Navi menu
i The menu overview can be found on
(컄 page 243).
The display in the “Navi” menu depends on
whether route guidance is active or not.
왘
Press ( or & to select the “Navi”
menu.
Route guidance not active
The multifunction display shows the direction of travel and the name of the street
you are currently driving on, if known by
the navigation system.
Illustration: Reset trip odometer
왘
Press % to select “Yes” and confirm
with #.
i You can reset the trip odometer by pressing
and holding the L button. The trip odometer
is then reset without confirmation.
1 Digital speedometer
246
1 Direction of travel
2 Street you are currently driving on
Control systems
Instrument cluster control system
Route guidance active
The image on the multifunction display depends on whether you are being notified of
a driving maneuver.
Notification of driving maneuver without lane recommendation
Navigation status displays in the instrument cluster
While route guidance is active, the following messages may be shown on the multifunction display:
No notification of driving maneuver
앫
<
You have reached your destination.
앫
Example illustration
Example illustration
1 Distance to destination
2 Symbol for “follow the course of the
road”
3 Distance to next driving maneuver
4 Street you are currently driving on
1 Street into which the driving maneuver
leads
2 Symbol for “driving maneuver”
3 Distance to driving maneuver and visual distance display
When you are being notified of a driving
maneuver, you will see a visual distance
display 3 next to the driving maneuver
symbol. The visual distance display is reduced from bottom to top the closer you
come to the announced driving maneuver.
“Area of dest. reached”
You have arrived in the area of your
destination. The message appears, for
example, for relatively large POIs.
앫
“New Route…”
COMAND calculates a new route, e.g.
because you have deviated from the
calculated route or due to a detour report. Afterward, COMAND continues
route guidance.
247
Control systems
Instrument cluster control system
앫
앫
“Calculating Route”
Audio menu
COMAND is calculating a route. Afterward, COMAND starts route guidance.
i The menu overview can be found on
“Off Map”
The vehicle’s location is outside of the
digital map’s range. The vehicle is in an
off-map position (컄 page 190).
앫
“Off Road”
The vehicle is either on a road that has
not been digitized (컄 page 190) or on
the side of a road, e.g. in a parking
space.
앫
The functions in the “Audio” menu operate
the audio equipment which you currently
have turned on.
If no audio equipment is currently turned
on, the message: “Audio off” is shown in
the multifunction display.
Select radio station
왘
Turn on COMAND and select “Radio”
(컄 page 93).
왘
Press ( or & to select the “Audio” menu.
왘
Press % or $ to select a station.
“No Route”
COMAND cannot calculate a route to
the selected destination.
앫
(컄 page 243).
“Direction of Dest.”
The vehicle has gone off the map during route guidance (컄 page 190).
248
1 Station frequency
2 Waveband
왘
Press æ or ç to adjust the volume.
i You can only change the frequency band
and save new stations using COMAND
(컄 page 93).
Select satellite radio* channel
(USA only)
The satellite radio is treated as a radio application.
왘
Turn on COMAND and select “Sat Radio” (컄 page 98).
Control systems
Instrument cluster control system
왘
Press ( or & to select the “Audio” menu.
Operating DVD changer/audio CD/
audio DVD/MP3
왘
Press % or $ to select a station.
왘
Turn on COMAND and select “CD”,
“DVD-Audio” or “MP3” (컄 page 104).
왘
Press ( or & to select the “Audio” menu.
왘
Press % or $ to select a track.
1 Channel number and/or name
2 SAT mode
왘
Press æ or ç to adjust the volume.
i A subscription to Sirius satellite radio service provider is required for the satellite radio operation. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for details and availability for your vehicle.
Example: audio CD
For more information, see Sat Radio
(컄 page 98) .
i When you play a CD or DVD with text, the
1 Current track
왘
Press æ or ç to adjust the volume.
multifunction display shows the name and number of the track. For MP3s, only the track is
shown.
Telephone menu*
i The menu overview can be found on
(컄 page 243).
Warning!
G
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a cellular telephone while driving.
Whether or not prohibited by law, for safety
reasons, the driver should not use the cellular telephone while the vehicle is in motion.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location before
placing or answering a call.
If you nonetheless choose to use the cellular
phone while driving, please use the handsfree feature and be sure to pay attention to
the traffic situation at all times. Use the cellular phone only when road, weather and
traffic conditions permit.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
249
Control systems
Instrument cluster control system
Warning!
G
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury.
You can use the functions in the “Telephone” menu to operate your telephone,
provided it is inserted in the cradle and
switched on.
Which messages appear in the multifunction display field depends on whether your
telephone is switched on or off.
앫
Switch on the telephone and COMAND
(컄 page 79).
왘
Press ( or & to select the “Telephone” menu.
250
왘
If the telephone is off, the message in
the multifunction display is: “Telephone
OFF”.
Enter the PIN or unlock code using the
telephone keypad*, Voice Control* or
telephone*.
The telephone will then search for a
network.
앫
If the telephone is not inserted in the
cradle, the message in the multifunction display is: “No telephone inserted”.
You may carry out the following functions:
앫
If the PIN or unlock code is not yet entered, the message in the multifunction
display is “Please enter PIN” or “Enter
unlock code”.
Dialing a number from the phone
book
250
Redialing
251
Answering a call
252
Ending a call or rejecting an incoming call
252
앫
Logging-on to a network
왘
Entering the PIN or unlock code
앫
If the telephone is switched on, the
telephone will then search for a network. During this time, the multifunction display is blank. If no network
available, the multifunction display
reads “No Service”.
If the telephone is on, as soon as the
telephone has found a network,
“Ready” or “Ready (Roaming)” appears
in the multifunction display.
Function
Page
Dialing a number from the mobile
phone book
If your telephone is ready to receive calls,
you may select and dial a number from the
phone book at any time.
왘
Log on to the network (컄 page 250).
Control systems
Instrument cluster control system
i When you insert a Mercedes-Benz approved
mobile phone into the cradle*, the control system reads in the phone book that is saved on the
SIM card or in the phone book of the mobile
phone. This can take several minutes, depending
on how many entries each phone book contains.
When you press %, $, (, & or
# during the download of the phone book the
message “Reading telephone data, please
wait...” appears in the multifunction display.
When the message: “Reading telephone data,
please wait...” disappears, the phone book has
been loaded.
왘
왘
Press % or $ or # to switch
to the phone book.
Press % or $ to select the desired name.
The stored names are displayed in ascending alphabetical order.
i If you do not want to dial from the phone
book, press t or L. In the multifunction
display appears again “Ready” or “Ready (Roaming)”.
been stored in the phone book, otherwise the dialed telephone number appears.
i If you press and hold % or $ for more
than 1 second, the system scrolls rapidly
through the list of names. If you press and hold
% or $ for more than 4 seconds, the control system shows the first four entries of the letter next used. Release the button to stop the
quick search. The search stops automatically at
the end of the list.
왘
Press s or # to start dialing.
If several entries are present for the
same name, they are all shown.
왘
Select the desired entry.
왘
Press s or # to start dialing.
The message “Connecting call…” appears on the multifunction display, as
well as the dialed telephone number or
name as long as it is stored in the
phone book.
The dialed number is saved in the “Dialed numbers” list.
Once a connection has been established, the name appears on the multifunction display, provided that it has
Redialing
The control system stores the most recently dialed phone numbers. This eliminates
the need to search through your entire
phone book.
왘
Log on to the network (컄 page 250).
왘
Press s to switch to the number
and/or name last dialed in the redial
memory.
왘
Press % or $ to select the desired number and/or name.
왘
Press s or # to start dialing.
Once a connection has been established, the name appears in the multifunction display, provided that it has
been stored in the phone book, otherwise the dialed telephone number appears.
251
Control systems
Instrument cluster control system
Answering a call
When your telephone is ready to receive
calls, you can answer a call at any time
with the ignition on. When you are in the
“Telephone” menu, you will see the following message on the multifunction display:
Assistance menu*
i The menu overview can be found on
Distance warning function*
activating/deactivating
왘
Press ( or & to select the
“Assistance” menu.
In the “Assistance” menu, you can change
the settings of your driving systems.
왘
Press % or $ to select the
“Distance warning” function.
Displaying distance graphic*
왘
Press #.
왘
Press # again if you would like to
change the current status.
(컄 page 243).
Please refer to the “Driving systems” section of this manual (컄 page 385) for instructions on how to activate DISTRONIC
Plus*.
왘
Press s.
i The caller’s number appears only if it is
왘
Press ( or & to select the
“Assistance” menu.
왘
Press % or $ to select the
“Distance display” function.
왘
Press #.
transmitted.
The caller’s name appears only if the number and
the name are stored in the phone book.
Ending a call or rejecting an incoming
call
왘
Press t.
252
The DISTRONIC Plus distance graphic
appears on the multifunction display.
Distance warner : appears on the
left-hand side of the multifunction display.
For more information (컄 page 397).
Control systems
Instrument cluster control system
Switching on the Dynamic Rear View
Monitor* automatically
i The image from the Dynamic Rear View
Monitor is shown on the COMAND display.
왘
Press ( or & to select the
“Assistance” menu.
왘
Press % or $ to select the
“Rearview camera” function.
왘
Press #.
The following settings are available:
“On when in The Dynamic Rear View
Reverse”
Monitor automatically
switches on when reverse
gear is engaged.
“OFF”
The Dynamic Rear View
Monitor is not switched on.
Service menu
i The menu overview can be found on
(컄 page 243).
Calling up vehicle malfunction, warning
and system status messages stored in
memory
Use the vehicle status message memory
menu to scan malfunction and warning
messages that may be stored in the system. Such messages appear in the multifunction display and are based on
conditions or system status the vehicle’s
system has recorded.
The vehicle status message memory menu
only appears if there are any messages
stored.
The “Service” menu is used for
왘
Press # again if you would like to
change the current status.
앫
calling up messages
앫
checking tire inflation pressure electronically with the Advanced TPMS*
(standard on U.S. vehicles)
앫
activating Run Flat Indicator
(Canada only)
앫
calling up the maintenance service indicator display
앫
check engine oil level*
Warning!
G
Malfunction and warning messages are only
indicated for certain systems and are intentionally not very detailed. The malfunction
and warning messages are simply a reminder with respect to the operation of certain
systems and do not replace the owner’s
and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain
the vehicle’s operating safety by having all
required maintenance and safety checks
컄컄
253
Control systems
Instrument cluster control system
컄컄
performed on the vehicle and by bringing
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center to address the malfunction and
warning messages (컄 page 557).
왘
Checking tire inflation pressure
For information about checking tire inflation pressure (컄 page 511).
Settings menu
i The menu overview can be found on
(컄 page 243).
Activating Run Flat Indicator*
In the “Settings” menu, you can:
Press ( or & to select the
“Service” menu.
For information about activating Run Flat
Indicator (컄 page 515).
앫
switch the daytime driving lamps on or
off
If conditions have occurred causing
status messages to be recorded, the
number of messages appears in the
multifunction display: “2 Messages”.
Calling up the maintenance service indicator display
앫
switch the additional speedometer on
or off
앫
switch the radar sensors* on or off.
왘
Press % or $ to select the message.
왘
Press # to confirm.
i See the “Practical hints” section for mal-
function and warning messages (컄 page 557).
i If you turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 and then back to position 2,
all messages will be deleted from the message
memory.
254
For information about maintenance
(컄 page 532).
Checking engine oil level (S 600)*
For information about checking engine oil
level (컄 page 494).
Control systems
Instrument cluster control system
Daytime driving lamps mode on/off
(USA only)
i This function is not available in countries
where the “Daytime driving lamps” mode is mandatory and therefore in a constant mode.
왘
Press ( or & to select the “Settings” menu.
왘
Press % or $ to select the “Daytime driving lamps” function.
With “Daytime driving lamps” mode selected and the exterior lamp switch at position
M or *, the low beam headlamps
are switched on when the engine is running.
In low ambient light conditions the following lamps will switch on additionally:
You can have an additional digital speedometer shown on the multifunction display. The speed is shown in the unit of
kilometers/hour (USA) or miles/hour
(CAN).
앫
Parking lamps
왘
앫
Tail lamps
Press ( or & to select the “Settings” menu.
왘
Press % or $ to select the “Add.
speedometer” function.
왘
Press #.
왘
Press # again if you would like to
change the current status.
왘
Press #.
앫
License plate lamps
왘
Press # again if you would like to
change the current status.
앫
Side marker lamps
Depending on the previous status, the
daytime driving lamps will be switched
on or off.
Showing or hiding additional speedometer
For more information on the daytime running lamp mode (컄 page 344).
i If you turn the exterior lamp switch to another position, the corresponding lamp(s) will
switch on.
Depending on the previous status, the
additional speedometer will be
switched on or off.
i Make sure that the light switch is set
to B or * when you switch off the daytime driving lamps while driving at night.
255
Control systems
Instrument cluster control system
Switching radar sensors* on or off
i Canada only:
If your vehicle is equipped with a 24 GHz
radar sensor system, you can switch it on
or off.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
앫
DISTRONIC Plus*
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
앫
BAS Plus*
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
앫
Park Assist*
앫
Distance warner*
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
i Depending on production date, the following
messages may appear in the multifunction display, when you have switched off the radar sensors and
! You must switch off the 24 GHz radar sensor system in certain countries and near radio-astronomical facilities.
i Please ask an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center where you must switch off the radar sensor system.
i USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
왘
Press ( or & to select the “Settings” menu.
왘
Press % or $ to select the “Radar sensor” function.
왘
Press #.
왘
Press # again if you would like to
change the current status.
Depending on the previous status, the
radar sensors will be switched on or
off.
i The selected status of the radar sensors remains stored in memory even if the engine is
turned off and restarted.
256
When you switch off the radar sensors, the
following systems are deactivated:
앫
you attempt to activate DISTRONIC Plus*:
DISTRONIC PLUS
currently unavailable
See Oper. Manual
앫
you attempt to activate Park Assist*:
Park Assist
currently unavailable
See Oper. Manual
앫
you attempt to activate DISTRONIC Plus* or
Park Assist*:
Radar sensor
deactivated
See Oper. Manual
For more information (컄 page 557).
Control systems
Voice Control* operating safety
왔 Voice Control* operating safety
Warning!
G
Please devote your attention first and foremost to the traffic situation you are in. While
the system permits hands-free phone operation, attention to traffic may be diverted
not only by physical operation of a phone,
but also by the distraction of a phone conversation while driving. As such, for safety
reasons, we encourage the driver to stop the
vehicle in a safe place before answering or
placing a phone call.
For safety reasons, you should only select a
destination when the vehicle is stationary.
While the navigation system provides directional assistance, the driver must remain focused on safe driving behavior, especially
attention to traffic and street signs, and
should utilize the system’s audio cues while
driving.
The navigation system does not supply any
information on stop signs, yield signs, traffic
regulations or traffic safety rules. Their observance always remains in the driver’ personal responsibility. DVD maps do not cover
all areas nor all routes within an area.
Traffic regulations always have priority over
any route recommendations given.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 13.5 m) every second.
Warning!
G
Navigation announcements are intended to
direct you while driving without diverting
your attention from the road and driving.
Please always use this feature instead of
consulting the map display for directions.
Consulting the symbols or map display for
directions may cause you to divert your attention from driving and increase your risk
of an accident.
Warning!
G
Please do not use the Voice Control System
in an emergency, as the tone of your voice
may change in a stressful situation. This
could cause a delay in completing your
phone call in a timely manner. This could
distract you in an emergency situation and
cause you to be involved in an accident.
257
Control systems
Voice Control* introduction
The Voice Control System gives you the capability to control the following systems on
your vehicle using spoken commands:
앫
Telephone*
앫
Navigation
앫
Address book
앫
Audio (AM/FM radio, CD/DVD changer, MP3 player)
You control these systems using spoken
commands. Moreover, controls such as
the buttons on the multifunction steering
wheel (컄 page 260) allow you to keep your
hands on the steering wheel.
The command vocabulary consists of
approximately 300 ready to use phrases.
The Voice Control System recognizes commands and number sequences, irrespective of the speaker. To optimize speech
recognition for your voice follow the individualization process (컄 page 302).
You can use the Voice Control System to
call up all of COMAND’s main menu items,
with the exception of the main menus for
“Vehicle” and “Navi”.
258
The commands and digit sequences can be
spoken without pausing between the individual words. If an unavailable or incorrect
command is used, the Voice Control System will prompt you for a new command by
asking “Please repeat” or “Please repeat
your entry”.
In order to provide for a safe and comfortable dialog, the Voice Control System acknowledges important commands.
Control systems
Voice Control* introduction
Spelling
Command types
Active System
You may not need to spell the entire name
(street, intersection, city or point of interest) especially if the name is lengthy. Spelling the first three to five characters of the
name should be sufficient for the system
to recognize the name provided it is available on the navigation DVD.
The Voice Control System commands can
be categorized as:
The active system is the system currently
shown in the COMAND display.
앫
If, for example, you listen to the radio while
the telephone system is active on the
COMAND display, you have to switch to
the radio using the command “Radio” before you can operate the radio.
The selection appearing on the COMAND
display is sorted based on your recognized
voice input and a matching algorithm.
You can use the commands “Next page” or
“Previous page” to scroll up or down in the
list.
General Commands
These are commands always available
to you as soon as the Voice Control
System is activated (for example
“Help” commands).
앫
Local Commands
These are commands specific to the
currently active system shown in the
COMAND display (for example commands to control the CD changer).
Use the command “Correction” to start
over by again spelling the name.
For a complete list of commands
(컄 page 288).
Speak each character as clearly as you
can, especially when they sound very similar (d or e).
i During Voice Control System operation visual help windows also appear in the COMAND display (컄 page 261).
259
Control systems
Voice Control* introduction
Controls
Item
Page
1 Press button:
Operation via the multifunction steering wheel
! to activate Voice
Control
to accept a call
260
Activating Voice Control
2 Press button:
L to cancel Voice
Control
i Voice Control can be cancelled at any time,
even during a dialog. Please note that if the Voice
Control System is cancelled during a dialog, then
the complete procedure is stopped and Voice
Control is cancelled.
260
왘
Switch on COMAND (컄 page 79).
왘
Press !.
An audible tone (beep) confirms the activation of the system.
3 Setting the volume
Press button:
æ volume up
261
ç volume down
261
Telephone
Press button:
260
s to accept an incoming
call
to dial a number
262
264
t to end a call
to reject an incoming
call
260
왘
Speak a command.
Cancelling Voice Control
왘
Press L, or
왘
speak the command “Cancel”
(except for speaking voice entries, entering a town or city or carrying out individualization), or
왘
press any COMAND button.
Control systems
Voice Control* introduction
Setting volume level
왘
Activate Voice Control.
왘
Speak a command, for example “Help”.
왘
Press æ or ç. The volume is increased or decreased during voice output, or
왘
set volume for voice output using the
COMAND volume thumbwheel on the
lower part of the front central console
(컄 page 89).
When the Voice Control System requires
additional information from the user, a selection list is shown on the COMAND display in the address book and navigation
system.
1 Multifunction display
Symbols
Displays
COMAND Display
In addition to the acoustic help function,
a visual help function (컄 page 215) is available on the COMAND display.
Upon activating the Voice Control, the
most important available commands for
the currently active system appear on the
COMAND display.
1 COMAND display
Multifunction display
For example: telephone numbers are
shown on the multifunction display while
dialing when the main “Telephone” menu
is selected in the instrument cluster control system.
The following symbols are found in following Voice Control System pages:
s This symbol stands for commands
and voice entries you are speaking.
t This symbol stands for voice output
by the system.
u This symbol indicates that information is available on the COMAND
display.
261
Control systems
Voice Control* telephone
Warning!
G
Warning!
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a cellular telephone while driving.
Whether or not prohibited by law, for safety
reasons, the driver should not use the cellular telephone while the vehicle is in motion.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location before
placing or answering a call.
If you nonetheless choose to use the cellular
phone while driving, please use the handsfree feature and be sure to pay attention to
the traffic situation at all times. Use the cellular phone only when road, weather and
traffic conditions permit.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
262
G
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury.
Telephone operation
The Voice Control System gives you the
following capabilities:
앫
Enter a telephone unlock code
앫
Dial a phone number by speaking the
telephone number
앫
Store names and numbers in the
COMAND address book
앫
Dial a phone number by speaking the
name of an COMAND address book entry
앫
Delete an address book entry from the
address book
앫
Have the system read out the phone
book of the address book entry by entry
앫
Manage and access the automated answering system/voice mail box
앫
Redial names and numbers
The Voice Control System detects whether
앫
your telephone is switched on
앫
the corresponding mobile network is
logged in
앫
it is possible to dial
If dialing is not possible, the Voice Control
System will advise you accordingly.
i You can continue operating your mobile
phone using the telephone keypad or keypad on
your phone.
Before you can operate the telephone using the Voice Control System, you have to
activate the Voice Control (컄 page 260).
Control systems
Voice Control* telephone
Telephone commands
For a complete list of commands
(컄 page 288).
“Telephone”
Use the command “Telephone” to activate
the telephone main menu. Use this command if you want the digits you are entering to appear on the COMAND display.
“Help telephone”
The Voice Control System features a comprehensive help function.
“Enter PIN”
i The PIN (only GSM mobile phones) prompt
starts automatically whenever the phone is
locked and you wish to use it.
Use the command “Enter PIN” to input the
code to unlock your telephone. After
speaking the command, you are prompted
to enter the code.
Speak the code
앫
as a continuously spoken string of digits, or
앫
in digit blocks of three to five digits.
Digits from “Zero” to “Nine” may be used.
After each digit block (separate the digit
blocks by using an approximately
0.5 second pause), the Voice Control System repeats the recognized digits and
waits until you continue speaking.
Sample dialog:
s Enter PIN
t Please say the PIN
s Zero zero one one
t Zero zero one one
s OK
Use the command “Help telephone” and
the Voice Control System will read out an
option list of available functions and commands that can be used in conjunction
with the telephone (컄 page 215).
263
Control systems
Voice Control* telephone
“Dial number”
Sample dialog:
“Confirm”
You can dial a phone number using the
command “Dial number”.
s Dial number
t Please say the number
s One two three
t One two three
s Four five six seven
t Four five six seven
s OK
t Dialing
Using the command “Confirm” will repeat
all digits spoken up to that point. Upon repeating the digits, the system will prompt
you to continue your input.
Digits from “Zero” to “Nine” may be used.
The phone number must be spoken
앫
as a continuously spoken string of
digits, or
앫
in digit blocks (three to five digits in
each block).
After each digit block (separate the digit
blocks by using an approx. 0.5 second
pause), the Voice Control System repeats
the recognized digits and waits until you
continue speaking.
When dialing 1800 numbers, you may pronounce the first four digits as “One eight
hundred” and the system will recognize the
spoken entries as “One eight zero zero”.
All other numeric entries must be spoken
as individual numbers.
264
i You can also dial the telephone number spoken by pressing button s on the multifunction steering wheel (instead of using the
command “OK”):
You can dial the telephone number before all
numbers are recited in full.
Sample dialog:
s Dial number
t Please say the number
s One two three
t One two three
s Confirm
t One two three, please continue
s Four five six seven
t Four five six seven
s OK
t Dialing
Control systems
Voice Control* telephone
“Correction”
“Delete”
Using the command “Correct” will correct
the last entered digit block. After speaking
the command, the last digit block is deleted and all previously entered digits are repeated. The system then prompts you to
continue your input.
Using the command “Delete” will erase all
digits entered. The system then prompts
you to start your input again.
Sample dialog:
s Dial number
t Please say the number
s One two three
t One two three
s Four five six seven
t Five five six seven
s Correction
t One two three, please continue
s Four five six seven
t Four five six seven
s OK
t Dialing
t Dialing
“Redial”
Use the command “Redial” to dial the last
dialed number.
Sample dialog:
s Dial number
t Please say the number
s One two three
t One two three
s Four five six seven
t Four five six seven
s Delete
t Number deleted. Please enter the
number again
s Four two seven three
t Four two seven three
s Three nine one
t Three nine one
s OK
“Save name” (COMAND address book)
Use the command “Save name” to create a
new entry in your COMAND address book.
After using the command, the system will
prompt you to enter a phone number.
Digits from “Zero” to “Nine” can be entered (컄 page 264).
Speak the telephone number
앫
as a continuous string
or, with longer phone numbers,
앫
in form of digit blocks (three to five digits). After each digit block (separate the
digit blocks by using an approximately
0.5 second pause), the Voice Control
System repeats the recognized digits
and waits until you continue speaking.
265
Control systems
Voice Control* telephone
After the command “OK”, you will be
prompted up to two times to input the
name. When repeating the name, make
sure that you pronounce it in the same
manner as during the first input. Otherwise
the name cannot be saved and the Voice
Control System cancels the save procedure.
i The Voice Control System may recognize
names even if not saved in your voice. For optimum call-up performance, however, you should
speak and save the names you intend to use
yourself.
i You can also add a name to an entry by calling up the corresponding menu on COMAND and
saying the name twice (컄 page 202).
Sample dialog:
“Dial name” (COMAND address book)
s Save name
t Please say the number first
s One two three
t One two three
s Four five six seven
t Four five six seven
s OK
t Please say the name
s John Smith
t Please repeat the name
s John Smith
t Do you want to save the number in
Use the command “Dial name” to place a
phone call by selecting a name previously
saved in your personal address book.
a category?
s No
t Name and number saved
266
Sample dialog:
s Dial name
t Please say the name
s John Smith
If several telephone numbers exist
for the same entry, the Voice Control System will ask for clarification.
t Do you want to place a work call or
a home call?
s Work
t John Smith work
Dialing
Control systems
Voice Control* telephone
“Call <voice entry>” (Address book)
앫
“Call John Smith work car”
Use the command “Call <voice entry>” to
place a phone call by directly selecting a
name previously stored in your address
book.
앫
“Call John Smith work land line”
One address book entry can have up to
three different telephone numbers (mobile
phone/car/land line) for both the home
and work fields.
Sample dialog:
If only one telephone number is stored for
a given name, you can recall the entry using the command “Call John Smith”.
If several telephone numbers are associated with one entry, you can recall the desired telephone number by using the
following commands:
앫
“Call John Smith home”
앫
“Call John Smith work”
앫
“Call John Smith home cell phone”
앫
“Call John Smith home car”
앫
“Call John Smith home land line”
앫
“Call John Smith work cell phone”
The system confirms your input and the
number is dialed.
“Delete name” (COMAND Address
book)
Use the command “Delete name” to delete
a name from the COMAND address book.
Sample dialog:
s Delete name
t The name, please
If several telephone numbers exist
for the same entry, the Voice Cons Smith office
trol System will ask for clarification.
t Smith office: Would you like to de-
s Call John Smith
t Do you want to place a work call or
a home call?
s Work
t John Smith work
lete the voice name?
s Yes
t The voice name is deleted
Dialing
267
Control systems
Voice Control* telephone
“List phone book” and dialing a phone
number
Selecting an entry and dialing that
number
Managing automated answering system/voice mail box
Use the command “List phone book” to listen to all voice entries in the phone book
with a phone number stored, and select an
entry and dial that number.
왘
Activate the Voice Control System to access and manage your answering machine/voice mail box.
Sample dialog:
s List phone book
The system reads out the complete
phone book entry by entry.
For the desired entry, press ! during or immediately after voice output.
If more than one phone number exists
for a given entry, the Voice Control System prompts:
왘
t Do you want to place a work call or
An audible tone (beep) confirms the activation of the system.
a home call?
s Home
The system reads out the name of
the selected entry and dials the corresponding number.
왘
Press L.
The system confirms “Cancel”.
The dialog is concluded.
268
Speak the required digits (“Zero” to
“Nine”).
or
왘
Speak the required words “Star” and
“Pound”.
왘
Speak the final command “OK”.
Cancelling the dialog:
왘
Activate the Voice Control System during a phone call (컄 page 260).
The system dials the number entered.
Control systems
Voice Control* navigation
왔 Voice Control* navigation
Important notes
Warning!
During route guidance, you will not receive
information on:
G
For safety reasons, you should only select a
destination when the vehicle is stationary.
While the navigation system provides directional assistance, the driver must remain focused on safe driving behavior, especially
attention to traffic and street signs, and
should utilize the system’s audio cues while
driving.
The navigation system does not supply any
information on stop signs, yield signs, traffic
regulations or traffic safety rules. Their observance always remains in the driver’ personal responsibility. DVD maps do not cover
all areas nor all routes within an area.
Traffic regulations always have priority over
any route recommendations given.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 13.5 m) every second.
앫
traffic lights
앫
stop and yield signs
앫
parking or stopping zones
앫
one-way streets
앫
narrow bridges, or
앫
other traffic regulation data.
G
Navigation announcements are intended to
direct you while driving without diverting
your attention from the road and driving.
You should therefore always strictly observe
traffic regulations while driving. Drive carefully and always obey traffic laws and road
signs, even if they contradict navigation system instructions.
Warning!
Warning!
Please always use this feature instead of
consulting the map display for directions.
Consulting the symbols or map display for
directions may cause you to divert your attention from driving and increase your risk
of an accident.
G
Please do not use the Voice Control System
in an emergency, as the tone of your voice
may change in a stressful situation. This
could cause a delay in completing your
phone call in a timely manner. This could
distract you in an emergency situation and
cause you to be involved in an accident.
269
Control systems
Voice Control* navigation
Navigation operation
The Voice Control System allows you to
앫
start route guidance
앫
display the map
앫
zoom in or zoom out of the map
앫
listen to the destination memory
앫
cancel route guidance
For a complete list of commands
(컄 page 288).
앫
turn guide instructions on or off
“Help navigation”/“Help”
앫
enter a state or province
앫
enter a city
앫
spell the name of a city
앫
spell the name of district or center
앫
spell the name of a street
앫
spell the name of an intersection
앫
enter a house number
Before you can operate navigation using
the Voice Control System, you have to activate the Voice Control System
(컄 page 260).
앫
enter a complete address
Selecting navigation mode
앫
select one of your last destinations
왘
Press !.
앫
enter a POI (point of interest)
왘
Speak the command “Navigation”.
앫
select one of your last destinations
왘
Press !.
앫
save a destination
왘
앫
navigate to a destination stored in the
destination memory of the address
book
Speak one of the navigation commands.
270
Navigation commands
i You cannot start the route guidance until all
necessary address data has been entered.
Use the command “Help navigation” to
read out an option list of available functions and commands that can be used in
conjunction with the navigation system.
Control systems
Voice Control* navigation
“Enter state”,“Enter province”
“Last states”
Use the command “Enter state” or “Enter
province” to select a different state or
province on the navigation DVD.
Use the command “Last states” to select a
state or province from among a number of
last selected states or provinces.
Sample dialog:
Dialog for entering a complete address
s Enter state
t Please say the name of the state
s New York
u The system shows a numbered list
of states recognized by the system
t Please select a line number
s Number two
or accept, say
s Yes
t State accepted
“Enter destination”
Use the command “Enter destination” to
enter a complete destination address.
The system guides you through the dialog.
As soon as a valid address has been entered, you can start route guidance or save
the destination. For information on spelling
(컄 page 276).
Sample dialog:
s Enter destination
The selected entry is adopted from the list. t Please spell a New York street
name
s B-R-O-A-D-W
u The system displays a numbered
list of matching street names on
the COMAND display
t Please select a line number
s Number two
t Number two accepted
t Do you want to enter a house number?
s No
t Do you want to enter an intersection?
s No
t Do you want to spell the town’s
name?
s Yes
t Please spell the town name
s N-E-W-Y-O-R-K
u The system displays a numbered
list of matching city names on the
COMAND display
t Please select a line number
271
Control systems
Voice Control* navigation
s Number one
t Number one accepted
t Do you want to start route guidance?
s Yes
t Starting route guidance
The system calculates the route and, upon
completing route calculation, starts route
guidance.
i You may not need to spell the entire name
(street, intersection, city or point of interest) especially if the name is lengthy. Spelling the first
three to five characters of the name should be
sufficient for the system to recognize the name
provided it is available on the navigation DVD.
i The selection appearing on the COMAND
display is sorted based on your recognized voice
input and a matching algorithm.
You can use the commands “Continue” or
“Back” to scroll up or down in the list.
Use the command “Correction” to start over by
again spelling the name.
Speak each character as clearly as you can, especially when they sound very similar (d or e).
272
“Points of interest”
Use the command “Points of interest” to
select a point of interest (POI) such as airports, railroad stations, gas stations etc.
Sample dialog:
s Points of interest
u The system shows the following list
on the COMAND display:
앫
current position
앫
other town/city
앫
Global POI
t Please select a line number
s Number one
u The system displays a numbered
list of available POI categories:
Select POI category menu
t Please select a line number
s Number one
u The system displays a numbered
list search categories: Find menu
t Please select a line number
s Number one
t The system displays a numbered
list of airports sorted by distance
t Please select a line number
s Number one
t Point of interest accepted
t Do you want to start route guidance?
s Yes
t Starting route guidance
i Depending on the number of categories and
POI’s available for a given area, the system may
display several lists on each of which you may
have to make a selection by speaking the desired
line number or you have to spell the name of a
POI.
Control systems
Voice Control* navigation
“Next POI”
With the commands
The system calculates the route and, upon
completing route calculation, starts route
guidance.
앫
“Next gas station”
앫
“Next parking lot”
“Last destinations”
앫
“Next Mercedes-Benz service”
앫
“Next restaurant”
Use the command “Last destinations” to
select a destination from among a number
of destinations last navigated to.
앫
“Next hospital”
you can select POIs in your vicinity.
Sample dialog:
s Next gas station
u The system shows a numbered list
of gas stations on the COMAND display.
t Please select a line number
s Number one
t Number one accepted
t Do you want to start route guid-
“Save destination”
Use the command “Save destination” to
save the current destination in the address
book.
Sample dialog:
s Save destination
t Please say the name
s John Smith
t Please repeat the name
s John Smith
t Where do you want to save: home
or work?
s Work
t The destination has been saved
i The Voice Control System may recognize
names even if not saved in your voice. For best
possible call-up performance, however, you
should speak and save the names you intend to
use yourself.
If an entry is already available in the address
book, the system will ask you if you would like to
add the address to the available entry.
ance?
s Yes
273
Control systems
Voice Control* navigation
“Navigate to <voice entry>” (Address
book)
Use the command “Navigate to <voice entry>” to start route guidance by selecting
voice entry with a saved destination address from the COMAND address book.
to directly select between home or work
address for that name. The system confirms your selection, calculates the route,
and begins route guidance.
Sample dialog:
A voice entry may have two different desti- s Navigate to John Smith
nation addresses associated with it (home
or work).
The system confirms your command, calculates the route, and begins route guidance.
If only one address is stored, you can use
the command “Navigate <voice name>” to
select the stored destination address for
that name.
If two addresses are stored, you can use
the commands
앫
“Navigate <voice name> home”
or
앫
“Navigate <voice name> work”
274
If more than one address exists for
this voice entry, the Voice Control
System will prompt you:
t Navigate to home or work?
s Work
t John Smith work
Starting route guidance
“Start route guidance”
Use the command “Start route guidance”
to start route guidance after entering a valid destination.
Sample dialog:
s Start route guidance
t Starting route guidance
Route guidance begins.
“Guidance instructions on”
Use the command “Guidance instruction
on” to have the Voice Control System repeat the last guidance instruction. If guidance voice output was previously muted,
using this command will deactivate the
muting of the voice output.
“Guidance instruction off”
Use the command “Guidance instruction
off” to mute the systems’ guidance voice
output.
Control systems
Voice Control* navigation
“Cancel route guidance”
“Map”
Sample dialog:
Use the command “Cancel route guidance” to cancel route guidance.
Use the command “Map” to activate or
switch to map display.
s List destination memory
Sample dialog:
“Zoom in”, “Zoom out”
s Cancel route guidance
t Are you sure you want to cancel
Use these commands to zoom in on map or
to zoom out of map to the desired level of
map detail.
route guidance?
s Yes
Route guidance is canceled.
or
s No
t Cancel
The dialog with the Voice Control System
is canceled. Route guidance remains active.
The system reads out the address
book destination memory.
To select a voice entry and adopt address
for route guidance:
왘
“Zoom in completely”, “Zoom out completely”
These commands are used to adapt the
map display directly to the smallest or largest map scale.
If more than one address is available,
the system will prompt you:
t Navigate to home or work?
s Home
The system reads the selected
voice entry and starts route guidance.
“List destination memory”
Use the command “List destination memory” to have the system read out all destination memory entries and select and entry
for route guidance.
When the system reads the desired entry, press !.
To cancel the dialog:
왘
Press L.
You have canceled the dialog. The system confirms cancellation by saying
“Cancel”.
275
Control systems
Voice Control* navigation
Commands for entering parts of an address
“Enter town”
The “Enter town” command is used to enter any larger town or city in the USA or
Canada.
i If the desired town/city does not appear on
the list of towns/cities, the town or city can be
entered by using the “Spell town” command.
i You can scroll through the list by using the
“Continue” or “Back” command. Say “Correction” to enter the town or city again.
Sample dialog:
s Enter town
t Please spell the name of the town
s E-A-S-T-O-N
u The system displays a numbered
list of available city names
276
t Please select a line number
s Number one
t Number one, town accepted
The city selected is adopted for route guidance.
“Spell town”
Use the command “Spell town” to enter a
city name by spelling mode and see if it
matches an entry available on the navigation DVD.
Speak the characters as a continuous
string (five to seven characters). The system then displays a list of cities on the
COMAND display from which you can select the desired city.
Sample dialog:
s Spell town
t Please spell the town name
s N-E-W-Y-O-R
u The system displays a numbered
list of available city names
t Please select a line number
s Number one
t Number one, town accepted
The city selected is adopted for route guidance.
i You can use the commands “Continue” or
“Back” to scroll up or down in the list. Use the
command “Correction” to start over again by
spelling the name of the town.
i You must also spell foreign towns or cities in
English. Please note that the list on the COMAND
display is sorted according to the probability of
the voice recognition.
Speak each character as clearly as you can, especially when they sound very similar (d or e).
Control systems
Voice Control* navigation
“District” or “Center”
Sample dialog:
“Street”
Use the command “District” or “Center” to
to spell a city location in the city previously
selected.
s District
t Please spell the center
s S-T-A-T-E-N-I-S
u The system displays a list of avail-
Use the command “Street” to spell and select a street for the adopted city. Only
street names available on the navigation
DVD can be selected.
Speak the characters as a continuous
string (five to seven characters). The system then displays a list of available city districts or centers on the COMAND display.
Select the desired city center from that
list.
able districts if more than one name
matches the name of a district for
the given city.
t Please select a line number
s Number one
t Number one, center accepted
The district selected is adopted for route
guidance.
Speak the characters as a continuous
string (five to seven characters). The system then displays a list of available street
names on the COMAND display. Select the
desired street name from that list.
Sample dialog:
s Street
t Please spell the name of the street
s F-O-R-E-S-T
u The system displays a numbered
list of available street names.
t Please select a line number
s Number one
t Number one, street accepted
The street name selected is adopted for
route guidance.
277
Control systems
Voice Control* navigation
“Intersection”, “cross street”
Use the command “Intersection” to spell
and select an intersection.
Speak the characters as a continuous
string (five to seven characters). The system then displays a list of available intersections on the COMAND display. Select
the desired intersection from that list.
t Please spell the name of the crossing street
s D-U-D-L-E-Y
u The system displays a numbered
list of available intersections on the
COMAND display.
Sample dialog:
t Please select a line number
s Number one
t Intersection accepted
s Intersection
t Please spell the first street name
s F-O-R-E-S-T
The intersection is adopted for route guidance. If an address at the intersection is
recognized, the system asks if it is correct.
Say “Yes” or “No”.
“House number”
Use the command “House number” to select a house number for the street previously selected. Speak the house number in
single digits.
Sample dialog:
s House number
t Please say the house number in single digits
s Three two
t Is three two correct?
s OK
t House number accepted
The house number is adopted for route
guidance.
278
Control systems
Voice Control* address book
왔 Voice Control* address book
Warning!
G
Please devote your attention first and foremost to the traffic situation you are in.
Before your journey, please familiarize yourself with the address book functions.
Only use the Voice Control System when
road and traffic conditions permit you to do
so. Otherwise you could be involved in an
accident in which you or others could be injured.
in the address book. Available commands
are dependent on the status of the address
book. The address book can be in one of
the following status:
Opening address book
Press !.
왘
Speak the command “Address book”.
왘
Press !.
Operation with address book not open
(global)
왘
Speak one of the address book commands described below.
The Voice Control System gives you the
following capabilities:
Operation with address book open
(local)
Address book not open
앫
Address book open.
Store a name (컄 page 265)
앫
Dial a name (컄 page 266)
The Voice Control System Address book
function gives you the capability to store
names and associated phone numbers and
address information.
앫
Delete a name (컄 page 267)
앫
Navigate to an entry (컄 page 274)
앫
List address book (컄 page 280)
You can store up to 80 speaker-dependent
voice entries in the Voice Control System
Address book.
앫
List phone book of the address
(컄 page 268)
앫
List address book destination memory
(컄 page 275)
앫
Delete the address book (컄 page 281)
Using these voice entries, you can dial a
phone number stored in address book or
start route guidance to an address stored
Open the address book
왘
앫
앫
COMAND address book overview
앫
In addition to the capabilities listed when
the address book is not open, the address
book opened allows you to:
앫
open an entry using the corresponding
voice entry
앫
open any entry by spelling the name
왘
Opening entry: Speak the command
“Open entry”.
279
Control systems
Voice Control* address book
Operating and using address book
“Delete name” (Address book)
Sample dialog:
왘
Press !.
Use the command “Delete name” to delete
a voice name from your address book.
s List address book
왘
Speak one of the following commands
depending on the address book status
(open or not open).
Available commands with the address
book not open
For a complete list of commands
(컄 page 288).
“Help address book”
Sample dialog:
s Delete name
t Please say the name
s John Smith
t Do you want to delete John Smith?
s Yes
t The voice name is deleted
Use the command “Help address book” to
have the Voice Control System read out an
option list of all available commands for
the address book.
“Navigate <voice entry>” (Address book)
(컄 page 274)
“Save name” (컄 page 265)
Use the command “List address book” to
have the system read out all available address book entries and, if desired, select
an entry when it is being read.
“Dial name” (컄 page 266)
“Call <voice name>” (컄 page 267)
280
The system reads out all available
address book entries.
“List address book”
왘
Selecting address book entry: When
the system reads the desired entry,
press !.
The entry is selected and shown on the
COMAND display.
왘
Canceling the dialog: Press L.
You have canceled the dialog. The system reads out “Cancel”.
“List phone book” and dialing a phone
number (컄 page 268)
“List destination memory” (컄 page 275)
Control systems
Voice Control* address book
“Delete address book”
Sample dialog:
Use the command “Delete address book”
to delete all or individual voice names of
the address book entries. Only the voice
name is deleted; the remaining data in the
entry are retained.
s Open John Smith
u The entry “John Smith” appears on
“Address book”
Use this command to open the address
book.
Available commands with the address
book open
“Help address book”
Use the command “Help address book” to
have the Voice Control System read out an
option list of all available commands for
the address book.
“Open <voice name>”
Use the command “Open <voice name>”
to open an entry in your address book that
has a voice name already assigned to it.
the COMAND display.
“Select entry”
Use the command “Select entry” to open
an entry in your address book.
Sample dialog:
s Select entry
t Please say the name
s John Smith
u The entry “John Smith” appears on
the COMAND display.
“Spell entry”
Use the command “Spell entry” to open an
address book entry by spelling the name.
Speak the name as continuous string (five
to seven characters).
The system will display a list of possible
matches on the COMAND display from
which you can select the desired entry.
Sample dialog:
s Spell entry
t Please spell the name
s S-M-I-T-H
u The system displays a numbered
list of matching entries on the
COMAND display.
t Please select a line number
s Number two
u The system opens the entry associated with line number two on the
list.
i You can use the commands “Continue” or
“Back” to scroll up or down the next page. Use
the command “Correction” to exit the current
selection list and spell the name again.
281
Control systems
Voice Control* radio
Warning!
G
Please devote your attention first and foremost to the traffic situation you are in.
Before your journey, please familiarize yourself with the radio functions.
Only use the Voice Control System when
road and traffic conditions permit you to do
so. Otherwise you could be involved in an
accident in which you or others could be injured.
Radio operation
The Voice Control System gives you the capability to:
왘
Press !.
왘
Speak the command “Radio”.
앫
Select a station
왘
Press !.
앫
Seek a station
왘
Speak one of the radio commands.
앫
Select a specific frequency
앫
Save up to 20 stations in your station
list
앫
Select frequency band (FM or AM)
앫
Select weatherband
앫
Switch to satellite radio* (USA only)
앫
Delete station (from station list)
“Help Radio”
앫
List the station list
Use the commands
앫
Delete the station list
앫
“FM”
앫
“AM”
앫
“Weatherband”
To operate the radio using the Voice Control System, the Voice Control System
must be activated (컄 page 260).
282
Selecting radio mode:
The system switches to the last tuned
station in the selected band.
Radio commands
For a complete list of commands
(컄 page 288).
to select the desired frequency band or
switch the radio to the weatherband.
Control systems
Voice Control* radio
“Sat Radio*” (USA only)
Sample dialog:
Sample dialog:
Use this command for switching on the
satellite radio*.
s Ninety-five point five
s Save station
t Please say the station name
s Smooth Jazz
t Please say the station name again
s Smooth Jazz
t The station Smooth Jazz has been
“Next station” or “Previous station”
The following commands are used to start
the station search and to tune in the next
station:
앫
“Next station”
앫
“Previous station”
Selecting frequency (FM, AM only)
You may, for example, select a frequency
in the FM band (87.9 to 107.9 Megahertz)
directly using a verbal command such as
“Ninety-five five”. The Voice Control System also recognizes the words “frequency”, “point” and “megahertz”. You may for
example use the command “Frequency
ninety-five point five”.
The Voice Control System tunes the
radio to frequency FM 95.5.
“Save station” (List saved stations)
Use this command to save the set station
(AM and FM only) by name in your personal
station list. After using this command, the
Voice Control System will prompt you to
repeat the name two to four times before it
is saved in the station list. When repeating
the station name, make sure that you pronounce it in the same manner as during the
first input. Otherwise the name cannot be
saved and the Voice Control System cancels the save procedure.
i The Voice Control System may recognize
names even if not saved in your voice. For optimum performance, however, call up only names
you have saved yourself.
i You can freely select the station name, for
example “Favorite station”.
saved
“Select station” (List saved stations)
Use the command “Select station” (AM
and FM only) to select a saved station
name from your station list.
Sample dialog:
s Select station
t Please say the station name
s Smooth Jazz
The Voice Control System tunes to
the corresponding frequency.
283
Control systems
Voice Control* radio
“Station Smooth Jazz” (List saved stations)
“List station list” and select station
from list
Use this command (AM and FM only) to directly select a saved station name from
your station list.
Use this command to list the entire station
list, or to select an entry from the station
list.
Sample dialog:
Sample dialog:
s Station Smooth Jazz
s List station list
“Delete station” (List saved stations)
Use the command “Delete station” (AM
and FM only) to delete a station from your
personal station list.
Sample dialog:
The Voice Control System tunes to
the corresponding station.
The Voice Control System reads out
the entire list.
i If the Voice Control System does not recog-
To select a station:
nize the station name you requested, please refer to the section “List station list” (컄 page 284).
By following the dialog, you can check and determine if the name is saved in the station list.
When the system reads the desired station:
왘
Press !.
왘
Canceling the dialog: Press L.
The dialog is concluded. The system
confirms “Cancel”.
284
s Delete station
t Which station do you want to delete?
s Smooth Jazz
t Do you want to delete Smooth Jazz?
s Yes
t Station deleted
Control systems
Voice Control* radio
“Delete station list”
Use this command to delete the complete
station list or one or more stations from
the station list.
Sample dialog:
s Delete station list
t Do you want to delete all voice
names from the station list?
s Yes
t Are you sure?
s Yes
t All voice names have been deleted
from the station list.
The system deletes the complete station
list. The deletion of the station list cannot
be undone.
The station is erased and the remaining
station entries are read out.
or
t No
t No
The system starts reading the station list.
or
The system continues reading the station
list entry by entry.
When the system reads the station to be
deleted:
왘
Press !.
The station to be deleted is selected.
The name of the selected station is
read out once more.
t Do you want to delete Smooth Jazz?
s Yes
t Station deleted
285
Control systems
Voice Control* CD/DVD changer/MP3
Operation
The Voice Control System gives you the
ability to:
Selecting CD mode:
왘
Press !.
왘
Speak one of the following commands:
앫
Select a CD/DVD/medium
앫
“CD”
앫
Select a track
앫
“DVD”
앫
Select a folder in MP3 mode
앫
“MP3”
앫
Select a group in audio-DVD mode
i The following commands “Next/Previous
CD/DVD” and “CD/DVD 1” to “CD/DVD 6”,
cause the DVD changer to switch from one slot
to another, regardless of the type of medium
found in the selected slot. In your command, you
can therefore replace the term “CD/DVD” with
“Medium”.
To operate the DVD changer using the
Voice Control System, the Voice Control
System must be activated (컄 page 260).
286
왘
Press !.
왘
Speak one of the following commands.
Commands
For a complete list of commands
(컄 page 288).
“Help CD” or “Help DVD” “Help MP3”
Use the commands
앫
“Help CD”
앫
“Help DVD”
앫
“Help MP3”
and the Voice Control System will read out
a complete list of available commands for
the CD, DVD or MP3.
“CD/DVD/Medium 1” to
“CD/DVD/Medium 6”
Use commands “CD/DVD/Medium 1” to
“CD/DVD/Medium 6” to select one of up
to 6 mediums in your DVD changer.
Control systems
Voice Control* CD/DVD changer/MP3
“Next CD/DVD/Medium”
“Previous track” or “Repeat track”
“Memory card”
Use the command “Next CD/DVD/Medium” to select the next available medium in
the DVD changer.
Use the command “Previous track” or “Repeat track” to play again the track you are
listening to.
The “Memory card” command is used to
switch from the DVD drive to the PCMCIA
card.
“Track 1” to “Track 39”
“Group 1” to “Group 9”
“Drive”
Use the commands “Track 1” to
“Track 39” to select one of up to 39 title
numbers of a loaded medium.
The “Group 1” to “Group 9” commands are
used to select a group on the inserted audio-DVD.
The “Drive” command is used to switch
from the PCMCIA card to the DVD drive.
“Next track”
“Next group”/“Previous group”
Use the command “Next track” to select
the next track.
The “Next group”/“Previous group” commands are used to select a group on the inserted audio-DVD.
287
Control systems
Voice Control* command list
Command list
Chapter “Command list” gives you on overview of all commands available for use to
control the Voice Control System.
Which commands are available for use is
dependent on the equipment level in your
vehicle.
i Some functions can be operated using several different commands. In the following list,
these commands are grouped in one cell.
Choose your preferred command from those
available.
General commands
앫
yes
앫
navigation
앫
help
앫
right
앫
route guidance
앫
help please
앫
ok
앫
audio DVD
앫
please help
앫
cancel
앫
radio
앫
help functions
앫
stop
앫
sat radio
앫
help devices
앫
quit
앫
satellite radio*
앫
help voice control
앫
abort
앫
telephone
앫
linguatronic help
앫
terminate
앫
messages
앫
general help
앫
no
앫
SMS
앫
help permanent commands
앫
no thank you
앫
vehicle
앫
help global commands
앫
address book
앫
correction
앫
letters of the English alphabet
앫
MP3
앫
wrong
앫
digits 0 - 9
앫
CD
앫
incorrect
앫
continue
288
Control systems
Voice Control* command list
앫
go forward
앫
help DVD audio
앫
save telephone number
앫
next page
앫
help DVD audio player
앫
save name
앫
back
앫
help DVD audio changer
앫
save password
앫
go back
앫
help navigation
앫
store PIN
앫
previous page
앫
help nav
앫
store PIN code
앫
help radio
앫
help navi
앫
store number
앫
help tuner
앫
help route guidance
앫
store PIN number
앫
help radio
앫
help routing
앫
store telephone number
앫
radio help
앫
help destination guidance
앫
store name
앫
tuner help
앫
store password
앫
dial
Telephone* commands
앫
help telephone
앫
help phone
앫
telephone (on)
앫
dial PIN
앫
help address book
앫
phone (on)
앫
dial number
앫
help CD
앫
telephone off
앫
dial PIN number
앫
help disc
앫
save
앫
dial PIN code
앫
help CD player
앫
save PIN
앫
dial phone number
앫
help CD changer
앫
save PIN code
앫
dial telephone number
앫
help audio DVD
앫
save number
앫
dial password
앫
help DVDA
앫
save PIN number
앫
dial unlock code
289
Control systems
Voice Control* command list
앫
confirm
앫
enter PIN number
앫
incorrect PIN
앫
confirm PIN
앫
enter code
앫
incorrect number
앫
confirm number
앫
enter unlock code
앫
incorrect PIN number
앫
confirm PIN number
앫
list phone book
앫
incorrect PIN code
앫
confirm PIN code
앫
read out phone book
앫
incorrect phone number
앫
confirm phone number
앫
play phone book
앫
incorrect telephone number
앫
confirm telephone number
앫
get phone book
앫
incorrect unlock code
앫
confirm password
앫
recall phone book
앫
delete
앫
confirm unlock code
앫
redial
앫
delete PIN
앫
repeat PIN
앫
redial last number
앫
delete number
앫
repeat number
앫
redial last phone number
앫
delete PIN number
앫
repeat PIN number
앫
correction
앫
delete PIN code
앫
repeat PIN code
앫
wrong PIN
앫
delete phone number
앫
repeat phone number
앫
wrong number
앫
delete telephone number
앫
repeat telephone number
앫
wrong PIN number
앫
delete unlock code
앫
repeat password
앫
wrong PIN code
앫
repeat unlock code
앫
wrong phone number
앫
enter PIN
앫
wrong telephone number
앫
navigation
앫
enter PIN code
앫
wrong unlock code
앫
nav
290
Navigation commands
Control systems
Voice Control* command list
앫
navi
앫
mute route guidance instructions
앫
spell intersection
앫
route guidance
앫
house number
앫
spell cross street
앫
routing
앫
enter house number
앫
enter intersection
앫
destination guidance
앫
map (on)
앫
enter cross street
앫
guidance instructions on
앫
show map
앫
last destinations
앫
switch guidance instruction on
앫
switch on map
앫
last states
앫
switch guidance instructions on
앫
zoom in
앫
last provinces
앫
switch route guidance instruction on
앫
zoom in on map
앫
spell town
앫
switch route guidance instructions on
앫
zoom out
앫
spell city
앫
switch on guidance instruction
앫
zoom out on map
앫
spell name of town
앫
switch on guidance instructions
앫
zoom in completely
앫
spell name of city
앫
switch on route guidance instruction
앫
zoom out completely
앫
enter town
앫
switch on route guidance instructions
앫
enter country
앫
enter city
앫
guidance instructions off
앫
enter another country
앫
enter name of town
앫
switch guidance instructions off
앫
spell country
앫
enter name of city
앫
switch route guidance instructions off
앫
spell another country
앫
district
앫
switch off guidance instructions
앫
change country
앫
center
앫
switch off route guidance instructions
앫
change another country
앫
spell district
앫
mute guidance instructions
앫
intersection
앫
spell center
291
Control systems
Voice Control* command list
앫
enter district
앫
store destination
앫
cancel destination guidance
앫
enter center
앫
store address
앫
exit route guidance
앫
points of interest
앫
start route guidance
앫
exit navigation
앫
enter points of interest
앫
start navigation
앫
exit nav
앫
enter point of interest
앫
start route guidance
앫
exit routing
앫
enter POI
앫
start routing
앫
exit destination guidance
앫
enter POIs
앫
begin route guidance
앫
terminate route guidance
앫
street
앫
begin navigation
앫
terminate navigation
앫
spell street
앫
begin route guidance
앫
terminate nav
앫
spell name of street
앫
begin routing
앫
terminate routing
앫
enter street
앫
continue route guidance
앫
terminate destination guidance
앫
enter name of street
앫
continue navigation
앫
next gas station
앫
enter destination
앫
continue route guidance
앫
next Mercedes-Benz service
앫
destination entry
앫
continue routing
앫
next workshop
앫
destination input
앫
destination guidance on
앫
next MB service
앫
address entry
앫
cancel route guidance
앫
next MB service point
앫
address input
앫
cancel navigation
앫
next MB service center
앫
save destination
앫
cancel nav
앫
next Mercedes service
앫
save address
앫
cancel routing
앫
next Mercedes service point
292
Control systems
Voice Control* command list
앫
next Mercedes service center
앫
spell entry
앫
read out destination memory
앫
next Mercedes-Benz service point
앫
spell name
앫
play destination memory
앫
next Mercedes-Benz service center
앫
spell heading
앫
get destination memory
앫
next service point
앫
search entry
앫
recall destination memory
앫
next service center
앫
search name
앫
<voice name>
앫
next hospital
앫
search heading
앫
<voice name> car
앫
next parking lot
앫
open entry
앫
<voice name> car phone
앫
next restaurant
앫
show entry
앫
<voice name> land line
앫
list entry
앫
<voice name> phone
앫
select entry
앫
<voice name> telephone
Address book commands
앫
address book (on)
앫
get entry
앫
<voice name> cell phone
앫
address list (on)
앫
open entry
앫
<voice name> mobile phone
앫
addresses (on)
앫
open page
앫
<voice name> cellular phone
앫
list address book
앫
open item
앫
call <voice name>
앫
read out address book
앫
open name
앫
call <voice name> work
앫
play address book
앫
open <voice name>
앫
call <voice name> office
앫
get address book
앫
delete name
앫
call <voice name> business
앫
recall address book
앫
delete <voice name>
앫
call <voice name> company
앫
delete address book
앫
list destination memory
앫
<voice name> home
293
Control systems
Voice Control* command list
앫
call <voice name> home
앫
car (phone) business
앫
home cell phone
앫
work
앫
car (phone) company
앫
home mobile
앫
office
앫
work land line
앫
cell home
앫
business
앫
office phone
앫
cell phone home
앫
company
앫
land line phone business
앫
mobile home
앫
car
앫
land line telephone company
앫
mobile phone home
앫
car phone
앫
work cell phone
앫
cellular home
앫
land line
앫
office mobile phone
앫
cellular phone home
앫
land line phone
앫
business cellular phone
앫
call <voice name> work car
앫
land line telephone
앫
cell phone company
앫
call <voice name> work land line
앫
cell phone
앫
home
앫
call <voice name> work cell phone
앫
mobile phone
앫
home car
앫
call <voice name> home car
앫
cellular phone
앫
home car phone
앫
call <voice name> land line phone
앫
work car (phone)
앫
car home
앫
call <voice name> cell phone home
앫
office car (phone)
앫
car phone home
앫
navigate to <voice name>
앫
business car (phone)
앫
home land line
앫
drive to <voice name>
앫
company car (phone)
앫
home land line phone
앫
navigate to <voice name> work
앫
car (phone) work
앫
land line home
앫
navigate to <voice name> home
앫
car (phone) office
앫
land line phone home
앫
dial name
294
Control systems
Voice Control* command list
앫
dial voice name
앫
<1> - <8>
앫
radio seek
앫
save name
앫
use <1> - <8>
앫
station <voice entry>
앫
save voice name
앫
number <1> - <8>
앫
go to <voice entry>
앫
save number
앫
line <1> - <8>
앫
<voice entry>
앫
save telephone number
앫
delete station
앫
save station
Audio commands
앫
store voice name
앫
store number
앫
audio
앫
store station
앫
store telephone number
앫
audio off
앫
select station
앫
accept
앫
select channel
앫
list station list
Radio
앫
accept PIN
앫
accept PIN code
앫
radio (on)
앫
read out station list
앫
accept lock code
앫
AM
앫
play station list
앫
accept PIN number
앫
MW
앫
get station list
앫
accept number
앫
FM
앫
recall station list
앫
accept telephone number
앫
weatherband
앫
delete station list
앫
accept name
앫
next station
앫
previous station
앫
accept password
앫
station search
앫
last station
앫
OK
앫
going up
앫
coming down
앫
finished
앫
other station
앫
station search coming down
295
Control systems
Voice Control* command list
Example: 95.5 FM
앫
satellite radio*
앫
other track
앫
previous track
앫
last track
앫
ninety-five five
앫
ninety-five five megahertz
앫
ninety-five point five
앫
CD (on)
앫
repeat track
앫
ninety-five point five megahertz
앫
CD player (on)
앫
replay track
앫
frequency ninety-five five
앫
CD changer (on)
앫
track 1-39
앫
frequency ninety-five point five
앫
next CD
앫
load track 1-39
앫
frequency ninety-five five megahertz
앫
other CD
앫
load track number 1-39
앫
frequency ninety-five point five megahertz
앫
next medium
앫
select track 1-39
앫
other medium
앫
select track number 1-39
앫
previous CD
앫
CD 1-6
앫
last CD
앫
CD number 1-6
Example: 540 AM
CD
앫
five-hundred-forty
앫
preceding CD
앫
medium 1-6
앫
five-hundred-forty kilohertz
앫
replay CD
앫
medium number 1-6
앫
frequency five-hundred-forty
앫
replay medium
앫
frequency five-hundred-forty kilohertz
앫
repeat medium
앫
last medium
앫
MP3 (on)
앫
previous medium
앫
MP3 player (on)
앫
next track
앫
MP3 changer (on)
Satellite radio* (USA only)
앫
sat radio*
296
MP3
Control systems
Voice Control* command list
앫
next MP3
앫
last folder
앫
앫
other MP3
앫
repeat directory
앫
next medium
앫
repeat folder
앫
other medium
앫
next track
앫
audio DVD
앫
previous MP3
앫
other track
앫
DVDA player (on)
앫
last MP3
앫
previous track
앫
audio DVD player (on)
앫
preceding MP3
앫
last track
앫
DVD audio player (on)
앫
replay MP3
앫
repeat track
앫
DVDA changer (on)
앫
replay medium
앫
replay track
앫
audio DVD changer (on)
앫
repeat medium
앫
track 1-39
앫
DVD audio changer (on)
앫
last medium
앫
load track 1-39
앫
next DVDA
앫
previous medium
앫
load track number 1-39
앫
other DVDA
앫
next directory
앫
select track 1-39
앫
next DVD audio
앫
other directory
앫
select track number 1-39
앫
other DVD audio
앫
next folder
앫
MP3 1-6
앫
next audio DVD
앫
other folder
앫
MP3 number 1-6
앫
other audio DVD
앫
previous directory
앫
medium 1-6
앫
next medium
앫
previous folder
앫
medium number 1-6
앫
other medium
앫
last directory
앫
drive
앫
previous DVDA
memory card
DVD
297
Control systems
Voice Control* command list
앫
last DVDA
앫
previous directory
앫
other track
앫
preceding DVDA
앫
previous folder
앫
previous track
앫
replay DVDA
앫
last directory
앫
last track
앫
previous DVD audio
앫
last folder
앫
repeat track
앫
last DVD audio
앫
repeat directory
앫
replay track
앫
preceding DVD audio
앫
repeat folder
앫
track 1-39
앫
replay DVD audio
앫
next group
앫
load track 1-39
앫
previous audio DVD
앫
other group
앫
load track number 1-39
앫
last audio DVD
앫
previous group
앫
select track 1-39
앫
preceding audio DVD
앫
previous repeat group
앫
select track number 1-39
앫
replay audio DVD
앫
previous replay group
앫
DVDA 1-6
앫
replay medium
앫
last group
앫
DVDA number 1-6
앫
repeat medium
앫
last repeat group
앫
DVD audio 1-6
앫
last medium
앫
last replay group
앫
DVD audio number 1-6
앫
previous medium
앫
group 1-9
앫
audio DVD 1-6
앫
next directory
앫
select group 1-9
앫
audio DVD number 1-6
앫
other directory
앫
group number 1-9
앫
medium 1-6
앫
next folder
앫
select group number 1-9
앫
medium number 1-6
앫
other folder
앫
next track
298
Control systems
Voice Control* troubleshooting
왔 Voice Control* troubleshooting
Help function
To support the user, the Voice Control System contains an extensive help function.
The help function gives you:
앫
General hints on how to best use the
Voice Control System
앫
A listing of all available commands
Help commands
“Help voice control”
Using the command “Help voice control”
will give you information on how to best
use the Voice Control System.
“Help”
In a main menu, help can be accessed at
any time by saying the command “Help”.
The Voice Control System will then read
out the available functions and commands
of all systems.
In a submenu, help can also be accessed at
any time by saying the command “Help”.
The Voice Control System will then read
out an option list of all available functions
and commands available in the particular
submenu.
Entering digits and spelling
앫
Digits from “Zero” to “Nine” may be
used.
You can also use the help function to access help for a specific system. To access
help for the phone operation, you would
speak the command “Help Telephone”.
앫
Speaking phone numbers in digit
blocks of 3 to 5 digits has proven a
very reliable method for the input of
phone numbers.
If you wish to hear the last command read
out:
왘
Press !.
Help window
You can use the help window to view a selection of valid commands on the
COMAND display.
Entering digits
Spelling
앫
The letters of the English alphabet and
the digits 0 - 9 may be used.
앫
Speak the letters in blocks of 5 - 7 letters at a time.
앫
Speak each individual letter clearly.
The help functions can be switched on or
off via COMAND in the “System settings”
menu (컄 page 215).
299
Control systems
Voice Control* troubleshooting
What to do if ...
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Voice Control System does not recognize a The voice entries for the station names
station list entry.
sound too similar.
Suggested solution
왘
When you create your address book entries, select names with the greatest
possible acoustic differences.
왘
Speak the command “List station list”.
The system reads out the station list entry by entry.
왘
Press ! when the desired station
name is being read out.
The station is selected (컄 page 284).
Should interference occur during the pro- Both voice entries differ.
cess of storing a name, the Voice Control
System prompts you to repeat your voice
entry a third and fourth time. If the interference continues, the dialog is stopped.
300
왘
Pronounce the voice entries both times
in the same manner.
Control systems
Voice Control* troubleshooting
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solution
Voice Control System does not recognize
commands.
You have not operated the system from the 왘 Operate the Voice Control System only
driver’s seat.
by the driver as the microphone is
geared to the driver side.
You have spoken unclearly, too loudly or
too quietly.
왘
Speak the commands in a continuous
manner using a normal tone.
A blower is set to the highest setting or
wind noise is being created through open
windows.
왘
Avoid loud disturbances.
Voice Control System does not recognize a The voice entries in the address book sound 왘 When you create your address book enaddress book entry.
too similar.
tries, select names with the greatest
possible acoustic differences: If for example you have the names Smith and
Schmidt, choose for example “Smith
work” or “Schmidt John”.
왘
Speak the command “List phone book”.
The system reads out the address book
entry by entry.
왘
Press ! when the desired entry is
being read out.
The entry is selected and the corresponding number is dialed
(컄 page 268).
301
Control systems
Voice Control* individualization
i The individualization can only be performed
i You may wish to complete only a portion of
when the vehicle is stationary.
the individualization process.
If you drive off, the individualization will be canceled.
Completing the digits portion alone may result in
an improved recognition rate.
After starting the session, the system will guide
you through the individualization by means of
acoustic instructions.
Individualization can be exited at any time. The
data trained, however, will only be retained if a
given individualization portion is completed and
the data is stored when prompted to do so by the
system.
The individualization is used to adapt the
Voice Control System to your own voice
and to therefore improve speech recognition. This does not affect the speech recognition of other users.
Individualization consists of two stages:
앫
Digits
앫
Commands
You can activate individualization in the
COMAND system settings (컄 page 215).
A dialog and screen displays will guide you
through the individualization process.
The system can be reset to the factory settings at any time.
302
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Driving and parking
Starter switch positions
Automatic transmission
Seats
Instrument cluster
Steering wheel
Driving systems
Mirrors
Automatic climate control
Memory function
Trunk
Fastening the seat belts
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Lighting
Windshield wipers
Panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel*
Power windows
Loading and storing
Useful features
303
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
SmartKey
Warning!
Your vehicle comes supplied with two
SmartKeys, each with remote control and
a removable mechanical key.
The locking tabs for the mechanical key
portion of the two SmartKeys are of different color to help distinguish each
SmartKey unit.
The SmartKey provides an extended operating range. To prevent theft, however, it is
advisable to only unlock the vehicle when
you are in close proximity to it.
The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks:
앫
the doors
앫
the trunk
앫
the fuel filler flap
304
SmartKey with remote control
1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Opening button for trunk
(컄 page 436)
3 Mechanical key locking tab
4 ΠUnlock button
5 Battery check lamp
6 Â Panic button (컄 page 68)
! To prevent possible malfunction, avoid exposing the SmartKey to high levels of electromagnetic radiation.
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. It is possible
for children to open a locked door from the
inside, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
Warning!
G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the door
or trunk lid opening when closing a door or
the trunk. Be especially careful when small
children are around.
Before closing doors, make sure there is no
possibility of someone getting caught in a
door during closing.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
i USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
Factory setting
Selective setting
왘
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
to reprogram the SmartKey so that
pressing Œ only unlocks the driver’s
door and the fuel filler flap.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
i You can also open and close the door windows and tilt/sliding sunroof, or the tilt/ sliding
panel* using the SmartKey (컄 page 355).
Global unlocking: Press button Œ.
왘
The vehicle will lock again automatically
and reactivate the anti-theft alarm system
within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if:
앫
neither a door nor the trunk is opened
앫
the SmartKey is not inserted in the
starter switch
앫
the central locking switch is not activated
왘
Global locking: Press button ‹.
With the trunk and all doors closed, all
turn signal lamps flash three times. The
locking knobs in the doors move down.
The anti-theft alarm system is armed.
Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about 5 seconds until battery check lamp 5 (컄 page 304)
flashes twice.
The SmartKey will then function as follows:
왘
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler flap: Press button Œ once.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knob in the driver’s door moves
up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
왘
Global unlocking: Press button Œ
twice.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
305
컄컄
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
컄컄 왘
Global locking: Press button ‹.
With the trunk and all doors closed, all
turn signal lamps flash three times. The
locking knobs in the doors move down.
The anti-theft alarm system is armed.
왘
Restoring to factory setting: Press
and hold buttons Œ and ‹ simultaneously for about 5 seconds until
battery check lamp 5 (컄 page 304)
flashes twice.
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO come
with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO,
each with remote control and a removable
mechanical key.
The locking tabs for the mechanical key
portion of the two SmartKeys with
KEYLESS-GO are of different color to help
distinguish each SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO unit.
The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated
into the SmartKey. On these vehicles, the
validity of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
is checked every time you grasp an outside
door handle.
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is valid,
your vehicle unlocks:
306
앫
the doors
앫
the trunk
앫
the fuel filler flap
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Opening button for trunk
(컄 page 436)
3 Locking tab for mechanical key
4 ΠUnlock button
5 Battery check lamp
6 Â Panic button (컄 page 68)
i When any outside door handle other than
the driver’s outside door handle is grasped, the
vehicle is centrally unlocked.
! To prevent possible malfunction, avoid exposing the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO to high
levels of electromagnetic radiation.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. It is possible for children
to open a locked door from the inside, which
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
They could start the vehicle with a valid
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO left in the vehicle or with the KEYLESS-GO button on the
starter switch, or they could release the
electric parking brake, thereby putting
themselves and others in danger. Switch off
the engine and take the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO with you even if you are only
leaving the vehicle for a short while.
Warning!
G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the door
or trunk lid opening when closing a door or
the trunk. Be especially careful when small
children are around.
Before closing doors, make sure there is no
possibility of someone getting caught in a
door during closing.
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
i You can also open and close the door wini USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
dows and tilt/sliding sunroof, or the tilt/ sliding
panel* using the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
(컄 page 355).
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
307
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO
앫
To lock or unlock the vehicle, the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
located outside the vehicle within approximately 3 ft. (1 m) of a door or the
trunk lid.
앫
In order to start the engine with the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO:
You can also use the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey
(컄 page 304).
The starter switch is under the
KEYLESS-GO button. Pull the
KEYLESS-GO button out in order to access the starter switch.
앫
앫
You can combine KEYLESS-GO functions with normal SmartKey functions
(e.g. unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and
locking with button ‹).
앫
Always carry the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO with you.
앫
Never store the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO together with:
앫
앫
Electronic items such as a mobile
phone or another SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO
Metallic objects such as coins or
metal foil
Doing so could impair the function of
the KEYLESS-GO system.
308
앫
앫
앫
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
must be located in the vehicle.
앫
The brake pedal must be firmly depressed. Do not depress the accelerator.
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
positioned farther away from the vehicle, the system may no longer recognize the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO.
The vehicle then cannot be locked or
the engine started via the KEYLESS-GO
system.
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is removed from the vehicle (e.g. if passenger exits the vehicle with the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO)
앫
when pressing the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button or trying to lock
the vehicle with the outside door
handle the message “Key not recognized” appears in the multifunction
display
앫
with the engine running, the message “Key not recognized” appears
in the multifunction display while
driving off.
Find the SmartKey or change its
present location immediately
(e.g. place it on the front passenger
seat or insert it in shirt pocket).
앫
If you have started the engine with the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
(컄 page 317), you can turn it off again
with:
앫
the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
앫
the SmartKey inserted in the starter
switch, when the automatic transmission is in position P
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
앫
Remember that the engine can be
started by anyone with a SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO that is left inside the
vehicle.
Possibility 1: (One SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO in the vehicle, one
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO outside
the vehicle):
If you leave the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO behind when exiting and
locking the vehicle, no message
appears in the multifunction display.
Possibility 2: (One SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO in the vehicle, no
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO outside
the vehicle):
When exiting and trying to lock the vehicle, the message “Key still in vehicle”
appears in the multifunction display.
The vehicle will not be locked.
Factory setting
왘
Global unlocking: Grasp an outside
door handle.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
i If the vehicle has been parked for more than
72 hours, you must pull an outside door handle
in order to activate the KEYLESS-GO function.
The vehicle will lock again automatically
and reactivate the anti-theft alarm system
within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if:
앫
neither a door nor the trunk is opened
앫
the central locking switch is not activated
1 Outside door handle
왘
Global locking: close all doors and
touch outside of door handle 1. Do
not keep your hand in the door handle
recess.
With the trunk and all doors closed, all
turn signal lamps flash three times. The
locking knobs in the doors move down.
The anti-theft alarm system is armed.
i The vehicle could inadvertently be unlocked
if the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is within 3 ft.
(1 m) of the vehicle and:
앫
an outside door handle is splashed with water, or
앫
you attempt to clean an outside door handle.
309
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Selective setting
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
to reprogram the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO so when you, grasp the driver’s outside door handle only the driver’s
door and the fuel filler flap unlocks.
왘
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
왘
Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about 6 seconds until battery check lamp 5 (컄 page 306)
flashes twice.
왘
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler flap: Grasp the driver’s outside door
handle.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knob in the driver’s door moves
up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
왘
Global unlocking: Grasp any outside
door handle other than the driver’s outside door handle.
310
Global locking: close all doors and
touch outside of door handle 1. Do
not keep your hand in the door handle
recess.
With the trunk and all doors closed, all
turn signal lamps flash three times. The
locking knobs in the doors move down.
The anti-theft alarm system is armed.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO will
then function as follows:
i You can also lock the vehicle using the lock
button on trunk lid (컄 page 310) or, vehicles
with trunk opening/closing system*,
KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch
(컄 page 440).
왘
Global locking using lock button on
trunk lid
Restoring to factory setting: Press
and hold buttons Œ and ‹ simultaneously for about 5 seconds until
battery check lamp 5 (컄 page 306)
flashes twice.
1 Lock button on trunk lid
왘
Close all doors and press lock
button 1.
With the trunk and all doors closed, all
turn signal lamps flash three times. The
locking knobs in the doors move down.
The anti-theft alarm system is armed.
i To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout,
the trunk will open automatically if a SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO is recognized inside the vehicle or in the trunk.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
i You can also lock the vehicle using the outside door handle (컄 page 309) or, vehicles with
trunk opening/closing system*, KEYLESS-GO
locking/closing switch (컄 page 440).
Checking batteries in the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
! If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle with
the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO,
then either the batteries in the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO are discharged, the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning or the vehicle batteries are drained.
앫
Check the batteries in the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO and replace it
them necessary (컄 page 619).
앫
Use the mechanical key to unlock the driver’s door (컄 page 614) and trunk
(컄 page 615).
앫
If the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
is malfunctioning, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Loss of the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO
왘
If you lose your SmartKey, SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO or mechanical key, you
should do the following:
Press button ‹ or Œ.
The battery check lamp (컄 page 304)
(컄 page 306) comes on briefly to indicate that the SmartKey or SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO batteries are in order.
왘
Have the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO deactivated by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Report the loss of the SmartKey,
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO or the mechanical key immediately to your car
insurance company.
You can obtain the required batteries at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Have the mechanical lock replaced if
necessary.
i If the batteries are checked within signal
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
will be glad to supply you with a replacement.
! If the battery check lamp does not come on
briefly during check, the SmartKey or SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO batteries are discharged.
Replace the batteries (컄 page 619).
range of the vehicle, pressing button ‹ or
Πwill lock or unlock the vehicle accordingly.
Have the vehicle batteries and their connections checked (컄 page 634).
311
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Opening doors from the inside
You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
i If the vehicle has previously been locked
Front doors
with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, opening a
door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft
alarm system.
왘
Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.
앫
Press button Œ or ‹ on the
SmartKey.
In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
앫
앫
312
Rear doors
왘
Pull up locking knob 1 on the respective rear door to unlock door.
왘
Pull on door handle 2 on the respective rear door to open door.
Grasp an outside door handle.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
within 3 ft. (1 m) of the vehicle.
1 Locking knob
2 Inside door handle
If door was locked, locking knob 1 will
move up.
To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
앫
Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
(컄 page 317).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be inside the vehicle.
Pull on door handle 2 on the respective front door to open door.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Power closing assist for doors and
trunk lid
It is not necessary to slam the door or
trunk lid closed. An electrical power-assisted mechanism draws doors and trunk lid
closed quietly and automatically once door
and trunk lid has been latched. When the
electrical power-assisted mechanism has
stopped, doors and/or trunk can be
re-opened.
Warning!
G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the door
or trunk lid opening when closing a door or
the trunk. Be especially careful when small
children are around.
In case of danger, pull the inside or outside
door handle, or pull the trunk lid handle.
To prevent personal injury, never actuate
the closing assist mechanism by tampering
with the door or trunk lid latch.
왘
Power closing assist for doors: Press
the doors gently past the initial engage
position into the lock.
The doors close automatically.
Warning!
G
Only drive with the doors closed. Otherwise,
one or more of the doors could open while
the vehicle is in motion, putting you and/or
others at risk.
왘
Power closing assist for trunk lid:
Press the trunk lid gently into its lock.
The trunk closes automatically.
Warning!
G
Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as blocked visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior.
Automatic central locking
The doors and the trunk automatically lock
when the ignition is switched on and the
wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. The
locking knobs in the doors move down.
You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
i The doors are designed to unlock automatically after an accident if the force of the impact
exceeds a preset threshold. The vehicle locks automatically when the ignition is switched on and
the wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. You
could therefore lock yourself out when the vehicle
앫
is pushed or towed
앫
is on a test stand
You can deactivate the automatic locking
using the COMAND system (컄 page 223).
313
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Locking and unlocking from the inside
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
You can lock or unlock the doors and the
trunk from the inside using the central
locking or unlocking switch. This can be
useful, for example, if you want to lock the
vehicle before starting to drive.
The fuel filler flap will not be locked or unlocked with the central locking or unlocking switch, respectively.
314
i You can open a locked door from the inside.
Open door only when conditions are safe to do
so.
If the vehicle was previously centrally locked
with the SmartKey or the with KEYLESS-GO*, it
will not unlock using the central unlocking
switch 1.
If the vehicle was previously locked with the central locking switch 2:
앫
While in the global remote control mode, the
vehicle is unlocked completely when a door
is opened from the inside.
앫
While in the selective remote control mode,
only the door opened from inside is unlocked.
1 Central unlocking switch
2 Central locking switch
왘
Locking: Press switch ‹.
If the front passenger door is closed,
the vehicle locks.
왘
Unlocking: Press switch Œ.
The vehicle unlocks.
Controls in detail
Starter switch positions
왔 Starter switch positions
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
SmartKey
0 For removing SmartKey
1 Power supply for some electrical consumers, such as seat adjustment
2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical
consumers) and driving position.
All lamps (except high beam headlamp
indicator lamp and turn signal indicator
lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster come on. If a lamp in the
instrument cluster fails to come on
when the ignition is switched on, have
it checked and replaced if necessary.
If a lamp in the instrument cluster remains on after starting the engine or
comes on while driving, refer to “Lamps
in instrument cluster” (컄 page 544).
3 Starting position
i When you switch on the ignition, the indica-
Starter switch
i When the SmartKey is removed from the
starter switch and the automatic transmission is
in a position other than P, the automatic transmission automatically shifts to P.
! If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the
starter switch, the battery may not be sufficiently charged.
앫
Check the battery and charge it if necessary
(컄 page 634).
앫
Get a jump start (컄 page 639).
To prevent accelerated battery discharge or a
completely discharged battery, always remove
the SmartKey from the starter switch when the
engine is not in operation.
For information on starting the engine using the SmartKey, see “Starting with the
SmartKey” (컄 page 359).
tor and warning lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator
lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster
come on. The indicator and warning lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and
turn signal indicator lamps if activated) should go
out when the engine is running. This indicates
that the respective systems are operational.
315
Controls in detail
Starter switch positions
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Vehicles equipped with the KEYLESS-GO
feature are supplied with a SmartKey with
integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a removable KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
With the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
inserted and the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO present in the vehicle, pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
앫
앫
without the brake pedal depressed
corresponds to the various starter
switch positions (컄 page 315)
with the brake pedal firmly depressed
will start the engine (컄 page 360)
If you wish or should there be a need to insert the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO in the
starter switch, the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button can be easily removed by pulling it
out of the starter switch.
i The function of the SmartKey overrules the
KEYLESS-GO function.
i The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button does
not need to be removed from the starter switch
when you leave the vehicle. However, always
take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you
when you leave the vehicle. As long as the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is in the vehicle, the
vehicle’s electrical systems can be switched on
or the engine can be started using the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
1 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
2 Starter switch
왘
Insert KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button 1 into starter switch 2 (if not
inserted already).
i When you switch from SmartKey mode back
to KEYLESS-GO mode, the system requires
2 seconds of detection time before you can use
the KEYLESS-GO button as usual.
316
Controls in detail
Starter switch positions
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
located in the vehicle.
왘
Make sure the automatic transmission
is set to P.
왘
Do not depress the brake pedal.
Position 1
왘
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once.
This supplies power for some electrical
consumers, such as seat adjustment.
i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button
앫
once again, the ignition (position 2) is
switched on
앫
twice, the power supply is again switched off
Ignition (or position 2)
왘
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
1 USA only
2 Canada only
Position 0
Before you press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button, the vehicle’s on-board
electronics have status 0 (as with
SmartKey removed).
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button twice.
This supplies power for all electrical
consumers.
All lamps (except high beam headlamp
indicator lamp and turn signal indicator
lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster come on. If a lamp in the
instrument cluster fails to come on
when the ignition is switched on, have
it checked and replaced if necessary.
If a lamp in the instrument cluster remains on after starting the engine or
comes on while driving, refer to “Lamps
in instrument cluster” (컄 page 544).
i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button once, the power supply is
again switched off.
i When you switch on the ignition, the indicator and warning lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator
lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster
come on. The indicator and warning lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and
turn signal indicator lamps if activated) should go
out when the engine is running. This indicates
that the respective systems are operational.
For information on starting the engine using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button,
see “Starting with KEYLESS-GO*”
(컄 page 360).
317
Controls in detail
Seats
Warning!
G
All seat, head restraint adjustments, as well
as fastening of seat belts, must be done before the vehicle is put into motion.
Your seat must be adjusted so that you can
correctly fasten your seat belt
(컄 page 339).
Never place hands under the seat or near
any moving parts while a seat is being adjusted.
Seat adjustment
Warning!
G
Warning!
G
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
back in an excessively reclined position as
this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat
belts provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a nearly upright position and
belts are properly positioned on the body.
Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* removed from the starter
switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
removed from the vehicle, the power seats
can be operated when the respective door is
open. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
318
Warning!
G
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend
that children be placed in the rear seats
whenever possible. Regardless of seating
position, children 12 years old and under
must be seated and properly secured in an
appropriate infant, or toddler restraint, or
booster seat recommended for the size and
weight of the child. For additional information, see “Children in the vehicle”
(컄 page 61).
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
You can adjust the lumbar support, multicontour seats for driver and front passenger, as well as drive-dynamic multicontour
seats using COMAND (컄 page 236).
Controls in detail
Seats
Front power seat adjustment
i If PRE-SAFE® has been activated, the front
passenger’s seat and/or electrically adjustable
rear seats* will be moved to a more favorable
seat position.
왘
Adjust the seat to a comfortable seating position that still allows you to
reach the accelerator/brake pedal
safely. The position should be as far to
the rear as possible, consistent with
ability to properly operate controls.
i The memory function (컄 page 336) lets you
store the settings for the seat positions together
with the settings for the steering wheel and the
exterior rear view mirrors.
! When moving the seat, make sure there are
no items in the footwell or behind the seats. Otherwise you could damage the seats.
Example driver’s door
1 Head restraint height (컄 page 324)
2 Seat height
3 Seat cushion tilt
4 Seat cushion depth
5 Seat fore and aft adjustment
6 Seat backrest tilt
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
or
왘
Open the respective door.
왘
Seat height: Press the switch up or
down in the direction of arrow 2.
왘
Seat cushion tilt: Press the switch up
or down in the direction of
arrow 3 until your upper legs are
lightly supported.
왘
Seat cushion depth: Press the switch
forward or backward in the direction of
arrow 4 until your legs are supported
comfortably.
Seat fore and aft adjustment: Press
the switch forward or backward in the
direction of arrow 5.
i Depending on the set height of the head restraint, the seat fore and aft position is automatically pre-set.
왘
Seat backrest tilt: Press the switch
forward or backward in the direction of
arrow 6 until your arms are slightly
angled when holding the steering
wheel.
i To ensure a maximum range of movement
for seat adjustment, various adjustment functions also involve other indirect adjustments being made.
319
Controls in detail
Seats
Rear power seat* adjustment
(rear outer seats)
Example rear right door
1 Seat cushion tilt
2 Seat backrest tilt
3 Folding down and placing upright head
restraint (컄 page 326)
4 Head restraint tilt (컄 page 326)
5 Seat fore and aft adjustment
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
or
왘
Open the respective door.
왘
Adjust desired seat using seat
switches 1, 2 and 5.
320
G
Make sure no one is caught or injured while
the seat is being adjusted.
The seat belt only offers its intended protection when the seat backrest is in a nearly
vertical position and the occupant is sitting
upright. Avoid sitting in positions that prevent the seat belt from being properly positioned against the body (컄 page 339). You
should therefore adjust the backrest to a position as upright as possible.
Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* removed from the starter
switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
removed from the vehicle, the power seats
can be operated when the respective door is
open. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
Warning!
Adjusting front passenger seat from
driver’s seat/rear*
! Do not move the front passenger seat comWarning!
G
When adjusting the front passenger seat,
make sure the seat, if occupied, is as far
from the passenger front air bag as possible.
Otherwise, the passenger could be seriously
or even fatally injured in the event of an accident or braking maneuver.
pletely forward if objects are stored in the parcel
net in the front passenger-side footwell. Items in
the net may be damaged.
Controls in detail
Seats
Adjusting front passenger seat from
driver’s seat*
You can adjust the front passenger seat
using the seat switches on the driver’s
side.
앫
memory function
왘
Setting front passenger seat position
from rear*
The switch is located on the right rear passenger door.
Press button 1 to adjust the front
passenger seat.
The Indicator lamp in the button 1
comes on.
왘
Adjust front passenger seat using seat
switches 2, 3, 4 and 5.
왘
To adjust right rear passenger seat
(컄 page 320), press button 1 again.
The Indicator lamp in the button 1
goes out.
i Adjusting the passenger seat position from
the rear is not possible if you deactivate the override switch (컄 page 67).
1 Adjusting front passenger seat
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
왘
Press button 1.
1 To select front or rear passenger seat
2 Seat height
3 Head restraint height (컄 page 324)
4 Backrest tilt
5 Seat fore and aft adjustment
When the indicator lamp on button 1 is
on, you can operate the following features
of the front passenger seat:
왘
앫
seat adjustment
or
앫
seat heating/ventilation*
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
Open the right rear passenger door.
321
Controls in detail
Seats
Seat heating*
i If one or more of the lamps on the seat heating button are flashing, there is insufficient voltage available since too many electrical
consumers are turned on. The seat heating
switches off automatically.
The buttons for seat heating are located on
the respective door. The red indicator
lamps on the button come on to show the
heating level selected.
The seat heating will switch back on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available.
Level
3
Three indicator lamps on
(highest level)
The seat heating automatically
switches to level 2 after approximately 5 minutes.
2
1 Seat heating button
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
왘
Switching on: Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired heating level is
set.
Two indicator lamps on
The seat heating automatically
switches to level 1 after approximately 10 minutes.
1
One indicator lamp on
(lowest level)
The seat heating automatically
switches off after approximately
20 minutes.
off
322
No indicator lamp on
One or more red indicator lamps on the
button show the selected heating level.
왘
Switching off: Press button 1 repeatedly until all indicator lamps go out.
Controls in detail
Seats
왘
Seat ventilation*
The buttons for seat ventilation are located
on the respective door. The blue indicator
lamps on the button come on show the
ventilation level selected.
i If one or more of the lamps on the seat ventilation button are flashing, there is insufficient
voltage available since too many electrical consumers are turned on. The seat ventilation
switches off automatically.
Level
3
Three indicator lamps on
(highest level)
2
Two indicator lamps on
1
One indicator lamp on
(lowest level)
off
No indicator lamp on
i The seat ventilation for the driver’ seat can
be activated using summer opening feature
(컄 page 355).
Switching off: Press button 1 repeatedly until all indicator lamps go out.
The seat ventilation will switch back on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available.
1 Seat ventilation button
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
왘
Switching on: Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired ventilation level is
set.
One or more blue indicator lamps on
the button show the selected ventilation level.
323
Controls in detail
Seats
Head restraints
Warning!
Front power head restraints
G
Head restraint tilt
Head restraint height
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that it is as close to
the head as possible and the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the head
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for
injury to the head and neck in the event of
an accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.
i Adjust the head restraint in such a way that
it is as close to the head as possible.
324
Manually adjust the angle of the head restraint.
1 Head restraint height
왘
Press the switch up or down in the direction of arrow 1.
i
Depending on the seat’s set fore and aft position, the head restraint height is automatically
pre-set.
i
The head restraint on the front passenger’s
side is automatically lowered all the way down
while the vehicle is in motion if no one is sitting
on the seat. This helps you to acquire a better
all-round view.
왘
Push or pull on the upper edge of the
head restraint cushion.
Luxury active head restraints
(S 600 only) (front seats)
Warning!
G
When folding back the side cushions, never
reach between the side cushion and the
mounting post. You could otherwise be
trapped.
Controls in detail
Seats
Adjustment
Resetting
If the luxury active head restraints have
been triggered in an accident, the luxury
active head restraints must be reset. Otherwise, the luxury active head restraints
cannot offer any additional protection in
the event of another rear-end collision.
Have this work carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
1 Head restraint side cushions
2 Adjusting head restraint forward and
backward
You can individually adjust side
cushions 1 of the luxury head restraints.
왘
Adjusting side cushions: Pull or push
side cushions 1 into desired position.
왘
Adjusting forward or backward: Pull
or push head restraint in direction of
arrow 2.
For information on luxury active head restraints, see “Luxury active head restraints
(S 600 only)” (컄 page 59).
Rear head restraints
Warning!
Warning!
G
Keep the area around head restraints clear
of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the
folding operation of the head restraints.
i You can only fold back the rear seat head restraints when no rear seat passenger is wearing
a seat belt.
Folding head restraints back
The rear seat head restraints and the rear
seat power head restraints* can be folded
backward for increased visibility.
G
For safety reasons, always drive with the
rear head restraints in the upright position
when the rear seats are occupied.
Otherwise, the back of the head will not be
supported in the event of a collision. As a result, rear seat occupants could be injured.
1 Switch in the front center console
325
Controls in detail
Seats
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
왘
Press switch 1 in the front center console briefly.
The rear head restraints will fold backward.
Placing power head restraints* upright
(rear outer seats)
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
왘
Press and hold switch 1 in the front
center console and hold.
The rear outer seats head restraints
will place upright.
Placing head restraints upright
왘
Pull the rear center seat head restraint
upright manually until it locks into position.
i When you fasten your seat belt in the rear,
the respective rear outer seat head restraint
places upright.
왘
Pull the rear head restraint upright until
it locks into position.
! Make sure the head restraints engage when
placing them upright manually. Otherwise their
protective function cannot be ensured.
326
Rear power head restraints*
(rear outer seats)
1 Placing upright head restraint
2 Folding down head restraint
3 Head restraint tilt
4 Head restraint tilt
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315) or
open the respective door.
왘
Press switch up in the direction of
arrow 1.
The rear outer seats power head restraint will place upright.
Controls in detail
Seats
왘
Press switch down in the direction of
arrow 3.
Adjustment
You can adjust the rear outer multicontour
seats using the buttons on the center console.
The rear power head restraint will fold
backward.
왘
Multicontour seats*, rear
Press the switch forward or backward
in the direction of arrow 2 or 4.
The power head restraint will be tilted.
Luxury head restraints*
(rear outer seats)
Warning!
G
When folding back the side cushions, never
reach between the side cushion and the
mounting post. You could otherwise be
trapped.
1 Head restraint side cushions
2 Head restraint height
You can individually adjust side
cushions 1 of the luxury head restraints
왘
Adjusting side cushions: Pull or push
side cushions 1 into desired position.
왘
Adjusting head restraint angle: Grip
head restraint at upper edge of cushion
and pull it forward or backward in direction of arrow 2.
1 To select right rear passenger seat
2 Massage setting, gentle
3 Massage setting, vigorous
4 To adjust position of backrest curvature (lordosis)
5 Lumbar region support
6 Side bolster adjustment
7 To select left rear passenger seat
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
327
컄컄
Controls in detail
Seats
컄컄 왘
Selecting a seat: Press rocker
switch 1 or 7 forward or backward.
The indicator lamp on the selected button lights up for a short while.
Lumbar region support
왘
왘
Gentle massage
왘
Switching on: Press rocker switch 2
forward.
왘
Switching off: Pull rocker switch 2
backward.
Vigorous massage
왘
Switching on: Press rocker switch 3
forward.
왘
Switching off: Pull rocker switch 3
backward.
Position of backrest curvature
왘
Moving upward: Press rocker
switch 4 forward.
왘
Moving downward: Pull rocker
switch 4 backward.
328
Selecting greater curvature: Press
rocker switch 5 forward.
Selecting less curvature: Pull rocker
switch 5 backward.
Side bolster adjustment
왘
왘
Reducing width: Press rocker
switch 6 forward.
Increasing width: Pull rocker
switch 6 backward.
Easy-entry/exit feature
This feature allows for easier entry into and
exit from the vehicle. When entering and
exiting the vehicle, the driver’s seat is in its
maximum rearward position and the steering wheel is in its uppermost position.
The easy-entry/exit feature can be activated or deactivated in the “Vehicle” menu of
the COMAND system (컄 page 224).
Warning!
G
You must make sure no one can become
trapped or injured by the moving steering
wheel and driver’s seat when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated.
To cancel seat/steering wheel movement,
do one of the following:
앫
Press seat adjustment switch
(컄 page 319).
앫
Move steering column stalk
(컄 page 330).
앫
Press one of the memory position buttons or the memory button M
(컄 page 337).
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver’s door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
Controls in detail
Seats
! Do not activate the easy-entry/exit feature
if the seat backrest is in an excessively reclined
position. Doing so could cause damage to front
or rear seats.
your last set position or to memory position, adjust the seat to the desired position or press and
hold the respective memory position button
(컄 page 337).
i If the current position for the steering wheel
First move the seat backrest to an upright position.
i The last set driver’s seat and steering wheel
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
the steering wheel and driver’s seat will return to their last set memory position or a
factory-set maximum forward position
when you:
앫
the ignition is switched off
앫
the position is stored in memory
(컄 page 336)
If the current seat position falls into a factory-set
position range and the system recognizes the
current seat position to be rearward enough for
easy entry and exit, the driver’s seat will not
move to the rear when the easy-entry/ exit feature is activated.
앫
close the driver’s door with the ignition
switched on
앫
insert the SmartKey into the starter
switch or press the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button (컄 page 317) once
with the driver’s door closed.
i For safety reasons, the driver’s seat will not
return to its last set position with the easy-entry/exit feature activated if the system recognizes the last set position as an extreme forward
position. Instead, the driver’s seat will remain at
or move to a factory-set maximum forward position. To again fully return the driver’s seat to
positions are stored when
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated
the steering wheel tilts upwards and the
driver’s seat moves a few inches to the
rear when you:
앫
remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch,
or
앫
open the driver’s door with the
SmartKey in starter switch position 0
or 1 or the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button (컄 page 317) in position 1.
is in the uppermost tilt position, the steering
wheel will no longer be able to move upward
when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated.
The adjustment procedure is briefly interrupted
when the engine is started.
Warning!
G
Let the system complete the adjustment
procedure before setting the vehicle in motion. All driver’s seat and steering wheel adjustments must be completed before setting
the vehicle in motion. Driving off with the
driver’s seat/steering wheel still adjusting
could cause the driver to lose control of the
vehicle.
329
Controls in detail
Steering wheel
Warning!
G
Steering wheel adjustment
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving could cause the driver to lose control of
the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle.
Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* removed from the starter
switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
removed from the vehicle, the steering
wheel adjustment feature can be operated
when the driver’s door is open. Therefore,
do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
330
1 Adjusting steering column, in or out
2 Adjusting steering column, up or down
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315) or
open the driver’s door.
왘
Adjusting steering column in or out:
Move stalk forward or back in the direction of arrow 1 until a comfortable
steering wheel position is reached with
your arms slightly bent at the elbow.
왘
Adjusting steering column up or
down: Move the stalk up or down in the
direction of arrow 2.
Make sure your legs can move freely
and all the displays (incl. malfunction
and indicator lamps) on the instrument
cluster are clearly visible.
i The memory function (컄 page 336) lets you
store settings for the steering wheel together
with the settings for the exterior rear view mirrors and the seat positions.
Controls in detail
Steering wheel
Heated steering wheel*
왘
The steering wheel heating warms up the
leather area of the steering wheel.
Switching on: Turn switch at the tip of
stalk in the direction of arrow 1.
i The steering wheel heating switches off au-
The steering wheel is heated. Indicator
lamp 3 comes on.
앫
when you remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch
앫
on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*, when you
switch off the ignition (컄 page 315) and
open the driver’s door
앫
when the temperature of the vehicle interior
is above 86°F (30°C)
앫
after approximately 30 minutes
i The steering wheel heating will not switch
on, when the temperature of the vehicle interior
is above 86°F (30°C).
왘
Switching off: Turn switch at the tip of
stalk in the direction of arrow 2.
tomatically:
The steering wheel heating is turned
off. Indicator lamp 3 goes out.
1 Switching on
2 Switching off
3 Indicator lamp
왘
i Indicator lamp 3 flashes or goes out
앫
in case of power surge or undervoltage
앫
in case of a steering wheel heating malfunction
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
331
Controls in detail
Mirrors
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
mirrors before driving so that you have a
good view of the road and traffic conditions.
Warning!
G
In case of an accident, liquid electrolyte may
escape the mirror housing if the mirror glass
breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
! Electrolyte drops coming into contact with
the vehicle paint finish can only be completely
removed while in their liquid state and by applying plenty of water.
332
Interior rear view mirror
왘
Manually adjust the interior rear view
mirror.
For more information, see “Auto-dimming
rear view mirrors” (컄 page 334).
Exterior rear view mirrors
Warning!
G
Exercise care when using the passenger
side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
1 Selector switch for right or left exterior
mirror
2 Adjustment button
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
왘
Press button 1 repeatedly until desired exterior mirror is selected.
The left or right indicator lamp in
button 1 comes on.
왘
Push adjustment button 2 up, down,
left, or right according to the desired
setting.
Controls in detail
Mirrors
i When you press button 1 for the first time,
the exterior mirror on the driver’s side is always
selected.
Power folding exterior rear view mirrors
Folding exterior rear view mirrors in
and out manually
If you do not make adjustments to the selected
exterior rear view mirror within 15 seconds, the
indicator lamp goes out. You will then have to select the desired exterior rear view mirror again
before any adjustments can be made. Adjustments can only be made with the indicator lamp
for the respective exterior rear view mirror button illuminated.
! Before driving the vehicle through an auto-
The exterior rear view mirrors can vibrate if
they are not folded out completely.
i At low ambient temperatures, the exterior
rear view mirrors will be heated automatically.
i The memory function (컄 page 336) lets you
store the setting for the exterior rear view mirrors together with the setting for the steering
wheel and the seat positions.
matic car wash, fold the exterior mirrors in. Otherwise they may get damaged.
Folding exterior rear view mirrors in
and out automatically
When the corresponding function in the
COMAND system is activated
(컄 page 222):
앫
앫
The exterior rear view mirrors automatically fold in as soon as the vehicle is
locked from the outside.
The exterior rear view mirrors automatically fold out as soon as the vehicle is
unlocked and the driver’s or front passenger door are subsequently opened.
1 Folds the exterior mirrors in and out
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
왘
Folding in: Press button 1.
왘
Folding out: Press button 1 again.
i The mirrors do not fold out if they were previously folded in manually.
i If you are driving at more than approximately
9 mph (15 km/h), you will not be able to fold the
exterior mirrors in.
333
컄컄
Controls in detail
Mirrors
컄컄 ! If an exterior rear view mirror housing is
forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear), reposition it manually by applying firm pressure until
it snaps back into place.
If an exterior rear view mirror housing is forcibly
pushed rearward (hit from the front), press
button 1 to fold mirrors in, then press
button 1 again to fold mirrors out. Do not force
mirrors by hand as this may damage the adjustment mechanism.
The mirror housing is then properly positioned
and you can adjust the mirror in the usual manner.
The interior rear view mirror will not react if
앫
reverse gear R is engaged
앫
the interior lighting is turned on
Warning!
G
The auto-dimming function does not react if
incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors in the interior rear view mirror.
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors
The interior rear view mirror and the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not
react, for example, if the rear window sunshade is in raised position.
The reflection brightness of the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side and
the interior rear view mirror will respond
automatically to glare when
Light hitting the mirror(s) at certain angles
(incident light) could blind you. As a result,
you may not be able to observe traffic conditions and could cause an accident.
앫
the ignition is switched on
(컄 page 315)
Warning!
G
and
앫
incoming light from headlamps falls on
the sensor in the interior rear view
mirror
334
In case of an accident, liquid electrolyte may
leak from the mirror housing if the mirror
glass breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
! Electrolyte drops coming into contact with
the vehicle paint finish can be completely removed only while in the liquid state by applying
plenty of water.
Warning!
G
Exercise care when using the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your inside rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
Controls in detail
Mirrors
왘
Activating exterior rear view mirror
parking position
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror will be turned downward to the
stored position.
Follow these steps to activate the mirror
parking position so that the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror will be
turned downward to the stored position.
왘
왘
왘
Make sure you have stored a parking
position for the passenger-side exterior
rear view mirror (컄 page 338).
Make sure the “Lower mirror when reversing” function in the “Exterior Mirror
Convenience Settings” submenu of the
COMAND system is selected
(컄 page 222).
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
Shift the automatic transmission in reverse gear R.
The exterior rear view mirror returns to its
previously stored driving position:
1 Selector switch for right or left exterior
mirror
왘
Press switch 1 repeatedly until the
exterior mirror on the front passenger
side is selected.
i With the automatic transmission in reverse
gear R, the previously selected exterior rear view
mirror is activated.
앫
when you switch off the ignition
앫
10 seconds after you have put the automatic transmission out of reverse
gear R
앫
immediately once your vehicle exceeds
a speed of approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h)
앫
immediately when you press button 1
for driver’s side exterior rear view mirror.
i If you adjust the exterior mirrors while they
are in the parking position, the new mirror position is stored as a new parking position.
335
Controls in detail
Memory function
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver
should check and adjust the seat height,
seat position fore and aft, and seat backrest angle if necessary, to ensure adequate
control, reach, and comfort. The head restraint should also be adjusted for proper
height. See also the section on air bags
(컄 page 45) for proper seat positioning.
With the memory function you can store up
to 3 different settings.
The following settings are stored when using the buttons* on the rear passenger
doors (Canada only):
The following settings are saved for each
stored position the driver’s door:
앫
Seat position
앫
Seat position and lumbar support
앫
앫
Multicontour seat*: previously selected setting
Multicontour seat*: previously selected setting
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to
ensure adequate control, reach, operation
and comfort. Both the inside and outside
rear view mirrors should be adjusted for
adequate rear vision.
앫
Drive-dynamic multicontour seat*: activation/deactivation
앫
Steering wheel position
앫
Exterior rear view mirrors position
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small children should be seated in a properly secured restraint system that complies with
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2.
The following settings are stored when using the buttons on the front passenger
door:
336
앫
Seat position and lumbar support
앫
Multicontour seat*: previously selected setting
앫
Drive-dynamic multicontour seat*: activation/deactivation
Warning!
G
Do not activate the memory function while
driving. Activating the memory function
while driving could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
Controls in detail
Memory function
The memory button and stored position
buttons are located on the door control
panel.
M
Memory button
1 2 3 Memory position buttons
왘
Storing positions into memory
Recalling positions from memory
왘
Adjust the seat (컄 page 318) to the desired position.
왘
On the driver’s side: adjust the steering
wheel (컄 page 330) and the exterior
rear view mirrors (컄 page 332) to the
desired position.
! Do not operate the power seats using the
memory button if the seat backrest is in an excessively reclined position. Doing so could cause
damage to front or rear seats.
First move seat backrest to an upright position.
왘
Press and hold one of the position
buttons until the seat, steering wheel
and exterior rear view mirrors have fully
moved to the stored positions.
왘
Press memory button M.
왘
Release memory button M and push
one of the position buttons within
3 seconds.
i Releasing the button immediately stops
All the settings are stored with the selected position.
The multicontour seat* and/or lumbar support
will continue to be adjusted.
movement to the stored positions.
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
or
왘
Open the respective door.
337
Controls in detail
Memory function
Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position
For easier parking, you can adjust the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror so
that you can see the right rear wheel as
soon as you engage reverse gear R.
For information on activating the parking
position, see “Activating exterior rear view
mirror parking position” (컄 page 335).
1 Memory button M
2 Adjustment button
3 Selector switch for right or left exterior
mirror
338
왘
Stop the vehicle.
왘
Make sure the ignition is switched on
(컄 page 315).
왘
Press switch 3 until the exterior mirror on the front passenger side is selected.
왘
Adjust the passenger-side exterior rear
view mirror with button 2 so that you
see the rear wheel and the road curb.
왘
Press memory button M.
왘
Within 3 seconds, press one of adjustment buttons 2.
The parking position is stored if the
mirror does not move.
i If the mirror does move, repeat the above
steps. After the setting is stored, you can move
the mirror again.
Controls in detail
Fastening the seat belts
왔 Fastening the seat belts
Warning!
G
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure all of your passengers
are properly restrained, even those sitting in
the rear and pregnant women.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and
position your seat belt greatly increases
your risk of injuries and their likely severity
in an accident. You and your passengers
should always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are wearing your
seat belt. The air bags can only provide the
protection they were designed to afford if
the occupants are using their seat belts
(컄 page 45).
Warning!
G
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend
that children be placed in the rear seats
whenever possible. Regardless of seating
position, children 12 years old and under
must be seated and properly secured in an
appropriate infant, or toddler restraint, or
booster seat recommended for the size and
weight of the child. For additional information, see “Children in the vehicle”
(컄 page 61).
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Warning!
G
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt. Never use
a seat belt for more than one person at a
time.
339
Controls in detail
Fastening the seat belts
Warning!
G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or
even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a nearly upright position and the
belt is properly positioned on the body.
Warning!
G
Read and observe the additional warning notices printed in the “Safety and Security”
section (컄 page 44).
1 Belt outlet
2 Latch plate
3 Buckle
4 Release button
왘
340
Pull the seat belt smoothly from the
seat belt outlet 1.
왘
Place the shoulder portion of the belt
across the top of your shoulder and the
lap portion across your hips.
왘
Push latch plate 2 into buckle 3 until
it clicks.
왘
If necessary, tighten the lap portion to
a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion
up.
왘
To release the seat belt, press release
button 4 and guide latch plate back to
belt outlet.
Controls in detail
Fastening the seat belts
Proper use of seat belts
앫
Do not twist the belt when fastening.
앫
Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder
portion is located as close as possible
to the middle of the shoulder (it should
not touch the neck). Never pass the
shoulder portion of the belt under your
arm.
앫
Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips (over hip joint) and not
across the abdomen.
앫
Place the seat backrest in a nearly upright position.
앫
Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time.
앫
Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another object at the same
time. When using a seat belt to secure
infant or toddler restraints or children
in booster seats, always follow the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
앫
Check your seat belt during travel to
make sure that it is properly positioned.
앫
Make sure the seat belt is always fitted
snugly. Take special care of this when
wearing loose clothing.
Warning!
G
Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They
could tear.
For more information, see “Seat belts”
(컄 page 55).
Seat belt height adjustment
The vehicle automatically adjusts the seat
belt height for the driver’s and front passenger’s seats as well as for the rear outer
seats. Comply with the instructions on how
to properly fasten a seat belt
(컄 page 339).
Do not allow the belt to get caught in the
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
This could damage the belt.
Never attempt to make modifications to
seat belts. This could impair the effectiveness of the belts.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash, they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
341
Controls in detail
Lighting
i If you drive in countries where vehicles drive
on the other side of the road than the country in
which the vehicle is registered, you must have
the headlamps modified for symmetrical low
beams. Relevant information can be obtained at
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i The active Bi-Xenon headlamps monitor the
vehicles steering angle, then automatically shift
their beams to either side to better follow the
curvature of the road ahead, increasing usable
illumination over conventional headlamps.
Exterior lamp switch
The exterior lamp switch is located on the
dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.
M Off
Daytime running lamp mode
(컄 page 344)
* Automatic headlamp mode
Daytime running lamp mode
(컄 page 344)
C Parking lamps (also side marker
lamps, tail lamps, license plate
lamps, instrument panel lamps)
B Low beam headlamps (or high
beam headlamps when the combination switch is pushed forward)
and parking lamps
ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left one
stop)
‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left two
stops)
C Indicator lamp for parking lamps
‡ Indicator lamp for front fog lamps
† Indicator lamp for rear fog lamp
342
Controls in detail
Lighting
i With the SmartKey removed from the starter
switch or the engine turned off with
KEYLESS-GO* and the driver’s door open, a
warning sounds if the parking lamps or low beam
headlamps are switched on.
The message: “Please switch off lights” appears
in the multifunction display.
i With the daytime running lamp mode activated and the engine running, the low beam headlamps cannot be switched off manually.
For information on how to activate the daytime
running lamp mode, see “Daytime running lamp
mode” (컄 page 344).
Manual headlamp mode
Automatic headlamp mode
The following lamps switch on and off automatically depending on the brightness of
the ambient light:
앫
Low beam headlamps
앫
Tail and parking lamps
Low beam headlamps
앫
License plate lamps
The exterior lamp switch is located on the
dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.
앫
Side marker lamps
왘
If the exterior lamp switch is set to *,
The low beam headlamps and parking
lamps can be switched on and off with the
exterior lamp switch. For exterior lamp
switch (컄 page 342).
G
Turn the switch to B.
Warning!
The green indicator lamp C in the
exterior lamp switch comes on.
If the exterior lamp switch is set to *,
앫
the headlamps may switch off unexpectedly when the system senses bright ambient light, for example light from
oncoming traffic.
앫
the headlamps may switch off unexpectedly when the system senses bright ambient light, for example light from
oncoming traffic.
앫
the headlamps will not be automatically
switched on under foggy conditions.
To minimize risk to you and to others, activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp
switch to B when driving or when traffic
and/or ambient lighting conditions require
you to do so.
In low ambient lighting conditions, only
switch from position * to B with the
vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
Switching from * to B will briefly
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
driving in low ambient lighting conditions
may result in an accident.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an
aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for
the operation of the vehicle’s lights at all
times.
343
Controls in detail
Lighting
i The front fog lamps and rear fog lamp can-
Daytime running lamp mode
When the engine is running, and you
not be switched on manually with exterior lamp
switch in position *. To activate the fog
lamps, turn exterior lamp switch to
position B and pull the exterior lamp switch
to first or second stop (컄 page 345).
왘
앫
turn the exterior lamp switch to
position C, the parking lamps
switch on additionally.
앫
turn the exterior lamp switch to
position B, the manual headlamp
mode has priority over the daytime running lamp mode.
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to *.
With the SmartKey in starter switch position 1 or the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button pressed once, only
the parking lamps will switch on and off
automatically.
When the engine is running, the low
beam headlamps, the tail and parking
lamps, the license plate lamps, and the
side marker lamps will switch on and
off automatically.
Turn exterior lamp switch to
position M or *.
When the engine is running, the low
beam headlamps are switched on. In
low ambient light conditions, the following lamps will switch on additionally:
앫
tail and parking lamps
앫
license plate lamps
앫
side marker lamps
For nighttime driving you should turn the
exterior lamp switch to position B to
permit activation of the high beam headlamps.
Canada only
The daytime running lamp mode is mandatory and therefore in a constant mode.
When the engine is running, and you shift
from a driving position to position N or P,
the low beam headlamps will switch off
with a 3-minute delay.
344
The corresponding exterior lamps
switch on (컄 page 622).
USA only
By default, the daytime running lamp mode
is deactivated. Activate the daytime running lamp mode using the control system,
see “Daytime driving lamps mode on/off
(USA only)” (컄 page 255).
When the engine is running, and you turn
the exterior lamp switch to position C
or B, the manual headlamp mode has
priority over the daytime running lamp
mode.
The corresponding exterior lamps switch
on (컄 page 622).
Controls in detail
Lighting
Fog lamps
Warning!
G
In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
only switch from position * to B with
the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
Switching from * to B will briefly
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
driving in low ambient lighting conditions
may result in an accident.
Front fog lamps
i If so equipped, the front fog lamps will also
왘
switch on.
왘
Switch on the low beam headlamps
(컄 page 343).
Pull out exterior lamp switch to first
stop.
The front fog lamps are switched on.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
lamp switch comes on (컄 page 342).
왘
왘
Push in the exterior lamp switch to first
stop.
The rear fog lamp is switched off.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
lamp switch goes out (컄 page 342).
The front fog lamps remain lit.
Push in the exterior lamp switch.
The front fog lamps are switched off.
i Fog lamps will operate with the parking
lamps and/or the low beam headlamps on. Fog
lamps should only be used in conjunction with
low beam headlamps. Consult your State or
Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding
permissible lamp operation.
i Fog lamps cannot be switched on with exterior lamp switch in position *. For switching
on the fog lamps, turn exterior lamp switch to position B.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
lamp switch goes out (컄 page 342).
Rear fog lamp (driver’s side only)
왘
Switch on the front fog lamps
(컄 page 345).
왘
Pull out exterior lamp switch to second
stop.
The rear fog lamp is switched on.
The yellow indicator lamp † in the
lamp switch comes on (컄 page 342).
345
Controls in detail
Lighting
Locator lighting and night security illumination
i The headlamps are automatically cleaned if,
Locator lighting and night security illumination are described in the COMAND vehicle section under “Setting locator lighting”
(컄 page 221) and “Setting night security illumination” (컄 page 220).
앫
the engine is running
앫
the lights are switched on
앫
the windshield wipers have wiped the windshield with washer fluid 15 times
Headlamp cleaning system
Combination switch
at the same time,
When you switch off the ignition or press
button 1, the automatic function is reset and
will start counting the next time from the beginning.
For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Windshield washer system
and headlamp cleaning system”
(컄 page 498).
1 High beam
2 High beam flasher
Switching on high beams
1 Headlamp washer button
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
왘
Press button 1.
The headlamps are cleaned with a
high-pressure water jet.
346
왘
Turn exterior lamp switch to
position B or to *
(컄 page 342).
왘
Push the combination switch in the
direction 1.
The high beam indicator A on the
instrument cluster comes on.
Controls in detail
Lighting
High beam flasher
왘
Pull the combination switch briefly in
the direction 2.
The respective corner-illuminating
lamp comes on and illuminates the
area in the direction into which you are
turning.
Corner-illuminating lamps
i The corner-illuminating lamps will come on
The corner-illuminating lamps improve illumination of the area in the direction into
which you are turning.
automatically up to a speed of approximately
25 mph (40 km/h) depending on the steering
angle, even if you did not switch on either turn
signal. If the corner-illuminating lamps came on
automatically, they will also go out automatically
depending on the steering angle.
Corner-illuminating lamps will operate
with:
앫
the engine running
앫
during darkness
앫
the headlamps switched on
i The corner-illuminating lamps function is not
i If you have switched on the turn signal for
one side but turn the steering wheel in the other
direction, the corner-illuminating lamp lights up
on the side of the turn signal.
i The corner-illuminating lamps temporarily
available at a vehicle speed above 25 mph
(40 km/h).
light up on both sides of the vehicle if you turn
the steering wheel in one direction and then in
the other direction shortly thereafter.
Switching on corner-illuminating lamps
i When you shift the automatic transmission
왘
Depending on whether you are turning
left or right, switch on the left or right
turn signal (컄 page 342).
in reverse gear R, the inverse corner-illuminating
lamp comes on automatically depending on the
steering direction and steering angle.
Switching off the corner-illuminating
lamps
The combination switch for the turn signal
resets automatically after major steering
wheel movements. This will switch off the
corner-illuminating lamps if they were activated by switching on the left or right turn
signal.
If the turn signal should stay on after making the turn, the turn signal and corner-illuminating lamp can be switched off by
returning the combination switch to its
original position.
i If you are driving faster than 25 mph
(40 km/h) when activating the turn signal indicator, the corner-illuminating lamp function is
switched off.
i The corner-illuminating lamp may remain lit
for a short time. The corner-illuminating lamp
lights up for no more than 20 seconds with the
vehicle standing still. It is then switched off even
if the turn signal is still switched on or you have
turned the steering wheel to full lock.
The turn signal has no influence on the corner-illuminating lamp on the outside of the curve.
347
Controls in detail
Lighting
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher can be
switched on at all times, even with the
SmartKey removed from the starter switch
or with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
removed from the vehicle.
The hazard warning flasher is automatically switched on if
앫
an air bag has been triggered
앫
S 600 and USA only: you brake the vehicle strongly at a speed of more than
50 mph (70 km/h) and bring it to a
complete stop.
1 Hazard warning flasher switch
348
왘
Switching on: Press hazard warning
flasher switch.
All turn signals will flash.
i With the hazard warning flasher activated
and the combination switch set for either left or
right turn, only the respective left or right turn
signals will operate when the SmartKey in the
starter switch is in position 1 or 2 or the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (컄 page 317) is
pressed once or twice.
왘
Switching off: Press hazard warning
flasher switch again.
i If the hazard warning flasher was activated
automatically, also press hazard warning flasher
switch 1 to switch off the hazard warning flasher.
Interior lighting
i When you lock the vehicle from the outside,
the interior lighting is switched off. As soon as
one of the interior lighting buttons inside the vehicle is pressed, however, the selected lamp
comes on and all of the lamps inside the vehicle
that are not switched on via a button are activated.
If you do not lock the vehicle, all lamps will be
switched off after 30 minutes. When you open
the door, you can still use the lighting for the
storage compartment, glove box and vanity mirror without in the starter switch in position 1 or 2
or the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
(컄 page 317) pressed once or twice.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Interior lighting in the front
Automatic control
The controls are located in the overhead
control panel.
왘
Deactivating: Press button 4.
The OFF indicator lamp next to the button comes on.
The interior lighting remains switched
off in darkness, even when you:
1 Left reading lamp on/off
2 Rear interior lamps on/off
3 Front interior lighting on/off
4 Interior lighting control
5 Right reading lamp on/off
! Leaving an interior light switch in the ON position for extended periods of time with the engine turned off could result in a discharged
battery.
왘
The interior lighting switches off automatically following an adjustable time
delay (컄 page 226).
앫
unlock the vehicle
앫
remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch
앫
open a door
앫
open the trunk
i If the door remains open, the interior lighting
switches off automatically after approximately
5 minutes.
An interior lamp switched on manually does not
go out automatically.
Manual control
왘
Switching on/off front interior lighting: Press button 3.
왘
Switching on/off rear interior lighting: Press button 2.
왘
Switching on/off front reading
lamps: Press button 1 or 5.
Activating: Press button 4.
The interior lighting switches on in
darkness when you:
앫
unlock the vehicle
앫
remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch
앫
open a door
앫
open the trunk
The reading lamps are integrated into
the interior rear view mirror.
왘
Ambient lighting: the brightness of
the ambient lighting is adjusted via
COMAND (컄 page 79).
349
Controls in detail
Lighting
Interior lighting in the rear
Courtesy lighting
For better orientation in the dark, courtesy
lamps will illuminate the interior of your vehicle as follows:
With parking lamps switched on:
1 Rear interior lamp
2 Button
3 Reading lamp
왘
앫
the door handles
앫
the driver and passenger footwells
With the SmartKey in the starter switch
position 1:
앫
the door handles
앫
the center console
Press button 2.
i If you turn the SmartKey in the starter
You can switch the lamps on/off in
succession as follows:
switch to position 0 and switch off the exterior
headlamps, the door handle lamps will remain lit
for approximately 5 minutes.
앫
reading lamp 3 and rear interior
lamp 1 on
앫
only reading lamp 3 on
앫
reading lamp 3 off
350
Door entry lamps
For better orientation in the dark, the corresponding door entry lamps will switch on
in darkness when you open a door and the
automatic control is activated.
The door entry lamps switch off when the
corresponding door is closed.
i If you turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 and switch off the exterior
headlamps, the door entry lamps will remain lit
for approximately 5 minutes.
Trunk lamp
The trunk lamp switches on if the trunk is
opened.
If the trunk remains open, the trunk lighting switches off automatically after approximately 10 minutes.
i The interior lighting is factory-set to automatic mode (컄 page 349).
The setting selected for the interior lighting is
used for the trunk lighting as well.
Controls in detail
Windshield wipers
왔 Windshield wipers
! Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry. Dust that accumulates on a windshield might scratch the glass and/or damage
the wiper blades when wiping occurs on a dry
windshield. If it is necessary to operate the wipers in dry weather conditions, always operate
the wipers with windshield washer fluid
(컄 page 352).
Combination switch
1 Switching on windshield wipers
2 Single wipe
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
! If the windshield wipers leave smears on the
windshield after the car has been driven through
an automatic car wash, then wax or other residue is on the windshield. Shortly after washing
the car in an automatic car wash, clean the windshield with windshield washer fluid
(컄 page 352).
! If anything blocks the windshield wipers
(leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off immediately.
앫
For safety reasons, stop the vehicle in a safe
location,
앫
앫
set the combination switch to the next higher wiper speed
앫
have the windshield wipers checked at the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
Switching on/off windshield wipers
왘
Turn the combination switch to the desired position depending on the intensity of the rain.
turn off the engine by turning the
SmartKey to position 0 and withdraw
SmartKey from starter switch
M Windshield wipers off
turn off the engine by pressing the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
(컄 page 317) and open the driver’s door
(with the driver’s door open, starter
switch is in position 0, same as with
SmartKey removed from starter switch)
V Fast intermittent wiping
(rain sensor operation low sensitivity)
or
앫
If the windshield wipers fail to function at all in
combination switch position u,
before attempting to remove any blockage.
앫
Remove blockage.
앫
Turn the windshield wipers on again.
U Slow intermittent wiping
(rain sensor operation low sensitivity)
u Slow continuous wiping
t Fast continuous wiping
351
Controls in detail
Windshield wipers
The wipers move across the windshield. Afterward, the wiping intervals
are determined by the wetness of the
windshield.
i When the windshield wipers are switched on
and you brake the vehicle to a stop, the wipers
operate more slowly.
Intermittent wiping
Only switch on intermittent wiping under
wet weather conditions or in the presence
of precipitation.
! Do not leave windshield wipers in intermittent setting when the vehicle is taken to an automatic car wash or during windshield cleaning.
Wipers will operate in the presence of water
sprayed on the windshield, and windshield wipers may be damaged as a result.
After the initial wipe, pauses between
wipes are automatically controlled by the
rain sensor.
i Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the
vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is
opened. This protects persons getting into or out
of the vehicle from being sprayed.
Intermittent wiping will be continued when
앫
! If you have set intermittent wiping, dirt on
or
the surface of the rain sensor or optical effects
may cause the windshield wipers to wipe in an
undesired fashion. This could then damage the
windshield wiper blades or scratch the windows.
You should therefore switch off the windshield
wipers when weather conditions are dry.
앫
왘
Set the wiper switch to position U
or V.
352
all doors are closed and the automatic transmission is set to position D or R
the wiper setting is changed using the combination switch
Single wipe
왘
Press the combination switch briefly in
the direction of arrow 2.
The windshield wipers wipe one time
without washer fluid.
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
왘
Press the combination switch in the direction of arrow 2 past the resistance
point.
The windshield wiper operates with
washer fluid.
i To prevent smears on the windshield, wipe
with windshield washer fluid every now and then
even when it is raining.
For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Windshield washer system
and headlamp cleaning system”
(컄 page 498).
Controls in detail
Power windows
왔 Power windows
Opening and closing power windows
Warning!
The door windows are opened and closed
electrically. The switches
앫
for all side windows are on the driver’s
door
앫
for the front passenger side window
are on the front passenger door
앫
for each rear side window are on the
rear doors
G
When closing the windows, make sure that
there is no danger of anyone being harmed
by the closing procedure.
Activate the override switch (컄 page 67)
when children are riding in the back seats of
the vehicle. The children may otherwise injure themselves, e.g. by becoming trapped
in the window opening.
The closing of the door windows can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or,
if the switch was pressed past the resistance point and released, by pressing the
lower part of the respective switch again.
1 Left front door window
2 Right front door window
3 Left rear door window
4 Right rear door window
The door windows are equipped with the express-close and automatic reversal function. If the window encounters an
obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you pressed the switch past
the resistance point and released it to close
the window, the automatic reversal function
will stop the window and open it slightly.
If the window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
you are closing the window by pressing and
holding the switch, by pressing and holding
button ‹ on the SmartKey or SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO*, by pressing and holding
the sensor surface (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO*) on an outside door handle,
or by pressing and holding button , on
the climate control panel, the automatic reversal function will not operate.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
353
Controls in detail
Power windows
i You can also open or close the windows us-
왘
ing the SmartKey, see “Summer opening feature” (컄 page 355) and “Convenience closing
feature” (컄 page 356).
Depending on current position, the windows may
also open or close when the air recirculation
button , (컄 page 426) is pressed and held
for 2 seconds
i Operating the windows from the rear is not
possible if you activate the override switch
(컄 page 67).
i If PRE-SAFE® has been activated, the side
windows close automatically until only a small
gap remains.
i With the SmartKey in starter switch
position 0 or removed from the starter switch,
the power windows can be operated:
앫
until you open the driver’s or front passenger
door
앫
for at least 5 minutes
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
354
Opening: Press the lower part of
switch 1 to 4 (컄 page 353) to the resistance point.
The corresponding window will move
downwards until you release the
switch.
왘
Closing: Press the upper part of
switch 1 to 4 (컄 page 353) to the resistance point.
The corresponding window will move
upwards until you release the switch.
Warning!
G
If you press and hold the switch up when
closing the window, and upward movement
of the window is blocked by some obstruction including but not limited to arms, hands,
fingers, etc., the automatic reversal will not
operate.
왘
Express-opening: Press the upper
part of switch 1 to 4 (컄 page 353)
past the resistance point and release.
The corresponding window opens completely.
왘
Express-closing: Press the upper part
of switch 1 to 4 (컄 page 353) past
the resistance point and release.
The corresponding window closes completely.
Warning!
G
Driver’s door only:
If within 5 seconds you again press the
switch past the resistance point and release, the automatic reversal will not operate.
Controls in detail
Power windows
! If the upward movement of the window is
blocked during the closing procedure, the window will stop and open slightly. Remove the obstruction, press the respective power window
switch at the upper part again past the resistance point and release. If the window still does
not close when there is no obstruction, press
and hold the respective power window switch at
the upper part. The side window will then close
without the obstruction sensor function.
왘
왘
i The rocker switches on the driver’s door
Stopping during Express-operation:
Briefly press the respective power window switch again.
Rear side window sunshades*
왘
Closing: With the side window fully
closed, press top part of respective
rocker switch 3 or 4 (컄 page 353).
The rear side window sunshade will be
fully closed.
i The rear side window sunshade cannot be
Opening: Press bottom part of respective rocker switch 3 or 4
(컄 page 353).
i The “Summer opening” function can only be
The rear side window sunshade will be
fully opened.
automatically set to the highest level if activated
via summer opening feature.
activated via the remote control.
i The seat ventilation* for the driver’s seat is
i The rocker switches on the rear doors can
also be used to close the rear side window sunshades on the other side of the vehicle.
take precedence over the rocker switches on the
other doors.
Summer opening feature
If the weather is warm, you can ventilate
the vehicle before driving off by simultaneously:
앫
opening the side windows and rear side
window sunshades*
앫
opening the tilt/sliding sunroof or
tilt/sliding panel* and extending the
roller sunblinds*
앫
turning on the seat ventilation* for the
driver’s seat
partially closed.
왘
Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* at the
driver’s outside door handle. The
SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* must be in close proximity to the driver’s door handle.
355
Controls in detail
Power windows
Vehicles with tilt/sliding sunroof
왘
왘
Press and hold button Πuntil the
side windows and tilt/sliding sunroof
have reached the desired position.
If roller sunblinds are retracted and/or
rear side window sunshades* are closed:
왘
Press and hold button Œ. The windows and sunblinds and/or rear side
window sunshades* begin to open/extend after approximately 1 second.
With the windows and roller blinds
and/or rear side window sunshades*
fully opened/extended, press and hold
button Πagain. The tilt/sliding panel tilts and opens.
356
Warning!
G
왘
Press and hold button Œ. The windows move down and the tilt/sliding
panel tilts and opens after approximately 1 second.
When closing the windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof or tilt/sliding panel*, make sure
that there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the closing procedure.
왘
Release button Πto interrupt procedure.
If potential danger exists, proceed as follows:
Release button Πto interrupt procedure.
Vehicles with panorama roof* and/or
rear side window sunshades*
왘
If roller sunblinds and/or rear side window
sunshades* are open/extended:
Convenience closing feature
앫
When you lock the vehicle, you can close
the side windows and tilt/sliding sunroof
or tilt/sliding panel* simultaneously.
Release button ‹ to stop the closing
procedure. To open, press and hold button Œ. To continue the closing after
making sure that there is no danger of
anyone being harmed by the closing procedure, press and hold button ‹.
Afterward, you can close the roller sunblinds* of the panorama tilt/sliding sunroof* and the rear side window
sunshades*.
앫
Release the sensor surface on the outside door handle (컄 page 358) to stop
the closing procedure.
i The function of the SmartKey overrules the
앫
Immediately pull on the same outside
door handle and hold firmly. The side
windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof or
tilt/sliding panel* will open for as long
as the outside door handle is held but
the door is not opened.
KEYLESS-GO function.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
Controls in detail
Power windows
Vehicles with SmartKey
Vehicles with tilt/sliding sunroof
왘
왘
Press and hold button ‹ until the
side windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof are completely closed.
Release button ‹ to interrupt procedure.
Vehicles with panorama roof* and/or
rear side window sunshades*
왘
Press and hold button ‹ until the
side windows and the tilt/sliding panel
are completely closed.
왘
Press and hold button ‹ again.
The roller sunblinds and/or rear side
window sunshades* close.
왘
왘
Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey
towards the sensor in the driver’s door
handle. The SmartKey must be in close
proximity to the driver’s door handle.
Release button ‹ to interrupt procedure.
i If you press ‹ while one of the front side
windows is open and one of the rear side windows is closed, for example, then the front side
window and the rear side window sunshade will
be closed. To prevent this from happening, first
open all side windows slightly by briefly
pressing Πand then close all side windows
by pressing ‹.
357
Controls in detail
Power windows
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*
Vehicles with tilt/sliding sunroof
왘
Touch and hold sensor surface 1 until
the windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof are completely closed.
i Make sure that you are only touching the
sensor surface.
왘
Release sensor surface 1 to interrupt
procedure.
Vehicles with panorama roof* and/or
rear side window sunshades*
왘
i Make sure that you are only touching the
sensor surface.
왘
왘
Close all doors.
358
Touch and hold sensor surface 1
again.
The roller sunblinds and/or rear side
window sunshades* close.
1 Sensor surface on door handle
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
located outside the vehicle within approximately 3 ft. (1 m) of a door.
Touch and hold sensor surface 1 until
the windows and the tilt/sliding panel
are completely closed.
왘
Release sensor surface 1 to interrupt
procedure.
i If you touch the sensor surface while one of
the front side windows is open and one of the
rear side windows is closed, for example, the
front side window will be closed as well as the
rear side window sunshade*.
Controls in detail
Driving and parking
왔 Driving and parking
Warning!
G
Make sure that absolutely no objects are obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obstacles. If there are any floormats or carpets in
the footwell, make sure that the pedals still
have sufficient clearance.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
the objects could get caught between the
pedals. You could then no longer brake or
accelerate. This could lead to accidents and
injury.
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
have the cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive with at least one window
fully open.
Starting with the SmartKey
왘
Make sure the automatic transmission
is set to P.
The gear position indicator in the tachometer display should be on P.
Automatic transmission
왘
Do not depress accelerator.
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 3 and hold until the engine
starts (컄 page 315).
i You can also use the “touch-start” function.
Starting the engine
Warning!
For more information on how to operate
the gear selector lever, see “Automatic
transmission” (컄 page 367).
Turn the SmartKey to position 3 and release it
again immediately. The engine then starts automatically.
G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission
P Park position
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive position
i You can also start the engine with the automatic transmission set to N.
For information on turning off the engine
with the SmartKey, see “Turning off the engine” (컄 page 365).
359
Controls in detail
Driving and parking
왘
Starting with KEYLESS-GO*
Warning!
G
The engine starts if the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO is in the vehicle.
As long as the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
is in your vehicle, the vehicle can be started.
Therefore, never leave children unattended
in the vehicle, as they could otherwise accidentally start the engine.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle.
You can start your vehicle without the
SmartKey in the starter switch using the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the
starter switch.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
located in the vehicle.
360
Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
once.
i You can also start the engine with the automatic transmission set to N.
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
1 USA only
2 Canada only
왘
Make sure KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button is inserted in the starter switch
(컄 page 316).
왘
Make sure the automatic transmission
is set to P.
The gear position indicator in the tachometer display should be on P.
왘
Depress the brake pedal during the
starting procedure.
왘
Do not depress accelerator.
i If you wish to start the vehicle with the
SmartKey instead of the KEYLESS-GO feature,
remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button from
the starter switch and proceed as described in
“Starting with the SmartKey” (컄 page 359).
For information on turning off the engine
with KEYLESS-GO, see “Turning off the engine” (컄 page 365).
Starting difficulties
If the engine does not start as described,
carry out the following steps:
왘
If you are starting the engine with the
SmartKey: Turn SmartKey in starter
switch to position 0 and repeat starting
procedure.
Controls in detail
Driving and parking
왘
If you are starting the engine with
KEYLESS-GO: Close any doors that
may be open to allow for better detection of the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO.
왘
Remove the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button from starter switch.
왘
Start the engine with the SmartKey as
radio signals from another source may
be interfering with the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO.
왘
Repeat the starting procedure
(컄 page 359). Remember that extended starting attempts can drain the battery.
Get a jump start (컄 page 639).
If the engine does not start after several
starting attempts, there could be a malfunction in the engine electronics or in the
fuel supply system.
왘
Call Roadside Assistance.
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Driving off
왘
or
왘
왘
Depress the brake pedal.
The gear selector lever can now be
used.
왘
Shift automatic transmission to D or R.
i Wait for the gear selection process to complete before setting the vehicle in motion.
i Shifting from gear position P to position R,
N, or D is only possible with the brake pedal depressed. Without the brake pedal depressed, the
gear selector lever can be moved, but the parking pawl remains engaged, not allowing shifting
to occur.
왘
Release the brake pedal.
왘
Carefully depress the accelerator
pedal.
The electric parking brake is automatically released (컄 page 364).
The red brake warning 0 (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) in the instrument cluster goes out.
Once the vehicle is in motion, the automatic central locking system engages
and the locking knobs in the doors
move down.
i After driving off the doors and the trunk lock
automatically.
You can open a locked door from the inside.
Open door only when conditions are safe to do
so.
You can deactivate the automatic locking using
the COMAND system (컄 page 223).
After a cold start, the automatic transmission shifts at a higher engine revolution.
This allows the catalytic converter to reach
its operating temperature earlier.
컄컄
361
Controls in detail
Driving and parking
컄컄
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.
Warning!
G
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
! Shift the automatic transmission to P or R
only when the vehicle is stopped in order to avoid
damaging the transmission.
362
! Do not run cold engine at high engine
speeds. Running a cold engine at high engine
speeds may shorten the service life of the engine.
! Simultaneously depressing the accelerator
pedal and applying the brake reduces engine
performance and causes premature brake and
drivetrain wear.
For more information, see “Driving instructions” (컄 page 479).
Turn signals
왘
Press the combination switch up 1 or
down 2.
The corresponding turn signal indicator
lamp L or K flashes in the instrument cluster (컄 page 28).
The combination switch resets automatically after major steering wheel movements.
i To signal minor directional changes, e.g.
passing or changing lanes, move combination
switch to point of resistance only and release.
The corresponding turn signal flashes three
times.
Problems while driving
The engine runs erratically and misfires
앫
An ignition cable may be damaged.
앫
The engine electronics may not be operating properly.
Combination switch
앫
1 Turn signals, right
2 Turn signals, left
Unburned gasoline may have entered
the catalytic converter and damaged it.
왘
Give very little gas.
Controls in detail
Driving and parking
왘
Have the problem repaired by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
왘
Notify local fire and/or police authorities.
If the extent of the damage cannot be determined:
Warning!
G
Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay, or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
The coolant temperature is above
248°F (120°C)
왘
The coolant is too hot and is no longer
cooling the engine.
If no damage can be determined on the
왘
앫
major assemblies
앫
fuel system
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of vehicle movement, before turning off
the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
앫
engine mount:
앫
Press the parking brake handle.
왘
Start the engine in the usual manner.
앫
Shift the automatic transmission to P.
앫
When parked on an incline, turn front
wheels towards the road curb.
앫
Turn the SmartKey to starter switch
position 0 and remove, or press
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
(컄 page 317).
앫
Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* with you and lock vehicle
when leaving.
왘
Stop the vehicle in a safe location as
soon as possible and turn off the engine. Allow engine and coolant to cool.
Check the coolant level and add coolant if necessary (컄 page 497).
i Excessive coolant temperatures trigger a
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Parking
warning message in the multifunction display
(컄 page 588).
In case of accident
If the vehicle is leaking gasoline:
왘
Do not start the engine under any circumstances.
왘
Move away from vehicle.
Warning!
G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and the
steering systems. In this case, it is important to keep in mind that a considerably
higher degree of effort is necessary to brake
and steer the vehicle.
363
Controls in detail
Driving and parking
Automatically releasing electric parking
brake
Electric parking brake
Warning!
G
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could release the parking brake
and/or shift the automatic transmission out
of position P, either of which could result in
an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Warning!
G
Getting out of your vehicle with the automatic transmission not fully engaged in
position P is dangerous. Also, when parked
on an incline, position P alone may not prevent your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people or objects.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P (컄 page 359).
364
Your vehicle’s electric parking brake is automatically released when:
1 Handle for electric parking brake
앫
The engine is running.
앫
Transmission is in position D or R.
앫
The hood is closed.
앫
You have fastened your seat belt.
앫
You step on the accelerator pedal.
Manually releasing electric parking
brake
If gear R is engaged, the trunk must be
closed.
왘
i If you have not fastened your seat belt, the
following conditions must be met in order for the
parking brake to be automatically released:
Pull handle 1.
The red indicator lamp 0 (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) in the instrument cluster goes out.
You cannot release the electric parking
brake until the ignition is switched on.
앫
The driver's door is closed
앫
You must move the gear selector out of P position or drive faster than 2 mph (3 km/h).
Controls in detail
Driving and parking
Manually engaging electric parking
brake
왘
앫
The hood is released
앫
The trunk lid is open while gear R is engaged
앫
The vehicle is parked for an extended
period
Press handle 1.
The red indicator lamp 0 (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) in the instrument cluster comes on.
During the braking procedure, the red indicator lamp 0 (USA only) or !
(Canada only) flashes in the instrument
cluster, the message “Please release parking brake” appears on the multifunction
display and you will hear a warning tone.
Once the vehicle comes to a complete stop
the electronic parking brake will engage.
towards the road curb.
The red indicator lamp 0 (USA only) or
! (Canada only) in the instrument cluster comes on.
i You can also engage the electric parking
i In addition to the electric parking brake,
Turning off the engine
brake when the SmartKey is removed from the
starter switch.
park position P can be automatically engaged.
i When parked on an incline, turn front wheels
Automatically engaging electric parking
brake
Your vehicle’s electric parking brake is automatically engaged when DISTRONIC
Plus* (컄 page 385) brings your vehicle to a
standstill and at least one of the following
conditions is met:
앫
The engine is switched off
앫
The driver’s door is opened and the
seat belt is not inserted in the belt
buckle
Emergency braking with electric parking brake
In an emergency situation, you can also
brake your vehicle while driving by using
the electric parking brake.
왘
While driving, press handle for electric
parking brake (컄 page 364).
i Your vehicle will be braked for as long as you
press and hold the switch for the electric parking
brake. The longer you keep the electric parking
brake pressed, the more strongly your vehicle
will be braked. This method occurs on all
4 wheels, not just the rear wheels.
Warning!
G
Do not turn off the engine before the vehicle
has come to a complete stop. With the engine not running, there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems. In
this case, it is important to keep in mind that
a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.
i With the SmartKey removed from the starter
switch or the engine turned off with
KEYLESS-GO* and the driver’s door open, a
warning sounds if the parking lamps or low beam 컄컄
365
Controls in detail
Driving and parking
컄컄 headlamps are switched on.
The message: “Please switch off lights” appears
in the multifunction display.
왘
Shift the automatic transmission to P.
i When parked on an incline, also turn front
wheels towards the road curb.
i If the engine can no longer be stopped using
the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, the engine can
be turned off by withdrawing two fuses. For more
information, see “Emergency engine shut-down”
(컄 page 648).
Turning off with SmartKey
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0 (컄 page 315) and remove
it.
The immobilizer is activated.
i If you turn off the engine using the SmartKey
and remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch with the automatic transmission in a position other than P, the transmission will automatically shift to P.
Keep in mind that turning off the engine with the
SmartKey alone will not automatically shift the
transmission to P.
366
Only when the SmartKey is removed from the
starter switch will the transmission automatically shift to P.
Turning off with KEYLESS-GO*
왘
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button (컄 page 317) to turn off the engine.
With the driver’s door closed, the starter switch is now in position 1. With the
driver’s door opened, the starter switch
is set to position 0, same as SmartKey
removed from starter switch
(컄 page 315).
i In an emergency you can turn off the engine
while driving by pressing and holding the
KEYLESS-GO start/ stop button for approximately 3 seconds.
i If you turn off the engine using the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and open the
driver’s door with the automatic transmission in
a position other than P, the transmission will automatically shift to P.
Keep in mind that turning off the engine with the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button alone will not automatically shift the transmission to P. Only
when the driver’s door is opened will the transmission automatically shift to P.
i If you drive through an automatic conveyor
type car wash, you can switch on the ignition
with the KEYLESS-GO button and engage gear N
or insert the SmartKey into the starter switch.
Releasing seat belts
왘
Press the seat belt release button
(컄 page 340).
Allow the retractor to completely rewind the seat belt by guiding the latch
plate.
! Make sure the seat belt retracts fully so that
the seat belt and/or latch plate cannot get
caught or pinched in the door or in the seat
mechanism. This can damage the seat belt and
impair the effectiveness of the seat belt, and/or
cause damage to the door and/or door trim panel. Such damage is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Damaged seat belts must be replaced. Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
왔 Automatic transmission
For more information on driving with an
automatic transmission, see “Automatic
transmission” (컄 page 359).
Your vehicle’s automatic transmission
adapts its gear shifting process to your individual driving style by continually adjusting the shift points up or down. These shift
point adjustments are performed based on
current operating and driving conditions.
If the operating conditions change, the
automatic transmission reacts by
adjusting its shift program.
have sufficient clearance.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
the objects could get caught between the
pedals. You could then no longer brake or
accelerate.
Gear selector lever
The gear selector lever is located on the
right of the steering column.
i During the brief warm-up, automatic transmission upshifting is delayed. This allows the
catalytic converter to heat up more quickly to operating temperature.
Warning!
i The current automatic transmission
position P, R, N or D appears in the tachometer
display (컄 page 370).
Warning!
G
It is dangerous to shift the automatic transmission out of park position P or neutral
position N if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
G
Make sure that absolutely no objects are
obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obstacles. If there are any floormats or carpets in
the footwell, make sure that the pedals still
Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission
P Park position
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive position
367
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Shifting from P to N
i The gear selector lever returns to its original
Moving the gear selector lever up or down
shifts the automatic transmission out of
park position P:
position.
왘
With the vehicle at a standstill, depress
the brake pedal and keep it pressed.
왘
Move gear selector lever up or down to
resistance point to select neutral
position N.
왘
Release the brake pedal.
왘
Carefully depress the accelerator pedal
to drive off when it is safe to do so.
왘
With the vehicle at a standstill, depress
the brake pedal and keep it pressed.
The electric parking brake is automatically released (컄 page 364).
왘
Move gear selector lever down past the
resistance point to select drive
position D.
The red brake warning 0 (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) in the instrument cluster goes out.
i The gear selector lever returns to its original
position.
Shifting from N to R or from N to D
왘
With the vehicle at a standstill, depress
the brake pedal and keep it pressed.
왘
Move gear selector lever up past the
resistance point to select reverse
gear R.
or
왘
Move gear selector down past the
resistance point to select drive
position D.
368
i When driving off, the electric parking brake
is released automatically (컄 page 364).
Shifting from P to D
i The gear selector lever returns to its original
position.
Shifting from P to R
왘
Release the brake pedal.
왘
With the vehicle at a standstill, depress
the brake pedal and keep it pressed.
왘
Carefully depress the accelerator pedal
to drive off when it is safe to do so.
왘
Move gear selector lever up past the
resistance point to select reverse
gear R.
i When driving off, the electric parking brake
is released automatically (컄 page 364).
i The gear selector lever returns to its original
Shifting from D, R, or N to P
position.
If you want to select park position P with
the automatic transmission being in drive
position D, reverse gear R or neutral
position N:
왘
Release the brake pedal.
왘
Carefully depress the accelerator pedal
to drive off when it is safe to do so.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
왘
With the vehicle at a standstill, depress
the brake pedal and keep it pressed.
왘
왘
Press the handle for electric parking
brake (컄 page 364).
i When the vehicle needs to be moved with
왘
왘
Press button at the end of the gear
selector lever in direction of arrow
(컄 page 367) to select park position P.
Release the brake pedal.
! Shift the automatic transmission directly
from drive position D to reverse gear R, from
reverse gear R to drive position D or directly to
park position P only when the vehicle is stopped.
Otherwise the automatic transmission could be
damaged.
When trying to free a vehicle stuck in mud or
snow, see “Rocking the vehicle” (컄 page 373).
Shifting from D or R to N
If you want to select neutral position N
with the automatic transmission being in
drive position D or reverse gear R:
왘
With the vehicle at a standstill, depress
the brake pedal and keep it pressed.
Press the handle for electric parking
brake (컄 page 364).
the engine switched off and the automatic transmission set to neutral position N (컄 page 371),
e.g. in an automatic car wash, do not press the
handle for electric parking brake.
왘
왘
Move gear selector lever up to resistance point when in drive position D or
down to resistance point when in
reverse gear R to select neutral
position N.
Release the brake pedal.
Shifting procedure
The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically, depending on:
앫
drive position D (컄 page 370) with
gear ranges (컄 page 372)
앫
the selected program mode (C/S)
(컄 page 374)
앫
the position of the accelerator pedal
(컄 page 373)
앫
the vehicle speed
! Allow engine to warm up under low load use.
Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached.
Shift into reverse gear R or parking position P
only when the vehicle is stopped.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended
period when driving off on slippery road surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
With drive position D selected, you can use
the steering wheel gearshift control
buttons (컄 page 375) to influence automatic transmission shifting by:
앫
limiting the gear range
앫
changing gears manually
369
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission positions
The current automatic transmission position appears in the tachometer display.
1 Current automatic transmission position
! If the automatic transmission position fails
in the tachometer display, you should check
whether the gear selector lever is placed in the
desired position while driving off with added caution. We recommend you to shift the gear selector lever to position D. Do not limit the gear
range.
370
Effect
ì Park position
Shift into park position P only
when vehicle is stopped. The
park position is not intended to
serve as a brake when the vehicle is parked. Rather, the driver
should always set the electric
parking brake in addition to shifting into park position P to secure
the vehicle.
If the vehicle’s electrical system
is malfunctioning, the automatic
transmission could remain
locked in park position P.
왘
Have the vehicle checked as
soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
! SmartKey:
If you turn off the engine using the SmartKey and
remove the SmartKey from the starter switch,
the automatic transmission will shift to park
position P automatically. Keep in mind that turning off the engine with the SmartKey alone will
not automatically shift the automatic transmission to park position P. Only when the SmartKey
is removed from the starter switch, will the automatic transmission automatically shift to park
position P.
KEYLESS-GO*:
If you turn off the engine using the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button and open the driver’s door, the
automatic transmission will shift to park
position P automatically. Keep in mind that turning off the engine using the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button alone will not automatically
shift the automatic transmission to park
position P. Only when the driver’s door is
opened, will the automatic transmission automatically shift to park position P.
DISTRONIC Plus*:
the transmission will shift to park position P automatically, only when DISTRONIC Plus brings
your vehicle to a standstill, and when it meets at
least one of the following conditions at the same
time:
앫
the engine is turned off
앫
the driver’s or passenger door opens and the
seat belt is not engaged in the buckle
In addition to shifting to park position P, the electric parking brake will be engaged automatically.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Even though this is possible, make it a practice
to always shift into park position P before turning
off the engine and remove the SmartKey from
the starter switch, or when using KEYLESS-GO*,
before turning off the engine with the start/stop
button and opening the driver’s door.
! If you want the gear position to remain in
neutral position N (for example when the vehicle
is pulled through a car wash)
앫
do not remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch
or, when using KEYLESS-GO*
앫
do not turn off the engine using the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button* and open
the driver’s door
Otherwise, the automatic transmission will shift
to park position P and lock the wheels, preventing the vehicle from being pulled through a car
wash.
Effect
í Reverse gear
Shift into reverse gear R only
when the vehicle is stopped.
ë Neutral
! Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other
reason in neutral position N can result in automatic transmission damage that is not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Warning!
G
No power is transmitted from the
engine to the drive axle. When
the brakes are released, the
vehicle can be moved freely
(pushed or towed).
Getting out of your vehicle without shifting
into park position P is dangerous. Also, park
position P alone is not intended to or capable of preventing your vehicle from moving,
possibly hitting people or objects.
To avoid damage to the automatic transmission, avoid shifting
into neutral position N while
driving.
Always set the electric parking brake in
addition to shifting to park position P
(컄 page 364).
If the ESP® is deactivated or
malfunctioning:
Shift into neutral position N only
if the vehicle is in danger of
skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
ê Drive
When parked on an incline, turn the front
wheels towards the road curb.
Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
The automatic transmission
shifts automatically. All forward
gears are available.
371
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Warning!
G
The selected gear range appears in the
tachometer display.
è The automatic transmission
shifts through third gear only.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Children could shift the
automatic transmission out of park
position P, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
With this selection you can use
the braking effect of the engine.
ç The automatic transmission
shifts through second gear only.
Allows the use of engine’s
braking power when driving:
1 Current gear range
Gear ranges
Effect
With the automatic transmission in drive
position D, you can select a gear range for
the automatic transmission to operate
within.
ï The automatic transmission
You can limit the gear range by pressing
the respective downshift button on the
steering wheel gearshift control, and
reverse the gear range limit by pressing
the respective upshift button on the steering wheel gearshift control (컄 page 375).
î The automatic transmission
372
Effect
shifts through sixth gear only
(applies to vehicles with 7-speed
automatic transmission only).
shifts through fifth gear only (applies to vehicles with 7-speed automatic transmission only).
é The automatic transmission
shifts through fourth gear only.
앫
on steep downgrades
앫
in mountainous regions
앫
under extreme operating
conditions
æ The automatic transmission operates in first gear only.
For maximum use of engine’s
braking effect on very steep or
lengthy downgrades.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Driving tips
Accelerator position
Your driving style influences the automatic
transmission’s shifting behavior:
Less throttle
Earlier upshifting
More throttle
Later upshifting
Kickdown
Use kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.
왘
Press the accelerator past the point of
resistance.
Depending on the engine speed the automatic transmission shifts into a lower
gear.
왘
Ease on the accelerator when you have
reached the desired speed.
Stopping
Rocking the vehicle
When you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic lights:
Rocking the vehicle by shifting between
drive position D and reverse gear R can
help free a vehicle stuck in mud or snow.
The engine control system of this vehicle
electronically limits shifting between drive
position D and reverse gear R to very low
speeds (i.e. approx. 5 mph (9 km/h)). To
shift between drive position D and reverse
gear R, move the gear selector lever past
the resistance point up or down.
왘
Leave the automatic transmission in
gear.
왘
Hold the vehicle with the brake.
When you stop for a longer period of time
with the engine idling and/or on a hill:
왘
Set the electric parking brake.
왘
Shift into park position P.
Maneuvering
When you maneuver in tight areas,
e.g. when pulling into a parking space:
왘
Control the vehicle speed by gradually
releasing the brakes.
왘
Accelerate gently.
왘
Never abruptly step on the accelerator.
Working on the vehicle
Warning!
G
When working on the vehicle, set the
electric parking brake and shift to park
position P. Otherwise the vehicle could roll
away.
The automatic transmission shifts up
again.
373
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Hill start assist system
Warning!
The hill start assist system is inactive
G
The hill start assist system is not designed
to function as a parking brake and does not
prevent the vehicle from moving when
parked on an incline.
앫
when starting off on a level road or
downhill grades
앫
with the automatic transmission in
neutral position N
앫
with the electric parking brake set
앫
if the ESP® has switched off due to a
malfunction
Always set the electric parking brake in
addition to shifting to park position P.
Automatic shift program
On uphill grades with a gradient angle of
more than 5°, the hill start assist system
maintains the pressure in the brake system for approximately 1 second after you
have released the brake pedal. Therefore,
you can start off smoothly without the
vehicle moving immediately after releasing
the brake pedal.
374
The program mode selector switch is used
to adjust
앫
shift program
앫
suspension tuning of Airmatic*
(컄 page 402) or ABC* (컄 page 404)
앫
engine control
Program mode selector switch
C Comfort
For comfort driving
S Sport
For standard driving
The selected program mode C or S appears in the tachometer display.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Program mode C:
1 Current program mode
! Never change the program mode when the
automatic transmission is out of park position P.
This could result in a change of driving characteristics for which you may not be prepared.
i The last selected program mode (C or S) is
switched on when the engine is restarted.
왘
Press program mode selector switch
repeatedly until the letter of the
desired program mode appears in the
tachometer display.
앫
Engine, automatic transmission and
suspension tuning are comfortable.
앫
The vehicle starts out in second
gear (both forward and reverse) for
gentler starts. This does not apply if
full throttle is applied or gear
range 1 is selected.
앫
Traction and driving stability are
improved on icy roads.
앫
Upshifts occur earlier even when
you give more gas. The engine then
operates at lower rpms and the
wheels are less likely to spin.
Program mode S:
앫
Engine, automatic transmission and
suspension tuning are more performance oriented.
앫
The vehicle starts out in first gear.
앫
Upshifts occur later.
Steering wheel gearshift control
With drive position D selected, you can
limit or extend the gear range.
! Allow engine to warm up under low load use.
Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached.
Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only
when the vehicle is stopped.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended
period when driving off on slippery road surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
The steering wheel gearshift buttons are
located on the back of the steering wheel
to the left and right.
375
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
왘
Briefly press button 2 on the back of
the steering wheel.
Canceling gear range limit
왘
The automatic transmission will shift to
the next lower gear as permitted by the
shift program. This action simultaneously limits the gear range of the automatic transmission (컄 page 372).
Press and hold button 1 on the back
of the steering wheel until the cipher
for the current gear range disappears
from the tachometer display
(컄 page 372).
The automatic transmission will shift
from the current gear range directly to
gear range D.
i To avoid overrevving the engine when downshifting, the automatic transmission will not shift
to a lower gear if the engine’s max. speed would
be exceeded.
Shifting into optimal gear range
i You cannot shift with the steering wheel
Upshifting
왘
gearshift buttons when the automatic transmission in position P, N or R.
왘
1 Right button: upshift
2 Left button: downshift
Downshifting
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
376
Briefly press button 1 on the back of
the steering wheel.
The automatic transmission will shift to
the next higher gear as permitted by
the shift program. This action simultaneously extends the gear range of the
automatic transmission.
i If you press on the accelerator when the engine has reached its rpm limit, the automatic
transmission will upshift beyond any gear range
limit selected.
Press and hold button 2 on the back
of the steering wheel.
The automatic transmission will automatically select the gear range suited
for optimal acceleration and deceleration. This will involve shifting down one
or more gears.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Emergency operation
(Limp-Home Mode)
If vehicle acceleration becomes less responsive or sluggish or the automatic
transmission no longer shifts, the automatic transmission is most likely operating in
limp-home (emergency operation) mode.
In this mode only second gear and reverse
gear can be selected.
왘
Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
왘
Shift to park position P.
왘
Turn off the engine.
왘
Wait at least 10 seconds before
restarting.
왘
Restart the engine.
왘
Shift to drive position D (for second
gear) or reverse gear R.
왘
Have the automatic transmission
checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
377
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
A full view illustration of the instrument
cluster can be found in the “At a glance”
section of this manual (컄 page 28).
The instrument cluster is activated when
you:
앫
open a door
앫
switch on the ignition (컄 page 315)
앫
switch on the exterior lamps
If you must continue to drive, please do so
with added caution. Visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Adjusting instrument cluster and
COMAND display illumination
G
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative.
As a result, you will not be able to see information about your driving conditions, such
as speed or outside temperature, warning/
indicator lamps, malfunction/warning messages or the failure of any systems. Driving
characteristics may be impaired.
378
Brightening illumination: Turn
knob 1 or 2 clockwise.
왘
Dimming illumination: Turn knob 1
or 2 counterclockwise.
Coolant temperature gauge
Warning!
The language setting for the multifunction
display can be changed via COMAND
(컄 page 79).
Warning!
왘
1 To adjust instrument cluster illumination and multifunction display
2 To adjust COMAND display
i The instrument cluster illumination is
dimmed or brightened automatically to suit ambient light conditions.
The instrument cluster illumination will also be
adjusted automatically when you switch on the
vehicle’s exterior lamps.
G
앫
Driving when your engine is overheated
can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire. You could be seriously
burned.
앫
Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns and can occur just
by opening the hood. Stay away from
the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from
other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of
the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle
until the engine has cooled down.
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
! Excessive coolant temperature triggers a
warning in the multifunction display
(컄 page 588).
The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248°F (120°C), i.e. in
the red zone of the coolant temperature gauge.
Doing so may cause serious engine damage
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
i During severe operating conditions,
e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature
may rise close to 248°F (120°C), i.e. close to
the red zone of the temperature gauge.
Tachometer
The red marking on the tachometer denotes excessive engine speed.
! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds, as
it may result in serious engine damage that is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply
is interrupted if the engine is operated
within the red marking.
Outside temperature indicator
Warning!
G
The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
The outside temperature indicator is on
the bottom left-hand side of the instrument cluster.
The temperature sensor is located in the
front bumper area. Due to its location, the
sensor can be affected by road or engine
heat during idling or slow driving. Therefore, the accuracy of the displayed temperature can only be verified by comparison to
a thermometer placed next to the sensor,
not by comparison to external displays
(e.g. bank signs, etc.).
When moving the vehicle into colder ambient temperatures (e.g. when leaving your
garage), you will notice a delay before the
lower temperature is displayed.
A delay also occurs when ambient temperatures rise. This prevents inaccurate temperature indications caused by heat
radiated from the engine during idling or
slow driving.
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge is on the left-hand side of
the instrument cluster (컄 page 28). Once
the fuel level has fallen below the reserve
mark, the yellow segment indicator for the
fuel reserve comes on (컄 page 550).
379
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The driving systems of your vehicle are described on the following pages:
앫
Cruise control and DISTRONIC Plus*,
with which the vehicle can maintain a
preset speed.
앫
Distance warning function* (only available with DISTRONIC Plus*), which
warns of a stationary obstacle or slower moving vehicle that you are closing
on to quickly.
앫
Airmatic (S 550 only) and ABC* adjust
the vehicle suspension characteristics
automatically and control the vehicle
level.
앫
Parktronic* and Park Assist*, which
serve as a parking assistant.
앫
Dynamic Rear View Monitor* is an
electronic and visual parking aid.
앫
Night View Assist* illuminates the road
with infrared light in addition to the normal headlamps.
380
For information on the ABS, Adaptive
Brake, BAS, BAS Plus*, EBP, and ESP® driving systems, see “Driving safety systems”
(컄 page 69).
Cruise control
Cruise control automatically maintains the
speed you set for your vehicle.
The use of cruise control is recommended
for driving at a constant speed for extended periods of time. You can set or resume
cruise control at any speed over 20 mph
(30 km/h).
The cruise control function is operated by
means of the cruise control lever.
Warning!
G
Cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The driver is and must always
remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed
and for safe brake operation.
Only use the cruise control if the road, traffic
and weather conditions make it advisable to
travel at a steady speed.
앫
The use of cruise control can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic
because conditions do not allow safe
driving at a steady speed.
앫
The use of cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in
tire traction can result in wheel spin and
loss of control.
앫
Deactivate cruise control when driving
in fog.
The “Resume” function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning!
Activating cruise control
G
You can activate cruise control if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (30 km/h).
Cruise control brakes automatically so that
the set speed is not exceeded. The brake
pedal depresses when cruise control engages the brakes.
Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times, including the area under the brake pedal. Objects stored in this area may impair pedal
movement which could interfere with the
braking ability of the cruise control system.
Do not place your foot under the brake pedal
– your foot could become caught.
Keep in mind that cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver
during vehicle operation. The driver is and
must always remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed and for safe brake operation.
In the following cases you cannot activate
cruise control:
1 Setting current or higher speed
Adjustment in 1 mph increments (to resistance point) or 5 mph increments
(past resistance point)
(Canada: 1 km/h or 10 km/h)
2 Setting current or lower speed
Adjustment in 1 mph increments (to resistance point) or 5 mph increments
(past resistance point)
(Canada: 1 km/h or 10 km/h)
3 Cancel cruise control
4 Resume to last set speed
앫
when you brake
앫
the vehicle is secured with the electric
parking brake
앫
if the automatic transmission is set to
position P, R, or N
앫
if ESP® is switched off
Setting current speed
왘
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.
왘
Briefly lift the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 1 or depress in
direction of arrow 2.
컄컄
The current speed is set.
381
Controls in detail
Driving systems
컄컄 왘
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Cruise control is activated.
앫
앫
앫
The last set speed appears in the
multifunction display for approximately 5 seconds.
The corresponding speedometer
segments from the selected speed
to the vehicle maximum speed in
the multifunction display are illuminated.
The set speed is shown by a triangle
in the speedometer.
i On uphill grades, cruise control may not be
able to maintain the set speed. Once the grade
eases, the set speed will be resumed.
On downhill grades, cruise control maintains the
set speed with braking from the vehicle’s braking
system. In addition, on longer downhill grades
the automatic transmission will automatically
downshift.
382
Canceling cruise control
There are several ways to cancel cruise
control:
왘
Step on the brake pedal.
Cruise control is canceled. The last
speed set is stored for later use.
i Cruise control switches off automatically
when
앫
you step on the brake pedal
앫
the vehicle is secured with the parking brake
In this case the segments in the multifunction display go out and no warning sounds.
앫
the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(30 km/h)
앫
the ESP® is in operation or switched off with
the ESP® switch (컄 page 73)
앫
you set the automatic transmission to N
while driving
or
왘
Briefly push the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 3.
Cruise control is canceled. The last
speed set is stored for later use.
i Upon switching off the engine, the last
stored speed is deleted.
The segments in the multifunction display go out,
and an acoustic warning sounds.
! Setting the automatic transmission to N
while driving cancels cruise control. However,
the automatic transmission should not be set
to N while driving except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy roads).
i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not
deactivate cruise control. After brief acceleration (e.g. for passing), cruise control will resume
the last speed set.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting a higher speed
You can increase the set speed in two
ways.
Warning!
Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)
increments
i The set speed value is increased in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments each time you lift
the cruise control lever up to the resistance
point.
왘
왘
Briefly lift the cruise control lever to the
resistance point in direction of
arrow 1 (컄 page 381).
Release the cruise control lever.
The vehicle set speed increases in increments 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h).
왘
Adjustment in 5 mph
(Canada: 10 km/h) increments
G
You can increase the vehicle set speed in
5 mph (Canada 10 km/h) increments. When
using this feature, keep in mind that it may
take a brief moment until the vehicle has
reached the set speed.
Increase the vehicle set speed to a value
that the prevailing road conditions permit.
Otherwise, sudden and unexpected acceleration of the vehicle could cause an accident
and/or serious injury to you and others.
i The set speed value is increased in 5 mph
(Canada: 10 km/h) increments each time you lift
the cruise control lever up past the resistance
point.
왘
Briefly lift the cruise control lever past
the resistance point in direction of
arrow 1 (컄 page 381).
Release the cruise control lever.
The vehicle set speed increases in increments 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
i The new speed is set and the vehicle will accelerate. Keep in mind that it may take a brief
moment until the vehicle has reached the set
speed.
Setting a lower speed
You can reduce the set speed in two ways.
i When you use the cruise control lever to decelerate, the brake system will automatically
brake the vehicle if the engine’s braking power
does not brake the vehicle sufficiently.
Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)
increments
i The set speed value is decreased in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments each time you
press the cruise control lever down to the resistance point.
왘
Briefly press the cruise control lever
down to the resistance point in direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 381).
컄컄
383
Controls in detail
Driving systems
컄컄 왘
Release the cruise control lever.
왘
Briefly press the cruise control lever
down past the resistance point in
direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 381).
왘
Release the cruise control lever.
The vehicle set speed decreases in increments 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h).
Adjustment in 5 mph
(Canada: 10 km/h) increments
Warning!
The vehicle set speed decreases in increments 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
G
You can decrease the vehicle set speed in
5 mph (Canada 10 km/h) increments. When
using this feature, keep in mind that it may
take a brief moment until the vehicle has
reached the set speed.
Decelerate the vehicle set speed to a value
that the prevailing road conditions permit.
Otherwise, sudden and unexpected deceleration of the vehicle could cause an accident
and/or serious injury to you and others.
i The set speed value is decreased in 5 mph
(Canada: 10 km/h) increments each time you
press the cruise control lever down past the resistance point.
384
i The new speed is set and the vehicle will decelerate. Keep in mind that it may take a brief
moment until the vehicle has reached the set
speed.
Setting to last stored speed
(“Resume” function)
Warning!
G
The set speed stored in memory should only
be set again if prevailing road conditions
permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration differences arising from returning to the
preset speed could cause an accident
and/or serious injury to you and others.
왘
Briefly pull the cruise control lever in
the direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 381).
The cruise control resumes to the last
set speed or if no speed is stored, it will
set and store the current speed.
왘
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
The last set speed appears in the multifunction display for approximately
5 seconds, and the corresponding speedometer segments from the selected speed
to the vehicle maximum speed are illuminated.
i The last stored set speed is deleted when
the engine is turned off.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
DISTRONIC Plus*
Warning!
When activated, the DISTRONIC Plus adaptive cruise control system increases driving convenience afforded by the cruise
control during travel on expressways and
other major roads.
앫
앫
If the DISTRONIC Plus distance sensor
detects a slower moving vehicle directly ahead, your vehicle speed will be reduced so that you follow that vehicle at
a preset distance.
If there is no vehicle directly ahead of
you, DISTRONIC Plus will function in
the same way as cruise control
(컄 page 380).
DISTRONIC Plus functions within a speed
range of 0 to 124 mph (0 to 200 km/h).
G
DISTRONIC Plus is a convenience system.
Its speed adjustment reduction capability is
intended to make cruise control more effective and usable when traffic speeds vary. It
is not however, intended to, nor does it, replace the need for extreme care. The responsibility for the vehicle speed and the
distance to the vehicle ahead, including
most importantly brake operation to assure
safe stopping distance, always rests with
the driver.
DISTRONIC Plus cannot take street and traffic conditions into account.
Complex driving situations are not always
fully recognized by DISTRONIC Plus. This
could result in wrong or missing distance
warnings.
Warning!
G
The DISTRONIC Plus adaptive cruise control
is no substitute for active driving involvement. It does not react to pedestrians or stationary objects, nor does it recognize or
predict the curvature and lane layout or the
movement of vehicles ahead.
DISTRONIC Plus can only apply a maximum
of 40% of the vehicle’s braking power.
DISTRONIC Plus may not detect narrow vehicles possibly driving in front of you, such
as motorcycles and vehicles driving in an
offset formation.
It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to
be attentive to road, weather and traffic conditions and to provide the steering, braking
and other driving inputs necessary to retain
control of the vehicle.
High-frequency sources such as toll stations, speed measuring systems etc. can
cause the DISTRONIC Plus system to temporarily cease functioning properly.
385
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning!
G
DISTRONIC Plus requires familiarity with its
operational characteristics. We strongly recommend that you review the following information carefully before operating the
system.
Warning!
G
DISTRONIC Plus cannot take street and traffic conditions into account. Only use
DISTRONIC Plus if the road, weather and
traffic conditions make it advisable to travel
at a steady speed.
Warning!
G
Use of DISTRONIC Plus can be dangerous
on slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction can result in wheel spin and loss of control.
386
DISTRONIC Plus does not act upon adverse
sight distance conditions. Do not use
DISTRONIC Plus during conditions of fog
and heavy rain, snow or sleet.
Warning!
G
DISTRONIC Plus cannot take weather conditions into account. Switch off
DISTRONIC Plus or do not turn it on if:
앫
앫
roads are slippery or covered with snow
or ice. The wheels could lose traction
while braking or accelerating, and the
vehicle could skid.
the sensor is dirty or visibility is
diminished due to snow, rain or fog. The
distance control could be impaired.
Always pay attention to traffic conditions
even while DISTRONIC Plus is switched on.
Otherwise, you may not be able to recognize
dangerous situations until it is too late and
could cause an accident resulting in personal or fatal injury to you or others.
Warning!
G
The “Resume” function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.
Warning!
G
Close attention to road and traffic conditions is imperative at all times, regardless of
whether or not DISTRONIC Plus is activated.
Use of DISTRONIC Plus can be dangerous
on winding roads as conditions do not allow
safe driving at a steady speed.
DISTRONIC Plus may not react to stationary
objects in the roadway (e.g. a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
DISTRONIC Plus will also not respond to oncoming vehicles.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Switch off DISTRONIC Plus:
i Due to its radar-emitting nature DISTRONIC
when changing from the left to the right
lane if vehicles are moving more slowly
in the left lane
Plus may have an appearance similar to a radar
detector to law inforcement officials. You may
want to refer to this section of your Operator’s
Manual when asked.
앫
when entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp
i USA only:
앫
in complex driving situations, such as in
highway construction zones
앫
In these situations, DISTRONIC Plus will
continue to maintain the set speed unless
deactivated.
DISTRONIC Plus is designed and intended
only to maintain a set speed and keep a set
distance from moving objects in front of it.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
DISTRONIC Plus displays in the speedometer dial
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
1 Speed of the vehicle ahead
2 Set speed
i Do not use DISTRONIC Plus if you are driving on a road with steep uphill or downhill slopes.
i Canada only:
i In certain countries and near radio-astrological facilities, you must switch off the radar systems (컄 page 256).
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
If DISTRONIC Plus is activated, the
marker 2 indicates the set speed.
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
ometer can briefly vary from the speed setting
on the DISTRONIC Plus system.
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
i The vehicle speed displayed on the speed-
387
Controls in detail
Driving systems
When DISTRONIC Plus detects a vehicle
driving ahead of you, the ring on the speedometer dial lights up between the speed of
the vehicle ahead of you and set speed 2.
If DISTRONIC Plus calculates that there is
a danger of collision (컄 page 397):
앫
The distance warning lamp l in the
instrument cluster comes on.
앫
An intermittent warning sounds.
왘
Immediately brake the vehicle to avoid
a collision.
Under no circumstances should the
driver await the intermittent warning
sound before braking. See the following warning note.
The intermittent warning sound ceases
and the distance warning lamp l
goes out when the necessary distance
to the vehicle ahead is again
established.
Warning!
G
G
An intermittent warning sounds and the distance warning lamp l in the instrument
cluster is illuminated if the DISTRONIC Plus
system calculates that the distance to the
vehicle ahead and your vehicle’s current
speed indicate that DISTRONIC Plus will not
be capable of slowing the vehicle sufficiently
to maintain the preset following distance,
which creates a danger of a collision.
DISTRONIC Plus brakes your vehicle with a
maximum of 13 ft/s2 (4 m/s2). This corresponds to about 40% of the maximum deceleration ability of your vehicle.
Immediately brake your vehicle to increase
the distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you. The warning sound is
intended as a final caution that you have not
interceded with your own braking inputs to
avoid a potentially dangerous situation. Do
not wait for the operation of the warning signal to intercede with your own braking, as
that will result in potentially dangerous
emergency braking which will not always result in an impact being avoided.
Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times, including the area under the brake pedal. Objects stored in this area may impair pedal
movement which could interfere with the
braking ability of the DISTRONIC Plus system.
Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.
388
Warning!
DISTRONIC Plus brakes the vehicle in an effort to restore the preset distance or to
maintain the speed. The brake pedal is automatically applied as this happens which results in the brake pedal moving.
Do not place your foot under the brake pedal
– your foot could become caught.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Displaying the distance graphic
DISTRONIC Plus activated
DISTRONIC Plus deactivated
In the “Assistance” menu under “Distance
display” you see the current settings for
DISTRONIC Plus. The information shown in
the multifunction display depends on
whether DISTRONIC Plus is activated or
deactivated.
When you turn DISTRONIC Plus on, you will
see the set speed in the multifunction display for about 5 seconds. You then see the
following display in the multifunction display.
If DISTRONIC Plus is deactivated, the standard display of DISTRONIC Plus appears in
the multifunction display.
i For activating or deactivating the DISTRONIC Plus system, see “Activating
DISTRONIC Plus” (컄 page 390) or “Activating
DISTRONIC Plus” (컄 page 395).
For activating or deactivating the distance warning function, see “Distance warning function*
activating/deactivating” (컄 page 252).
왘
Press ( or & to select the
“Assistance” menu.
왘
Press % or $ to select the
“Distance display” function.
왘
Press #.
The DISTRONIC Plus distance graphic
appears and you will see one of the following displays on the multifunction
display.
1 DISTRONIC Plus activated
2 Your vehicle
3 Preset distance threshold to vehicle
ahead
4 Vehicle ahead, if detected
1 Symbol for activated distance warning
function
2 Vehicle ahead, if detected
3 Actual distance to vehicle ahead
4 Preset distance threshold to vehicle
ahead
5 Your vehicle
389
Controls in detail
Driving systems
DISTRONIC Plus lever
The DISTRONIC Plus system is operated by
means of the DISTRONIC Plus lever.
Activating DISTRONIC Plus
Warning!
You can activate DISTRONIC Plus when:
G
When DISTRONIC Plus is braking, the brake
pedal is retracted (i.e. depressed automatically). The pedals’ range of motion must not
be impeded by any obstacles:
1 Setting current or higher speed
Adjustment in 1 mph or 5 mph
increments (Canada: 1 km/h or
10 km/h)
2 Setting current or lower speed
Adjustment in 1 mph or 5 mph
increments (Canada: 1 km/h or
10 km/h)
3 Canceling DISTRONIC Plus
4 Activating DISTRONIC Plus or resuming to last set speed
5 Setting target distance
390
앫
Do not place any objects in the footwell.
앫
Make sure that the floor mats and carpets are securely in place.
앫
Do not rest your foot underneath the
brake pedal, as it could otherwise be
trapped.
You could otherwise cause an accident and
injure yourself and others.
Warning!
G
When DISTRONIC Plus is switched on, the
vehicle can be braked. You should therefore
switch off DISTRONIC Plus if the vehicle
must be towed.
앫
you are driving slower than 20 mph
(30 km/h) and DISTRONIC Plus has
detected a vehicle ahead of you
앫
you are driving above 20 mph
(30 km/h)
i The maximum speed you can set is 124 mph
(200 km/h).
If DISTRONIC Plus has not been activated
after pressing the DISTRONIC Plus lever,
you will see the message: “DISTRONIC
PLUS Off” in the multifunction display.
In the following cases you cannot activate
DISTRONIC Plus:
앫
up to 2 minutes after starting the engine
앫
if the engine is switched off
앫
if you step on the brake pedal while
driving
앫
the vehicle is secured with the electric
parking brake
Controls in detail
Driving systems
앫
if the gear selector lever is in
position P, R, or N
앫
if ESP® is switched off
앫
if the hood is open
앫
if the driver’s door is open and the driver has not fastened his or her seat belt
앫
if the radar sensors are switched off
(컄 page 256).
Switching on while driving
왘
Tap DISTRONIC Plus lever up 1 or
down 2 until desired speed is set.
DISTRONIC Plus is switched on.
or
왘
Pull DISTRONIC Plus lever briefly in direction of arrow 4 to call up speed
last set (컄 page 395).
DISTRONIC Plus is switched on.
왘
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Your vehicle adapts its speed to the vehicle ahead, observing the set speed as
a maximum value.
i Under 20 mph (30 km/h), you can only
switch on DISTRONIC Plus if the vehicle ahead of
you has been detected and is shown on the multifunction display. If you no longer see the vehicle in front of you on the multifunction display
and if it is no longer detected because it has
changed lanes, for example, DISTRONIC Plus
switches off and you will hear a signal.
i If you do not completely lift your foot off the
accelerator pedal, the message“DISTRONIC
PLUS passive” appears on the multifunction display. The distance to a slower-driving vehicle will
not be set. You will drive at the speed you dictate
by pressing the accelerator pedal.
Switching on when approaching a stationary vehicle
If the vehicle in front of you is stationary,
you can only switch on DISTRONIC Plus if
your vehicle is also at a standstill.
왘
Tap DISTRONIC Plus lever up 1 or
down 2 until desired speed is set.
DISTRONIC Plus is switched on.
or
왘
Pull DISTRONIC Plus lever briefly in direction of arrow 4 to call up speed
last set (컄 page 395).
DISTRONIC Plus is switched on.
i It is helpful to switch on the DISTRONIC Plus
display in the instrument cluster since you can
only switch on DISTRONIC Plus under a speed of
20 mph (30 km/h) when a vehicle has been detected in front of you.
i You can adjust the set speed using the
DISTRONIC Plus lever and the target distance
using the distance setting switch on the
DISTRONIC Plus lever (컄 page 396).
i The distance warning function will still issue
warnings even when DISTRONIC Plus is switched
off if you have activated it on using the instrument cluster control system (컄 page 252).
391
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Starting off
When the vehicle in front of you starts off:
왘
Remove your foot from the brake
pedal.
왘
Pull DISTRONIC Plus lever briefly in direction of arrow 4.
or
왘
Briefly step on the accelerator pedal.
Your vehicle starts off and adapts its speed
to the vehicle in front of you.
Warning!
G
When you step on the brake pedal, you
switch off DISTRONIC Plus except when the
vehicle is at a standstill. DISTRONIC Plus will
no longer brake your vehicle. You are always
responsible for maintaining a distance from
other vehicles, observing road speeds and
braking well in advance.
Stopping
G
Driving
Warning!
If no vehicle is driving ahead of you, DISTRONIC Plus functions like cruise control
(컄 page 380).
DISTRONIC Plus’s braking effect is canceled
and the vehicle can start to roll if
When DISTRONIC Plus detects that the vehicle in front of you is driving more slowly,
it brakes the vehicle in order to keep the
distance specified by you.
When DISTRONIC Plus detects that the vehicle in front of you is driving faster, the vehicle accelerates up to the set speed.
392
앫
DISTRONIC Plus is switched off using
the DISTRONIC Plus lever
앫
you accelerate
앫
the system or the power supply is malfunctioning, e.g. due to battery failure
앫
the electrical components in the engine
compartment or the fuses have been
manipulated
앫
the battery is disconnected
Warning!
G
Never get out of the vehicle while DISTRONIC Plus is switched on!
DISTRONIC Plus must never be operated or
switched off by passengers or from outside
the vehicle.
DISTRONIC Plus is not a substitute for the
electric parking brake and may not be used
for parking.
When you get out of the vehicle or switch off
the engine, deactivate DISTRONIC Plus and
secure the vehicle from rolling away by engaging the electric parking brake.
When DISTRONIC Plus detects that the vehicle in front of you is stopping, the vehicle
brakes until it also stops.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Once DISTRONIC Plus has stopped your
vehicle and it is at a standstill, it remains
stationary; the brake pedal does not need
to be depressed.
i If you do not take your foot off of the accel-
i After a short while, your vehicle is secured in
place by the electric parking brake so that the
operating brake can be relieved of load.
The distance to a slower moving vehicle in front
of you will not be set. Your vehicle speed will
then be determined only by the accelerator pedal position.
i Depending on the following distance set using the distance setting switch on the DISTRONIC Plus lever, your vehicle will stop approx.
13.1 ft. (4 m) away from the vehicle in front of
you.
Setting the current speed
왘
왘
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.
Briefly lift the DISTRONIC Plus lever in
the direction of arrow 1 or depress in
the direction of arrow 2.
DISTRONIC Plus is activated and the
current speed is set.
왘
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
erator completely, the following message will appear in the multifunction display:
왘
Release the DISTRONIC Plus lever.
The vehicle speed increases in increments of 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h).
DISTRONIC PLUS passive
Adjustment in 5 mph
(Canada: 10 km/h) increments
Warning!
G
Setting a higher speed
You can increase the set speed in two stages.
Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)
increments
i The set speed value is increased in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments each time you lift
the DISTRONIC Plus lever to the resistance
point.
왘
Briefly lift the DISTRONIC Plus lever to
the resistance point in direction of
arrow 1 (컄 page 381).
You can increase the vehicle speed in 5 mph
(Canada 10 km/h) increments. When using
this feature, keep in mind that it may take a
brief moment until the vehicle has reached
the set speed.
Increase the vehicle speed to a value that
the prevailing road conditions permit. Otherwise, sudden and unexpected acceleration
of the vehicle could cause an accident
and/or serious injury to you and others.
i The set value is increased in 5 mph
(Canada: 10 km/h) increments each time you lift
the DISTRONIC Plus lever past the resistance
컄컄
point.
393
Controls in detail
Driving systems
컄컄 왘
왘
Briefly lift the DISTRONIC Plus lever
past the resistance point in direction of
arrow 1 (컄 page 381).
왘
Briefly press the DISTRONIC Plus lever
down to the resistance point in direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 381).
Release the DISTRONIC Plus lever.
왘
Release the DISTRONIC Plus lever.
The vehicle speed increases in increments of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
The vehicle speed decreases in increments of 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h).
i The new speed is set and the vehicle will ac- Adjustment in 5 mph
celerate. Keep in mind that it may take a brief
moment until the vehicle has reached the set
speed.
(Canada: 10 km/h) increments
Warning!
Setting a lower speed
You can reduce the speed in two stages.
i When you use the DISTRONIC Plus lever to
decelerate, the brake system will automatically
brake the vehicle if the engine’s braking power
does not brake the vehicle sufficiently.
Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)
increments
i The set value is decreased in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments each time you
press the DISTRONIC Plus lever down to the resistance point.
394
G
You can decrease the vehicle speed in
5 mph (Canada 10 km/h) increments. When
using this feature, keep in mind that it may
take a brief moment until the vehicle has
reached the set speed.
Decelerate the vehicle speed to a value that
the prevailing road conditions permit. Otherwise, sudden and unexpected deceleration
of the vehicle could cause an accident
and/or serious injury to you and others.
i The set value is decreased in 5 mph
(Canada: 10 km/h) increments each time you
press the DISTRONIC Plus lever down past the
resistance point.
왘
Briefly press the DISTRONIC Plus lever
down past the resistance point in
direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 381).
왘
Release the DISTRONIC Plus lever.
The vehicle speed decreases in increments of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
i The new speed is set and the vehicle will decelerate. Keep in mind that it may take a brief
moment until the vehicle has reached the set
speed.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting to last stored speed (“Resume”
function)
Warning!
G
The speed stored in memory should only be
set again if prevailing road conditions permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
differences arising from returning to preset
speed could cause an accident and/or serious injury you and others.
왘
Briefly pull the DISTRONIC Plus lever in
the direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 390).
DISTRONIC Plus is set to the last
stored speed.
DISTRONIC Plus resumes the last set
speed or if no speed is stored, it will set
and store the current speed.
왘
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
i Upon switching off the engine, the last
stored speed is deleted.
Deactivating DISTRONIC Plus
i DISTRONIC Plus deactivates automatically
There are several ways to deactivate the
DISTRONIC Plus system:
when:
왘
Briefly tip the DISTRONIC Plus lever in
the direction of arrow 3 (컄 page 390).
앫
the vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake
앫
the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(30 km/h) and no preceding vehicle is detected
앫
the ESP® is in operation or switched off with
the ESP® switch (컄 page 73)
앫
you set the automatic transmission to P, R,
or N while driving
앫
the radar sensors are switched off
(컄 page 256).
or
왘
Step on the brake pedal.
DISTRONIC Plus will be deactivated.
The last speed set will be stored into
memory.
i The following message will appear in the
multifunction display for approximately
5 seconds:
DISTRONIC PLUS Off
The last stored speed is deleted when you turn
off the engine.
The segments in the multifunction display go out,
an acoustic warning sounds, and the message
“DISTRONIC PLUS Off” appears in the multifunction display for approximately 5 seconds.
If the vehicle has been stopped by DISTRONIC Plus and a malfunction occurs in
the system, the message “Brake immediately” will appear on the multifunction display. Step on the brake immediately to
prevent the vehicle from rolling. DISTRONIC Plus is then switched off and the message disappears.
395
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning!
G
DISTRONIC Plus switches off and releases
the brakes when the vehicle decelerates below the minimum speed of 20 mph
(30 km/h) by operation of the system unless DISTRONIC Plus detects a vehicle directly ahead of you. At that time the driver
must apply the brakes in order to reduce vehicle speed further or bring it to a stop.
! Setting the automatic transmission to N
while driving cancels the DISTRONIC Plus. However, the automatic transmission should not be
set to N while driving except to coast when the
vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy
roads).
i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not
deactivate DISTRONIC Plus. After brief acceleration (e.g. for passing), DISTRONIC Plus will resume the last speed set.
Setting the following distance in
DISTRONIC Plus
You can set the specified following distance for DISTRONIC Plus by varying the
time setting between 1.0 and 2.0 seconds.
Using this time setting and the current set
speed of your vehicle, DISTRONIC Plus calculates and sets the required following distance to the vehicle ahead. The set
distance will be shown in the multifunction
display.
Warning!
G
It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to
select the appropriate setting given road
conditions, traffic, driver’s preferred driving
style and applicable laws and driving recommendations for safe following distance.
The distance setting switch for the target
distance is located on the DISTRONIC Plus
lever.
1 Distance setting switch for target distance
2 To increase target distance
3 To decrease target distance
Increasing distance
Increasing the distance setting causes
DISTRONIC Plus to maintain a greater following distance to the vehicle ahead.
왘
396
Move distance setting switch 1 in direction 2.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Decreasing distance
Decreasing the distance setting causes
DISTRONIC Plus to maintain a shorter following distance to the vehicle ahead.
왘
Move distance setting switch 1 in direction 3.
When pressing the brake pedal, the warning sound stops. The warning sound also
stops when the distance to the vehicle
ahead is sufficient again without applying
the brake pedal. In this case the distance
warning lamp l also goes out.
G
Distance warning function
Warning!
When DISTRONIC Plus is deactivated, this
function will continue to warn you when
recognizing a slower vehicle moving in
your vehicle’s path or a stationary object in
your vehicle’s path and the danger of a collision exists:
If the DISTRONIC Plus warning lamp l in
the instrument cluster comes on while driving and/or an intermittent warning sounds,
immediate attention on the part of the driver
is required. As required by the traffic situation, apply the brakes and navigate around a
possible obstacle. However, do not drive by
relying on the distance warning function, as
this will result in an emergency braking application. Especially depending on road surface conditions and driver reaction, this will
not always enable you to avoid a collision.
앫
앫
The distance warning lamp l in the
instrument cluster comes on.
An intermittent warning sounds.
If these warnings are issued, you must
brake manually to maintain a safe distance
and avoid a collision with the vehicle or
stationary object ahead.
Activating and deactivating
The distance warning function can be activated or deactivated using the instrument
cluster control system (컄 page 252).
After the function has been activated,
: appears on the left-hand side of the
multifunction display.
Driving with DISTRONIC Plus
This section describes a number of driving
situations where special precaution is required on the part of the driver. Be prepared to brake in such situations which will
deactivate the DISTRONIC Plus system.
Warning!
G
DISTRONIC Plus works to maintain the
speed selected by the driver unless a moving obstacle proceeding directly ahead of it
in the same travel direction is detected (e.g.
following another vehicle ahead of you at a
distance set by DISTRONIC Plus).
컄컄
397
Controls in detail
Driving systems
컄컄
This means that:
앫
Your vehicle can pass another vehicle
after you change lanes.
앫
While in a sharp turn or if the vehicle in
front is in a sharp turn, DISTRONIC Plus
could lose sight of a vehicle traveling in
front of it, then your vehicle could accelerate to the previously selected speed.
DISTRONIC Plus regulates only the distance
between your vehicle and those directly
ahead of it. It may not register stationary objects in the road, e.g.:
앫
a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam
앫
a disabled vehicle
앫
an oncoming vehicle
The driver must always be on the alert, observe all traffic and intercede as required by
steering or braking the vehicle.
Warning!
G
DISTRONIC Plus should not be used in
snowy or icy road conditions.
398
The most likely cause for a malfunctioning
system is a dirty sensor (located behind
the hood grille), especially at times of snow
and ice or heavy rain. In such a case,
DISTRONIC Plus will switch off, and the
message:
DISTRONIC PLUS
currently unavailable
See Oper. Manual
appears in the multifunction display.
For cleaning and care of the
DISTRONIC Plus sensor, see “Cleaning the
DISTRONIC Plus* system sensor cover”
(컄 page 537).
i If the message:
DISTRONIC PLUS
currently unavailable
See Oper. Manual
disappears during driving and the last speed
stored flashes for approximately 5 seconds, the
dirt (e.g. slush) has dissolved; DISTRONIC Plus is
again operational.
Another cause might be that the radar sensors have been manually switched off in
the instrument cluster control system.
Please verify that the radar sensors are
switched on (컄 page 256).
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Turns and bends
Offset driving
Lane changing
In turns or bends, DISTRONIC Plus may not
detect a moving vehicle in front, or it may
detect one too soon. This may cause your
vehicle to brake late or unexpectedly.
A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset
from your direct line of travel may not be
detected by DISTRONIC Plus. There will be
insufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
DISTRONIC Plus has not yet detected the
vehicle changing lanes. There will be insufficient distance to the lane-changing vehicle.
399
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Narrow vehicles
Obstacles and stationary vehicles
Cross-traffic
Because of their narrow profile, the vehicles traveling near the outer edge of the
lane have not yet been detected by
DISTRONIC Plus. There will be insufficient
distance to the vehicles ahead.
DISTRONIC Plus does not brake for obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for example,
the vehicle detected in front of you changes lanes to bypass an obstacle or stationary vehicle in front of it, DISTRONIC Plus
will not brake for the obstacle or stationary
vehicle.
DISTRONIC Plus may inadvertently detect
crossing vehicles. If you switch on DISTRONIC Plus, for example, at a traffic light
with cross-traffic, the vehicle may suddenly start to drive off.
400
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Airmatic (S 550 only)
Vehicle level control with Airmatic
Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride
height to:
Airmatic automatically selects the optimum suspension tuning and ride height for
your vehicle.
앫
reduce fuel consumption
Airmatic consists of two components:
앫
increase vehicle stability
앫
Level control system
앫
Adaptive Damping System (ADS)
The vehicle chassis ride height is raised or
lowered according to the selected level
setting and to the vehicle speed:
The ADS automatically selects the optimum damping for the respective driving conditions. At the same time the
suspension is set to either sporty or
regular.
앫
With increasing speed, ride height is reduced by up to approximately 0.8 in
(20 mm).
앫
With decreasing speed, the ride height
is again raised to the selected vehicle
level.
The following vehicle level settings can be
selected when the vehicle is stationary:
Level
Normal
For driving on normal roads.
The indicator lamp is off.
Raised
For driving on rough roads or
with snow chains. The indicator lamp is on.
Select the “Raised” level setting only when
required by current driving conditions.
Otherwise:
앫
Fuel consumption may increase.
앫
Handling may be impaired.
i These height adjustments are so small that
you may not notice any change.
401
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning!
G
왘
Start the engine.
Suspension tuning
왘
Briefly press switch 1 to change from
one level setting to the other.
The Adaptive Damping System (ADS) automatically tunes shock absorbers and
springs.
To help avoid personal injury, keep hands
and feet away from wheel housing area, and
stay away from under the vehicle when lowering the vehicle chassis.
The message:
Vehicle rising
appears in the multifunction display
when changing from normal level to
raised level.
The Airmatic button with the indicator
lamp is located on the control panel on the
right-hand side of the instrument cluster.
The indicator lamp 2 is then lit. The
display switches off when the vehicle is
raised.
왘
1 Vehicle level control switch
2 Indicator lamp
Press switch 1 again to lower the vehicle. The indicator lamp 2 is off.
Driving program Suspension tuning
C Comfort
Comfortable
(default setting)
S Standard
Standard
for dynamic driving
i The selected vehicle level setting remains
In addition, suspension characteristics in
both driving programs (S/C) depend on:
stored in memory even if the engine is turned off
and restarted except when you
앫
your driving style
앫
exceed a speed of 75 mph (120 km/h)
앫
road surface conditions
or
앫
the vehicle loading
앫
maintain a speed of between 50 mph
(80 km/h) and 75 mph (120 km/h) for more
than 3 minutes
The vehicle then lowers to regular level.
402
The program mode selector switch (S/C)
(컄 page 374) is used to adjust the suspension tuning:
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Active Body Control (ABC)*
i These height adjustments are so small that
you may not notice any change.
The ABC system automatically selects the
optimum suspension tuning and ride
height for your vehicle.
The following vehicle level settings can be
selected when the vehicle is stationary:
The ABC system consists of an active, hydraulically controlled suspension and
damping system.
Level
Normal
For driving on normal roads.
The indicator lamp is off.
Vehicle level control with ABC*
Raised
For driving on rough roads or
with snow chains. The indicator lamp is on.
Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride
height to:
앫
reduce fuel consumption
앫
increase vehicle stability
The vehicle chassis ride height is raised or
lowered according to the selected level
setting and to the vehicle speed:
앫
앫
With increasing speed, ride height is reduced by up to approximately 0.6 in
(15 mm).
Warning!
G
To help avoid personal injury, keep hands
and feet away from wheel housing area, and
stay away from under the vehicle when lowering the vehicle chassis.
Select the “Raised” level setting only when
required by current driving conditions.
Otherwise:
앫
Fuel consumption may increase.
앫
Handling may be impaired.
i The selected vehicle level setting remains
stored in memory even if the engine is turned off
and restarted.
With decreasing speed, the ride height
is again raised to the selected vehicle
level.
403
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The ABC level control switch with the indicator lamp is located on the control panel
on the right-hand side of the instrument
cluster.
Selecting a higher level
Suspension tuning
왘
The program mode selector switch (C/S)
(컄 page 374) is used to adjust the suspension tuning:
Start the engine.
If indicator lamp 2 is off:
왘
Press switch 1.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on. The vehicle is raised to a higher level.
Selecting a normal level
왘
1 Vehicle level control switch
2 Indicator lamp
404
C Comfort
Comfortable
(default setting)
S Standard
Standard
for dynamic driving
Start the engine.
If indicator lamp 2 is on:
왘
Driving program Suspension tuning
Press switch 1.
Indicator lamp 2 goes out. The vehicle
is adjusted to a normal level.
In addition, suspension characteristics in
both driving programs (S/C) depend on:
앫
your driving style
앫
road surface conditions
앫
the vehicle loading
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Parktronic system*
Warning!
Warning!
G
Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is
not intended to, nor does it replace, the
need for extreme care. The responsibility
during parking and other critical maneuvers
always rests with the driver.
Special attention must be paid to objects
with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes
(e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts, or road
curbs). Such objects may not be detected by
the system and can damage the vehicle.
The operational function of the Parktronic
system can be affected by dirty sensors, especially at times of snow and ice, see
“Cleaning the Parktronic* system sensors”
(컄 page 538).
G
Make sure no persons or animals are in the
area in which you are maneuvering. You
could otherwise injure them.
i Interference caused by other ultrasonic signals (e.g. working jackhammers, car wash, or the
air brakes of trucks) can cause the system to
send erratic indications, and should be taken
into consideration.
Parktronic is an electronic parking aid with
ultrasonic sensors that helps you while
parking.
It visually and audibly indicates the relative
distance between the vehicle and an obstacle.
The Parktronic system deactivates at
speeds over approximately 11 mph
(18 km/h). At lower speeds the Parktronic
system turns on again.
Parktronic is also switched off when you
engage gear P or secure the vehicle in
place with the electric parking brake and
switch off the engine.
The Parktronic system monitors the surroundings of your vehicle with six sensors
in the front bumper and four sensors in the
rear bumper.
Parktronic is automatically activated when
you switch on the ignition, release the
electric parking brake or start the engine
and engage gear D, R or N.
1 Sensors in the front bumper (Only visible without DISTRONIC Plus*)
405
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i To function properly, the sensors must be
free of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean the sensors regularly, being careful not to scratch or
damage the sensors, see “Cleaning the Parktronic* system sensors” (컄 page 538).
Range of the sensors
Front sensors
Minimum distance
Center
approx. 40 in (100 cm)
Center
approx. 8 in (20 cm)
Corners
approx. 24 in (60 cm)
Corners
approx. 6 in (15 cm)
Rear sensors
Center
approx. 48 in (120 cm)
Corners
approx. 32 in (80 cm)
! During parking maneuvers, pay special attention to objects located above or below the
height of the sensors (e.g. street curbs, painted
posts, or trailer hitches etc.). The Parktronic system will not detect such objects at close range
and damage to your vehicle or the object may result.
Ultrasonic signals from outside sources (e.g.
truck air brakes, car wash, or jackhammers) may
impair the operation of the Parktronic system.
406
If the system detects an obstacle in this
range, all the distance warning segments
illuminate and you hear a warning signal. If
the obstacle is closer than the minimum
distance, the actual distance may no longer be indicated by the system.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning indicators
Visual signals indicate to the driver the relative distance between the sensors and an
obstacle.
The warning indicator for the front area is
in the instrument cluster. The warning indicator for the rear area is on the roof liner in
the rear.
The position of the gear selector lever determines which warning indicators will be
activated.
Gear selector
lever position
Warning indicator
D
Front area activated
R or N
Front and rear area
activated
P
Neither activated
As your vehicle approaches an object, one
or more distance segments will illuminate,
depending on the distance. When the seventh distance segment illuminates, you
have reached the minimum distance.
1 Left side of the vehicle
2 Right side of the vehicle
3 Indicator
앫
Front area:
An intermittent acoustic warning will
sound as the first red distance segment
illuminates and a constant acoustic
warning lasting a maximum of
2 seconds will sound for the second
red distance segment. The signal is
canceled when the gear selector lever
is placed in position P.
앫
Rear area:
An intermittent acoustic warning will
sound as the first red distance segment
illuminates and a constant acoustic
warning lasting a maximum of
2 seconds will sound for the second
red distance segment. The signal is
canceled when the gear selector lever
is placed in position D or P.
Each warning indicator is divided into five
yellow and two red distance segments for
either side of the vehicle.
If yellow indicators 3 under the segments
are lit, Parktronic is ready to measure.
407
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Switching Parktronic system on/off
왘
The Parktronic system can be switched off
manually.
The Parktronic button with the indicator
lamp is on the control panel on the
right-hand side of the instrument cluster.
Switching off the Parktronic system: Press button 1.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
왘
Switching on the Parktronic system:
Press button 1 again.
Indicator lamp 2 goes out.
i The Parktronic system is automatically
switched on when the ignition is switched on
(컄 page 315).
1 Parktronic button
2 Indicator lamp
408
왘
Have the Parktronic system checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
If only the red distance segments illuminate and no acoustic warning sounds, the
Parktronic system sensors are dirty or
there is an interference from other radio or
ultrasonic signals. The Parktronic system
will automatically switch off after 20 seconds and the indicator lamp in the Parktronic switch comes on.
Parktronic system malfunction
왘
Switch off the ignition (컄 page 315).
If only the red distance segments illuminate and an acoustic warning sounds,
there is a malfunction in the Parktronic
system. The Parktronic system will automatically switch off after 20 seconds and
the indicator lamp in the Parktronic switch
comes on.
왘
Clean the Parktronic system sensors
(컄 page 538).
왘
Switch on the ignition.
or
왘
Check the Parktronic system operation
at another location to rule out interference from outside radio or ultrasonic
signals.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Park Assist*
Warning!
G
Park Assist is a supplemental system. It is
not intended to, nor does it replace, the
need for extreme care. The responsibility
during parking and other critical maneuvers
always rests with the driver.
Warning!
G
Make sure no persons or animals are in the
area in which you are maneuvering. You
could otherwise injure them.
! Special attention must be paid to objects
with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes (e.g.
trailer couplings, painted posts, elevated crossbars or road curbs). Such objects may not be detected by the system and can damage the
vehicle.
! The operational function of the Park Assist
system can be affected by dirty sensors, especially at times of snow and ice.
Park Assist is automatically activated
when the engine is running and the transmission is in position D, R or N.
Make sure that the area on the bumpers around
the sensors is free of dirt, ice and/or slush,
otherwise Park Assist may not function properly,
see “Cleaning the Park Assist* system sensors”
(컄 page 538).
The Park Assist system deactivates at
speeds over approximately 11 mph
(18 km/h). At lower speeds the Parktronic
system turns on again.
! High-frequency sources such as toll stations, speed measuring systems, etc. can cause
the Park Assist system to malfunction. You can
switch off the Park Assist using the Park Assist
button (컄 page 412) or switch off the radar sensors (컄 page 256) to prevent possible malfunction.
Park Assist is also switched off when the
transmission is in position P or switch off
the engine.
i In certain countries and near radio-astrological facilities, you must switch off the radar sensors (컄 page 256).
Park Assist is an electronic parking aid
with radar sensors that helps you while
parking.
It visually and audibly indicates the relative
distance between the vehicle and an obstacle.
While the transmission is in position N,
Park Assist is switched off if you secure the
vehicle in place with the electric parking
brake.
The Park Assist system monitors the surroundings of your vehicle with four sensors
in the front bumper and two sensors in the
rear bumper.
409
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Front sensors
Range of the sensors
The sensors of the Park Assist system are
integrated in the front and rear bumpers.
Make sure that the bumpers are clear of
dirt, ice and slush in the area of the sensors, as otherwise, Park Assist may not
function properly, see “Cleaning the Park
Assist* system sensors” (컄 page 538).
approx. 40 in (100 cm)
Corners
approx. 24 in (60 cm)
Rear sensors
i Due to the sensors’ broad detection range,
it is possible that Park Assist also detects the following obstacles and issues a warning:
410
Center
앫
obstacles in the ground, e.g. sewer canal
covers, rails, bumps in the road or gutters
앫
obstacles moving upward quickly, e.g. rolling
garage doors
Center
approx. 50 in (125 cm)
Corners
approx. 24 in (60 cm)
! While parking, pay particular attention to objects over or underneath the sensors, e.g. flower
boxes, an elevated crossbar or a trailer tow
hitch. Park Assist does not detect such nearby
objects. You could otherwise damage the vehicle
or the objects.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning indicators
Visual signals indicate to the driver the relative distance between the sensors and an
obstacle.
The warning indicator for the front area is
in the instrument cluster. The warning indicator for the rear area is on the roof liner in
the rear.
The position of the gear selector lever determines which warning indicators will be
activated.
Gear selector
lever position
Warning indicator
D
Front area activated
R
Front and rear area
activated
N
1 Left side of the vehicle
2 Right side of the vehicle
3 Indicator
Each warning indicator is divided into five
yellow and two red distance segments for
either side of the vehicle.
If yellow indicators 3 under the segments
are lit, Park Assist is ready to measure.
With the electric parking brake engaged:
neither activated.
With the electric parking brake released:
front and rear area activated.
P
Neither activated
As your vehicle approaches an object, one
or more distance segments will illuminate,
depending on the distance. When the seventh distance segment illuminates, you
have reached the minimum distance.
앫
Front area:
As soon as the first red segment lights
up, you will hear an intermittent warning tone for approx. two seconds. Once
the second red segment lights up, you
will hear a continuous warning tone.
You have reached the minimum distance.
앫
Rear area:
As soon as the first red segment lights
up, you will hear an intermittent warning tone for approx. two seconds. Once
the second red segment lights up, you
will hear a continuous warning tone.
You have reached the minimum distance.
i During strong rainfall, the warning indicators
and warning tones may be triggered, for example, by water splashing into the area of the sensors.
411
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Collision warning
Switching Park Assist system on/off
Park Assist can detect obstacles from a
considerable distance. If you drive in reverse towards an obstacle, you will hear a
warning tone. You must then brake in order to avoid a collision. The warning tone
for a collision will not sound when the vehicle is at a standstill very close to the obstacle. In this case, you will hear a
corresponding tone for the warning indicator in the rear area.
The Park Assist system can be switched off
manually.
The Park Assist button with the indicator
lamp is located on the control panel on the
right-hand side of the instrument cluster.
i When the indicator lamp is on, the Park
Assist system is switched off.
i During strong rainfall, the collision warning
may be triggered, for example, by water splashing into the area of the sensors.
1 Park Assist button
2 Indicator lamp
412
왘
Switching off Park Assist system:
Press button 1.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
왘
Switching on Park Assist system:
Press button 1 again.
Indicator lamp 2 goes out.
i The Park Assist system is automatically
switched on when the ignition (컄 page 315) and
radar sensors are switched on (컄 page 256).
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Dynamic Rear View Monitor*
The Dynamic Rear View Monitor is in the
handle strip of the trunk lid.
The Dynamic Rear View Monitor is an electronic and visual parking aid. It shows you
the area behind the vehicle on the
COMAND display.
In addition, the Dynamic Rear View Monitor contains guide lines to help you with reverse parking (back-in parking) and
parallel parking.
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as
a reverse-mirror image similar to the view
in a rear-view mirror.
Warning!
1 Dynamic Rear View Monitor
View through the camera
i The image from the Dynamic Rear View
Monitor is shown on the COMAND display
(컄 page 31).
G
Please note that objects which do not touch
the ground, such as the bumper of a vehicle
parked behind you, a trailer hitch, or the
back of a truck, may appear to be further
away than they actually are. In this case, you
should not use the guide lines to judge distance. The use of the guide lines to judge
distance increases the risk of impacting the
objects.
413
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning!
G
The Dynamic Rear View Monitor is a supplement system. It is not intended to, nor does
it replace, the need for extreme care. The responsibility during parking and other driving
maneuvers always rests with the driver.
The Dynamic Rear View Monitor may show
obstacles with a distorted perspective, incorrectly or not at all.
to the area in front of and to the sides of the
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in injury
to persons and/or damage to the vehicle or
other property. We also recommend that the
driver use the Parktronic system* or Park
Assist* when parking or maneuvering the
vehicle.
Warning!
Make sure that no persons or animals are
standing in the area where you are maneuvering. You could otherwise injure them.
The Dynamic Rear View Monitor does not
warn you about impending collisions with
objects. The driver is always responsible for
safety and must continue to pay attention to
the immediate surroundings while parking
or maneuvering the vehicle. This applies not
only to the area behind the vehicle, but also
The Dynamic Rear View Monitor may not
function if:
414
the camera is exposed to very strong
white light (white stripes may appear on
the COMAND display)
앫
the surrounding area is lit with fluorescent light (the COMAND display can
flicker)
앫
there is a sudden change in temperature, for example when you drive out of
the cold into a heated garage in winter
(lens condensation)
앫
outside temperatures are very high (lens
condensation)
앫
the camera lens is dirty or covered, see
“Cleaning of the Dynamic Rear View
Monitor lens*” (컄 page 538)
앫
the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In
this case, have the position and setting
of the camera checked by a qualified
technician. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
G
Special attention must be paid to objects
outside of the camera’s field of view such as
those located very close to or below the rear
bumper, or above the recessed grip of the
luggage compartment lid. Such objects may
not be detected by the system and can damage the vehicle.
Warning!
앫
G
앫
the trunk lid is not completely closed
앫
it is raining or snowing heavily, or if
there is thick fog
앫
in a very dark area
Do not use the Dynamic Rear View Monitor
if the roads are icy, slippery or covered with
snow. The vehicle could slip causing the actual vehicle position to deviate from the one
shown on the COMAND display.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
This may cause injury to you or others, or
damage the vehicle or objects.
Mounting tires/rims of other specification
than the original equipment tires/rims may
impair the function of the Dynamic Rear
View Monitor. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
G
Use of Dynamic Rear View Monitor can be
dangerous if you are color-blind or have impaired color vision.
Only use Dynamic Rear View Monitor if you
can see and distinguish all colored guide
lines shown by Dynamic Rear View Monitor
on the COMAND display.
Switching on Dynamic Rear View Monitor
i The Dynamic Rear View Monitor must be activated in the instrument cluster control system
in order for it to be switched on (컄 page 253).
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
왘
Switch on COMAND (컄 page 79).
왘
Move gear selector lever to position R
(reverse gear).
The COMAND display will show the
area behind the vehicle with guide lines
to help you reverse into a parking
place.
This function helps you when you are reversing in a straight line or backing in at
any angle.
The space required by the vehicle for reversing is shown by guide lines.
When you turn the steering wheel to a
straight-ahead position, you will see the
guide lines on the COMAND display in the
following order:
i If you activate a different function on the
driver’s COMAND controls while reverse parking
or parallel parking, the image from the back-up
camera is interrupted.
To reactivate the camera, take the vehicle out of
reverse gear and then re-engage reverse gear
again.
Reverse parking (back-in parking)
1 Yellow and blue guide lines for vehicle
width
2 Yellow 13 ft (4 m) guide line
3 Yellow 39 in (1 m) guide line
4 Red 10 in (0.25 m) guide line
415
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The red 10 in (0.25 m) guide line 4, the
yellow 39 in (1 m) guide line 3 and the
yellow 13 ft (4 m) guide line 2 correspond
to the relevant distance from the rear of
the vehicle. The yellow and blue guide lines
for vehicle width 1 show the required
width for the vehicle.
Warning!
G
Please note that objects which do not touch
the ground, such as the bumper of a vehicle
parked behind you, a trailer hitch, or the
back of a truck, may appear to be further
away than they actually are. In this case, you
should not use the guide lines to judge distance as the use of the guide lines to judge
distance increases the risk of impacting the
objects.
Even when the object you approach is directly on the ground (and nothing on the object extends above the ground beyond the
object's contours directly touching the
ground) and no objects that do not touch
the ground, such as the bumper of a vehicle
416
parked behind you, a trailer hitch, or the
back of a truck are in the path, do not approach the object on the ground any closer
than red guide line 4.
Backing in straight
i The Dynamic Rear View Monitor must be activated in the instrument cluster control system
in order for it to be switched on (컄 page 253).
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
왘
Switch on COMAND (컄 page 79).
왘
Move gear selector lever to position R
(reverse gear).
왘
Use the COMAND controller
(컄 page 82) to select “reverse parking”
function 6.
You will see the guide lines for reverse
parking on the COMAND display.
5 Blue guide lines for straight driving
6 Symbol for “reverse parking”
7 Yellow and red guide lines for cornering
When you turn the steering wheel out of
the straight-ahead position, the positions
of the yellow and red guide lines 7
change depending on the steering wheel’s
position. The space required by the vehicle
for reverse cornering is indicated by yellow
and red guide lines 7.
The desired parking space is wide
enough if nothing is inside the yellow
and blue guide lines 1 of your intended driving path or protrudes into this
area.
! While parking, do not approach any obstacles closer than indicated by red guide line 4.
왘
Back in straight carefully.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Backing in at any angle
i The Dynamic Rear View Monitor must be activated in the instrument cluster control system
in order for it to be switched on (컄 page 253).
! While parking, do not approach any obstacles closer than indicated by red guide line 4.
왘
Back in carefully.
왘
When the blue guide lines 5 for
straight driving lie parallel inside the
desired parking space, straighten the
steering wheel for straight driving.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
왘
Switch on COMAND (컄 page 79).
왘
Move gear selector lever to position R
(reverse gear).
왘
왘
Use the COMAND controller
(컄 page 82) to select “reverse parking”
function 6.
Parallel parking
Back in enough to leave sufficient free
space around the vehicle.
왘
Stop the vehicle
앫
at a distance of approximately
three feet (one meter) parallel to
the vehicle that is in front of the desired parking space.
앫
in such a way that the front of the
parked vehicle is parallel to your
rear wheel.
왘
Switch on COMAND (컄 page 79).
왘
Move gear selector lever to position R
(reverse gear).
You will see the guide lines for reverse
parking on the COMAND display.
왘
Turn steering wheel so that the yellow
and red guide lines for cornering 7 are
pointing towards the desired parking
space.
The desired parking space is wide
enough if nothing is inside yellow and
red guide lines 7 of your intended
driving path or protrudes into this area.
This function assists you when you wish to
park in a row, e.g. in a parking place parallel to the road.
i The Dynamic Rear View Monitor must be ac- 1 Vertical blue guide line
tivated in the instrument cluster control system
in order for it to be switched on (컄 page 253).
컄컄
2 Symbol for “parallel parking”
417
Controls in detail
Driving systems
컄컄 왘
Use the COMAND controller
(컄 page 82) to select “parallel parking”
function 2.
i If an obstacle is inside of or protrudes into
the area marked by blue guide lines 4 for the
vehicle, the parking space is too small for the vehicle.
You will see the guide lines for parallel
parking on the COMAND display.
왘
Back up carefully parallel to parked car
until the respective vertical blue guide
line 1 is at the end of the parked vehicle next to you.
왘
Stop the vehicle.
Warning!
G
If the respective vertical guide line 1 is not
yet located at the end of the parked vehicle
and you are already turning into the parking
space, you could collide with the parked vehicle. Stop the parking procedure immediately. Pull out of the parking space and start
the parking procedure over again.
418
1 Vertical blue guide line
3 Extended blue guide line
4 Blue guide lines for vehicle contour
왘
With the vehicle at a standstill, turn
steering wheel in parking direction until
blue guide lines 3 and 4 appear and
the rectangle formed by guide lines 4
shows the desired parking position. If
another vehicle is located next to you,
the extended blue guide line 4 must
just touch the corresponding vertical
blue guide line 1.
i If you turn the steering wheel too far, the
message “Steering wheel turned too far. Please
adjust steering wheel” appears on the COMAND
display. Turn the steering wheel back until the
message disappears and the extended blue
guide line 4 intersects with vertical blue guide
line 1.
If you back up using the wrong wheel angle, the
following appears in the COMAND display:
“Steering wheel turned too far. Park Assist disabled.”. Pull out of the parking space and start
the parking procedure over again.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왘
Back up until bent guide line 5 intersects the edge of the parking space,
e.g. the curb.
왘
Stop the vehicle.
왘
The guide lines for straight driving 7
and cornering 6 appear in the
COMAND display.
왘
Back up using the set wheel angle until
blue guide line 7 for straight driving is
parallel to the edge of the parking
space, e.g. the curb.
왘
Now straighten out steering wheel and
back up until you still have just enough
room behind the vehicle.
5 Bent blue guide line
왘
Back up with the set wheel angle.
The guide lines in the COMAND display
disappear. After a short distance, the
bent blue guide line 5 appears.
i If you turn the steering wheel while backing
up, the following appears in the COMAND display: “The steering wheel position has been
changed. Park Assist disabled.”. Pull out of the
parking space and start the parking procedure
over again.
6 Yellow and red guide lines for cornering
7 Blue guide line for straight driving
With the vehicle at a standstill, turn
steering wheel as far as it will go in the
opposite direction.
While doing so, observe
Parktronic* (컄 page 405) or Park Assist* (컄 page 409) warning indicators.
419
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Night View Assist*
Warning!
G
Night View Assist is only an aid to support
you while driving and cannot substitute your
careful attention. Do not rely on the display
of the Night View Assist; instead, continue
to look through the windshield. You are always responsible for safety and must drive
in accordance with traffic conditions. Otherwise, you could endanger yourself and others.
If it is foggy, raining or snowing, the clarity of
the Night View Assist image on the multifunction display may be diminished.
The image on the multifunction display corresponds to a road lit up by high-beam
headlamps.
Warning!
G
Night View Assist cannot record objects immediately in front of or next to the vehicle.
When maneuvering, continue to look
through the windshield. Make sure that no
persons or animals are in or near the area in
which you are maneuvering.
The Night View Assist image on the multifunction display is not impaired
앫
by the headlamps of approaching vehicles
앫
if you cannot switch on the high beams
due to oncoming traffic
As a result, you can better follow the
course of the road and detect obstacles
earlier on.
i Infrared light is invisible to the human eye
and can therefore remain permanently switched
on without blinding oncoming traffic.
The camera is at the top of the windshield.
Night View Assist illuminates the road with
infrared light in addition to the normal
headlamps.
A camera at the top of the windshield measures the infrared light and shows a
black-and-white image on the multifunction display.
420
1 Night View Assist camera
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Switching on or off
You can only switch on the Night View Assist if
앫
the SmartKey in the starter switch is
set to position 2
앫
it is dark
앫
the light switch is set to * or B
or if the daytime driving lamps are
switched on
앫
the automatic transmission is not in
position R
왘
Press button 1.
The Night View Assist image appears
on the multifunction display.
i The infrared headlamps only come on above
a speed of approx. 9 mph (15 km/h). Therefore,
when you are at a standstill, you do not have a
complete view and cannot check the function of
the Night View Assist.
Image on multifunction display
When you switch on Night View Assist, the
image for the speed gauge changes on the
multifunction display. The speed gauge is
shown as a bar on the lower edge of the
multifunction display. The line for main
menus is no longer available. If you would
like to change a setting using the steering
wheel buttons, you must first switch off
Night View Assist.
1 Night View Assist image
2 Speedometer display
i If you change the brightness of the instrument cluster while Night View Assist is switched
on, only the brightness of the multifunction display is changed.
1 Night View Assist on or off
421
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Removing condensation
Dirty or fogged-up windshield
왘
If the windshield in front of the camera is
fogged up on the inside or outside or if it is
dirty, the Night View Assist image is diminished.
Warning!
G
Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
attention to the road must always be
his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, stop before trying to remove window fogging or
cleaning the window in front of the Night
View Assist camera.
왘
Fold camera cover downward using recessed handles 1.
왘
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
Check settings of automatic climate
control and change them, if necessary
(컄 page 424).
Once the image is no longer impaired:
422
Cleaning inside of windshield
1 Recessed handles on camera cover
왘
Fold camera cover back up using recessed handles 1.
Clean inside of windshield in front of
camera (컄 page 539).
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Night View Assist* malfunction
Problem
Possible cause
The quality of the Night View Assist image The windshield wipers are leaving streaks
has diminished.
on the windshield.
Suggested solution
왘
Replace windshield wiper blades
(컄 page 627).
The area of the windshield within the cam- 왘 Clean windshield (컄 page 539).
era’s field of view is dirty.
The area of the windshield within the cam- 왘 Replace windshield.
era’s field of view has been damaged.
The area of the windshield within the cam- 왘 Remove condensation (컄 page 539).
era’s field of view is fogged over.
The area of the windshield within the cam- 왘 Defrost windshield (컄 page 429).
era’s field of view is iced over.
423
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
424
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Item
1 Left side air vent, adjustable
2 Left side defroster vent, fixed
3 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for left air vent
4 Left center air vent, adjustable
5 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for left center air vent
6 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right center air vent
7 Right center air vent, adjustable
8 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right air vent
i For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders
for the center air vents 4 and 7 to the middle
position.
Warning!
G
When operating the automatic climate control, the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents can be very
hot or very cold (depending on the set temperature). This may cause burns or frostbite
to unprotected skin in the immediate area of
the air vents.
Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the air
vents. If necessary, use the air distribution
adjustment (컄 page 230) to direct the air to
air vents in the vehicle interior that are not
in the immediate area of unprotected skin.
9 Right side defroster vent, fixed
a Right side air vent, adjustable
b Climate control panel
425
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Automatic climate control panel, front
Item
Item
Item
1 AUTO mode for air distribution and
volume, left
5 Air recirculation
9 Manual fan speed adjustment, right
6 Automatic climate control on/off
a Temperature control, right
2 Temperature control, left
3 Manual fan speed adjustment, left
7 Residual engine heat and ventilation
(REST)
b AUTO mode for air distribution and
volume, right
4 Front defroster
8 Rear window defroster
426
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
i If you have the air distribution and air volume automatically controlled, you can adjust the
temperature, footwell temperature and air flow.
The following basic settings are recommended:
앫
Automatic air distribution control
(컄 page 428)
앫
Temperature: 72°F (22°C) (컄 page 429)
앫
Footwell temperature: 0 (컄 page 232)
앫
Air flow: focused (컄 page 233)
The automatic climate control is operational whenever the engine is running. You can
operate the climate control system in either the automatic or manual mode. The
system cools or heats the interior depending on the selected interior temperature
and the current outside temperature.
It can only function optimally when you are
driving with the windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof/panorama sunroof* closed.
It is possible to completely deactivate the
climate control system (컄 page 428).
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and
odors are filtered out before outside air enters the passenger compartment through
the air distribution system.
Warning!
G
Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on the following pages
and in the “COMAND automatic climate
control” section (컄 page 229). Otherwise
the windows could fog up, impairing visibility and endangering you and others.
i Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)
may require replacement of the filter before its
scheduled interval. A clogged filter will reduce
the air volume to the interior.
Do not obstruct air volume by placing objects on
the air volume-through exhaust slots below the
rear window.
The following automatic climate control
functions can be operated via COMAND:
Function
Page
Temperature
230
Air distribution
230
Air volume
230
Switching off cooling (“AC ”)
231
Central climate control (“Mono”)
232
Footwell temperature
232
Air flow from air vents
233
Rear climate control*
234
OFF
If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the interior
before driving off, see “Summer opening feature” (컄 page 355). The automatic climate control will then adjust the interior temperature to
the set value much faster.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the windshield free of snow, leaves, sticks, and any other
debris.
427
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Deactivating climate control system
왘
Deactivating: Press button ´
(컄 page 426) up or down.
i When operating the climate control system
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
in automatic mode, you will only rarely need to
adjust the temperature, air volume and air distribution.
Warning!
G
When the automatic climate control is
switched off, the outside air supply and circulation are also switched off. Only choose
this setting for a short time. Otherwise the
windows could fog up, impairing visibility
and endangering you and others.
왘
Operating climate control system in automatic mode
Reactivating: Press button ´
(컄 page 426) up or down.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
428
Deactivating
왘
Press button U (컄 page 426) up or
down.
or
왘
Adjust air distribution (컄 page 230).
or
Activating
왘
Press button U (컄 page 426) up or
down.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
왘
Adjust air volume (컄 page 429).
The indicator lamp on button U
goes out. The automatic function is
switched off.
You can adjust the air distribution
(컄 page 230) or air volume
(컄 page 429) manually.
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Setting temperature
Adjusting air volume
Use temperature controls %$
2 and a (컄 page 426) in the center console or COMAND (컄 page 230) to separately adjust the air temperature on each
side of the passenger compartment. You
should raise or lower the temperature setting in small increments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C). The automatic climate
control will adjust to the set temperature
as fast as possible.
Use buttons Q (컄 page 426) in the center console or COMAND to separately adjust the air volume on each side of the
passenger compartment.
왘
Press temperature control %$
2 and/or a (컄 page 426) upward or
downward.
The climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature.
i When you change the air volume, the automatic function of the climate control system is
switched off.
왘
Activating
왘
Press button ; (컄 page 426) up or
down.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
The air conditioning switches to the following functions automatically:
앫
increased blowing and heating power
Press button Q up to increase or
down to decrease air volume.
앫
air flows onto the windshield and the
front side windows
The indicator lamps on buttons U
(컄 page 426) goes out.
앫
the air conditioning compressor
switches on at outside temperatures
above approximately 41°F (5°C) for
dehumidifying the air
앫
the air recirculation mode is switched
off
Front defroster
You can use this setting to defrost the
windshield, for example if it is iced up. You
can also defog the windshield and the side
windows.
i Keep this setting selected only until the
windshield is clear again.
429
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Deactivating
왘
왘
Press button ; (컄 page 426) up or
down.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
The previous settings are once again in
effect, except air recirculation mode
stays off.
Windshield fogged on the outside
왘
Switch the windshield wipers on
(컄 page 351).
왘
Press button U (컄 page 426) up or
down.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Press button < (컄 page 426) up or
down.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
! The rear window defroster uses a large
amount of power. To keep battery drain to a minimum, switch off the defroster as soon as the
rear window is clear.
Deactivating
왘
Press button < (컄 page 426) up or
down.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
i The defroster is automatically deactivated
after some time of operation depending on the
outside temperature.
Rear window defroster
Warning!
Activating
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
430
G
Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
removed from the rear window before driving. Visibility could otherwise be impaired,
endangering you and others.
i If the rear window defroster switches off too
soon and the indicator lamp goes out, this indicates that too many electrical consumers are operating simultaneously and the load on the
battery is reducing available voltage. The system
responds automatically by deactivating the rear
window defroster.
Maximum cooling MAXCOOL (USA only)
If U is selected on both the left and
right side and there is a high demand for
cooling, the display “MAXCOOL” appears
in the COMAND display.
This provides the fastest possible cooling
of the vehicle interior (when windows and
tilt/sliding sunroof or tilt/sliding panel*
are closed).
i Maximum cooling MAXCOOL is only available when the engine is running.
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
i The air recirculation mode is activated auto- Air recirculation mode with conve-
Air recirculation mode
matically at high outside temperatures.
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside (e.g. before driving in a
tunnel). This setting cuts off the intake of
outside air and recirculates the air in the
passenger compartment.
Warning!
G
Fogged windows impair visibility, endangering you and others. If the windows begin to
fog on the inside, switching off the air
recirculation mode immediately should clear
interior window fogging. If interior window
fogging persists, make sure the air
conditioning (컄 page 231) is activated, or
press button ;.
왘
Activating: Press button ,
(컄 page 426) up or down.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
The indicator lamp on button , is not lit when
the air recirculation mode is automatically activated.
A quantity of outside air is added when the cooling demand is not at maximum.
If the air conditioning has been turned off
(컄 page 231) or the outside temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the air recirculation mode will
not switch on automatically.
왘
Deactivating: Press button ,
(컄 page 426) up or down.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
i The manually selected air recirculation
mode is deactivated automatically:
앫
after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is
below approximately 41°F (5°C)
앫
after 5 minutes if the air conditioning is
turned off
앫
after 30 minutes if the outside temperature
is above approximately 41°F (5°C)
nience closing or opening feature
Warning!
G
Never operate the side windows and the
tilt/sliding sunroof or tilt/sliding panel* if
there is the possibility of anyone being
harmed by the closing procedure.
Vehicles with tilt/sliding sunroof:
In the event that the procedure causes potential danger, the closing of the side windows can be immediately halted by pressing
the respective window switch. The closing of
the tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately
halted by moving the tilt/sliding sunroof
switch in the overhead control panel in any
direction.
Vehicles with panorama roof*:
In the event that the procedure causes potential danger, the closing of the side windows or the tilt/sliding panel can be
immediately halted by releasing
button ,.
431
컄컄
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
컄컄
The closing of the side windows and the
tilt/sliding sunroof or tilt/sliding panel* can
be reversed by again pressing and holding
button ,.
Vehicles with tilt/sliding sunroof
왘
Convenience closing: Press
button , for approximately
2 seconds.
The side windows and/or tilt/sliding
sunroof will close. You can release
button , once the closing procedure has begun. The windows and
tilt/sliding sunroof continue closing
until they are fully closed. The indicator
lamp on the button comes on. The air
recirculation mode is activated.
왘
Convenience opening: Press
button , for approximately
2 seconds.
The side windows and/or tilt/sliding
sunroof will return to their previous position. You can release button ,
once the opening procedure has begun. The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof continue opening until they have
reached their previous positions. The
indicator lamp on the button goes out.
The air recirculation mode is deactivated.
Vehicles with panorama roof*
왘
Convenience closing: Press and hold
button , until the side windows and
the tilt/sliding panel are closed or have
reached the desired position. The indicator lamp on the button comes on.
The air recirculation mode is activated.
왘
Convenience opening: Press and hold
button , until the side windows and
the tilt/sliding panel are opened or
have reached the desired position.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. The air recirculation mode is deactivated.
i A window or tilt/sliding sunroof (or tilt/sliding panel*) will only return to its previous position if it has not been moved to another position
using the respective window switch or tilt/sliding sunroof (or tilt/sliding panel*) switch after it
was closed with button ,.
A window or tilt/sliding sunroof (or tilt/sliding
panel*) that has been moved will remain in its
current position if button , is used to reopen
the remaining windows or tilt/sliding sunroof (or
tilt/sliding panel*).
432
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Residual engine heat and ventilation
With the engine switched off, it is possible
to continue to heat or ventilate the interior.
This feature makes use of the residual heat
produced by the engine.
i If you switch on the residual heat function
when outside temperatures are high, only the
ventilation will be switched on.
i Regardless of the selected air volume, the
blower operates at low speed when heating. In
case of ventilation the blower operates at higher
speed.
Activating
왘
Switch off the ignition (컄 page 315).
왘
Press button T (컄 page 426) up or
down.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
왘
Opening/closing the air vents:
Turn thumbwheels 3, 5, 6 and 8
(컄 page 425).
Deactivating
왘
Press button T (컄 page 426) up or
down.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
i How long the system will provide heating depends on
i The residual heat is automatically turned off:
앫
the coolant temperature
앫
when the ignition is switched on
the temperature set by the operator
앫
after approximately 30 minutes
앫
if the battery voltage drops
앫
if the coolant temperature is too low
앫
Front passenger compartment adjustable air vents
433
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Rear passenger compartment adjustable air vents
Rear center console air vents
i Vehicles without rear passenger compartment climate control*:
The temperature at the air vents for rear passenger compartment 1 and 2 will be approximately the same as at the dashboard center air
vents.
Rear passenger compartment climate
control*
Warning!
G
Automatic climate control panel, rear
Item
1 Left center air vent, adjustable
2 Right center air vent, adjustable
3 Thumbwheel for right center air vents
4 Thumbwheel for left center air vents
왘
Opening/closing air vents:
Turn thumbwheel 3 or 4.
434
Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling as given in the instructions
for the front climate control (컄 page 424).
Otherwise the windows could fog up, impairing visibility for the driver and endangering
you and others.
i At low outside temperatures or if you have
switched off the cooling function, you cannot
cool the rear passenger compartment.
1 Temperature control, left
2 Air distribution, left
(automatic, manual)
3 Air volume (automatic, manual)
4 Mode selector
5 Air distribution, right
(automatic, manual)
6 Temperature control, right
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
i If the climate control system in the rear passenger compartment is adjusted using COMAND
(컄 page 234), the ) symbol appears in the
display of the rear control unit. The rear climate
control system can no longer be adjusted using
the rear control unit.
왘
왘
Switching on automatic mode: Press
button 4 (컄 page 434) up or down repeatedly until “AUTO” mode is selected
in display.
Switching off rear climate control:
Press button 4 (컄 page 434) up or
down repeatedly until “OFF” mode is
selected in display.
왘
Switching off automatic mode: Press
button 4 (컄 page 434) up or down repeatedly until “MAN” mode is selected
in display.
왘
Setting temperature: Use temperature controls 1 and 6 (컄 page 434)
to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the rear passenger
compartment.
왘
Increasing/decreasing: Press
temperature control 1 or 6 up or
down.
The climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air
temperature.
왘
Adjusting air distribution: Press button 2 or 5 (컄 page 434) up or down
repeatedly until desired air distribution
is set.
The direction of the arrows represent
the air distribution. “MAN” appears in
the display over the button for the function mode.
왘
Adjusting air volume Press air volume
control 3 (컄 page 434) up or down.
The air volume is increased or decreased. “MAN” appears in the display
over the button for the function mode.
435
Controls in detail
Trunk
Warning!
G
Opening trunk from outside
Opening trunk from inside
You can open the trunk from the inside if
the vehicle is stationary.
Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as blocked visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior.
Vehicles without trunk opening/closing
system*
Opening trunk
A minimum height clearance of 5.9 ft.
(1.80 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
! The trunk lid swings open upwards automat- 1 Trunk lid handle
ically. Always make sure that there is sufficient
overhead clearance.
In vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*: The vehicle must be unlocked.
왘
Pull on handle 1.
or
왘
1 Remote trunk opening switch
Press and hold button Š on the
SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* until trunk unlocks and
begins to open.
! Vehicles with trunk opening/closing system*: To stop the opening procedure, press
button Š on the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*.
436
왘
Press switch 1 until the trunk begins
to open.
The trunk opens. The indicator lamp in
switch 1 comes on and remains lit until the trunk closed.
Controls in detail
Trunk
Vehicles with trunk opening/closing
system*
Trunk opening-height restriction*
Vehicles with trunk opening/closing system*:
The trunk lid opening height can be limited
when transporting goods on a roof rack
(e.g. presence of an optional MB sport luggage container). When activated, the trunk
opens to approximately the height of the
roof edge.
왘
1 Remote trunk opening/closing* switch
왘
Press and hold switch 1 until the
trunk is opened.
The indicator lamp in switch 1 comes
on and remains lit until the trunk
closed.
To interrupt the closing procedure:
왘
Release switch 1.
The vehicle is only locked when the turn signals
flash three times. If you are carrying a second
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you, you can
still lock the vehicle.
Closing trunk from outside manually
Activate the limiting opening height of
trunk lid using the COMAND system
(컄 page 227).
Closing trunk
i Do not place the SmartKey in the open
trunk. You may lock yourself out.
i If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked, the trunk will lock automatically after
closing it. All turn signal lamps flash three times
to confirm locking.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the trunk will open automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
recognized inside the vehicle or in the trunk.
1 Handles
왘
Lower trunk lid by pulling firmly on
handles 1.
왘
Close trunk lid with hands placed flat
on trunk lid.
The power closing assist automatically ensures that the lid is pulled closed completely (컄 page 313).
437
Controls in detail
Trunk
G
procedure carefully to make sure no one is
in danger of being injured.
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the trunk
lid opening when closing the trunk. Be especially careful when small children are
around.
To interrupt the closing procedure, release
the door mounted remote trunk opening/closing* switch again.
Warning!
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
Closing trunk from inside
automatically*
Warning!
G
Maintain sight of trunk area while operating
door mounted switch. Monitor the closing
438
Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* removed from the starter
switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
removed from the vehicle, the remote trunk
opening/closing* switch can be operated.
Therefore, do not leave children unattended
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
In vehicles with trunk opening/closing system* you can close the trunk from the inside using the remote trunk opening/
closing* switch.
1 Remote trunk opening/closing* switch
(vehicles with trunk opening/closing
system*)
왘
Press and hold switch 1 until the
trunk is closed.
The indicator lamp in the switch goes
out when the trunk is closed.
To interrupt the closing procedure:
왘
Release switch 1.
i If the trunk lid comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has been
piled too high) in the upper motion sequence, the
closing procedure is stopped and the trunk reopens slightly.
Controls in detail
Trunk
Closing trunk from outside
automatically*
Warning!
G
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
make sure no one is in danger of being injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from
the trunk lid opening when closing the trunk.
Be especially careful when small children
are around. To stop the closing procedure,
do one of the following:
앫
press button Š on the SmartKey
앫
press the trunk opening/closing*
switch (on the driver’s door)
앫
press trunk closing switch
앫
press the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing
switch*
Even with the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch, the trunk opening/closing*
switch can be operated. Therefore, do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
In vehicles with trunk opening/closing system* you can close the trunk separately
from the outside using the trunk closing
switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*
1 Trunk closing switch
왘
Press trunk closing switch 1 briefly.
The trunk closes.
i If the trunk lid comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has been
piled too high) in the upper motion sequence, the
closing procedure is stopped and the trunk reopens slightly.
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*
1 Trunk closing switch
439
Controls in detail
Trunk
Closing trunk and locking vehicle from
outside (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*)
In vehicles with trunk opening/closing system* and KEYLESS-GO*, you can close the
trunk and lock the vehicle simultaneously
from the outside using the KEYLESS-GO
locking/closing switch.
With the hood and all doors closed, all
turn signal lamps flash three times to
confirm locking. The locking knobs in
the doors move down. The anti-theft
alarm system is activated.
i If the trunk lid comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has been
piled too high) in the upper motion sequence, the
closing procedure is stopped and the trunk reopens slightly.
왘
The trunk opens.
i The emergency release button unlocks and
opens the trunk while the vehicle is standing still
or in motion.
Illumination of the emergency release button:
앫
The button will flash for 30 minutes after opening the trunk.
앫
The button will flash for 60 minutes after closing the trunk.
Trunk emergency release
With the emergency release button, the
trunk can be opened from inside the trunk.
1 KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch
왘
Make sure you have the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO with you.
왘
Press switch 1 briefly.
The vehicle is locked and the trunk
closes automatically.
1 Emergency release button
440
Briefly press emergency release
button 1.
i The emergency release button does not
open the trunk if the vehicle battery is discharged or disconnected.
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
왔 Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Opening and closing power tilt/sliding
sunroof
Warning!
G
When closing the tilt/sliding sunroof, make
sure that there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the closing procedure.
If the tilt/sliding sunroof encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you are closing the tilt/sliding
sunroof by moving the tilt/sliding sunroof
switch past the resistance point, or by
pressing and holding button ‹ on the
SmartKey, by pressing and holding the sensor surface (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*) on
the outside door handle, the automatic reversal function will not operate.
The opening/closing procedure of the
tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or, if the switch
was moved past the resistance point and released, by moving the switch in any direction.
The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass.
In the event of an accident, the glass may
shatter. This may result in an opening in the
roof.
In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing
their seat belts or not wearing them properly
may be thrown out of the opening. Such an
opening also presents a potential for injury
for occupants wearing their seat belts
properly as entire body parts or portions of
them may protrude from the passenger
compartment.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
! To avoid damaging the seals, do not trans-
Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if there is
snow or ice on the roof, as this could result in
malfunctions.
The tilt/sliding sunroof can be opened or closed
manually should an electrical malfunction occur
(컄 page 617).
i When the tilt/sliding sunroof is open, resonance noises may result in addition to the usual
wind noises. They are caused by minimal pressure changes in the passenger compartment. To
reduce or eliminate these noises, change the position of the tilt/sliding sunroof or open a side
window slightly.
i You can also open or close the tilt/sliding
sunroof using the SmartKey, see “Summer opening feature” (컄 page 355) and “Convenience
closing feature” (컄 page 356). Depending on
current position, the tilt/sliding sunroof may
also open or close when the air recirculation
button , (컄 page 426) is pressed and held
for 2 seconds.
i If PRE-SAFE® has been activated, the
tilt/sliding sunroof closes automatically until
only a small gap remains.
port any objects with sharp edges which can
stick out of the tilt/sliding sunroof.
441
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
i With the SmartKey in starter switch
왘
position 0 or removed from the starter switch,
the tilt/sliding sunroof can be operated
앫
until you open the driver’s or passenger door
앫
for up to approximately 5 minutes
왘
To open, close, raise or lower, move the
switch to resistance point in the required direction 1 to 4 until the
tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the desired position.
Express-operation: To open, close,
raise or lower, move the switch past
the resistance point in the required
direction 1 to 4 and release.
앫
if the tilt/sliding sunroof can only be
opened with a jerking motion
앫
after a malfunction
! Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof completely if it is not aligned. Otherwise you could
damage the tilt/sliding sunroof.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
왘
Press and hold the sunroof switch in
the direction of arrow 3 until the
tilt/sliding sunroof is fully raised at the
rear.
The tilt/sliding sunroof opens or closes
completely.
왘
1 Push back to slide sunroof open
2 Push forward to slide sunroof closed
3 Push up to raise sunroof at rear
4 Pull down to lower sunroof at rear
With the sunroof closed or tilted open, a
screen can be slid into the roof opening to
help provide shade. When sliding the sunroof open, the screen will also retract.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
442
Stopping during Express-opening/
closing: Move the switch in any direction.
i If the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof is
blocked during the closing procedure, the sunroof will stop and reopen slightly.
Synchronizing
The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized
앫
after the tilt/sliding sunroof has been
closed manually (컄 page 617)
Keep holding the sunroof switch in the
direction of arrow 3 for approximately
1 second.
왘
Check the Express-operation feature
(컄 page 442).
If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens completely, the sunroof is synchronized.
Otherwise repeat the above steps.
Controls in detail
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel*
왔 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel*
Roller sunblinds
Operating front roller sunblind
The roller sunblinds are designed to protect you from excessive sunlight streaming
in through the panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel.
왘
Stopping during Express-extending:
Move the roof panel switch in any direction.
Operating rear roller sunblind from
front
The front roller sunblind only operates with
the tilt/sliding panel closed. The front and
rear roller sunblind cannot be operated individually.
Warning!
G
When extending/retracting the roller sunblinds, make sure that no one is in danger of
being injured by the closing procedure. The
extending/retracting of the roller sunblinds
can be immediately halted by releasing the
switch or, if the switch was pressed past the
resistance point and released, by pressing
the switch in any direction.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
Roof panel switch
1 Extend front roller sunblind
2 Retract front roller sunblind
왘
왘
Extending or retracting: Move the
roof panel switch to the resistance
point in the required direction of
arrow 1 or 2 until the front roller
sunblind has reached the desired position.
Express-extending: Move the roof
panel switch past the resistance point
in direction of arrow 1 and release.
1 Extending and retracting
왘
Extending or retracting: Press
button 1 until the rear roller sunblind
has reached the desired position.
i To change directions, you must first extend
or retract the rear roller sunblind completely.
The front roller sunblind extends completely.
443
Controls in detail
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel*
Operating rear roller sunblind from rear
Opening and closing panorama roof
with power tilt/sliding panel
Warning!
G
When opening or closing the tilt/sliding panel, make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing
procedure.
Rear door control panel
1 Retracting
2 Extending
왘
왘
Extending: Press button 2 on the
rocker switch until the rear roller sunblind has reached the desired position.
Retracting: Press button 1 on the
rocker switch until the rear roller sunblind has reached the desired position.
The opening procedure of the tilt/sliding
panel can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or, if the switch was moved
past the resistance point and released, by
moving the switch in any direction.
The closing procedure of the tilt/sliding
panel can be immediately halted by releasing the switch.
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel is made out of glass. In the event of an
accident, the glass may shatter. This may result in an opening in the roof.
In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing
their seat belts or not wearing them properly
may be thrown out of the opening.
444
Such an opening also presents a potential
for injury for occupants wearing their seat
belts properly as entire body parts or portions of them may protrude from the passenger compartment.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment can cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
! To avoid damaging the seals, do not transport any objects with sharp edges which can
stick out of the tilt/sliding panel.
Do not open the tilt/sliding panel if there is snow
or ice on the roof, as this could result in malfunctions.
The tilt/sliding panel can be opened or closed
manually should an electrical malfunction occur
(컄 page 617).
Controls in detail
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel*
i When the panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel is open, resonance noises may
result in addition to the usual wind noises. They
are caused by minimal pressure changes in the
passenger compartment. To reduce or eliminate
these noises, change the position of the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel or open a
side window slightly.
i You can also open or close the tilt/sliding
panel using the SmartKey, see “Summer opening feature” (컄 page 355) and “Convenience
closing feature” (컄 page 356).
Depending on current position, the tilt/sliding
panel may also open or close when the air recirculation button , in the control panel of the
climate control (컄 page 424), is pressed and
held for 2 seconds.
The tilt/sliding panel only operates with
the roller sunblinds extended.
i If the front roller sunblind is retracted while
being raised, it will extend first.
왘
Express-opening: Move the roof panel
switch past the resistance point in direction of arrow 1 and release.
The tilt/sliding panel opens
completely.
왘
Roof panel switch
1 Push back to slide roof panel open
2 Push forward to slide roof panel closed
3 Push up to raise roof panel
4 Pull down to lower roof panel
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
왘
To open, close, raise, or lower the
tilt/sliding panel, move the roof panel
switch to resistance point in the required direction of arrows 1 to 4.
Express-raising: Move the roof panel
switch past the resistance point in direction of arrow 3 and release.
The tilt/sliding panel raises
completely.
왘
Stopping during Express-operation:
Move the roof panel switch in any direction.
i You cannot automatically close and lower
the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel.
Release the roof panel switch when the
tilt/sliding panel has reached the desired position.
445
Controls in detail
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel*
Synchronizing
The tilt/sliding panel and front roller sunblinds must be synchronized
Move and hold the roof panel switch in
direction of arrow 2 until the front
roller sunblind is fully retracted.
왘
Keep holding the roof panel switch in
direction of arrow 2 for approximately
1 second.
after a malfunction
왘
if the panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel can only be opened
with a jerking motion
Move and hold the roof panel switch in
direction of arrow 1 until the front
roller sunblind is fully extended.
왘
Move and hold the roof panel switch in
direction of arrow 1 until the tilt/sliding panel is slightly opened.
앫
after the tilt/sliding panel has been
closed manually (컄 page 617)
앫
앫
Tilt/sliding panel and front roller sunblind
왘
왘
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
Move and hold the roof panel switch in
direction of arrow 2 until the tilt/sliding panel is fully closed.
왘
Keep holding the roof panel switch in
direction of arrow 2 for approximately
1 second.
왘
Check the Express-open feature of the
tilt/sliding panel (컄 page 445).
If the tilt/sliding panel opens completely, the roof is synchronized. Otherwise repeat the above steps.
446
Rear roller sunblind
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
왘
Press button 1 until the rear roller
sunblind is fully retracted.
왘
Keep holding button 1 for approximately 1 second.
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
왔 Loading and storing
! Load the roof rack in such a way that the vehicle cannot be damaged while driving.
Roof rack*
Warning!
G
Only use roof racks approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model to
avoid damage to the vehicle.
Make sure
앫
you can fully raise tilt/sliding sunroof or the
panorama roof with tilt/sliding panel*
앫
you can fully open the trunk
Follow the manufacturer’s installation
instructions. Otherwise, an improperly
attached roof rack system or its load could
become detached from the vehicle.
The total load weight including vehicle occupants and luggage/cargo should not exceed the load limit or vehicle capacity
weight as indicated on the corresponding
placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar
(컄 page 503).
Warning!
G
Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible using cargo tie-down hooks
and fastening materials appropriate for the
weight and size of the load.
Do not exceed the maximum roof load of
220 lb (100 kg).
Take into consideration that when the roof
rack is loaded, the handling characteristics
are different from those when operating the
vehicles without the roof rack loaded.
Loading instructions
왘
Flip the covers upward.
왘
Only attach the roof-rack system to the
anchorage points under the covers.
Observe manufacturer’s instructions
for installation.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle and can cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items
are securely fastened in the vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when transporting cargo. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible.
컄컄
447
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
컄컄
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
seat backs. Do not place anything on the
rear-window shelf.
Never drive vehicle with trunk open. Deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness
and death.
Storage compartments
Warning!
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
앫
braking
앫
vehicle maneuvers or
앫
an accident.
Storage compartments in the front passenger compartment
Glove box
왘
Opening: Press glove box lid
release 1.
왘
Closing: Push the lid up.
왘
Locking: Insert the mechanical key
into the glove box lock and turn it
clockwise to position 3.
왘
Unlocking: Insert the mechanical key
into the glove box lock and turn it counterclockwise to position 2.
Storage compartments in the front armrest
G
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when storing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not
pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat
backs.
Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy objects.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
to prevent stored objects from being thrown
448
1 Glove box lid release
2 Unlocking glove box
3 Locking glove box
The glove box can be unlocked and locked
with the mechanical key (컄 page 614).
1 Storage tray/telephone compartment
2 Storage compartment (not with rear
climate control system*)
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
왘
Opening storage tray/telephone
compartment: Press button 1 and
swing armrest to left or right side.
왘
Opening storage compartment:
Press button 2 and swing center armrest upward.
Eyeglasses compartment
braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could
be injury to vehicle occupants.
The parcel net cannot protect transported
goods in the event of an accident.
A small convenience parcel net is located
in the front passenger footwell. It is for
small and light items, such as road maps,
mail, etc.
Storage compartments below the front
seats
왘
Opening: Press mark 1.
왘
Closing: Swing eyeglasses compartment upward until it engages.
Parcel net in front passenger footwell
Warning!
왘
Opening: Pull tab 1 upward and fold
cover 2 forward.
G
The parcel net is intended for storing
light-weight items only.
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or
fragile objects may not be transported in the
parcel net. In an accident, during hard
449
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
Storage compartment between rear
seats
Storage compartments in rear passenger compartment
Armrest with integrated storage compartment
! Before storing the armrest in the backrest,
close the storage compartment cover.
! Do not sit on or lean your body weight
against the armrest when it is folded down, as
you could otherwise damage it.
Vehicles with control panel* in rear armrest
왘
Opening: Press button 1 and swing
the cover upward.
Vehicles without rear center seat*
왘
Vehicles without control panel* in rear armrest
왘
Opening: Pull release catch 1 and
swing the cover upward.
450
Opening: Pull handle 1 backward in
direction of arrow.
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
Rear storage box
Ruffled storage pockets
Warning!
! Do not sit on or lean your body weight
against the armrest when it is folded down, as
you could otherwise damage it.
G
Do not place objects with a combined
weight of more than 4.4 lbs (2 kg) into the
ruffled storage pocket. Otherwise, the Occupant Classification System OCS (컄 page 50)
may not be able to properly approximate the
occupant weight category.
i When the rear seats are in their basic position, you can open the cover more easily.
The ruffled storage pocket is intended for
storing light-weight items only.
Ruffled storage pockets 1 are located on
the back of the front seats.
왘
Opening: Fold down rear center armrest and swing down cover 1.
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or
fragile objects may not be transported in the
ruffled storage pocket. In an accident, during hard braking, or sudden maneuvers, they
could be thrown around inside the vehicle
and cause injury to vehicle occupants.
The ruffled storage pocket cannot protect
transported goods in the event of an accident.
451
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
Cup holders
Warning!
G
In order to help prevent spilling liquids on
vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equipment, only use containers that fit into the
cup holder. Use lids on open containers and
do not fill containers to a height where the
contents, especially hot liquids, could spill
during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an
accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occupants may cause serious personal injury.
Liquids spilled on vehicle equipment may
cause damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
When not in use, keep the cup holders
closed. An open cup holder may cause injury
to you or others when contacted during
braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident.
Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup
holder may come loose during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be
thrown around in the vehicle interior.
Objects thrown around in the vehicle interior may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
i You can remove the cup holder to clean it.
Only clean it using clear, lukewarm water.
왘
Removing: Pull cup holder out by pulling silver handle 2 upward in direction
of arrow.
왘
Inserting: Press downward until it engages. While doing so, make sure that
the word “Front” is in the proper installation position.
Cup holder in front center console
Cup holder in rear
1 Mark
2 Handle
왘
Opening: Press mark 1 on the front.
왘
Closing: Fold cover in until it engages.
Vehicles without control panel* in rear armrest
1 Compartment for cup holder
왘
452
Opening: Press mark 1 on the front.
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
Cargo tie-down hooks
Vehicles with control panel* in rear armrest
1 Compartment for cup holder
왘
1 Trunk floor
2 Storage spaces
4 hooks are located in the trunk.
왘
Opening: Press front of cup holder 1.
Trunk
Carefully secure cargo by applying
even load on all hooks with rope of sufficient strength to hold down the cargo.
Storage spaces under trunk floor
You can fold back the front and rear parts
of the trunk floor.
1 Storage space
2 Trunk floor
453
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
Retaining hooks
Retainer for Operator’s Manual pouch
Two hooks are located on the upper edge
of the trunk and can be used to attach cargo items such as bags.
Use Velcro strap 1 to fasten Operator’s
Manual pouch 2 in place.
왘
Pull tab 1 of retaining hook 2 down.
! Do not use the retaining hooks to tie down
You can attach an umbrella to the trunk lid.
Warning!
G
Parcel net in trunk
Do not pull on the umbrella holder when you
are closing the trunk lid. You could otherwise injure yourself on the trunk lid.
i You can purchase a suitable umbrella at any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
454
왘
Swing down holder 1 in direction of
arrow.
왘
Take umbrella 2 out of holder 1.
Umbrella holder
cargo.
There is a pocket net on each side of the
right and left trunk side walls to secure
loads.
1 Umbrella holder
2 Umbrella
Controls in detail
Useful features
왔 Useful features
Glare from front
Sun visors
왘
Warning!
G
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visors
closed while vehicle is in motion. Reflected
glare can endanger you and others.
Vanity mirror in rear
Swing sun visor 1 down.
Glare from front and sides
! Close vanity mirror cover 2 (if open) before
you disengage sun visor 1 from the mounting
and pivot it to the side.
왘
Disengage sun visor 1 from the
mounting.
왘
Pivot sun visor 1 to the side.
왘
Vanity mirror in sun visor
왘
The vanity mirror swings down in the direction of the arrow.
To use vanity mirror, lift up cover 2.
Vanity mirror lamp 3 comes on.
i If you disengage sun visor 1 from the
Opening: Press mark 1.
왘
Closing: Swing vanity mirror up until it
engages.
mounting, vanity mirror lamp 2 will switch off.
1 Sun visor
2 Vanity mirror cover
3 Vanity mirror lamp
4 Document holder
Document holder
You can use the plastic tab of document
holder 4 to hold admission tickets, parking passes, or similar items in place.
455
Controls in detail
Useful features
Rear window sunshade
The switches are on the rear doors.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
Ashtrays
왘
Press upper part 1 of the rocker
switch briefly to extend the sunshade.
Center console ashtray
왘
Press lower part 2 of the rocker
switch briefly to retract the sunshade.
i Operating the rear window sunshade from
the rear is not possible if you activate the override switch (컄 page 67).
i If you operate the rear window sunshade via
1 Opening
2 Closing
You can also operate the rear window sunshade via COMAND (컄 page 227) or via
the favorite button (컄 page 216).
COMAND or via the favorite button, this takes
precedence over the rear window sunshade buttons on the rear doors.
Warning!
Remove ashtray only with vehicle standing
still. Set the parking brake to secure vehicle
from movement. Set automatic transmission to P. With the automatic transmission
set to P, turn off the engine.
i The rear window sunshade is switched off at
temperatures below -4°F (-20°C).
1 Button for disengaging ashtray
2 Cover plate
456
G
Controls in detail
Useful features
Opening ashtray
왘
Removing ashtray insert
Press mark on cover plate 2 forward.
Warning!
Removing ashtray insert
왘
Push sliding button 1 to the left.
왘
Make sure that any children traveling with
you do not injure themselves or start a fire
with the hot cigarette lighter.
Remove the insert from the ashtray
frame.
Reinstalling ashtray insert
Install the insert by pushing it back into
the frame until it engages.
1 Insert
왘
Briefly press mark on cover plate 2
forward.
Press the open cover outwards beyond
the stop.
Ashtray insert 1 pops out of the holder.
Closing ashtray
왘
왘
Remove insert by pulling it upward.
Reinstalling ashtray insert
Rear door ashtray
Opening ashtray
왘
Lift up the cover.
G
Never touch the heating element or sides of
the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the
knob only.
The ashtray is disengaged and slides
out a short way.
왘
Cigarette lighters
왘
Install the insert by pushing it back into
the frame until it engages.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
To avoid possible injury to children sitting in
the rear seat, activate the override switch
(컄 page 67). Activation of the override
switch deactivates the rear center console
lighter.
457
Controls in detail
Useful features
The lighter will pop out automatically
when hot.
Power outlet
The power outlet is located in the rear cen-
! The lighter socket can be used to accommo- ter console.
1 Center console cigarette lighter
date 12V DC electrical accessories (up to a maximum of 85 W) designed for use with the
standard “cigarette lighter” plug type. Keep in
mind, however, that connecting accessories to
the lighter socket (for example extensive connecting and disconnecting, or using plugs that do
not fit properly) can damage the lighter socket.
With the socket damaged, the lighter may no
longer be able to be placed in the heating
(pushed-in) position, or the lighter may pop out
too early with the lighter not hot enough.
To help avoid damaging the cigarette lighter
socket, we recommend connecting 12V DC electrical accessories designed for use with a standard “cigarette lighter” plug type to the 12V
power outlets (컄 page 458) in your vehicle
whenever possible.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
왘
Flip up cover 1 and insert electrical
plug (cigarette lighter type).
i Operation of the rear door lighters is only
1 Rear center console lighter
possible, if the override switch (컄 page 67) is deactivated.
i The power outlet can be used to
accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories
(e.g. air pump, auxiliary lamps) up to a maximum
of 180 W.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
i If the engine is off and the cigarette lighter is
왘
Push in cigarette lighter 1.
being used extensively, the vehicle battery may
become discharged.
If the engine is off and the outlet is being used
extensively, the vehicle battery may become discharged.
458
Controls in detail
Useful features
Telephone*
Warning!
Warning!
G
Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
attention to the road must always be
his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location
and stop before placing or taking a telephone call.
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
If you choose to use the telephone1 while
driving, please use the hands-free device
and only use the telephone when road,
weather and traffic conditions permit. Some
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
mobile telephone while driving a vehicle.
Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit, should only
be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
The external antenna must be approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information on the installation of an approved
external antenna. Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use
of an external antenna.
G
Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System)1 if road, weather
and traffic conditions permit.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
1
When the mobile phone is inserted in the
cradle, you can operate the telephone using the following devices:
앫
mobile phone keypad
앫
COMAND telephone keypad
(컄 page 115)
앫
buttons s and t on the steering
wheel (컄 page 249)
앫
Voice Control* (컄 page 262)
앫
Bluetooth headset (컄 page 217)
See also separate operating manual for instructions on how to use the mobile phone.
i Various mobile phone cradles can be installed in the cockpit. These mobile phone cradles can be obtained from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
The functions and services available to you while
using the mobile phone depend on your service
provider and the type of mobile phone you are
using.
Observe all legal requirements.
459
Controls in detail
Useful features
The mobile phone is linked to the
hands-free device and the multifunction steering wheel.
The cradle is located in the center armrest.
왘
Open telephone compartment
(컄 page 448).
The battery is charged depending on its
charge status and the position of the
SmartKey in the starter switch. The
charge procedure will be indicated in
the mobile phone’s display.
Inserting mobile phone in mobile phone
cradle
Once the mobile phone has been inserted
in the mobile phone cradle, calls can only
be made via the hands-free system* or
Bluetooth headset*.
Example illustration
! Do not try to remove the mobile phone along
with the cradle. You could otherwise damage the
mobile phone cradle.
1 Insert the mobile phone
2 Connector contact
3 Mobile phone cradle
왘
왘
Slide the lower end of the mobile phone
into connector contact 2 on
cradle 3.
왘
Push the top of the mobile phone in direction of arrow 1, until the lug on the
mobile phone release button engages.
If applicable, remove the cover for the
external antenna connection from the
back of the mobile phone and store it in
a safe place. Be sure to comply with the
mobile phone’s operating instructions,
as well.
The mobile phone is connected to the
network via the external antenna.
460
You can place or receive phone calls. You
can control other functions of the mobile
phone via the control system (컄 page 249)
or COMAND (컄 page 115).
i When you take the SmartKey or SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO* out of the starter switch, the
mobile phone remains switched on for approx.
10 minutes. If you place or receive a call during
this time, the mobile phone switches off 10 minutes after the call has been completed.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Removing mobile phone from mobile
phone cradle
Changing mobile phone cradle
If you require a different cradle for your
mobile phone, remove the present cradle
before installing a new one.
Removing an existing mobile phone cradle
왘
Press release button in direction of
arrow 1 and take mobile phone
cradle 3 out in direction of arrow 2.
Installing a different mobile phone cradle
Example illustration
1 Release catch for mobile phone
2 Mobile phone cradle
i When using a flip-style mobile phone, open
flip top before removing from the cradle while a
call is connected. Otherwise, the call will be disconnected.
왘
Press release catch in direction of
arrow 1 and take mobile phone out of
mobile phone cradle 2.
Example illustration
Example illustration
1 To release the mobile phone cradle
2 To remove the mobile phone cradle
3 Mobile phone cradle
1 Contact plate
2 Recesses
3 Mobile phone cradle
왘
Insert mobile phone cradle 3 into
recesses 2 of contact plate 1.
왘
Push mobile phone cradle 3 forward
until it engages.
461
Controls in detail
Useful features
Tele Aid
! The initial activation of the Tele Aid system
may only be performed by completing the subscriber agreement and placing an acquaintance
call using the Information button ¡. Failure
to complete either of these steps will result in a
system that is not activated.
If you have any questions regarding activation,
please call the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
The Tele Aid system is operational providing that the vehicle’s battery is charged,
properly connected, not damaged and mobile phone and GPS coverage are available.
i The Tele Aid system utilizes the mobile
phone network for communication and the GPS
(Global Positioning System) satellites for vehicle
location. If either of these signals are unavailable, the Tele Aid system may not function and if
this occurs, assistance must be summoned by
other means.
앫
automatic and manual emergency
The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can
be adjusted when using the volume control
on the multifunction steering wheel. To
raise, press button æ and to lower,
press button ç or use the COMAND
volume thumbwheel , on the lower
part of the front central console
(컄 page 89).
앫
roadside assistance, and
왘
앫
information
The Tele Aid system
(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand)
The Tele Aid system consists of three
types of response:
462
To activate, press the SOS button, the
Roadside Assistance button • or
the Information button ¡, depending on the type of response required.
i The SOS button is located above the interior
rear view mirror (컄 page 464).
The Roadside Assistance button • and the
Information button ¡ are located below the
center armrest cover (컄 page 465).
Shortly after the completion of your
Tele Aid acquaintance call, you will receive
a user ID and password. By visiting
www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid”
(USA only), you will have access to account
information, remote door unlock and
more.
System self-check
Initially, after switching on the ignition,
malfunctions are detected and indicated.
If a malfunction is detected, the indicator
lamps in the SOS button, the Roadside Assistance button • and the Information
button ¡ stay on longer than
10 seconds or do not come on. The message “Tele Aid not activated” or “Tele Aid
inoperative” appears in the multifunction
display.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Warning!
G
If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in
the Roadside Assistance button •
and/or in the Information button ¡ do
not come on during the system self-check,
or if any of these indicators remain illuminated continuously in red and/or the message
“Tele Aid not activated” or “Tele Aid inoperative” is displayed in the multifunction display
after the system self-check, a malfunction in
the system has been detected.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
above, the system may not operate as expected. Have the system checked at the
nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Emergency calls
An emergency call is initiated
automatically following an accident in
which the emergency tensioning devices
(ETDs) or air bags deploy.
An emergency call can also be initiated
manually by opening the cover next to the
interior rear view mirror labeled SOS, then
briefly pressing the button located under
the cover. For instructions on initiating an
emergency call manually (컄 page 464).
All information relevant to the emergency,
such as the location of the vehicle (determined by the GPS satellite location system), vehicle model, identification number
and color are generated.
Once the emergency call is in progress, the
indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin
to flash. The message:
gency Call Activated” is displayed, operation
from COMAND is not possible. The automatic climate control can be still adjusted using the
switches on the climate control panel.
앫
“Connecting call” appears in the multifunction display
앫
“Emergency Call Activated” appears in
the COMAND display
and the audio system is muted. When the
connection is established, the message:
앫
“Call connected” appears in the multifunction display
앫
“Emergency Call Activated” appears in
the COMAND display
i During the emergency call message “Emer-
A voice connection between the Response
Center and the occupants of the vehicle
will be established automatically soon after the emergency call has been initiated.
The Response Center will attempt to determine more precisely the nature of the accident provided they can speak to an
occupant of the vehicle.
i If no vehicle occupant responds, an ambulance will be sent to the vehicle immediately.
463
Controls in detail
Useful features
The Tele Aid system is available if
앫
The message:
it has been activated and is operational. Activation requires a subscription
for monitoring services, connection,
and cellular air time
앫
the relevant mobile phone and GPS
coverage are available and pass the information on to the Response Center
앫
there is sufficient voltage in the vehicle
batteries
Briefly press button on cover 2 to
open.
앫
“Call failed” appears in the multifunction
display for approximately 10 seconds
앫
A pop-up window with the message:
“Call could not be connected! Please dial
911 directly using the mobile telephone
keypad.” appears in the COMAND display. Confirm the message pressing n
(컄 page 82).
왘
Should this occur, assistance must be summoned by other means.
왘
Wait for a voice connection to the
Response Center.
왘
Close cover 2 after the emergency
call is concluded.
i Location of the vehicle on a map is only possible if the vehicle is able to receive signals from
the GPS satellite network and pass the information on to the Response Center.
왘
Initiating an emergency call manually
Cover 2 will open.
Press SOS button 1 (for longer than
2 seconds).
The indicator lamp in SOS button 1
will flash until the emergency call is
concluded.
Warning!
Warning!
G
If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is
flashing continuously and there was no
voice connection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system could
not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the relevant mobile phone network is not available).
464
1 SOS button
2 Cover
G
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, vehicle in a dangerous road location), please
do not wait for voice contact after you have
pressed the emergency button. Carefully
leave the vehicle and move to a safe location. The Response Center will automatically
contact local emergency officials with the
Controls in detail
Useful features
vehicle’s approximate location if they
receive an automatic SOS signal and cannot
make voice contact with the vehicle occupants.
Roadside Assistance button •
왘
Press and hold Roadside Assistance
button • (for longer than
2 seconds).
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher will be initiated.
The button will flash while the call is in
progress. The message:
Roadside Assistance button • and
Information button ¡
The Roadside Assistance button • and
the Information button ¡ are located in
the storage compartment below the front
armrest (컄 page 448).
앫
앫
“Connecting call” appears in the
multifunction display
“Roadside Assistance Activated”
appears in the COMAND display
and the audio system is muted.
When the connection is established, the
message:
1 Information button ¡
2 Roadside Assistance button •
앫
“Call connected” appears in the multifunction display
앫
“Roadside Assistance Activated”
appears in the COMAND display
The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number,
model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals).
A voice connection between the Roadside
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants
of the vehicle will be established.
왘
Describe the nature of the need for assistance.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to
tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such
as labor and/or towing, charges may apply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance Manual for more information.
These programs are only available in the
USA:
앫
Sign and Drive services: Services such
as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or
the replacement of a flat tire with the
vehicle spare tire are obtainable.
465
Controls in detail
Useful features
i The indicator lamp in the Roadside Assis-
Information button ¡
tance button • remains illuminated in red for
approximately 10 seconds during the system
self-check after switching on the ignition (together with the SOS button and the Information
button ¡).
왘
A call to the Customer Assistance Center will be initiated. The button will
flash while the call is in progress. The
message:
See system self-check (컄 page 462) if the indicator lamp does not come on in red or stays on
longer than approximately 10 seconds.
If the indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance
button • is flashing continuously and no
voice connection to the Response Center was
established, the Tele Aid system could not initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the relevant
mobile phone network is not available). The message:
앫
“Call failed” appears in the multifunction display for approximately 10 seconds
앫
“Call could not be connected!” appears in
the COMAND display. Confirm the message
pressing n (컄 page 82).
Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated using button t on the multifunction steering
wheel or COMAND (컄 page 115).
466
Press and hold Information button
¡ (for longer than 2 seconds).
앫
“Connecting call” appears in the
multifunction display
앫
“Information Call Activated” appears in the COMAND display
and the audio system is muted.
When the connection is established, the
message:
A voice connection between the Customer
Assistance Center representative and the
occupants of the vehicle will be established. Information regarding the operation
of your vehicle, the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz
USA products and services is available to
you.
For more details concerning the Tele Aid
system, please visit www.mbusa.com and
use your ID and password (sent to you separately) to learn more (USA only).
i The indicator lamp on the Information
button ¡ remains illuminated in red for approximately 10 seconds during the system
self-check after switching on the ignition (together with the SOS button and the Roadside Assistance button •).
앫
“Call connected” appears in the multifunction display
앫
“Information Call Activated” appears in
the COMAND display
See system self-check (컄 page 462) if the indicator lamp does not come on in red or stays on
longer than approximately 10 seconds.
The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number,
model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals).
If the indicator lamp in the Information
button ¡ is flashing continuously and no
voice connection to the Response Center was
established, then the Tele Aid system could not
initiate an Information call (e.g. the relevant
Controls in detail
Useful features
mobile phone network is not available). The message:
앫
“Call failed” appears in the multifunction display for approximately 10 seconds
앫
“Call could not be connected!” appears in
the COMAND display. Confirm the message
pressing n (컄 page 82).
Information calls can be terminated using button
t on the multifunction steering wheel or
COMAND (컄 page 115).
! If the indicator lamps do not start flashing
after pressing one of the buttons or remain illuminated (in red) at any time, the Tele Aid system
has detected a fault or the service is not currently activated, and may not initiate a call. Visit an
Mercedes-Benz Center and have the system
checked or contact the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon as possible.
Destination Download to the COMAND
System
i The components and operating principles of
COMAND can be found on (컄 page 79).
Destination Download allows you access
to a database of over 10,000,000 Points Of
Interest (POIs) that can be downloaded to
your vehicle's navigation system. If you
know the destination the address can be
downloaded. Or if you are unsure of your
destination you can be provided with
Points Of Interests near your location.
The Response Center can transmit destination data to the COMAND during the
connection with the Roadside Assistance
or Customer Assistance Center.
The transmitted data can contain address
details for a Mercedes-Benz Center or POIs
(Points of Interest).
Route guidance
A prompt appears for confirmation if route
guidance to the address is to be started.
왘
Slide rmq or rotate ymz to select
“Yes” menu item and confirm by
pressing n.
The system starts the route calculation
and subsequently the route guidance
to the defined address (컄 page 140).
i If you select “No”, you can save the address
in your address book (컄 page 202).
i The destination download feature is available if the relevant mobile phone network is
available and data connection is possible.
Call priority
If other service calls such as a Roadside
Assistance call or Information call are active, an emergency call is still possible. In
this case, the emergency call will take priority and override all other active calls.
467
Controls in detail
Useful features
i The indicator lamp in the respective button
i You can exit Roadside Assistance and/ or
flashes until the call is concluded. Calls can only
be terminated by a Response Center or Customer Assistance Center representative except
Roadside Assistance and Information calls,
which can also be terminated by pressing
button t on the multifunction steering wheel
or COMAND (컄 page 115).
the information display during an active connection and call up the COMAND application last selected. To do so, select “Back”. Meanwhile,
mute remains active (컄 page 79).
! If the indicator lamp continues to flash or
the system does not terminate the call at all,
contact the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 in Canada.
Remote door unlock
In case you have locked your vehicle unintentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),
and the reserve SmartKey is not handy:
왘
You will be asked to provide your password which you provided when you
completed the subscriber agreement.
i When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, the
audio system is muted. The optional mobile
phone (if installed) switches off. If you must use
this phone, the vehicle must be parked. Unplug
the telephone, switch it on and place the call.
The COMAND navigation system (if engaged) will
continue to run. The multifunction display in the
instrument cluster is available for use, but spoken commands are not available.
468
Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
or
왘
Contact the Tele Aid web page via Internet using the ID and password sent
to you shortly after the completion of
your acquaintance call.
왘
Then return to your vehicle and pull the
trunk lid handle for a minimum of
20 seconds until the SOS button begins to flash.
The message: “Call connecting” appears in the multifunction display and
the SOS button is flashing.
The Response Center will then unlock
your vehicle with the remote door unlocking feature.
i The remote door unlock feature is available
if the relevant mobile phone network is available
and data connection is possible.
The SOS button will flash and the message: “Call
connecting” appears in the multifunction display
to indicate receipt of the door unlock command.
Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response Center
specialist might attempt to establish voice contact with the vehicle occupants.
If the trunk lid handle was pulled for more than
20 seconds before door unlock authorization
was received by the Response Center, you must
wait 15 minutes before pulling the trunk lid handle again.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Remote door lock
Automatic Maintenance Call
Stolen Vehicle Recovery services
If you have forgotten to lock your vehicle
and are no longer near it, you can have it
locked remotely through the Response
Center.
The 2007 S-Class is equipped with a feature which considerably enhances the care
of your vehicle. Just prior to your vehicle
reaching a maintenance milestone Tele Aid
will initiate a message informing the service center, important vehicle maintenance information and the vehicle is due
for a service appointment. The message is
transmitted in the background with no
driver interaction necessary. This feature
allows your preferred Mercedes-Benz Center to significantly improve the process of
arranging your service appointment and
ensures that your vehicle receives the best
possible care.
In the event your vehicle was stolen:
The vehicle can be remotely locked within
4 days after the ignition has been switched
off.
왘
Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
You will be asked to provide your password which you provided when you
completed the subscriber agreement.
When you are inside your vehicle the next
time and switch on the ignition, the message “Tele Aid Doors locked by remote control” will appear on the multifunction
display.
i The remote door lock feature is available if
the relevant mobile phone network is available
and data connection is possible.
i The Automatic Maintenance Call feature is
available if the relevant mobile phone network is
available and data connection is possible.
왘
Report the incident to the police.
The police will issue a numbered
incident report.
왘
Pass this number on to the
Mercedes-Benz Response Center along
with your password issued to you when
you subscribed to the service.
The Response Center will then attempt
to covertly contact the vehicle’s
Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is
located, the Response Center will
contact the local law enforcement and
you. The vehicle’s location will only be
provided to law enforcement.
i When the anti-theft alarm or the tow-away
alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a call
is initiated automatically to the Response Center. See anti-theft alarm system (컄 page 75) and
tow-away alarm (컄 page 76).
469
Controls in detail
Useful features
Garage door opener
Warning!
The integrated remote control is capable of
operating up to three separately controlled
devices. It provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand-held remote controls used to operate devices such as
garage door openers, gate openers, or other devices compatible with HomeLink® or
some other systems.
Before the integrated remote control can
be used, it must be programmed to the garage door opener, gate operator or other
device you wish to operate. See the following instructions for programming information.
470
Interior rear view mirror with integrated remote control
1
Indicator lamp
2 3 4 Signal transmitter button
Needed for programming (not part of vehicle equipment):
5
Hand-held remote control of garage door opener, gate operator
or other device
6
Hand-held remote control button
G
Before programming the integrated remote
control to a garage door opener or gate
operator, make sure people and objects are
out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage. When programming
a garage door opener, the door moves up or
down. When programming a gate operator,
the gate opens or closes.
Do not use the integrated remote control
with any garage door opener that lacks
safety stop and reverse features as required
by U.S. federal safety standards (this
includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982).
A garage door that cannot detect an object
– signaling the door to stop and reverse –
does not meet current U.S. federal safety
standards.
When programming a garage door opener,
park the vehicle outside the garage.
Controls in detail
Useful features
longer than 30 seconds). This procedure erases any previous settings for
all three channels and initializes the
memory.
Do not run the engine while programming
the integrated remote control. Inhalation of
exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All
exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause
unconsciousness and possible death.
If you later wish to program a second
and/or third hand-held transmitter to
the remaining two signal transmitter
buttons, do not repeat this step and begin directly with step 3.
Programming integrated remote control
Step 1:
Step 3:
왘
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
Step 2:
왘
If you have previously programmed a
signal transmitter button and wish to
retain its programming, proceed to
step 3.
If you are programming the integrated
remote control for the first time, press
and hold the two outer signal transmitter buttons 2 and 4 and release
them only when the indicator lamp 1
begins to flash after approximately
20 seconds (do not hold the button for
Hold the end of the hand-held remote
control 5 of the device you wish to
train approximately 2 to 5 in
(5 to12 cm) away from the signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) to be programmed, while keeping the indicator
lamp 1 in view.
Step 4:
왘
Using both hands, simultaneously
press the hand-held remote control
button 6 and the desired signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not
release the buttons until step 5 is completed.
The indicator lamp 1 will flash, first
slowly and then rapidly.
i The indicator lamp 1 flashes immediately
the first time the signal transmitter button is programmed. If this button has already been programmed, the indicator lamp will only start
flashing after 20 seconds.
Step 5:
왘
After the indicator lamp 1 changes
from a slow to a rapidly flashing light,
release the hand-held remote control
button and the signal transmitter button.
Step 6:
왘
Press and hold the just-trained signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) and
observe the indicator lamp 1.
If the indicator lamp 1 stays on
constantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate when
the respective signal transmitter
button (2, 3 or 4) is pressed and released.
471
Controls in detail
Useful features
“training” button may also be referred
to as “learn”or “smart” button. If there
is difficulty locating the transmitting
button, refer to the garage door opener
operator’s manual.
i If the indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly for
about 2 seconds and then turns to a constant
light, continue with programming steps 8
through 12 as your garage door opener may be
equipped with the “rolling code” feature.
Step 7:
왘
To program the remaining two signal
transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
above starting with step 3.
Step 9:
왘
Press the “training” button on the garage door opener motor head unit.
The “training light” is activated.
Rolling code programming
To train a garage door opener (or other
rolling code devices) with the rolling code
feature, follow these instructions after
completing the “Programming” portion
(steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second
person may make the following training
procedures quicker and easier.)
Step 8:
왘
Locate “training” button on the garage
door opener motor head unit.
Exact location and color of the button
may vary by garage door opener brand.
Depending on manufacturer, the
472
You have 30 seconds to initiate the following two steps.
Step 10:
왘
Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
hold for 2 seconds and release the programmed signal transmitter button
(2, 3 or 4).
Step 11:
왘
Press, hold for 2 seconds and release
same signal transmitter button a second time to complete the training process.
i Some garage door openers (or other rolling
code equipped devices) may require you to
press, hold for 2 seconds and release the same
signal transmitter button a third time to complete the training process.
Step 12:
왘
Confirm the garage door operation by
pressing the programmed signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4).
Step 13:
왘
To program the remaining two signal
transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
above starting with step 3.
Gate operator/Canadian programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission
which may not be long enough for the
integrated signal transmitter to pick up the
signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to “time-out” in the same
manner.
Controls in detail
Useful features
If you live in Canada or if you are having
difficulties programming a gate operator
(regardless of where you live) by using the
programming procedures, replace step 4
with the following:
Step 4:
왘
왘
왘
Press and hold the signal transmitter
button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release
this button until it has been successfully trained.
While still holding down the signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4),
“cycle” your hand-held remote control
button 6 as follows: Press and hold
button 6 for 2 seconds, then release
it for 2 seconds, and again press and
hold it for 2 seconds. Repeat this sequence on the hand-held remote control until the frequency signal has been
learned. Upon successful training, the
indicator lamp 1 will flash slowly and
then rapidly after several seconds.
Proceed with programming step 5 and
step 6 to complete.
i Upon completion of programming the inte-
Operation of integrated remote control
grated remote control, make sure you retain the
hand-held remote control that came with the garage door opener, gate operator or other device.
You may need it for use in other vehicles, for future programming of an integrated remote control, or simply for continued use as a hand-held
remote control to operate the respective device
in other situations.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
왘
Select and press the appropriate integrated signal transmitter button (2,
3 or 4) to activate the remote controlled device.
The integrated remote control transmitter continues to send the signal as
long as the button is pressed – up to
20 seconds.
Reprogramming a single signal transmitter button
To program a device using a signal transmitter button previously trained, follow
these steps:
Erasing integrated remote control
memory
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
왘
Press and hold the desired signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4).
Do not release the button.
왘
왘
The indicator lamp 1 will begin to
flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the signal transmitter button, proceed with programming starting with
step 3.
Simultaneously press and hold down
the outer signal transmitter buttons 2
and 4, for approximately 20 seconds,
until the indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly. Do not hold for longer than
30 seconds.
The codes of all three channels are
erased.
473
Controls in detail
Useful features
gles at the distance of 2 to 5 inches
(5 to 12 cm) away or the same angle at
varying distances.
i If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of all
three channels.
Programming tips
앫
If you are having difficulty programming
the integrated remote control, here are
some helpful tips:
앫
앫
앫
Check the frequency of the hand-held
remote control 5 (typically located on
the reverse side of the remote). The integrated remote control is compatible
with radio-frequency devices operating
between 288-399 MHz.
Put a new battery in the hand-held remote control 5. This will increase the
likelihood of the hand-held remote control sending a faster and more accurate
signal to the integrated remote control.
While performing step 3, hold the
hand-held remote control 5 at different lengths and angles from the signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) you
are programming. Attempt varying an-
474
앫
If another hand-held remote control is
available for the same device, try the
programming steps again using that
other hand-held remote control. Make
sure new batteries are in the hand-held
remote control before beginning the
procedure.
Straighten the antenna wire from the
garage door opener assembly. This
may help improve transmitting and/or
receiving signals.
i Certain types of garage door openers are incompatible with the integrated remote control. If
you should experience further difficulties with
programming the integrated remote control,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or
call Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA only) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or
Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
i USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Infrared reflecting windshield
Your vehicle is equipped with infrared reflecting glass, which reduces the amount
of radiated heat entering the vehicle interior through the windows.
The infrared reflecting glass also prevents
the transmission of signals through the
glass by in-vehicle electronic devices
(e.g. electronic toll collection devices).
To allow the use of these devices in the vehicle, transparent areas 1 and 3 are
placed in the windshield.
You can see them from certain angles
when ambient light condition permit.
Vehicles without Night View Assist*
Vehicles with Night View Assist*
1 Transparent area (located left and right
to the cover of the rain light sensor)
2 Cover of the rain light sensor
3 Transparent area
1 Transparent area (located left to the
cover of the rain light sensor)
2 Cover of the rain light sensor
3 Transparent area
475
476
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care
477
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
In the “Operation” section you will find detailed information on operating, maintaining and caring for your vehicle.
478
The more cautiously you treat your vehicle
during the break-in period, the more satisfied you will be with its performance later
on.
앫
Drive your vehicle during the first
1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but
moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
앫
During this period, avoid heavy loads
(full throttle driving) and excessive engine speeds (no more than 2/3 of maximum rpm in each gear).
앫
Avoid accelerating by kick-down.
앫
Do not attempt to slow the vehicle
down by shifting to a lower gear using
the gear selector lever.
앫
Select positions 3, 2 or 1 only when
driving at moderate speeds (for hill
driving).
앫
Select C as the preferred shift program
(컄 page 374) for the first 1000 miles
(1500 km).
After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may gradually increase vehicle and engine speeds
to the permissible maximum.
All of the above instructions, as may apply
to your vehicle type, also apply when driving the first 1000 miles (1500 km) after
the engine or the rear differential has been
replaced.
i Always obey applicable speed limits.
Operation
Driving instructions
왔 Driving instructions
Drive sensibly – save fuel
Fuel consumption, to a great extent,
depends on driving habits and operating
conditions.
To save fuel you should:
앫
Keep tires at the recommended tire
inflation pressures.
앫
Remove unnecessary loads.
앫
Remove roof rack when not in use.
앫
Allow engine to warm up under low
load use.
앫
앫
Avoid frequent acceleration and deceleration.
Have all maintenance work performed
at the intervals specified in the Maintenance Booklet and as required by the
Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or
FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles). Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Drinking and driving
Warning!
Pedals
G
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs
and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or
drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions
and judgment.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident are greatly increased when you drink
or take drugs and drive.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or
taking drugs.
Warning!
G
Make sure that absolutely no objects are obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obstacles. If there are any floormats or carpets in
the footwell, make sure that the pedals still
have sufficient clearance.
Power assistance
Warning!
G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.
Fuel consumption is also increased by driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic,
on short trips, and in hilly area.
479
Operation
Driving instructions
Brakes
Warning!
G
After driving in heavy rain for some time
without applying the brakes or through water deep enough to wet brake components,
the first braking action may be somewhat
reduced and increased pedal pressure may
be necessary to obtain expected braking effect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles
in front.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will
cause excessive and premature wear of the
brake pads.
It can also result in the brakes overheating,
thereby significantly reducing their effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop the
vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an accident.
480
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after
driving on wet road surfaces (particularly
salted roads), it is advisable to brake the
vehicle with considerable force prior to
parking. The heat generated serves to dry
the brakes.
If your brake system is normally only subjected to moderate loads, you should occasionally test the effectiveness of the
brakes by applying above-normal braking
pressure at higher speeds. This will also
enhance the grip of the brake pads.
Warning!
G
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking maneuvers.
Refer to the description of the Brake Assist
System (BAS) (컄 page 71).
If the parking brake is released and the
brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster stays on and there is no audible warning (EBP), the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is too low.
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
be the reason for low brake fluid in the reservoir.
Have the brake system inspected immediately. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
All checks and service work on the brake
system should be carried out by qualified
technicians only. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Only install brake pads and brake fluid
recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
Operation
Driving instructions
Warning!
G
If other than recommended brake pads are
installed, or other than recommended brake
fluid is used, the braking properties of the
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that
safe braking is substantially impaired. This
could result in an accident.
! When driving down long and steep grades,
relieve the load on the brakes by shifting into a
lower gear to use the engine’s braking power.
This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and
reduces brake pad wear.
When using the engine’s braking power, a drive
wheel may not spin for an extended period of
time, e.g. on slippery road surfaces. This may
cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive
on for some time, rather than immediately
park, so that the air stream can cool down
the brakes faster.
Driving off
Apply the brakes to test them briefly after
driving off. Perform this procedure only
when the road is clear of other traffic.
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not
place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached.
When starting off on a slippery surface, do
not allow a drive wheel to spin for an extended period with the ESP® switched off.
Doing so may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
! Simultaneously depressing the accelerator
pedal and applying the brake reduces engine
performance and causes premature brake and
drivetrain wear.
Parking
Warning!
G
Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of inadvertent vehicle movement, before turning off the engine and leaving the
vehicle always:
앫
Keep right foot on brake pedal.
앫
Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
앫
Shift the automatic transmission to P.
앫
Slowly release brake pedal.
앫
When parked on an incline, turn front
wheels towards the road curb.
481
컄컄
Operation
Driving instructions
컄컄
앫
앫
Turn the SmartKey to starter switch position 0 and remove the SmartKey from
the starter switch, or press the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
(컄 page 317).
Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* with you and lock the
vehicle when leaving.
! Set the parking brake whenever parking or
leaving the vehicle. In addition, shift the automatic transmission to P.
When parking on hills, always turn front wheels
towards the road curb.
Tires
Warning!
The treadwear indicator appears as a solid
band across the tread.
G
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to your vehicle has occurred,
you should turn on the hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from
the road.
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or tire
dealer for repairs.
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point
the tire is considered worn and should be
replaced.
482
Warning!
G
Although the applicable federal motor vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be worn
when the treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at approximately 1/16 in
(1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow your tires to wear down to that level. As
tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the
adhesion properties on a wet road are
sharply reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.
Specified tire inflation pressures must be
maintained. This applies particularly if the
tires are subject to extreme operating conditions (e.g. high speeds, heavy loads, high
ambient temperatures).
Operation
Driving instructions
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire or driving at high
speed with a flat tire will cause excessive
heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Tire traction
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or
icy road is always lower than on a dry road.
You should pay particular attention to the
condition of the road whenever the outside
temperatures are close to the freezing
point.
G
Hydroplaning
Warning!
Depending on the depth of the water layer
on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even
at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce
vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the
road and apply brakes cautiously in the
rain.
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
will be substantially reduced. Under such
weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
with extreme caution.
Mercedes-Benz recommends winter tires
(컄 page 530) with a minimum tread depth
of approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four
wheels for the winter season to ensure
normal balanced handling characteristics.
On packed snow, they can reduce your
stopping distance compared to summer
tires.
Stopping distance, however, is still considerably greater than when the road is not
covered with snow or ice. Exercise appropriate caution.
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may
cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
483
Operation
Driving instructions
Tire speed rating
Regardless of the tire speed rating, local
speed limits should be obeyed. Use prudent driving speeds appropriate to prevailing conditions.
Warning!
G
Even when permitted by law, never operate
a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and/or serious
personal injury and possible death, for you
and for others.
484
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
130 mph (210 km/h). The factory
equipped tires on your vehicle may have a
tire speed rating above the maximum
speed permitted by the electronic speed
limiter.
Make sure your tires have the required tire
speed rating as specified for your vehicle in
the “Technical data” section (컄 page 655),
for example when purchasing new tires.
For information on how to identify the tire
speed rating on a tire’s sidewall, see “Tire
size designation, load and speed rating”
(컄 page 518).
If you are uncertain about the correct reading of the information given on a tire’s sidewall, any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will be glad to assist you.
Winter driving instructions
The most important rule for slippery or icy
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid
abrupt acceleration, braking and steering
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
or DISTRONIC Plus* system under such
conditions.
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding,
move gear selector lever to position N. Try
to keep the vehicle under control by corrective steering action.
i For information on driving with snow chains,
see “Snow chains” (컄 page 531).
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of control loss.
Operation
Driving instructions
Road salts and chemicals can adversely affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
force may become necessary to produce
the normal braking effect.
Depressing the brake pedal periodically
when traveling at length on salt-strewn
roads can bring road-salt impaired braking
efficiency back to normal.
If the vehicle is parked after being driven
on salt-treated roads, the braking efficiency should be tested as soon as possible after driving is resumed.
Warning!
Warning!
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
sure that snow is kept clear of the exhaust
pipe and from around the vehicle with the
engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and
death.
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation,
open a window slightly on the side of the vehicle not facing the wind.
G
Warning!
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking maneuvers.
G
G
Standing water
! Do not drive through flooded areas or water
of unknown depth. Before driving through water,
determine its depth. Never accelerate before
driving into water. The bow wave could force water into the engine and auxiliary equipment, thus
damaging them.
If you must drive through standing water, drive
slowly to prevent water from entering the passenger compartment or the engine compartment. Water in these areas could cause damage
to electrical components or wiring of the engine
or transmission, or could result in water being ingested by the engine through the air intake causing severe internal engine damage. Any such
damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road
surface is free of ice.
For more information on winter driving, see
“Winter driving” (컄 page 530).
485
Operation
Driving instructions
Passenger compartment
Warning!
Driving abroad
G
Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
Abroad, there is an extensive
Mercedes-Benz service network at your
disposal. If you plan to drive into areas
which are not listed in the index of your
Mercedes-Benz Center directory, you
should request pertinent information from
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Control and operation of radio transmitters
COMAND, radio, and telephone*
Warning!
G
Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle safely.
Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System), radio, or telephone1 if road, weather and traffic
conditions permit.
The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
1
486
Observe all legal requirements.
Operation
Driving instructions
Telephones and two-way radios
Catalytic converter
Warning!
Warning!
G
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury.
Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit should only
be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with
monolithic-type catalytic converters, an
important element in conjunction with the
oxygen sensors to achieve substantial control of the pollutants in the exhaust emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper
operating condition by following our recommended maintenance instructions as
outlined in your Maintenance Booklet.
G
As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or operate this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves
can come into contact with the hot exhaust
system, as these materials could be ignited
and cause a vehicle fire.
! To prevent damage to the catalytic converters, only use premium unleaded gasoline in this
vehicle.
Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation
should be repaired promptly. Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel may reach the catalytic converter, causing it to overheat and potentially
start a fire.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna.
487
Operation
Driving instructions
Emission control
Warning!
Certain systems of the engine serve to
keep the toxic components of the exhaust
gases within permissible limits required by
law.
These systems, of course, will function
properly only when maintained strictly according to factory specifications. Any adjustments on the engine should, therefore,
be carried out only by qualified
Mercedes-Benz Center authorized technicians.
Engine adjustments should not be altered
in any way. The specified service jobs must
be carried out regularly according to
Mercedes-Benz servicing requirements.
For details please refer to the Maintenance
Booklet.
488
G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
have the cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive only with at least one window fully open at all times.
Coolant temperature
During severe operating conditions,
e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to approximately
248°F (120°C).
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature over 248°F
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Warning!
G
앫
Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids, which
may have leaked into the engine compartment, to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
앫
Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns and can occur just
by opening the hood. Stay away from
the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from
other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of
the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle
until the engine has cooled down.
Operation
At the gas station
왔 At the gas station
Refueling
Warning!
G
The fuel filler flap is located on the
right-hand side of the vehicle towards the
rear. Locking and unlocking the vehicle automatically locks and unlocks the fuel filler
flap.
왘
Turn off the engine (컄 page 366).
왘
Shift the automatic transmission to P
(컄 page 367).
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
It burns violently and can cause serious
injury. Never allow sparks, flame or smoking
materials near gasoline!
Vehicles with SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*:
Do not allow fuel to come into contact with
skin or clothing. Direct skin contact with fuels and the inhalation of fuel vapors are
damaging to your health.
Switch off the engine before refueling.
1 To open fuel filler flap
2 To insert fuel filler cap
3 Supplemental tire inflation pressure
information (컄 page 510)
4 To insert fuel filler cap
왘
왘
Turn off the engine by pressing the
KEYLESS-GO* button once
(컄 page 366).
왘
Open the driver’s door (this puts
the starter switch in position 0,
same as with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch). The
driver’s door then can be closed
again.
Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at
the point indicated by the arrow 1.
The fuel filler flap springs open.
왘
Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise and
hold on to it until possible pressure is
released.
컄컄
489
Operation
At the gas station
컄컄 왘
왘
Take off fuel filler cap and set it in direction of arrow 2 in the recess on the
inside of fuel filler flap 4.
i Only use premium unleaded gasoline with a
To prevent fuel vapors from escaping
into open air, fully insert filler nozzle
unit.
Information on gasoline quality can normally be
found on the fuel pump.
Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle
unit cuts out – do not top up or overfill.
Warning!
G
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pressure in the system which could cause a gas
discharge. This could cause the gas to spray
back out when removing the fuel pump nozzle, which could cause personal injury.
왘
Replace fuel cap by turning it clockwise
until it audibly engages.
왘
Close the fuel filler flap.
490
Check regularly and before a long trip
minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91 (average of
96 RON/86 MON).
More information on gasoline can be found in the
Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet.
i Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap
open can cause the yellow engine malfunction
indicator lamp ± to illuminate.
For more information, see the “Practical hints”
section (컄 page 547).
Example illustration from S 550
1 Coolant level
2 Brake fluid
3 Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system
i Opening the hood (컄 page 492).
Operation
At the gas station
Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system
For more information on refilling the washer reservoir, see “Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system”
(컄 page 498).
Coolant
For more information on coolant, see
“Coolant level” (컄 page 497) and see “Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.”
(컄 page 661).
Brake fluid
Vehicle lighting
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or
below, have the brake system checked for brake
pad thickness and leaks immediately. Notify an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
Do not add brake fluid as this will not solve the
problem. For more information, see “Practical
hints” (컄 page 545).
Check function and cleanliness. For more
information on replacing light bulbs, see
“Replacing bulbs” (컄 page 621).
For information on brake fluid, see “Brake
fluid” (컄 page 663)
For more information, see “Lighting”
(컄 page 342).
Tire inflation pressure
For information on tire inflation pressure,
see “Checking tire inflation pressure”
(컄 page 511).
Engine oil level
For more information on engine oil, see
“Engine oil” (컄 page 494).
491
Operation
Engine compartment
왘
Hood
Warning!
Handle 2 will extend out of the radiator grille.
G
! To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or
Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could
be forced open by passing air flow.
hood, never open the hood if the wiper arms are
folded forward away from the windshield.
! To avoid damage to handle 2 never pull up
the hood on handle 2.
This could cause the hood to come loose
and injure you and others.
1 Release lever
왘
Opening
Warning!
G
Pull release lever 1.
The hood is unlocked.
왘
Pull handle 2 to its stop out of radiator
grille.
왘
Lift bottom of hood at edge of radiator
grille.
The hood will be automatically held
open at shoulder height by gas-filled
struts.
You could be injured when the hood is open
– even when the engine is switched off.
Parts of the engine can become very hot. To
prevent burns, only touch the components
described in the Operator’s Manual and
comply with all relevant safety precautions.
2 Handle for opening the hood
492
Lift the hood slightly.
Operation
Engine compartment
Warning!
G
Warning!
G
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
moving parts when the hood is open and the
engine is running. Make sure the hood is
properly closed before driving. When closing
the hood, use extreme caution not to catch
hands or fingers.
The engine is equipped with a transistorized
ignition system. Because of the high voltage
it is dangerous to touch any components (ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic
socket) of the ignition system
앫
with the engine running
The radiator fan may continue to run for approximately 30 seconds or even restart after the engine has been turned off. Stay
clear of fan blades.
앫
while starting the engine
앫
if ignition is “on” and the engine is
cranked manually
Warning!
G
Closing
Warning!
G
Be careful that you do not close the hood on
anyone.
Make sure that the hood is securely engaged before driving off. Do not continue
driving if the hood can no longer engage after an accident, for example. The hood could
otherwise come loose while the vehicle is in
motion and endanger you and others.
왘
Let the hood drop from a height of approximately 1 ft. (30 cm).
The hood will lock audibly.
If you see flames or smoke coming from the
engine compartment, or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the engine is
overheated, do not open the hood. Move
away from vehicle and do not open the hood
until the engine has cooled down. If necessary, call the fire department.
왘
Check to make sure the hood is fully
closed.
If you can raise the hood at a point
above the headlamps, then it is not
properly closed. Open it again and let it
drop with somewhat greater force.
493
Operation
Engine compartment
Engine oil
The amount of oil your engine needs will
depend on a number of factors, including
driving style. Higher oil consumption can
occur when
앫
the vehicle is new
앫
the vehicle is driven frequently at
higher engine speeds
Engine oil consumption checks should only
be made after the vehicle break-in period.
! Do not use any special lubricant additives,
앫
앫
with the engine at operating temperature, the vehicle must have been
stationary for at least 5 minutes with
the engine turned off
with the engine not at operating temperature yet, the vehicle must have
been stationary for at least 30 minutes
with the engine turned off
To check the engine oil level via the multifunction display, do the following:
i The menu overview can be found on
(컄 page 243).
as these may damage the drive assemblies. Using special additives not approved by
Mercedes-Benz may cause damage not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
왘
Press ( or & to select the menu
“Service”.
More information on this subject is available at
any Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Checking engine oil level with the control system (S 600)
When checking the oil level
앫
the vehicle must be parked on level
ground
494
왘
Press $ or % to select “Engine
oil level”.
Press #.
The following message is seen in the multifunction display:
Engine oil level
Measuring now
Correct measurement
only if vehicle is level
One of the following messages will
subsequently appear in the multifunction
display:
앫
Engine oil level
OK
앫
Add 1.0 qts. engine oil
at next refueling
(Canada: 1.0 l)
앫
Add 1.5 qts. engine oil
at next refueling
(Canada: 1.5 l)
앫
Add 2.0 qts. engine oil
at next refueling
(Canada: 2.0 l)
i If you want to interrupt the checking procedure, press button ( or & on the multifunction steering wheel.
Operation
Engine compartment
왘
If necessary, add engine oil.
왘
For adding engine oil (컄 page 496).
For more information on engine oil, see the
“Technical data” section (컄 page 661) and
(컄 page 663).
Other display messages
If the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO* start/
stop button is not in position 2, the following message will appear:
For engine oil level,
turn on ignition
왘
Waiting period for,
engine oil level
not complete
왘
If you see the message
Engine oil level
Not when engine on
왘
Turn off the engine.
왘
If the engine is at operating temperature, wait 5 minutes before checking
oil.
왘
If the engine is not at operating temperature yet, you must wait 30 minutes
before checking oil.
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
If you see the message
If engine is at operating temperature,
wait 5 minutes before repeating check
procedure.
If engine is not at operating temperature yet, wait 30 minutes before
repeating check procedure.
If there is excess engine oil with the engine
at operating temperature, the following
message will appear:
Engine oil level
Reduce oil level
왘
Have excess oil siphoned or drained
off. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off.
It could cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter (gasoline engine) not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
For more information on messages in the
multifunction display concerning engine
oil, see the “Practical hints” section
(컄 page 602).
Checking engine oil level with the oil
dipstick (S 550)
When checking the oil level
앫
the vehicle must be parked on level
ground
앫
with the engine at operating temperature, the vehicle must have been stationary for at least 5 minutes with the
engine turned off
앫
with the engine not at operating temperature yet, the vehicle must have
been stationary for at least 30 minutes
with the engine turned off
495
Operation
Engine compartment
To check the engine oil level with the oil
dipstick, do the following:
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 492).
The oil level is correct when it is between
lower mark 3 (min.) and upper mark 2
(max.) mark of the oil dipstick.
i The filling quantity between the upper and
lower marks on the oil dipstick is approximately
2.1 US qt. (2.0 l).
왘
If necessary, add engine oil.
For adding engine oil (컄 page 496).
For more information on engine oil, see the
“Technical data” section (컄 page 661) and
(컄 page 663).
S 550
1 Oil dipstick
2 Upper mark
3 Lower mark
왘
Pull out oil dipstick 1.
왘
Wipe oil dipstick 1 clean.
왘
Fully insert oil dipstick 1 into the dipstick guide tube.
왘
Pull out oil dipstick 1 again after approximately 3 seconds to obtain accurate reading.
496
For more information on messages in the
multifunction display concerning engine
oil, see the “Practical hints” section
(컄 page 602).
Adding engine oil
! Only use approved engine oils and oil filters
required for vehicles with Maintenance System
(U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles).
For a listing of approved engine oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet in your vehicle literature portfolio,
or contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Using engine oils and oil filters of specification
other than those expressly required for the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS
(Canada vehicles), or changing of oil and oil filter
at change intervals longer than those called for
by the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or
FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles) will result in engine
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Warning!
G
Parts of the engine can become very hot. To
prevent burns, only touch the components
described in the Operator’s Manual and
comply with all relevant safety precautions.
Operation
Engine compartment
For more information on engine, see the
“Technical data” section (컄 page 661) and
(컄 page 663).
Transmission fluid level
Example illustration from S 550
1 Filler cap
왘
Unscrew filler cap 1 from filler neck.
왘
Add engine oil as required. Be careful
not to overfill with oil.
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
entering the ground or water.
! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off.
It will cause damage to the engine and catalytic
converter not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
왘
The transmission fluid level does not need
to be checked. If you notice transmission
fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions,
have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
check the automatic transmission.
Active Body Control* (ABC*) fluid level
Regular fluid level check is not required. If
you notice fluid leaks or malfunction messages in the multifunction display, have an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center check
the ABC-system.
Coolant level
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check
the coolant level, the vehicle must be
parked on level ground and the engine
must be cool.
Warning!
G
In order to avoid any possibly serious burns:
앫
Use extreme caution when opening the
hood if there are any signs of steam or
coolant leaking from the cooling system,
or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the coolant is overheated.
앫
Do not remove pressure cap on coolant
reservoir if coolant temperature is
above 158°F (70°C). Allow engine to
cool down before removing cap. The
coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and
컄컄
is under pressure.
Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck.
497
Operation
Engine compartment
컄컄
앫
앫
Using a rag, slowly open the cap approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess pressure. If opened immediately, scalding
hot fluid and steam will be blown out under pressure.
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine
parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts.
The coolant expansion tank is located on
the passenger side of the engine compartment.
왘
Using a rag, turn cap 1 slowly approximately one half turn counterclockwise
to release any excess pressure.
왘
Continue turning the cap counterclockwise and remove it.
The coolant level is correct if the level
앫
for cold coolant: reaches the white
marking (plastic bridge) inside the coolant expansion tank
앫
for warm coolant: is approximately
0.6 in (1.5 cm) higher
왘
Add coolant as required.
왘
Replace and tighten cap 1.
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system
The washer fluid reservoir is located on the
left-hand side of the engine compartment
when looking in the direction of travel. It
supplies the windshield washer system
and headlamp cleaning system* with
washer fluid.
For more information on coolant, see the
“Technical data” section (컄 page 665).
S 550 with Airmatic
1 Cap
Example illustration from S 550
1 Cap
2 Coolant expansion tank
498
Operation
Engine compartment
Warning!
G
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze
on hot engine parts, because it may ignite
and burn. You could be seriously burned.
Vehicles with ABC*
왘
To open washer fluid reservoir: pull
tab of cap 1 upward.
왘
Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate and water (or
commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures).
1 Cap
Fluid for the windshield washer system and
the headlamp cleaning system is supplied
from the windshield washer reservoir. It
has a capacity of approximately:
앫
6.93 US qt (6.56 l) in vehicles
with Airmatic*
앫
6.76 US qt (6.4 l) in vehicles with ABC*
During all seasons, add MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” to
water. Premix the windshield washer fluid
in a suitable container.
! Only use washer fluid which is suitable for
plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps.
For more information, see “Windshield and
headlamp washer system” (컄 page 668).
Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
where temperatures may fall below
freezing point. Failure to do so could result in damage to the washer system/reservoir.
왘
To close washer fluid reservoir:
press cap 1 onto filler hole until it engages.
499
Operation
Tires and wheels
See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for information on tested and
recommended rims and tires for summer
and winter operation. They can also offer
advice concerning tire service and
purchase.
Warning!
G
Replace rims or tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown on the
original part. See an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for further information. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are
mounted:
앫
The wheel brakes or suspension
components can be damaged.
앫
The operating clearance of the wheels
and the tires may no longer be correct.
500
Warning!
G
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them.
When replacing rims, only use Genuine
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
particular rim type. Failure to do so can
result in the bolts loosening and possibly an
accident.
Retreaded tires are not tested or recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous
damage cannot always be recognized on retreads. The operating safety of the vehicle
cannot be assured when such tires are used.
Important guidelines
앫
Only use sets of tires and rims of the
same type and make.
앫
Tires must be of the correct size for the
rim.
앫
Break in new tires for approximately
60 miles (100 km) at moderate
speeds.
앫
Regularly check the tires and rims for
damage. Dented or bent rims can
cause tire inflation pressure loss and
damage to the tire beads.
앫
If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
inflation pressure and correct as
required.
앫
Do not allow your tires to wear down
too far. Adhesion properties on wet
roads are sharply reduced at tread
depths under 1/8 in (3 mm).
앫
When replacing individual tires, you
should mount new tires on the front
wheels first (on vehicles with
same-sized wheels all around).
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire care and maintenance
Warning!
G
Regularly check the tires for damage. Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure
loss. As a result, you could lose control of
your vehicle.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them.
Regularly check your tire inflation pressure
at least once a month. For more information on checking tire inflation pressure,
see “Recommended tire inflation pressure” (컄 page 509).
Tire inspection
Life of tire
Every time you check your tire inflation
pressure, you should also inspect your
tires for the following:
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including but not limited to:
앫
excessive treadwear (컄 page 502)
앫
cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber
앫
bumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in
the tread or side of the tire
Replace the tire if you find any of the above
conditions.
앫
Driving style
앫
Tire inflation pressure
앫
Distance driven
Warning!
G
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after
6 years, regardless of the remaining tread.
Make sure you also inspect the spare tire
periodically for condition and inflation.
Spare tires will age and degrade over time
even if never used, and thus should be inspected and replaced when necessary.
501
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tread depth
Do not allow your tires to wear down too
far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are
sharply reduced at tread depths under
1
/8 in (3 mm).
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and
become visible at a tread depth of approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point
the tire is considered worn and should be
replaced.
to wear down to that level. As tread depth
approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesion
properties on a wet road are sharply reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.
Summer tires 1/8 in (3 mm)
앫
Winter tires 1/6 in (4 mm)
Warning!
G
Although the applicable federal motor safety
laws consider a tire to be worn when the
treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at
approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow your tires
502
! Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place
with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease and gasoline.
Cleaning tires
! Never use a round nozzle to power wash
tires. The intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire.
Always replace a damaged tire.
Recommended minimum tire tread depth:
앫
Storing tires
1 TWI (TreadWear Indicator)
The treadwear indicator appears as a solid
band across the tread.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Direction of rotation
Loading the vehicle
Unidirectional tires offer added advantages, such as better hydroplaning performance. To benefit, however, you must
make sure the tires rotate in the direction
specified.
Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry.
앫
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the
intended direction of rotation (spinning) of
the tire.
i Spare wheels may be mounted against the
direction of rotation (spinning) even with a unidirectional tire for temporary use only until the regular drive wheel has been repaired or replaced.
Always observe and follow applicable temporary
use restrictions and speed limitations indicated
on the spare wheel.
앫
The Tire and Loading Information
placard (Example A) or the Vehicle Tire
Information placard (Example B) can be
found on the driver’s door B-pillar. This
placard tells you important information
about the number of people that can be
in the vehicle and the total weight that
can be carried in the vehicle. It also
contains information on the proper size
and recommended tire inflation
pressures for the original equipment
tires on your vehicle.
The Certification label, also found on
the driver’s door B-pillar tells you about
the gross weight capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the
weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
fuel and cargo. The Certification label
also tells you about the front and rear
axle weight capacity, called the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The GAWR
is the total allowable weight that can be
carried by a single axle (front or rear).
Never exceed the GVWR or GAWR for
either the front axle or rear axle.
1 Driver’s door B-pillar
Following is a discussion on how to work
with the information contained on the two
placards with regards to loading your vehicle.
503
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire and Loading Information
Warning!
Placard (Example B)
1 Load limit information on the Tire and
Loading Information placard
1 Load limit information on the Vehicle
Tire Information placard
The placard showing the load limit information is located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and
Loading Information placard (Example A),
locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.”
on this placard. The combined weight of all
occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue load (if applicable) should never
exceed the weight referenced in that
statement.
The placard showing the load limit information is located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Vehicle
Tire Information placard (Example B),
locate the heading “Vehicle Capacity
Weight” on this placard. The combined
weight of all occupants, cargo/luggage
and trailer tongue (if applicable) should
never exceed the weight listed next to
vehicle capacity weight.
G
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit or vehicle capacity
weight as indicated on the placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
Your vehicle is equipped with either the
Tire and Loading Information placard
(Example A) or the Vehicle Tire Information
placard (Example B).
i Data shown on placard examples are for illustration purposes only. Load limit data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data
shown in the illustrations below. Refer to placard
on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle.
504
Placard (Example A)
Operation
Tires and wheels
Seating capacity
Steps for determining correct load limit
The seating capacity gives you important
information on the number of occupants
that can be in the vehicle. Observe front
and rear seating capacity. Your vehicle is
equipped with either placard Example A or
placard Example B located on the driver’s
door B-pillar (컄 page 503).
The following steps have been developed
as required of all manufacturers under
Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations,
Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic
and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
i Data shown on placard examples are for illustration purposes only. Seating data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown
in the illustrations below. Refer to placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle.
Step 1 (Vehicles equipped with placard
Example A)
왘
Placard (Example B)
1 Seating capacity
Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on
your vehicle’s placard.
Step 1 (Vehicles equipped with placard
Example B)
왘
Locate the heading “Vehicle Capacity
Weight” on your vehicle’s placard.
Step 2
왘
Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
컄컄
Placard (Example A)
1 Seating capacity
505
Operation
Tires and wheels
컄컄 Step
왘
3
Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.
Step 4
왘
The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lbs. passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400 – 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
Step 5
왘
Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in step 4.
506
Step 6 (if applicable)
왘
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle (컄 page 508).
The following table shows examples on
how to calculate total and cargo load
capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants.
The following examples use a load limit
of 1500 lbs. This is for illustration
purposes only. Make sure you are using
the actual load limit for your vehicle stated
on the vehicle’s placard (컄 page 504).
Operation
Tires and wheels
Example Combined
weight limit
of occupants and
cargo from
placard
Number of Seating
occupants configura(driver and tion
passengers)
Occupants weight
Combined
Available cargo/luggage and trailer
weight of all tongue weight (total load limit or
occupants
vehicle capacity weight from placard minus combined weight of all
occupants)
1
5
Occupant 1: 150 lbs
Occupant 2: 180 lbs
Occupant 3: 160 lbs
Occupant 4: 140 lbs
Occupant 5: 120 lbs
750 lbs
1500 lbs – 750 lbs = 750 lbs
1500 lbs
front: 2
rear: 3
2
1500 lbs
3
front: 1
rear: 2
Occupant 1: 200 lbs
Occupant 2: 190 lbs
Occupant 3: 150 lbs
540 lbs
1500 lbs – 540 lbs = 960 lbs
3
1500 lbs
1
front: 1
Occupant 1: 150 lbs
150 lbs
1500 lbs – 150 lbs = 1350 lbs
The higher the weight of all occupants, the
less cargo and luggage load capacity is
available.
For more information, see “Trailer tongue
load” (컄 page 508).
507
Operation
Tires and wheels
Certification label
Even after careful determination of the
combined weight of all occupants, cargo
and the trailer tongue load (if applicable)
(컄 page 508) as to not exceed the permissible load limit, you must make sure that
your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the
front or rear axle. You can obtain the
GVWR and GAWR from the Certification label. The Certification Label can be found
on the driver’s door B-pillar, see “Technical
data” (컄 page 652).
508
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The
total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
all cargo, and the trailer tongue load
(컄 page 508) must never exceed the
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The total allowable weight that can be carried by
a single axle (front or rear).
To assure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible weight
limits (GVWR and GAWR for front and rear
axle), have the loaded vehicle (including
driver, passengers and all cargo and, if applicable, trailer fully loaded) weighed on a
suitable commercial scale.
Trailer tongue load
The tongue load of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects
the load you can carry in your vehicle. If a
trailer is towed, the tongue load must be
added to the weight of all occupants riding
and any cargo you are carrying in the
vehicle. The tongue load typically is
10 percent of the trailer weight and everything loaded in it.
Your Mercedes-Benz has been designed
primarily to carry passengers and their
cargo. Mercedes-Benz does not recommend trailer towing with your vehicle.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Recommended tire inflation pressure
Warning!
G
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
Your vehicle is equipped with either the
Tire and Loading Information placard
(Example A) or the Vehicle Tire Information
placard (Example B) located on the driver’s
door B-pillar (컄 page 503).
The tire inflation pressure should be
checked regularly and should only be adjusted on cold tires. The tires can be considered cold if the vehicle has been parked
for at least 3 hours or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km).
Placard (Example A)
Follow recommended cold tire inflation
pressures listed on placard.
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best handling, tread life and
riding comfort.
In addition to the tire placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar, also consult the fuel
filler flap for any additional information
pertaining to special driving situations. For
more information, see “Important notes on
tire inflation pressure” (컄 page 510).
i Data shown on placard examples are for il-
1 Tire and Loading Information placard
with recommended cold tire inflation
pressures
Placard (Example A) lists the recommended cold tire inflation pressures for maximum loaded vehicle weight. The tire
inflation pressures listed apply to the tires
installed as original equipment.
lustration purposes only. Tire data are specific to
each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
the illustrations below. Refer to placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle.
509
Operation
Tires and wheels
Placard (Example B)
Important notes on tire inflation
pressure
Warning!
G
If the tire inflation pressure repeatedly
drops:
1 Vehicle Tire Information placard with
recommended cold tire inflation
pressures
Placard (Example B) lists the recommended cold tire inflation pressures for maximum loaded vehicle weight. The tire
inflation pressures listed apply to the tires
installed as original equipment.
i Placard (Example B) may list recommended
cold tire inflation pressures for different vehicle
loads.
510
앫
Check the tires for punctures from
foreign objects.
앫
Check to see whether air is leaking from
the valves or from around the rim.
Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure
are also increased while driving, depending
on the driving speed and the tire load.
If you will be driving your vehicle at high
speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher,
where it is legal and conditions allow,
consult the placard on the inside of the fuel
filler flap on how to adjust the cold tire inflation pressure. If you do not adjust the
tire inflation pressure, excessive heat can
build up and result in sudden tire failure.
Be sure to readjust the tire inflation
pressure for normal driving speeds. You
should wait until the tires are cold before
adjusting the tire inflation pressure.
Some vehicles may have supplemental tire
inflation pressure information for vehicle
loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition (컄 page 518). If such information is provided, it can be found on the
placard located on the inside of the fuel filler flap (컄 page 489).
Tire inflation pressure changes by approximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of
air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire inflation pressure
where the temperature is different from
the outside temperature.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Checking tire inflation pressure
Regularly check your tire inflation pressure
at least once a month.
Check and adjust the tire inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. The tires
can be considered cold if the vehicle has
been parked for at least 3 hours or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
If you check the tire inflation pressure
when the tires are warm (the vehicle has
been driven for several miles or sitting less
than 3 hours), the reading will be
approximately 4 psi (0.3 bar) higher than
the cold reading. This is normal. Do not let
air out to match the specified cold tire inflation pressure. Otherwise, the tire will be
underinflated.
Checking tire inflation pressure
manually
Follow the steps below to achieve correct
tire inflation pressure:
왘
Remove the cap from the valve on one
tire.
왘
Firmly press a tire gauge onto the
valve.
왘
Read tire inflation pressure on tire
gauge and check against the recommended tire inflation pressure on the
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar
(컄 page 503). If necessary, add air to
achieve the recommended tire inflation
pressure.
i If you have overfilled the tire, release tire in-
Checking tire inflation pressure electronically with the Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring System (Advanced
TPMS)*, (standard on U.S. vehicles)
i The Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (Advanced TPMS) is equipped with a
combination low tire pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale in the instrument cluster
(컄 page 28). Depending on how the telltale illuminates, it indicates a low tire inflation pressure
condition or a malfunction in the TPMS system itself:
앫
If the telltale illuminates continuously, one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. There is no malfunction in the TPMS.
앫
If the telltale flashes for 60 seconds and
then stays illuminated, the TPMS system itself is not operating properly.
flation pressure by pushing the metal stem of the
valve with e.g. a tip of a pen. Then recheck the
tire inflation pressure with the tire gauge.
왘
Install the valve cap.
왘
Repeat this procedure for each tire.
511
Operation
Tires and wheels
The TPMS only functions on wheels that
are equipped with the proper electronic
sensors. It monitors the tire inflation pressure, as selected by the driver, in all four
tires. A warning is issued to alert you to a
decrease in pressure in one or more of the
tires.
Tire inflation pressure inquiries are made
using the multifunction display. The
present inflation pressures are displayed
only after a few minutes of travel time.
i Possible differences between the readings
of a tire inflation pressure gauge of an air hose,
e.g. gas station equipment, and the vehicle’s
control system can occur. Usually the readings
issued by the control system are more precise.
i The menu overview can be found on
(컄 page 243).
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
왘
Press ( or & to select the menu
“Service”.
왘
Press $ or % to select “Tire
pressure”.
왘
Press #.
512
i When the message “Tire pressures displayed after driving a few minutes” appears in
the display, the individual inflation pressure values are matched with the tires. The individual
values are displayed after a few minutes driving.
Warning!
G
It is the driver’s responsibility to calibrate
the TPMS on the recommended cold inflation pressure. Underinflated tires affect the
ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
might lose control over the vehicle.
i With a spare wheel without wheel sensor
mounted, the system may still indicate the tire
inflation pressure of the removed wheel for some
minutes. If this happens, keep in mind that the
indicated value where the spare wheel is mounted does not reflect the actual spare tire inflation
pressure.
Warning!
G
The TPMS does not indicate a warning for
wrongly selected inflation pressures. Always
adjust tire inflation pressure according to
the placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if
available, the supplemental tire pressure information on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due
to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g.
tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In
this case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully applying the brakes and avoiding
abrupt steering maneuvers.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Warning!
G
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressure
label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or the tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate then to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may effect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately
one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not
be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing
one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle
to ensure that the replacement or alternate
tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue
to function properly.
i If a condition causing the TPMS to malfunction develops, it may take up to 10 minutes for
the system to signal a malfunction using the
TPMS telltale flashing and illumination sequence.
The telltale extinguishes after a few minutes driving if the malfunction has been corrected.
i Operating radio transmission equipment
(e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) in or
near the vehicle could cause the TPMS to malfunction.
513
Operation
Tires and wheels
Reactivating Advanced TPMS
i Reactivate the TPMS after adjusting the tire
The TPMS must be reactivated when you
have adjusted the tire inflation pressure to
a new level (e.g. because of different load
or driving conditions). The TPMS is then
recalibrated to the current tire inflation
pressures.
inflation pressure to the inflation pressure recommended for the vehicle operating condition.
Tire inflation pressure should only be adjusted
on cold tires. Observe the recommended tire inflation pressure on the placard on the driver’s
door B-pillar (컄 page 503). Some vehicles may
have supplemental tire inflation pressure information for driving at high speeds (컄 page 510)
or for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition. If such information is provided, it can be found on the inside of the fuel
filler flap (컄 page 489).
Warning!
G
It is the driver’s responsibility to calibrate
the TPMS on the recommended cold inflation pressure. Underinflated tires affect the
ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
might lose control over the vehicle.
왘
Using the tire placard on the driver’s
door B-pillar (컄 page 503) or, if available, the supplemental tire inflation
pressure information on the inside of
the fuel filler flap (컄 page 489), make
sure the tire inflation pressure of all
four tires is correct.
514
i After wheel rotation or sensor replacement,
the vehicle must be parked for 20 minutes before attempting to reactivate the TPMS.
i The menu overview can be found on
(컄 page 243).
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
왘
Press ( or & to select the menu
“Service”.
왘
Press $ or % to select “Tire
pressure”.
왘
Press #.
You will see
앫
the current inflation pressures for
each tire
or
앫
the message
Tire pressures
displayed after driving
a few minutes
appear in the multifunction display.
왘
Press %.
The message
Use current pressure
values as new
reference values
To confirm press “OK”
appears in the multifunction display.
Operation
Tires and wheels
왘
Press #.
Run Flat Indicator (Canada only)
The message
While the vehicle is being driven, the Run
Flat Indicator monitors the set tire inflation
pressures by evaluating each wheel’s rotational speed. This allows the system to detect a significant loss of pressure in a tire.
If a wheel’s rotational speed changes due
to falling tire inflation pressure, you will
see a corresponding warning message in
the multifunction display.
Tire pressure monitor
reactivated
appears in the multifunction display.
After a few minutes driving, the current
tire inflation pressure values are accepted as reference values and then
monitored.
If you wish to cancel activation:
왘
Press L.
or
왘
Press $ to exit menu screen.
i When the wheel positions are changed on
the vehicle, it is possible that the air pressure is
temporarily displayed for the wrong position.
This will be corrected after driving for several
minutes, and the air pressure will be shown for
the correct position.
The Run Flat Indicator may function in a restricted manner or with a delay if:
앫
snow chains are mounted to the
vehicle
앫
in presence of ice and snow
앫
you are driving on a loose surface (e.g.
sand or gravel)
앫
you are driving in a very sporty manner
(involving rapid acceleration or high
speeds in curves)
Warning!
G
When the multifunction display shows the
message “Tire pressure Check tires”, one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. You should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper tire inflation pressure as indicated on
the vehicle’s tire information placard. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Each tire, including the spare, should be
checked monthly when cold and set to the
tire inflation pressure recommended by the
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or the tire inflation pressure label.
515
Operation
Tires and wheels
Warning!
G
The Run Flat Indicator does not provide a
warning for wrongly selected tire inflation
pressures. Always adjust tire inflation pressure according to the placard on the driver’s
door B-pillar or fuel filler flap.
The Run Flat Indicator does not replace regular checks of the tire inflation pressures
since a gradual pressure loss in all four tires
cannot be detected by the Run Flat
Indicator.
The Run Flat Indicator is not able to issue a
warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of
tire inflation pressure (e.g. tire blowout
caused by a foreign object). In this case
bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering
maneuvers.
Reactivating the Run Flat Indicator
The tire inflation pressure monitor must be
reactivated in the following situations:
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
앫
If you have changed the tire inflation
pressure
왘
Press ( or & to select the menu
“Service”.
앫
If you have replaced the wheels or tires
왘
앫
If you have installed new wheels or
tires
Press $ or % to select “Tire
pressure”.
왘
Press #.
왘
Using the tire placard on the driver’s
door B-pillar (컄 page 503) or, if available, the inside of the fuel filler flap
(컄 page 489), make sure the tire inflation pressure of all four tires is correct.
The message
Run Flat Indicator
active
Reactivation possible: OK
appears in the multifunction display.
Warning!
G
The Run Flat Indicator can only warn you in
a reliable manner if you have set the correct
tire inflation pressures for each tire.
If an incorrect tire inflation pressure was
set, the system will monitor the pressure according to the incorrect value.
516
i The menu overview can be found on
(컄 page 243).
왘
Press #.
The message
Tire pressure
now OK?
appears in the multifunction display.
Operation
Tires and wheels
If you wish to confirm activation:
Potential problems associated with
underinflated and overinflated tires
Overinflated tires
앫
adversely affect handling
characteristics
앫
cause uneven tire wear
앫
be more prone to damage from road
hazards
앫
adversely affect ride comfort
앫
increase stopping distance
왘
Press $ or % to select “Yes”.
왘
Press #.
Underinflated tires
The message
Underinflated tires can:
Run Flat Indicator
reactivated
앫
cause excessive and uneven tire wear
앫
adversely affect fuel economy
앫
lead to tire failure from being
overheated
앫
adversely affect handling
characteristics
appears in the multifunction display.
After a certain “learning phase”, the Run
Flat Indicator checks the set pressure values for all four tires.
If you wish to cancel activation:
왘
Press L.
Warning!
Warning!
G
or
When the message
Tire pressure
now OK?
appears in the multifunction display:
왘
Press $ or % to select “No”.
왘
Press #.
Overinflated tires can:
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
and are more likely to fail from being
overheated.
G
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
517
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire labeling
Besides tire name (sales designation) and
manufacturer name, a number of markings
can be found on a tire.
Following are some explanations for the
markings on your vehicle’s tires:
1 Uniform Quality Grading Standards
(컄 page 524)
2 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
(컄 page 522)
3 Maximum tire load (컄 page 523)
4 Maximum tire inflation pressure
(컄 page 523)
5 Manufacturer
6 Tire ply material (컄 page 525)
7 Tire size designation, load and speed
rating (컄 page 518)
8 Load identification (컄 page 521)
9 Tire name
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
For more information, see “Rims and tires”
(컄 page 655).
Tire size designation, load and speed
rating
1 Tire width
2 Aspect ratio in %
3 Radial tire code
4 Rim diameter
5 Tire load rating
6 Tire speed rating
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
518
Operation
Tires and wheels
General:
Tire width
Rim diameter
Depending on the design standards used,
the tire size molded into the sidewall may
have no letter or a letter preceding the tire
size designation.
The tire width 1 (컄 page 518) indicates
the nominal tire width in mm.
The rim diameter 4 (컄 page 518) is the
diameter of the bead seat, not the
diameter of the rim edge. Rim diameter is
indicated in inches (in).
No letter preceding the size designation
(as illustrated above): Passenger car tire
based on European design standards.
The aspect ratio 2 (컄 page 518) is the
dimensional relationship between tire
section height and section width and is
expressed in percentage. The aspect ratio
is arrived at by dividing section height by
section width.
Letter “P” preceding the size designation:
Passenger car tire based on U.S. design
standards.
Letter “LT” preceding the size designation:
Light Truck tire based on U.S. design
standards.
Letter “T” preceding the size designation:
Temporary spare tires which are high
pressure compact spares designed for
temporary emergency use only.
Aspect ratio
Tire code
The tire code 3 (컄 page 518) indicates
the tire construction type. The “R” stands
for radial tire type. Letter “D” means diagonal or bias ply construction; letter “B”
means belted-bias ply construction.
Tire load rating
The tire load rating 5 (컄 page 518) is a
numerical code associated with the
maximum load a tire can support.
For example, a load rating of 91 corresponds to a maximum load of 1356 lbs
(615 kg) the tire is designed to support.
See also “Maximum tire load”
(컄 page 523) where the maximum load associated with the load index is indicated in
kilograms and lbs.
At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire
with a speed capability above 149 mph
(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
designation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18).
For additional information, see “Tire speed
rating” (컄 page 520).
519
Operation
Tires and wheels
Warning!
G
The tire load rating must always be at least
half of the GAWR (컄 page 526) of your vehicle. Otherwise, tire failure may be the result
which may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury to you or others.
Always replace rims and tires with the same
designation, manufacturer and type as
shown on the original part.
Warning!
G
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit or vehicle capacity
weight as indicated on the placard located
on the driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 503).
Overloading the tires can overheat them,
possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the
tires can also result in handling or steering
problems, or brake failure.
520
For additional information on tire load
rating, see “Load identification”
(컄 page 521).
i Tire load rating 5 (컄 page 518) and tire
speed rating 6 (컄 page 518) are also referred
to as “service description”.
i Tire load rating 5 (컄 page 518) and tire
speed rating 6 (컄 page 518) are also referred
to as “service description”.
Summer tires
Index
Speed rating
Q
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
Tire speed rating
R
up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
The tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 518)
indicates the approved maximum speed
for the tire.
S
up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
T
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
W
up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y
up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
(Y)
above 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR
above 149 mph (240 km/h)
Warning!
G
Even when permitted by law, never operate
a vehicle at speeds greater than the
maximum speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire
failure, causing loss of vehicle control and
possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury and possible death, for you
and for others.
앫
At the tire manufacturer’s option, any
tire with a speed capability above
149 mph (240 km/h) can include a
“ZR” in the size designation (for example: 245/40 ZR18). To determine the
maximum speed capability of the tire,
Operation
Tires and wheels
the service description for the tire must
be referred to. The service description
is comprised of the tire load rating 5
(컄 page 518) and the tire speed
rating 6 (컄 page 518).
앫
If your tire includes “ZR” in the size
designation and no service
description 5 and 6 (컄 page 518) is
given, the tire manufacturer must be
consulted for the maximum speed capability.
If a service description 5 and 6
(컄 page 518) is given, the speed capability is limited by the speed symbol in
the service description.
Example: 245/40 ZR18 97Y.
In this example, “97Y” is the service
description. The letter “Y” designates
the speed rating and the speed capability of the tire is limited to 186 mph
(300 km/h).
Any tire with a speed capability above
186 mph (300 km/h) must include a
“ZR” in the size designation AND the
service description must be placed in
parenthesis.
Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99Y).
The “(Y)” speed rating in parenthesis
designates the maximum speed capability of the tire as being above
186 mph (300 km/h). Consult the tire
manufacturer for the actual maximum
permissible speed of the tire.
i Not all M+S rated tires provide special winter performance. Make sure the tires you use
show M+S and the mountain/snowflake.marking on the tire sidewall. These
tires meet specific snow traction performance
requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of
Canada (RAC) and have been designed specifically for use in snow conditions.
Load identification
All-season and winter tires
Index
Speed rating
Q M+S
1
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
T M+S
1
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
M+S1
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
1
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
H
V M+S
1
or M+S.for winter tires
1 Load identification
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
521
Operation
Tires and wheels
In addition to tire load rating, special load
information may be molded into the tire
sidewall following the letter designating
the tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 518).
No specification given: absence of any text
(like in above example) indicates a
standard load (SL) tire.
safety matters concerning tires and gives
purchasers the means to easily identify
such tires.
The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s
identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type
code” and “Date of manufacture”.
DOT (Department of Transportation)
A tire branding symbol 1 (컄 page 522)
which denotes the tire meets requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Manufacturer’s identification mark
The manufacturer’s identification mark 2
(컄 page 522) denotes the tire
manufacturer.
XL (Extra Load): designates an extra load
(or reinforced) tire.
Light Load: designates a light load tire.
New tires have a mark with two symbols.
C, D, E: designates load range associated
with the maximum load a tire can carry at
a specified pressure.
Retreaded tires have a mark with four symbols. For more information on retreaded
tires (컄 page 500).
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
U.S. tire regulations require each new tire
manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a
TIN into or onto a sidewall of each tire
produced.
The TIN is a unique identifier which facilitates efforts by tire manufactures to notify
purchasers in recall situations or other
522
1 DOT
2 Manufacturer’s identification mark
3 Tire size
4 Tire type code (at the option of the tire
manufacturer)
5 Date of manufacture
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
Tire size
The code 3 (컄 page 522) indicates the
tire size.
Tire type code
The code 4 (컄 page 522) may, at the
option of the manufacturer, be used as a
descriptive code for identifying significant
characteristics of the tire.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Date of manufacture
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
The date of manufacture 5 (컄 page 522)
identifies the week and year of manufacture.
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
The first two figures identify the week,
starting with “01” to represent the first full
week of the calendar year. The second two
figures represent the year.
For example, “3202” represents the 32nd
week of 2002.
Maximum tire load
Maximum tire inflation pressure
The maximum tire load is the maximum
weight the tires are designed to support.
Warning!
G
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit or vehicle capacity
weight as indicated on the placard located
on the driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 503).
Overloading the tires can overheat them,
possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the
tires can also result in handling or steering
problems, or brake failure.
For more information on tire load rating
(컄 page 519).
For information on calculating total and
cargo load capacities (컄 page 505).
1 Maximum permissible tire inflation
pressure
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
This is the maximum permissible tire
inflation pressure for the tire.
Always follow the recommended tire
inflation pressure (컄 page 509) for proper
tire inflation.
1 Maximum tire load rating
523
Operation
Tires and wheels
Warning!
All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
G
Never exceed the max. tire inflation
pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Treadwear
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are
more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
(U.S. vehicles)
Tire manufacturers are required to grade
tires based on three performance
factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance.
524
1 Treadwear
2 Traction
3 Temperature resistance
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear Traction Temperature
200
AA
A
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly
from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning!
G
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem-
perature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C corresponds to the
minimum level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
Warning!
G
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
excessive heat build-up and possible tire
failure.
Tire ply material
1 Plies in sidewall
2 Plies under tread
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
This marking tells you about the type of
cord and number of plies in the sidewall
and under the tread.
525
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire and loading terminology
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those
standard items which may be replaced) of
automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power
seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that
these items are available as
factory-installed equipment (whether
installed or not).
Bar
DOT (Department of Transportation)
Another metric unit for air pressure. There
are 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi)
to 1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa)
to 1 bar.
A tire branding symbol which denotes the
tire meets requirements of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
Bead
The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the
rim.
Cold tire inflation pressure
Air pressure
The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire.
Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi), or kilopascal (kPa) or
bars.
Aspect ratio
Dimensional relationship between tire
section height and section width
expressed in percentage.
526
Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle
has been sitting for at least 3 hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum
capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so
equipped, air conditioning and additional
optional equipment, but without passengers and cargo.
The GAWR is the maximum permissible
axle weight. The gross vehicle weight on
each axle must never exceed the GAWR for
the front and rear axle indicated on the
Certification label located on the driver’s
door B-pillar.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
The GVW comprises the weight of the
vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel,
installed accessories, passengers and
cargo and, if applicable, trailer tongue
load. The GVW must never exceed the
GVWR indicated on the Certification label
located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
Operation
Tires and wheels
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
Maximum tire inflation pressure
PSI (Pounds per square inch)
This is the maximum permissible vehicle
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of
the vehicle including all options, passengers, fuel, and cargo and, if applicable,
trailer tongue load). It is indicated on
Certification label located on the driver’s
door B-pillar.
This number is the greatest amount of air
pressure that should ever be put in the tire
under normal driving conditions.
A standard unit of measure for air pressure
-> bar, kilopascal (kPa).
Kilopascal (kPa)
The metric unit for air pressure. There are
6.9 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 psi; another
metric unit for air pressure is bars. There
are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar.
Maximum load rating
The maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The sum of curb weight, accessory weight,
vehicle capacity weight and production
options weight.
Recommended tire inflation pressure
Normal occupant weight
The number of occupants the vehicle is
designed to seat, multiplied by
68 kilograms (150 lbs).
Recommended tire inflation pressure
listed on placard located on driver’s door
B-pillar for normal driving conditions.
Provides best handling, tread life and
riding comfort.
Occupant distribution
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle
at their designated seating positions.
Production options weight
The combined weight of those installed
regular production options weighing over
5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those
standard items which they replace, not
previously considered in curb weight or
accessory weight, including heavy duty
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
battery, and special trim.
Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire beads are
seated.
Sidewall
The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Unique identifier which facilitates efforts
by tire manufacturers to notify purchasers
in recall situations or other safety matters
527
Operation
Tires and wheels
concerning tires and gives purchases the
means to easily identify such tires. The TIN
is comprised of “Manufacturer’s identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code”
and “Date of manufacture”.
Traction
Vehicle capacity weight
Force exerted by the vehicle on the road
via the tires. The amount of grip provided.
Rated cargo and luggage load plus
68 kilograms (150 lbs) times the vehicle’s
designated seating capacity.
Tire load rating
The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Numerical code associated with the
maximum load a tire can support.
Tire ply composition and material used
This indicates the number of plies or the
number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials
in the tire and sidewall, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
Tire speed rating
Part of tire designation; indicates the
speed range for which a tire is approved.
528
Tread
Treadwear indicators
Narrow bands, sometimes called
“wear bars” that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 in (1.6 mm) of tread
remains.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
A tire information system that provides
consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction,
temperature and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The
ratings are molded into the sidewall of the
tire.
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each axle its
share of the maximum loaded vehicle
weight and dividing it by two.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Rotating tires
Warning!
G
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires
are of the same dimension.
If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size
tires (different tire dimensions front vs.
rear), tire rotation is not possible.
Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles
with tires of the same dimension all
around. If your vehicle is equipped with
tires of the same dimension all around,
tires can be rotated, observing a
front-to-rear rotation pattern that will
maintain the intended rotation (spinning)
direction of the tire (컄 page 503).
In some cases, such as when your vehicle
is equipped with mixed-size tires (different
tire dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation
is not possible.
If applicable to your vehicle’s tire configuration, tires can be rotated according to
the tire manufacturer’s recommended intervals in the tire manufacturer’s warranty
pamphlet located in your vehicle literature
portfolio. If none is available, tires should
be rotated every 3000 to 6000 miles
(5000 to 10000 km), or sooner if necessary, according to the degree of tire wear.
The same rotation (spinning) direction
must be maintained (컄 page 503).
Rotate tires before the characteristic tire
wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder
wear on front tires and tread center wear
on rear tires).
Warning!
G
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. Wheels could become
loose if not tightened with a torque of
110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
Only use Genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
bolts specified for your vehicle’s rims.
For information on wheel change, see the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 629).
Thoroughly clean the mounting face of
wheels and brake disks, i.e. the inner side
of the wheels/tires, during each rotation.
Check for and ensure proper tire inflation
pressure.
529
Operation
Winter driving
Before the onset of winter, have your
vehicle winterized at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. This service
includes:
앫
Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze
concentration.
앫
Addition of cleaning concentrate to the
water of the windshield and headlamp
cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate
“S” to a premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze which is formulated
for below freezing temperatures
(컄 page 666).
앫
앫
Battery test. Battery capacity drops
with decreasing ambient temperature.
A well charged battery helps to make
sure that the engine can be started,
even at low ambient temperatures.
Tire change.
Winter tires
Always use winter tires at temperatures
below 45°F (7°C) and whenever wintry
road conditions prevail. Not all M+S rated
530
tires provide special winter performance.
Make sure the tires you use show the
mountain/snowflake.marking on the
tire sidewall. These tires meet specific
snow traction performance requirements
of the Rubber Manufacturers Association
(RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) and have been designed specifically for use in snow conditions. Use of
winter tires is the only way to achieve the
maximum effectiveness of the ABS, EBP
and ESP® in winter operation.
Always observe the speed rating of the
winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the
maximum speed for which your tires are
rated is below the speed rating of your
vehicle, you must place a notice to this
effect where it will be seen by the driver.
Such notices are available from your tire
dealer or from any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
For safe handling, make sure that all
mounted winter tires are of the same make
and have the same tread design.
If you use your spare tire when winter tires
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that
the difference in tire characteristics may
very well impair turning stability and that
overall driving stability may be reduced.
Adapt your driving style accordingly.
Warning!
G
Winter tires with a tread depth under 1/6 in
(4 mm) must be replaced. They are no
longer suitable for winter operation.
Warning!
G
Have the spare tire replaced with a winter
tire at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Operation
Winter driving
Snow chains
! When driving with snow chains, always select the raised level of the level control system
Airmatic* (컄 page 401). Other settings may result in damage to your vehicle.
Please observe the following guidelines
when using snow chains:
앫
Use of snow chains is not permissible
with all wheel/tire combinations.
앫
Snow chains should only be driven on
snow-covered roads at speeds not to
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains
as soon as possible when driving on roads
without snow.
Snow chains should only be used on
the rear wheels. Follow the manufacturer’s mounting instructions.
앫
i When driving with snow chains, you may
wish to deactivate the ESP® (컄 page 73) before
setting the vehicle in motion. This will improve
the vehicle’s traction.
Only use snow chains that are
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
be glad to advise you on this subject.
앫
Use of snow chains may be prohibited
depending on location. Always check
local and state laws before installing
snow chains.
! Some tire sizes do not leave adequate clearance for snow chains. To help avoid serious damage to your vehicle or tires, use of snow chains is
not permissible with the spare wheel.
For use of snow chains on tire size
255/45 R18 99H M+S., contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
531
Operation
Maintenance
We strongly recommend that you have
your vehicle serviced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, in accordance with
the Maintenance Booklet at the times
called for by the maintenance service indicator.
Starting approximately 1 month before
your next maintenance service is due, one
of the following messages will appear in
the multifunction display while you are
driving or when you switch on the ignition
(example service A):
Failure to have the vehicle maintained in
accordance with the Maintenance Booklet
and maintenance service indicator at the
designated times/mileage will result in
vehicle damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Next Service A due in XXX miles (km)
Next Service A due in XX days
Service A due
Maintenance service indicator
message
The maintenance service indicator message will notify you when your next maintenance service is due.
The maintenance services will be indicated
by showing a service type A through type H
in the multifunction display. Types A
through H are classified based on estimated time needed to perform the maintenance service, ranging
from
“Service A”
(approx. 1 hour)
to
“Service H”
(approx. 8 hours)
532
Refer to Maintenance Booklet for a listing
of maintenance services and intervals they
need to be performed at.
왘
To clear the maintenance service
indicator message: Press L
(컄 page 242).
i Vehicles equipped with FSS PLUS (Flexible
Service System PLUS) only (Canada vehicles):
The interval between maintenance services depends on your driving habits. A gentle driving
style, moderate engine speeds and the avoidance of short-distance trips will lengthen the interval between services.
Operation
Maintenance
Maintenance service term exceeded
If you have exceeded the suggested maintenance service term, you will see the following message in the multifunction
display:
Service A exceeded by XXX miles (km)
Service A exceeded by XX days
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
reset the maintenance service indicator
following a completed maintenance
service.
Calling up the maintenance service
indicator display
i The menu overview can be found on
(컄 page 243).
You can call up the maintenance service indicator display at any time to check when
the next maintenance service is due.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
왘
Press ( or & on multifunction
steering wheel to select “Service”
menu.
왘
Press % or $ to select “ASSYST
PLUS”.
왘
Press #.
The service deadline appears in the
multifunction display.
i If the battery is disconnected, the days of
disconnection will not be included in the count
shown by the maintenance service indicator.
To arrive at the true maintenance service deadline, you will need to subtract these days from
the days shown in the maintenance service indicator message or maintenance service indicator
display.
Resetting the maintenance service
indicator
In the event that the maintenance service
on your vehicle is not carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, you can
have the maintenance service indicator reset. The automotive maintenance facility
carrying out the maintenance service will
find the information for resetting the maintenance service indicator in the maintenance-relevant information for your
vehicle. Such information is available from
either your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or directly from Mercedes-Benz.
i If the maintenance service indicator was inadvertently reset, have an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center correct it.
Only reset if the proper maintenance service has
been performed. Resetting the system without
performing the proper service as called for by
the maintenance service indicator will result in
engine damage and/or other vehicle damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
533
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of vehicle
Warning!
G
Many cleaning products can be hazardous.
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
Always follow the instructions on the particular container. Always open your vehicle’s
doors or windows when cleaning the inside.
Never use fluids or solvents that are not designed for cleaning your vehicle.
Always lock away cleaning products and
keep them out of reach of children.
While in operation, even while parked, your
vehicle is subjected to varying external influences which, if gone unchecked, can attack the paintwork as well as the vehicle
underbody and cause lasting damage.
Such damage is caused not only by extreme and varying climatic conditions, but
also by:
앫
near the ocean
앫
in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
emissions)
Tar
앫
during winter operation
Gravel and stone chipping
You should check your vehicle from time to
time for stone chipping or other damage.
Any damage should be repaired as soon as
possible to prevent corrosion.
앫
Air pollution
앫
Road salt
앫
앫
To avoid paint damage, you should immediately remove:
앫
Grease and oil
앫
Fuel
앫
Coolant
앫
Brake fluid
앫
Bird droppings
앫
Insects
앫
Tree resins, etc.
Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates the aggressiveness and potency of
the above adverse influences.
534
More frequent washings are necessary to
deal with unfavorable conditions:
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody
of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thorough check is a washing of the underbody
followed by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas need to be re-undercoated.
Your vehicle has been treated at the factory with a wax-base rustproofing in the body
cavities which will last for the lifetime of
the vehicle. Post-production treatment is
neither necessary nor recommended by
Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility
of incompatibility between materials used
in the production process and others applied later.
Operation
Vehicle care
We have selected car-care products and
compiled recommendations which are
specially matched to our vehicles and
which always reflect the latest technology.
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved
car-care products at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or
damage due to negligent or incorrect care
cannot always be removed or repaired with
the car-care products recommended here.
In such cases it is best to seek aid at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The following topics deal with the cleaning
and care of your vehicle and give important
“how-to” information as well as references
to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care
products.
Power washer
Paintwork, painted body components
! Follow the instructions provided by the power washer manufacturer on maintaining a distance between the vehicle and the nozzle of the
power washer.
! Affixing stickers, adhesive tape or similar
materials to painted body components may damage the paintwork.
Never use a round nozzle to power-wash tires.
The intense jet of water can result in damage to
the tire.
Always replace a damaged tire.
Always keep the jet of water moving across the
surface. Do not aim directly at electrical parts,
electrical connectors, seals, or other rubber
parts.
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of water, and
a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is in close proximity, i.e. within approximately 3 ft. (approximately 1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently
locked or unlocked.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care
should be applied when water drops on the
paint surface do not “bead up”. This should
normally be done every 3 to 5 months, depending on the climate and washing detergent used.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
should be applied if the paint surface
shows signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of
gloss).
Do not apply any of these products or wax
if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the
hood is still hot.
왘
Tar stains
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry
and become more difficult to remove. A tar
remover is recommended.
Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up
Stick for quick and provisional repairs
of minor paint damage (i.e. chips from
stones, vehicle doors, etc.).
535
Operation
Vehicle care
Engine cleaning
Hand-wash
! Do not clean your vehicle in an automatic
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment,
make sure to protect electrical components and connectors from contact with
water and cleaning agents.
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle
in direct sunlight.
touchless car wash which uses caustic spray.
Otherwise the caustic spray will damage the
paint or ornamental moldings.
Corrosion protection, such as
MB Anticorrosion Wax, should be applied
to the engine compartment after every engine cleaning. Before applying, all control
linkage bushings and joints should be lubricated. The poly-V-belt and all pulleys
should be protected from any wax.
Vehicle washing
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces
of road salt as soon as possible.
When washing the vehicle underbody, do
not forget to clean the inner sides of the
wheels.
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of water, and
a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is in close proximity, i.e. within approximately 3 ft (approximately 1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently
locked or unlocked.
536
왘
Only use a mild car wash detergent,
such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car
Shampoo.
If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it before running it through the automatic car
wash.
왘
Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a diffused jet of water.
! Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in
Direct only a very weak spray towards
the ventilation intake.
왘
Use plenty of water and rinse the
sponge and chamois frequently.
왘
Rinse with clean water and thoroughly
dry with a chamois.
Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on
the finish.
Automatic car wash
You can have your vehicle washed in an automatic car wash from the start. Automatic
car washes without brushes are preferable.
exterior rear view mirrors prior to running the vehicle through an automatic car wash to prevent
damage to the mirrors.
Make sure that the windshield wiper switch is set
to 0 (컄 page 351). Otherwise, the rain sensor
could activate and cause the wipers to move unintentionally. This may lead to vehicle damage.
i After running the vehicle through an automatic car wash, wipe any wax off of the windshield (컄 page 540). This will prevent smears
and reduce wiping noise which can be caused by
residual wax on the windshield.
When leaving the car wash, make sure that the
mirrors are folded out. Otherwise they may vibrate.
Operation
Vehicle care
Ornamental moldings
For regular cleaning and care of ornamental moldings, use a damp cloth.
! Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamental
moldings. Although ornamental moldings may
have chrome appearance, they could be made of
anodized aluminum that will be damaged when
cleaned with chrome cleaner. Instead, use a
damp cloth to clean those ornamental moldings.
For very dirty ornamental moldings of which you
are sure are chrome-plated, use a chrome cleaner. If in doubt whether an ornamental molding is
chrome-plated, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Headlamps, tail lamps, side markers,
turn signal lenses
왘
Cleaning the DISTRONIC Plus* system
sensor cover
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car
Shampoo, with plenty of water.
! Only use window cleaning solutions that are
suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Window cleaning solutions which are not suitable may damage
the plastic lamp lenses of the headlamps. Therefore, do not use abrasives, solvents or cleaners
that contain solvents.
Never apply strong force and only use a soft,
non-scratching cloth when cleaning the lenses.
Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry
cloth or sponge.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the lens
surface.
1 DISTRONIC Plus system sensor cover
왘
Switch off the ignition (컄 page 315).
왘
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car
Shampoo, with plenty of water and a
non-scratching cloth to clean sensor
cover 1.
! To prevent scratches or damage, never apply strong force and only use a soft, non-scratching cloth when cleaning the sensor cover 1. Do
not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth
or sponge.
537
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning the Parktronic* system
sensors
! To prevent scratches, never apply strong
force and only use a soft, non-scratching cloth
when cleaning the sensors. Do not attempt to
wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth or sponge.
Cleaning the Park Assist* system
sensors
! Do not use any dry, rough or hard cloths and
do not scrub. You could otherwise scratch or
damage the surface.
Cleaning of the Dynamic Rear View
Monitor lens*
The sensors are integrated in the front and
rear bumpers and cannot be seen from the
outside.
1 Parktronic system sensors
왘
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car
Shampoo, with plenty of water and a
soft, non-scratching cloth to clean
sensors 1 on the bumpers.
! Do not apply strong pressure to the sensor
covers. Applying strong pressure may damage
the sensor covers.
Follow the instructions provided by the power
washer manufacturer on maintaining a distance
between the vehicle and the nozzle of the power
washer.
538
1 Camera lens
Position of sensors
왘
Clean bumper area near sensors with
water, shampoo and a soft cloth.
왘
Only clean the camera lens 1 with
clean water and a soft cloth.
왘
Be careful not to apply wax to the camera lens 1 when waxing the vehicle. If
necessary, remove the wax using a
mixture of commercially available car
shampoo and water.
Operation
Vehicle care
! Do not clean the camera and the area
around the camera:
앫
with a high-pressure cleaner
앫
with a dry cloth and high pressure
앫
with aggressive cleaning agents
You could otherwise damage the camera.
Cleaning the windshield in front of the
Night View Assist camera*
! Do not clean the lens of the Night View As-
1 Recessed handles of camera cover
2 Camera
sist camera. If the camera lens is dirty, please
contact a qualified specialist workshop such as a
Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
왘
Clean inside of windshield in front of
camera 2 with a soft cloth.
왘
Use recessed handles 1 to swing
camera cover up.
! If you use a windshield cleaning product,
Use recessed handles 1 to swing
camera cover downward.
make sure that none of the cleaning product
comes into contact with the lens of the Night
View Assist camera.
539
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning the windows and the wiper
blades
! If the windshield wipers leave smears on the
windshield after the vehicle has been driven
through an automatic car wash, wax or other residue is on the windshield. Clean the windshield
with washer fluid shortly after cleaning the car in
an automatic car wash (컄 page 352).
! The windshield wipers must be in a vertical
position before folding them away from the windshield. They could otherwise damage the hood.
Never open the hood when the wiper arms are
folded forward.
왘
Make sure the hood is fully closed.
왘
Place wiper arms in vertical position
(컄 page 627).
왘
Make sure the vehicle’s on-board electronics have status 0 (컄 page 315).
540
Warning!
G
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the
vehicle’s on-board electronics have
status 0) before cleaning the windshield
and/or the wiper blades. Otherwise, the
wiper motor could suddenly turn on and
cause injury.
왘
Fold the wiper arms forward until they
snap into place.
! While doing so, only touch the wiper arm so
as not to damage the wiper blade inserts.
왘
Clean the wiper blade inserts with a
clean cloth and detergent solution.
왘
Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild window cleaning solution on all outside
and inside glass surfaces.
An automotive glass cleaner is recommended.
! Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto
the windshield before turning the SmartKey in
the starter switch or pressing the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*).
Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm
back. If released, the force of the impact from
the tensioning spring could crack the windshield.
! To clean the window interior, do not use a
dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or cleaners containing solvents. Do not touch the inside of the
front, rear or side windows with hard objects
such as an ice scraper or ring. Doing so may
damage the windows.
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning the panorama roof with
tilt/sliding panel*
The rear part of the tilt/sliding panel has a
protective layer on the inside.
왘
Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild window cleaning solution.
An automotive glass cleaner is recommended.
! Do not use a dry cloth, abrasives, solvents
or cleaners containing solvents. Do not touch
the protective layer with hard objects such as an
ice scraper or ring. Never apply strong force and
only use a soft, non-scratching cloth when cleaning the rear part of the tilt/sliding panel.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the protective layer.
Light alloy wheels
Plastic and rubber parts
If possible, clean wheels once a week.
왘
왘
Use Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel
Care, a soft bristle brush and a strong
spray of water for cleaning the light alloy wheels.
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
washing solution.
! Do not use oil or wax on these parts.
! Only use acid-free cleaning materials. Acid
Instrument cluster and cup holders
may cause corrosion or damage the clear coat.
왘
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
washing solution.
왘
Wipe with a cloth moistened in a lukewarm solution.
! The vehicle should not be parked for an extended period of time immediately after it has
been cleaned, especially not after the wheel rims
have been cleaned with wheel rim cleaner.
Wheel rim cleaners can lead to increased corrosion of the brake disks and brake pads. Therefore, the vehicle’s brake system should always
be warmed-up before it is parked after cleaning.
To do so, please drive your vehicle for several
minutes to allow the brakes to dry.
! To prevent scratches, do not use scouring
agents.
When applying Mercedes-Benz approved Tire
Care and Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care
products, take care not to spray them on the
brake disks.
541
Operation
Vehicle care
Hard plastic trim items
Seat belts
Leather upholstery
왘
왘
왘
Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
Care, a soft, lint-free cloth and apply
with light pressure.
! To prevent scratches, do not use scouring
agents.
Only use clear, lukewarm water and
soap.
! The webbing must not be treated with
chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the webbing at temperatures above 176°F (80°C) or in
direct sunlight.
Steering wheel
왘
Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes-Benz
approved Leather Care.
Carpets
왘
Use Mercedes-Benz approved Carpet
and Fabric Care for cleaning the carpets.
Headliner and shelf below rear window
왘
Use a soft bristle brush or a dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive dirt.
542
Warning!
G
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Upholstery
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing
clothing that have the tendency to give off
coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause
the upholstery to become permanently discolored. By lining the seats with a proper
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration
will be prevented.
Wipe leather upholstery with a damp
cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with
Mercedes-Benz approved Leather
Care.
Exercise particular care when cleaning perforated leather as its underside should not
become wet.
Wood trims
왘
Dampen cloth using water and use
damp cloth to clean wood trims in your
vehicle.
! Do not use solvents like tar remover or
wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as these
may be abrasive.
! S 600 only: Do not cover the luxury active
head restraints*.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Where will I find ...?
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Resetting activated head restraints
(S 600 only)
Replacing SmartKey batteries
Replacing bulbs
Replacing wiper blades
Flat tire
Batteries
Jump starting
Towing the vehicle
Fuses
543
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Lamps in instrument cluster
Problem
-
General information:
If any of the following lamps in the instrument cluster fails to come on during the
Possible cause/consequence
The yellow Antilock Brake
System (ABS) indicator lamp
comes on while the engine is
running.
bulb self-check when switching on the ignition, have the respective bulb checked and
replaced if necessary.
Suggested solution
The ABS has detected a malfunction and
왘 Continue driving with added caution.
has switched off. The BAS, ESP® and
Wheels may lock during hard braking,
reducing steering capability.
PRE-SAFE® are also switched off (see messages in multifunction display).
왘 Read and observe messages in the mulThe brake system is still functioning nortifunction display (컄 page 557).
mally but without the ABS available.
왘 Have the system checked at an authoIf the ABS control unit is malfunctioning,
rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
other systems such as Parktronic*, DISpossible.
TRONIC Plus*, navigation system, Park AsFailure to follow these instructions increassist* and the automatic transmission may
es the risk of an accident.
also be malfunctioning.
The charging voltage has fallen below
10 volts. The ABS has switched off.
When the voltage is above this value again,
the ABS is operational again and the ABS inThe battery may not be charged sufficiently. dicator lamp should go out.
If the ABS indicator lamp does not go out:
왘
544
Have the generator (alternator) and the
battery checked.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem
;
(USA only)
3
(Canada only)
v
Possible cause/consequence
The red brake warning
lamp comes on while the
engine is running. In addition, the yellow ABS malfunction indicator lamp,
and the yellow ESP®
warning lamp come on
and a warning will sound.
Suggested solution
A malfunction in the Electronic Brake Pro- 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
portioning (EBP) was detected. The ABS,
Wheels may lock during hard braking,
BAS, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are also
reducing steering capability.
switched off (see messages in multifunction
왘 Read and observe messages in the muldisplay).
tifunction display (컄 page 557).
The brake system continues to function
왘 Have the system checked at an authonormally, but without electronic support.
rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
v
The yellow ABS malfunction indicator lamp, and
the yellow ESP® warning
lamp come on while the
engine is running and a
warning will sound.
ABS and ESP® are switched off due to a
malfunction.
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
Wheels may lock during hard braking,
reducing steering capability.
The BAS, EBP and PRE-SAFE® are also
switched off (see messages in multifunction 왘 Read and observe messages in the muldisplay).
tifunction display (컄 page 557).
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
545
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem
0
(USA only)
!
(Canada only)
;
(USA only)
3
(Canada only)
Warning!
Possible cause/consequence
The red indicator lamp
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning 왘 Read and observe messages in the mulfor the electric parking or defective.
tifunction display (컄 page 557).
brake flashes and/or the
왘 Have the system checked at an authoyellow warning lamp for
rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
the electric parking brake
possible.
is on.
The red brake warning
lamp comes on while
driving and you hear a
warning sound.
G
Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have your
brake system checked immediately if the
brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add
There is insufficient brake fluid in the reser- 왘 Risk of accident! Do not drive any furvoir.
ther. Consult a Mercedes-Benz Center.
Under no circumstances should you top
up the brake fluid. This will not solve the
problem.
brake fluid before checking the brake
system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir
can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire.
You can be seriously burned.
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or
below, have the brake system checked for brake
pad thickness and leaks.
546
Suggested solution
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem
±
Possible cause/consequence
The yellow engine malfunc- There is a malfunction in:
tion indicator lamp comes
앫 The fuel management system
on while driving.
앫 The ignition system
앫
The emission control system
앫
Systems which affect emissions
Such malfunctions may result in excessive
emissions values and may switch the engine to its limp-home (emergency operation) mode.
Suggested solution
왘
Have the vehicle checked as soon as
possible by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
An on-board diagnostic connector is
used by the service station to link the
vehicle to the shop diagnostics system.
It allows the accurate identification of
system malfunctions through the readout of diagnostic trouble codes. It is located in the front left area of the
footwell.
i Some states may by law require you to visit
a workshop immediately as soon as the engine
malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Check local requirements.
547
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem
±
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solution
The yellow engine malfunc- A loss of pressure has been detected in the 왘 Check the fuel cap.
tion indicator lamp comes fuel system. The fuel cap may not be closed If it is not closed properly:
on while driving.
properly or the fuel system may be leaky.
왘 Close the fuel cap.
If it is closed properly:
Your fuel tank is empty.
왘
Have the fuel system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
After refueling, start, turn off, and restart the engine three or four times in
succession.
The limp-home mode is canceled. You do
not need to have your vehicle checked.
548
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solution
l
Only vehicles with DISTRONIC You are too close to the vehicle in front of
Plus*: The red distance warning you to maintain selected speed.
lamp comes on while driving.
l
Only vehicles with DISTRONIC 앫 You are gaining too rapidly on the vehi- 왘 Apply the brakes immediately.
Plus*: The red distance warning
cle ahead of you.
왘 Carefully observe the traffic situation.
lamp comes on while driving
You may need to brake or maneuver to
앫 The distance warning system has recogand you hear a warning sound.
avoid hitting an obstacle.
nized a stationary obstacle on your
probable line of travel.
v
The yellow ESP® warning lamp
flashes while driving.
왘
Apply the brakes immediately to increase the following distance.
The ESP® or ETS has come into operation 왘 When driving off, apply as little throttle
because of detected traction loss in at least
as possible.
one tire.
왘 While driving, ease up on the acceleraCruise control and DISTRONIC Plus* are detor.
activated.
왘 Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
왘
Do not deactivate the ESP®. Exceptions:
(컄 page 73).
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
549
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem
v
Possible cause/consequence
®
The yellow ESP warning lamp
comes on while the engine is
running.
®
The ESP is deactivated.
Suggested solution
왘
Risk of accident!
Switch the ESP® back on (컄 page 72).
Exceptions: (컄 page 73).
®
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail- If the ESP cannot be switched back on:
ing road, weather, and traffic conditions.
왘 Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
ESP® is switched off due to a malfunction. 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Risk of accident!
왘
Read and observe messages in the multifunction display (컄 page 557).
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road, weather, and traffic conditions.
왘 Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
The yellow fuel tank reserve
warning lamp in the fuel gauge
comes on while driving.
<
550
The fuel level has gone below the reserve
mark.
왘
Refuel at the next gas station
(컄 page 489).
The red seat belt telltale comes The seat belt telltale reminds you and your 왘 Fasten your seat belts.
on and a warning chime sounds passengers to fasten your seat belts before
The seat belt telltale goes out and the
for approximately 6 seconds af- driving off.
warning chime stops sounding.
ter starting the engine with all
doors closed.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem
<
Possible cause/consequence
The red seat belt telltale remains illuminated after driving
off. The vehicle’s speed does
not exceed 15 mph (25 km/h).
Suggested solution
You and/or your front passenger have for- 왘 Fasten your seat belts.
gotten to fasten your seat belts.
or
There are items placed on the front passen왘 Remove the items from the front pasger seat and therefore the system senses
senger seat and put them in a safe
the front passenger seat as being occupied.
place.
The seat belt telltale goes out.
<
The red seat belt telltale flashes
and you additionally hear an intermittent warning chime with
increasing intensity for a maximum of 60 seconds from the
time the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h).
You and/or your front passenger have for- 왘 Fasten your seat belts.
gotten to fasten your seat belts.
or
There are items placed on the front passen왘 Remove the items from the front pasger seat and therefore the system senses
senger seat and put them in a safe
the front passenger seat as being occupied.
place.
The seat belt telltale goes out and the
warning chime stops sounding.
i After 60 seconds with an unfastened seat
belt the warning chime stops sounding and the
seat belt telltale illuminates continuously. The
seat belt telltale will only go out if both, the driver
and front passenger’s, seat belt are fastened, or
the vehicle is standing still and a front door is
opened.
551
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem
=
Possible cause/consequence
The red SRS indicator lamp
comes on while the engine is
running.
Warning!
G
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may
not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal
injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and
unnecessarily which could result in an accident and/or injury to you or to others.
552
Suggested solution
There is a malfunction in the supplemental 왘 Drive with added caution to the nearest
restraint systems. The air bags or emergenauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
cy tensioning devices (ETDs) could deploy
unexpectedly or fail to activate in an accident.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem
H
Possible cause/consequence
Combination low tire presThe Advanced TPMS* detects a loss of
sure/TPMS malfunction telltale pressure in at least one tire.
for the Advanced TPMS* illuminates continuously.
Suggested solution
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
avoiding abrupt steering and braking
maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation
around you.
왘
Read and observe messages in the multifunction display (컄 page 557).
If the tire inflation pressure in the respective tire(s) has (have) been corrected, the
combination low tire pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale goes out after few minutes
driving.
H
Combination low tire presThere is a malfunction in the Advanced
sure/TPMS malfunction telltale TPMS*.
for the Advanced TPMS* flashes
for 60 seconds and then stays illuminated.
왘
Read and observe messages in the multifunction display (컄 page 557).
왘
Have the Advanced TPMS* checked by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
After the malfunction has been remedied
the combination low tire pressure/TPMS
malfunction telltale goes out after few
minutes driving.
553
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Warning!
G
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressure
label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or the tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
554
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately
one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing
one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle
to ensure that the replacement or alternate
tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue
to function properly.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Air bag off indicator lamp
Problem
Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution
59
The system is malfunctioning.
The front passenger front
air bag off indicator lamp
illuminates and remains illuminated with the weight
of a typical adult or someone larger than a small individual on the front
passenger seat.
Warning!
왘
Have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Also read and observe any messages in the multifunction display
and follow corrective steps (컄 page 564).
G
If the 59 indicator lamp
illuminates and remains illuminated with the
weight of a typical adult or someone larger
than a small individual on the front passenger seat, do not have any passenger use the
front passenger seat until the system has
been repaired.
555
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem
Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution
59
The system is malfunctioning.
The front passenger front
air bag off indicator lamp
does not illuminate and/or
does not remain illuminated with the weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a
standard child restraint or
less on the front passenger seat.
Warning!
G
If the 59 indicator lamp does
not illuminate or remains out with the
weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a
standard child restraint or less on the front
556
왘
Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat and
check installation of the child seat.
왘
Make sure no objects applying supplemental weight onto the seat
are present.
왘
Make sure no objects which apply forces to the seat are present
(e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged behind or around
the seat, head restraints pushing against roof etc.). The system may
recognize such forces as supplemental weight.
왘
If the front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp remains out,
have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not transport a child on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
왘
Also read and observe any messages in the multifunction display
and follow corrective steps (컄 page 564).
passenger seat, do not transport a child on
the front passenger seat until the system
has been repaired.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Warning and malfunction messages appear in the multifunction display located in
the instrument cluster.
Certain warning and malfunction messages are accompanied by an audible signal.
High-priority messages are shown in red
on the multifunction display. Messages of
lower priority are also shown in yellow or
white.
Address these messages accordingly and
follow the additional instructions given in
this Operator’s Manual.
Certain messages of high priority cannot
be cleared from the multifunction display
using # or L on the multifunction
steering wheel (컄 page 242).
Other messages of high priority and messages of less immediate priority can be
cleared from the multifunction display
using # or L. They are then stored
in the vehicle status message memory
(컄 page 253). Remember that clearing a
message will only make the message disappear. Clearing a message will not correct the condition that caused the
message to appear.
Warning!
G
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative.
As a result, you will not be able to see information about your driving conditions, such
as speed or outside temperature, warning/indicator lamps, malfunction/warning
messages or the failure of any systems.
Driving characteristics may be impaired.
If you must continue to drive, please do so
with added caution. Visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
557
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Warning!
G
All categories of messages contain important information which should be taken note
of and, where a malfunction is indicated, addressed as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Failure to repair condition noted may cause
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty, or result in property damage or personal injury.
i Switching on the ignition causes all instrument cluster lamps (except high beam headlamp
indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps
unless activated) as well as the multifunction display to come on. Make sure the lamps and multifunction display are in working order before
starting your journey.
558
On the pages that follow, you will find a
compilation of the most important warning
and malfunction messages that may appear in the malfunction display.
For your convenience the messages are divided into two sections:
앫
Text messages (컄 page 559)
앫
Symbol messages (컄 page 570)
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Text messages
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Apply brake
to shift
from ’P’
You have tried to Shift the automatic trans- 왘 Step on brake.
mission to D, R or N without stepping on
the brake.
USA only:
Cruise control
- - - mph
You have tried to switch on cruise control
below a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h).
왘
Drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and save the speed.
ESP® is deactivated.
왘
Activate ESP® (컄 page 72).
Canada only:
Cruise control
- - - km/h
The automatic transmission is in position P, 왘 Shift the automatic transmission to D (컄 page 367).
R or N.
The system is overheated.
왘
Wait until the system cools down.
The vehicle is secured in place by the elec- 왘 Release electric parking brake (컄 page 364).
tric parking brake.
Cruise control
inoperative
Cruise control is malfunctioning.
왘
Have cruise control checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
559
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
왘
Check if the radar sensors* may be switched on (컄 page 256).
왘
Switch on the radar sensors* using the instrument cluster
control system.
DISTRONIC Plus* is switched off and is
temporarily unavailable.
왘
Clean the DISTRONIC Plus* cover in the radiator grille
(컄 page 537).
DISTRONIC Plus* is deactivated if:
왘
Restart the vehicle.
DISTRONIC PLUS
You attempt to activate DISTRONIC Plus*
currently unavailable even though you have switched off the raSee Oper. Manual
dar sensors* on the vehicle.
앫
the DISTRONIC Plus* cover in the radia- 왘 Try activating DISTRONIC Plus* again later.
tor grille is dirty
왘 Wait until the system cools down or the battery recovers.
앫 the radar sensors* does not sense any
DISTRONIC Plus* will be operational again without you needing to
other vehicles or objects, i.e. road sign restart the engine if:
or similar to this, for a long time
앫 the dirt (e.g. slush) loosens while you are driving
앫 the system is overheated
앫 the system detects that the sensors* are fully available again
앫 its function is impaired as a result of
앫 the message in the multifunction display disappears
heavy precipitation or fog
앫
the battery voltage is insufficient
DISTRONIC Plus* is switched off because 왘 Wait until the message in the multifunction display disappears.
the radar sensor system* is temporarily inoperative due to electromagnetic interference near television and radio transmitter
stations, toll stations, speed measuring systems, etc.
560
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
DISTRONIC PLUS
inoperative
DISTRONIC Plus* is malfunctioning.
왘
DISTRONIC PLUS
passive
You have depressed the accelerator pedal, 왘 Release the accelerator pedal.
DISTRONIC Plus* is no longer controlling
the speed of the vehicle.
USA only:
DISTRONIC PLUS
- - - mph
You have attempted to activate DISTRONIC 왘 Drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and activate DISTRONIC
Plus* at a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h)
Plus* again.
without the vehicle in front being displayed
in the multifunction display (컄 page 385).
Canada only:
DISTRONIC PLUS
- - - km/h
ESP® is deactivated.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Activate ESP® (컄 page 72).
The automatic transmission is in position P, 왘 Shift the automatic transmission to D (컄 page 367).
R or N.
The system is overheated.
왘
Wait until the system cools down.
The vehicle is secured in place by the elec- 왘 Release electric parking brake (컄 page 364).
tric parking brake.
The driver’s door is open and the drivers
seat belt is unbuckled.
왘
Close the driver’s door and fasten your seat belt.
The hood is open.
왘
Close the hood (컄 page 493).
561
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
Door Open
Vehicle not in Park
You have opened the driver’s
door and the automatic transmission is still in position D, R
or N.
왘
Front passenger
airbag disabled
See Oper. Manual
Front passenger front air bag is
deactivated while driving even
though an adult or someone
larger than a small individual is
occupying the front passenger
seat. Forces acting on the seat
may make the system sense a
decrease in weight.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and check the front
passenger seat for the following:
Before you leave the vehicle, make sure that the automatic transmission
is shift to position P and that the parking brake is engaged.
왘
Switch off the ignition (컄 page 315).
왘
Have the front passenger vacate the seat and exit the vehicle.
왘
Adjust the seat in a height position (컄 page 318).
왘
Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the seat are present (e.g.
objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged underneath, behind or
around the seat). Such forces may cause the system to sense that an occupant of a lesser weight than actually present is on the front passenger
seat.
왘
Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door and switch on
the ignition (컄 page 315).
Monitor the 59 indicator lamp right of the instrument cluster
(컄 page 53) and the multifunction display in the instrument cluster
(컄 page 241) for the following:
(Continued on next page)
562
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition switched on (컄 page 315),
Front passenger
airbag disabled
See Oper. Manual
앫
the 59 indicator lamp right of the instrument cluster should
illuminate and remain illuminated, indicating that the OCS (컄 page 50)
has deactivated the air bag.
앫
the message “Front passenger airbag enabled See Oper. Manual” or the
message “Front passenger airbag disabled See Oper. Manual” should not
appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied.
Wait at last 60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary check
cycles and to make sure neither message appears in the multifunction display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front passenger seat again.
Depending on the front passenger classification sensed by the OCS
(컄 page 50), the 59 indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go
out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working properly. Have the
system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
G
If the 59 indicator lamp remains illuminated with an adult occupant on
the front passenger seat even after
performing the above corrective steps, do
not have any passenger use the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
563
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
Front passenger
airbag enabled
See Oper. Manual
Front passenger front air bag is
activated while driving even
though a child, small individual,
or object below the system’s
weight threshold is on the front
passenger seat, or the front passenger seat is empty. Objects
on the seat or forces acting on
the seat may make the system
sense supplemental weight.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and check the front
passenger seat for the following:
왘
Switch off the ignition (컄 page 315).
왘
Remove child and child restraint from front passenger seat and properly
secure the child in rear seat employing the child restraint if necessary.
왘
Remove any other items from on and around the front passenger seat and
make sure the storage bag on the back of the front passenger seat is empty.
왘
Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the seat are present (e.g.
objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged behind or around the seat,
head restraints pushing against roof etc.). The system may recognize such
forces as supplemental weight and sense that an occupant on the front
passenger seat is of a greater weight than actually present.
왘
Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door and switch on
the ignition (컄 page 315).
Monitor the 59 indicator lamp right of the instrument cluster
(컄 page 53) and the multifunction display in the instrument cluster
(컄 page 241) for the following:
(Continued on next page)
564
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition switched on (컄 page 315),
Front passenger
airbag enabled
See Oper. Manual
앫
the 59 indicator lamp right of the instrument cluster should
illuminate and remain illuminated, indicating that the OCS (컄 page 50)
has deactivated the air bag.
앫
the message “Front passenger airbag enabled See Oper. Manual” or the
message “Front passenger airbag disabled See Oper. Manual” should not
appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied.
Wait at last 60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary check
cycles and to make sure neither message appears in the multifunction display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front passenger seat again.
Depending on the front passenger classification sensed by the OCS
(컄 page 50), the 59 indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go
out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working properly. Have the
system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
G
If the 59 indicator lamp remains illuminated with an adult occupant on
the front passenger seat even after
performing the above corrective steps, do
not have any passenger use the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
565
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Next Service X
due in ... days
due in ... mls (km)
Service X must be carried out in ... days or 왘 Have the maintenance service carried out by an authorized
after ... miles (kilometers) (컄 page 532).
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Only shift to
position 'P' when
vehicle is stationary
You have tried to Shift the automatic trans- 왘 Stop the vehicle.
mission to P using the gear selector lever although the vehicle is still in motion.
Park Assist
You attempt to activate Park Assist* even 왘 Check if the radar sensors* may be switched on (컄 page 256).
currently unavailable though you have switched off the radar sen왘 Switch on the radar sensors* using the instrument cluster
See Oper. Manual
sors* on the vehicle.
control system.
Park Assist* is deactivated because the
왘 Clean the front and rear bumper (컄 page 538).
area around the sensors* in the front or the
rear bumper (컄 page 538) is dirty.
Park Assist* is deactivated because the
battery voltage is insufficient.
왘
Have the battery checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Park Assist* is switched off because the ra- 왘 Wait until the message in the multifunction display disappears.
dar sensor system* is temporarily inoperative due to electromagnetic interference
near television and radio transmitter stations, toll stations, speed measuring systems, etc.
566
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Park Assist
inoperative
Park Assist* is unavailable due to a malfunction.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
PRE-SAFE
PRE-SAFE® itself has failed. All other occu- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
inoperative
pant safety systems, such as the air bags,
See Owner's Manual are still available.
Check tires
then restart
Run Flat Indicator
There was a warning message about a loss 왘 Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required
in tire inflation pressure and the Run Flat In(컄 page 514).
dicator* has not been restarted yet.
왘 Then restart the Run Flat Indicator* (컄 page 515).
Radar sensor
deactivated
See Oper. Manual
You attempt to activate DISTRONIC Plus* 왘 Check if the radar sensors* may be switched on (컄 page 256).
or Park Assist* even though you have
왘 Switch on the radar sensors* using the instrument cluster
switched off the radar sensors* on the vehicontrol system.
cle.
Run Flat Indicator
inoperative
The Run Flat Indicator* is malfunctioning.
Service X
due
Service X must be carried out (컄 page 532). 왘 Have the maintenance service carried out by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Service X exceeded
by X days
by XXX mls (km)
Service X must be carried within the next ... 왘 Have the maintenance service carried out by an authorized
or before you have driven ... miles (kilomeMercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
ters) (컄 page 532).
Shift to P or N
to start engine
You have attempted to start the engine
왘 Shift the automatic transmission to P or N (컄 page 367).
while the automatic transmission was set to
position R or D.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
567
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Tire pressure
Check tires
The pressure has fallen significantly in one 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering
or more tires.
and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around
you.
왘
Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required
(컄 page 511).
왘
If necessary, change the wheel (컄 page 629).
왘
Restart the Run Flat Indicator* after adjusting the tire inflation pressure values (컄 page 516).
Tire pressure monitor The Advanced TPMS* or a wheel sensor is 왘 Have the Advanced TPMS* checked by an authorized
inoperative
malfunctioning.
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tire pressure monitor The Advanced TPMS* is deactivated be왘 Have the wheel sensors installed by an authorized
inoperative
cause wheels without proper sensors were
Mercedes-Benz Center.
No wheel sensors
installed.
As soon as all wheels with sensors have been mounted, the
Advanced TPMS* is switched back on after driving for several minutes.
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
568
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire will cause excessive
heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Tire pressure monitor The Advanced TPMS* is unable to monitor As soon as the causes for the malfunction are no longer present,
currently unavailable the tire inflation pressure due to:
the Advanced TPMS* automatically becomes active again after
a few minutes driving.
앫 a nearby radio interference source
앫
the on-board voltage is too low
앫
excessive wheel sensor temperatures
Tire pressures
Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*:
왘 Drive the vehicle for a few minutes.
displayed after driving
The tire inflation pressure is being checked.
a few minutes
Visit workshop
The automatic transmission cannot be shift- If the automatic transmission is shift to position D:
without shifting gears ed out of the set position because of a mal왘 Without changing the automatic transmission from
function.
position D, drive to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If the automatic transmission is shift to position N, R or P:
왘
Do not drive.
왘
Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
569
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Symbol messages
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Malfunction
Stop Vehicle!
Possible solution
You have started driving although the vehi- 왘 Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
cle level is still too low.
so.
The vehicle is raised. The ABC* message
goes out after a few seconds.
왘
Wait until the message disappears from the
multifunction display.
You may then drive off.
The vehicle is losing oil.
왘
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
왘
Call Roadside Assistance.
왘
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Do not turn steering wheel too far to avoid
damaging the front fenders.
왘
Listen for scraping noises.
왘
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
The ABC* message is continuously shown.
ABC* is malfunctioning.
The ABC* message is continuously shown.
570
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Malfunction
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The capability of the ABC* system is restricted. This can impair the handling.
왘
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
왘
Do not drive off.
왘
Wait until the message disappears from the
multifunction display.
Vehicle rising
The vehicle’s level is too low while at a
Please wait a moment standstill. The vehicle will be raised.
You may then drive off.
571
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause/consequence
ABS and ESP
inoperative
See Oper. Manual
Possible solution
ABS, ESP as well as PRE-SAFE are
switched off due to a malfunction. BAS is
also switched off.
왘
Continue driving with added caution. Wheels
may lock during hard braking, reducing steering capability.
The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ABS available.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
®
®
Failure to follow these instructions increases the
risk of an accident.
ABS and ESP
currently unavailable
See Oper. Manual
ABS, ESP® as well as PRE-SAFE® are not
왘 Drive a short distance with gentle turns
available due to a malfunction. BAS is also
above a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
switched off. It is possible that the self-diagThe message disappears when ABS and ESP®
nostics have not yet been completed.
are again available.
The brake system still functions normally.
The ABS, ESP® as well as PRE-SAFE® were
deactivated because of insufficient power
supply. The charging voltage has fallen below 10 volts.
When the voltage is above this value again, the
ABS, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are operational again
and the message in the multifunction display
should disappear.
The brake system still functions normally If the message in the multifunction display does
but without the ABS, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® not disappear:
available.
왘 Have the generator (alternator) and the battery checked.
572
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Check brake
fluid level
(USA only)
Possible solution
There is insufficient brake fluid in the reser- 왘 Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle in a safe lovoir.
cation as soon as it is safe to do so and notify
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not
add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem.
(Canada only)
Warning!
G
Driving with the message “Check brake fluid
level ” displayed can result in an accident.
Have your brake system checked immediately. Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake
fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid
catching fire. You can be seriously burned.
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or
below, have the brake system checked for brake
pad thickness and leaks.
573
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Brake immediately
(USA only)
Possible solution
A malfunction has occurred while DISTRON- 왘 While observing surrounding traffic condiIC Plus* was switched on.
tions and when it is safe, immediately depress the brake pedal firmly until the warning
message disappears.
왘
Secure vehicle from rolling away before getting out of it (컄 page 363).
(Canada only)
EBV, ABS, ESP
inoperative
See Oper. Manual
(USA only)
(Canada only)
574
ESP®, EBP and ABS are switched off due to 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
a malfunction. BAS is also switched off. As
왘 Have the system checked at an authorized
a result, PRE-SAFE® is also inoperative.
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the
risk of an accident.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Service
See Oper. Manual
S 600 only:
왘
Brake wear
The brake pads have reached their wear
limit.
(USA only)
Continue driving with added caution.
The brake system sensors are malfunction- 왘 Have the system checked at an authorized
ing. The brake system continues to function
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
normally with full brake force boost.
(Canada only)
왘
Have the brake pads replaced as soon as
possible.
! Brake pad thickness must be visually
checked by a qualified technician at the intervals
specified in the Maintenance Booklet.
575
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Parking brake
See Oper. Manual
(USA only)
Possible solution
The red indicator lamp for the electric park- To release:
ing brake is either on or off and the yellow
왘 Pull handle of electric parking brake
warning lamp for the electric parking brake
(컄 page 364).
comes on.
or
The electric parking brake is malfunction왘 Drive off carefully (컄 page 364).
ing.
왘
(Canada only)
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
or
왘
Release electric parking brake mechanically
(컄 page 616).
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
To engage:
왘
576
Switch off ignition and press handle for electric parking brake until the warning message
on the multifunction display disappears.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Parking brake
See Oper. Manual
(USA only)
Possible solution
The red indicator lamp for the electric park- 왘 Pull handle for electric parking brake
ing brake flashes.
(컄 page 364).
The power supply for the electric parking or
brake was malfunctioning or the electric
왘 Carefully drive off (컄 page 364).
parking brake was previously mechanically
or
released.
왘
(Canada only)
Press handle for electric parking brake until
the warning message disappears from the
multifunction display.
577
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Parking brake
See Oper. Manual
(USA only)
(Canada only)
578
Possible solution
The red indicator lamp for the electric park- 왘 Switch ignition off and back on again, and ening brake flashes and the yellow warning
gage or release electric parking brake
lamp for the electric parking brake lights
(컄 page 364).
up.
or
The electric parking brake is malfunction왘 Carefully drive off (컄 page 364).
ing.
왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
or
왘
Release electric parking brake mechanically
(컄 page 616).
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Parking brake
See Oper. Manual
(USA only)
(Canada only)
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
When you engage or release the electric
parking brake, the red indicator lamp for
the electric parking brake flashes for
approx.10 seconds. Afterward, it goes out
or lights up continuously. The yellow warning lamp for the electric parking brake lights
up.
왘
Carefully drive off (컄 page 364).
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
In the event of overvoltage or undervoltage:
왘
Remove the cause of the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. charge the battery or restart
the engine.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning
or overheated for example due to over- or 왘 Switch ignition off and back on again, and enundervoltage.
gage or release electric parking brake
(컄 page 364).
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:
왘
Release electric parking brake mechanically
(컄 page 616).
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
(Continued on next page)
579
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Parking brake
See Oper. Manual
Possible solution
If overheated:
왘
or
(USA only)
왘
(Canada only) Parking brake
inoperative
Switch ignition off and back on again, and engage or release electric parking brake.
When you engage or release the electric
왘 Switch ignition off and back on again, and enparking brake, the red indicator lamp for
gage electric parking brake (컄 page 364).
the electric parking brake flashes and goes
If the electric parking brake cannot be engaged:
out after approx. 10 seconds. The yellow
warning lamp for the electric parking brake 왘 Shift the automatic transmission to P
(컄 page 367).
lights up.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
580
Let vehicle cool down, and do not engage
electric parking brake during this time.
왘
Protect vehicle from rolling away while
parked by using a chock from the vehicle tool
kit (컄 page 613).
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Please release
parking brake
The red indicator lamp for the electric park- 왘 Release electric parking brake.
ing brake flashes and you also hear a warn- or
ing tone.
왘 Carefully drive off (컄 page 364).
You are driving with the electric parking
brake activated, or you are carrying out an or
emergency brake application with the elec- 왘 Release the handle for electric parking brake.
tric parking brake (컄 page 364).
(Canada only) Please release
parking brake
The red indicator lamp for the electric park- While driving:
ing brake flashes and the yellow warning
왘 Release the handle for electric parking brake.
lamp for the electric parking brake comes
While at a standstill:
on. You also hear a warning tone.
(USA only)
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning; braking action is restricted.
왘
Switch off ignition and press handle for electric parking brake until the warning message
disappears from the multifunction display.
581
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Turn on the ignition
to release the
parking brake
The yellow indicator lamp for the electric
parking brake comes on.
왘
Inoperative
See Oper. Manual
ESP® as well as PRE-SAFE® are switched off 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
due to a malfunction. In addition, the v
왘 Have the system checked at an authorized
warning lamp in the instrument cluster
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
comes on.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the
The ABS is still operational.
risk of an accident.
(USA only)
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
You have tried to release the electric parking brake, but the ignition was not switched
on.
(Canada only)
582
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Inoperative
See Oper. Manual
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
S 600 only:
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
ESP® as well as PRE-SAFE® are switched off 왘 Have the system checked at an authorized
due to a malfunction. In addition, the v
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
and ; (USA only) or 3(Canada only) Failure to follow these instructions increases the
warning lamps come on in the instrument risk of an accident.
cluster.
Brake force assistance is impaired and is
sustained through an electric substitute
function as long as the engine is running.
The brake system continues to function
normally. You will feel a pulsating effect at
the brake pedal while braking.
583
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Currently unavailable
See Oper. Manual
®
®
ESP and PRE-SAFE are temporarily unavailable. It is possible that the self-diagnostics have not yet completed.
In addition, the yellow ESP® warning
lamp v comes on.
Possible solution
왘
Synchronize the ESP®:
Drive a short distance with gentle turns at a
speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The message disappears when ESP® is again
available.
The brake system functions normally.
584
Currently unavailable
See Oper. Manual
ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are switched off due 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
to undervoltage. It is possible that the bat왘 Have the system checked at an authorized
tery is not charged.
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
The brake system functions normally.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the
risk of an accident.
Currently unavailable
See Oper. Manual
If the yellow ESP® warning lamp v flash- As soon as the brakes have cooled off, the ETS
es while driving and this message appears, switches on again.
the ETS has switched off to prevent overThe message in the multifunction display disapheating of the drive wheel brakes.
pears and the ESP® warning lamp v goes
out.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause/consequence
STOP,
car too low
STOP,
car too low
Possible solution
You have started driving although the vehi- 왘 Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
cle level was too low.
so.
The vehicle will be raised. The Airmatic*
warning lamp goes out after several seconds.
왘
The Airmatic* is malfunctioning.
왘
Stop and press the vehicle level control button to select a higher vehicle level
(컄 page 401).
왘
Do not turn steering wheel too far to avoid
damaging the front fenders.
왘
Listen for scraping noises.
왘
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Wait until the message disappears from the
multifunction display.
You may then drive off.
The Airmatic* warning lamp lights up continuously.
There is otherwise danger of an accident.
Malfunction
The capability of the Airmatic* system is re- 왘 Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
stricted. This can impair the handling.
왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
585
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Vehicle rising
The vehicle level is too low while at a stand- 왘 Do not drive off.
Please wait a moment still. The vehicle will be raised.
왘 Wait until the message disappears from the
multifunction display.
You may then drive off.
The battery is no longer charging.
Possible causes:
앫
alternator malfunctioning
앫
broken poly-V-belt
왘
Stop immediately and check the poly-V-belt.
If it is broken:
왘
Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water
pump which may result in damage to the engine. Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
If it is intact:
왘
586
Drive immediately to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Coolant,
please refill
See Oper. Manual
Warning!
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The coolant level is too low.
왘
Add coolant (컄 page 497).
왘
If you have to add coolant frequently, have
the cooling system checked by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
G
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
engine parts. You can be seriously burned.
! Do not ignore the low engine coolant level
warning. Extended driving with the message and
symbol displayed may cause serious engine
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Do not drive without a sufficient amount of coolant in the cooling system. The engine will overheat, causing major engine damage.
587
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Coolant level
Stop vehicle!
Switch engine off
Warning!
앫
앫
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The coolant is too hot.
왘
Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon
as it is safe to do so and immediately turn off
the engine.
왘
Only start the engine again after the message
disappears. You could otherwise damage the
engine.
왘
Observe the coolant temperature gauge in
the instrument cluster (컄 page 28).
G
Driving when your engine is overheated
can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire. You could be seriously
burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns which can occur
just by opening the engine hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it.
588
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from
other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of
the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle
until the engine has cooled down.
During severe operating conditions,
e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248°F (120°C).
! The engine should not be operated with the
coolant temperature above 248°F (120°C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Coolant level
Stop vehicle!
Switch engine off
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The poly-V-belt could be broken.
왘
Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon
as it is safe to do so and immediately turn off
the engine.
왘
Check the poly-V-belt.
If it is broken:
왘
Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water
pump which may result in damage to the engine. Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
If it is intact:
왘
Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this
message displayed. Doing so could result in
serious engine damage that is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
왘
Observe the coolant temperature gauge in
the instrument cluster (컄 page 28).
(Continued on next page)
589
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
왘
Coolant level
Stop vehicle!
Switch engine off
Restart the engine.
If this message disappears from the multifunction display:
왘
Drive immediately to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If this message does not disappear from the
multifunction display:
왘
Call Roadside Assistance.
The cooling fan for the coolant is malfunc- 왘 Observe the coolant temperature gauge in
tioning.
the instrument cluster (컄 page 28).
You are driving with one or more doors
open.
The display symbol shows you which doors
are open.
590
왘
Have the fan replaced as soon as possible.
왘
Close the doors.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Gas cap open
Possible solution
A loss of pressure has been detected in the 왘 Check the fuel cap (컄 page 489).
fuel system. The fuel cap may not be closed If it is not closed properly:
properly or the fuel system may be leaky.
왘 Close the fuel cap.
If it is closed properly:
You are driving with the hood open.
왘
Have the fuel system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
왘
Close the hood (컄 page 493).
There is otherwise danger of an accident.
591
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Key
not recognized
Possible solution
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is not
왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as
recognized while the engine is running beit is safe to do so.
cause the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is
왘 Search for the SmartKey.
not in the vehicle.
Otherwise the vehicle cannot be centrally
locked nor can the engine be started again
after the engine is stopped.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is not
왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as
recognized while the engine is running beit is safe to do so.
cause there is strong radio-frequency inter왘 Remove KEYLESS-GO* button from over
ference.
starter switch (컄 page 316).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is momentarily not recognized.
592
왘
Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the
starter switch.
왘
Change the position of the SmartKey in the
vehicle.
왘
If necessary, operate vehicle using SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO* in starter switch under
KEYLESS-GO* button (컄 page 316).
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Close doors
to lock them
You wanted to lock the vehicle but not all
doors were closed.
왘
Do not
forget key
This display appears (for a maximum of
왘 Insert SmartKey in the starter switch.
60 seconds) if the driver’s door is opened or
with the engine shut off and no SmartKey in
왘 Take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with
the starter switch.
you when leaving the vehicle.
This message is only a reminder.
Please
remove key
You have forgotten to remove the
SmartKey.
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
Change
key batteries
The batteries in the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* are discharged.
왘
Replace the batteries (컄 page 619).
Key
still in vehicle
A SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* left in the 왘 Take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* out of
vehicle was recognized while locking the vethe vehicle.
hicle from the outside.
Close doors and lock vehicle again.
593
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Key
not recognized
594
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is momentarily not recognized.
왘
Change the position of the SmartKey in the
vehicle.
왘
If necessary, operate vehicle using SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO* in starter switch under
KEYLESS-GO* button (컄 page 316).
Key being
initialized…
Please wait
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is being
initialized in the vehicle.
왘
Wait until the message disappears from the
multifunction display.
Remove starting
button, then
insert key
The KEYLESS-GO* system is malfunctioning.
왘
Remove KEYLESS-GO* button from over
starter switch (컄 page 316).
왘
Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the
starter switch.
Replace key
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must be 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
replaced.
soon as possible.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Third brake lamp
The high mounted brake lamp is malfunc- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
tioning. This message will only appear if all
soon as possible.
light emitting diodes have stopped working.
Corner. lamp,
Left
The left-hand corner-illuminating lamp is
malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 621).
Corner. lamp,
Right
The right-hand corner-illuminating lamp is
malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 621).
Low beam,
Left
The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning.
Bi-Xenon headlamp:
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
595
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
596
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Low beam,
Right
The right low beam lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Active headlamps
inoperative
The active headlamps are malfunctioning.
AUTO lamps
inoperative
The light sensor is malfunctioning. Daytime 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
driving lamps are switched on.
soon as possible.
Turn signal,
Rear Left
The left rear turn signal lamp is malfunction- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
ing.
soon as possible.
Turn signal,
Rear Left
Substitute bulb on
The left rear turn signal lamp is malfunction- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
ing. A substitute bulb is being used.
soon as possible.
Turn signal,
Rear Right
The right rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Turn signal,
Rear Right
Substitute bulb on
The right rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Turn signal,
Left mirror
The turn signal in the left exterior rear view 왘 Have the LEDs replaced as soon as possible.
mirror is malfunctioning. This message will
only appear if all light emitting diodes have
stopped working.
Turn signal,
Right mirror
The turn signal in the right exterior rear view 왘 Have the LEDs replaced as soon as possible.
mirror is malfunctioning. This message will
only appear if all light emitting diodes have
stopped working.
Turn signal,
Front Left
The left front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.
Turn signal,
Front Right
The right front turn signal lamp is malfunc- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
tioning.
soon as possible.
High beam, Left
The left high beam lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 621).
High beam, Right
The right high beam lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 621).
License plate lamp,
Left
The left license plate lamp is malfunctioning.
License plate lamp,
Right
The right license plate lamp is malfunction- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
ing.
soon as possible.
왘
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
597
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
598
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Please
switch off lights
You are getting out of the vehicle and the
lights are still switched on.
왘
Switch off lights
or
remove key
The light switch is set to * and you have 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to M
forgotten to take out the SmartKey. The
(컄 page 342).
parking lamps remain switched on.
왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
Front foglamp,
Left
The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Front foglamp,
Right
The right front fog lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Rear foglamp,
Left
The left rear fog lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Rear foglamp,
Left
Substitute bulb on
The left rear fog lamp is malfunctioning. A
substitute bulb is being used.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Rear foglamp,
Right
The right rear fog lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Rear foglamp,
Right
Substitute bulb on
The right rear fog lamp is malfunctioning. A 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
substitute bulb is being used.
soon as possible.
Turn the exterior lamp switch to M
(컄 page 342).
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Parking lamp,
Front Left
The left front parking lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Fr. parking lamp, left
Substitute bulb on
The left front parking lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Parking lamp,
Right front
The right front parking lamp is malfunction- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
ing.
soon as possible.
Fr. parking lamp,
Right
Substitute bulb on
The right front parking lamp is malfunction- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
ing. A substitute bulb is being used.
soon as possible.
Side marker lamp,
Left Front
The front left side marker lamp is malfunc- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
tioning.
soon as possible.
Side marker lamp,
Right Front
The front right side marker lamp is malfunc- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
tioning.
soon as possible.
Side marker lamp,
Rear Left
The rear left side marker lamp is malfunctioning.
Side marker lamp,
Rear Right
The rear right side marker lamp is malfunc- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
tioning.
soon as possible.
Reverse lamp,
Left
The left reverse lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
599
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Reverse lamp,
Right
The right reverse lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Tail lamp/
brake lamp, Left
Substitute bulb on
The left tail lamp/brake lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Tail lamp/
brake lamp, Left
The left tail lamp/brake lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
This message will only appear if all light
emitting diodes have stopped working. A
substitute bulb is being used.
This message will only appear if all light
emitting diodes have stopped working.
Tail lamp/
brake lamp, Right
Substitute bulb on
The right tail lamp/brake lamp is malfunc- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
tioning.
soon as possible.
Tail lamp/
brake lamp, Right
The right tail lamp/brake lamp is malfunc- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
tioning.
soon as possible.
This message will only appear if all light
emitting diodes have stopped working. A
substitute bulb is being used.
This message will only appear if all light
emitting diodes have stopped working.
600
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Night View Assist
inoperative
Night View Assist* is malfunctioning.
왘
Night View Assist
currently unavailable
The temperature of the camera* is too high 왘 Wait until the message “Night View Assist
(컄 page 420).
available again” appears.
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
In addition you can:
왘
Swing the camera* cover down
(컄 page 539).
왘
Adjust the air distribution of the automatic
climate control so that air flows upward
(컄 page 230).
Night View Assist
Lights must be on
or set to AUTO
You have tried to switch on Night View As- 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to * or
sist*, but the light switch is not set to *
B (컄 page 342).
or B.
Night View Assist
Not in Reverse gear
You have tried to switch on Night View As- 왘 Shift the automatic transmission to P, N or D
sist* while the automatic transmission was
(컄 page 367).
in position R.
601
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Night View Assist
Lights ON or AUTO,
not in R gear
You have tried to switch on Night View As- 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to * or
sist* but the light switch is not set to *
B (컄 page 342).
or B.
왘 Shift the automatic transmission to P, N or D
In addition, the automatic transmission is in
(컄 page 367).
position R.
Night View Assist
only when
it is dark
You have tried to switch on Night View As- You can only switch on Night View Assist* when
sist* by daylight.
it is dark.
Engine oil level
Stop vehicle!
Switch engine off
S 600 only:
왘
There is no oil in the engine. There is a danger of engine damage.
왘 Turn off the engine.
왘
602
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as soon
as it is safe to do so in a safe location.
Add engine oil (컄 page 494) and check the
engine oil level (컄 page 494).
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause/consequence
USA only:
S 600 only:
Add 1.0 qts. engine oil The engine oil level is too low.
at next refueling
Canada only:
Add 1.0 l engine oil
at next refueling
Possible solution
왘
Check the engine oil level (컄 page 494) and
add engine oil as required (컄 page 494).
왘
If you must add engine oil frequently, have
the engine checked for possible leaks.
Check engine oil level S 550 only:
왘 Check the engine oil level (컄 page 495) and
at next refueling
add engine oil as required (컄 page 494).
The engine oil level has dropped to approximately the minimum level.
왘 If you must add engine oil frequently, have
the engine checked for possible leaks.
603
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Engine oil level
cannot be
measured
S 600 only:
왘
Have the measuring system checked by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Engine oil level
Reduce oil level
S 600 only:
왘
Have excess oil siphoned or drained off. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The measuring system is malfunctioning.
You have added too much engine oil.
There is a risk of damaging:
앫
the engine
앫
the catalytic converter
When the message “Check engine oil level
at next refueling” (S 550) or “Add 1.0 qts.
(Canada: 1.0 l) engine oil at next refueling”
(S 600) appears while the engine is running and at operating temperature, the engine oil level has dropped to approximately
the minimum level.
604
When this occurs, the warning will first
come on intermittently and then stay on if
the oil level drops further.
Visually check for oil leaks. If no obvious oil
leaks are noted, drive to the nearest service station where the engine oil should be
topped to the required level with an approved oil specified in the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet.
! The engine oil level warnings should not be
ignored. Extended driving with the symbol displayed could result in serious engine damage
that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Warning!
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Restraint system
malfunction
Visit workshop
There is a malfunction in the supplemental 왘 Drive with added caution to the nearest aurestraint systems. The air bags or emergenthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
cy tensioning devices (ETDs) could deploy
unexpectedly or fail to activate in an accident.
Malfunction
on front left side
Visit workshop
Components of the driver’s supplemental
restraint system may not work properly.
Malfunction
on Front Right side
Visit workshop
Components of the front passenger’s sup- 왘 Drive with added caution to the nearest auplemental restraint system may not work
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
properly.
Malfunction
on Rear Left side
Visit workshop
Components of the left rear passenger’s
supplemental restraint system may not
work properly.
G
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational. For your safety, we strongly
왘
Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may
not be activated when needed in an
accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly
and unnecessarily which could result in an
accident and/or injury to you or to others.
605
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Warning!
Possible cause/consequence
Malfunction
in Rear Center
Visit workshop
Components of the center rear passenger’s 왘 Drive with added caution to the nearest ausupplemental restraint system may not
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
work properly.
Malfunction
on Rear Right side
Visit workshop
Components of the right rear passenger’s
supplemental restraint system may not
work properly.
Left window curtain
airbag malfunction
Visit workshop
The left side window curtain air bag may not 왘 Drive with added caution to the nearest auwork properly.
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Right window curtain
airbag malfunction
Visit workshop
The right side window curtain air bag may
not work properly.
G
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational. For your safety, we strongly
606
Possible solution
왘
Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may
not be activated when needed in an
accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly
and unnecessarily which could result in an
accident and/or injury to you or to others.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Tele Aid
inoperative
One or more main functions of the Tele Aid 왘 Have the Tele Aid system checked by an ausystem are malfunctioning.
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tire pressure
Caution, tire defect
Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*:
Caution
Tire defect
Warning!
Possible solution
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
왘
If necessary, change the wheel (컄 page 629).
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
One or more tires are deflating.
Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*:
One or more tires are deflating. The respective tire is shown in the multifunction dis- 왘 If necessary, change the wheel (컄 page 629).
play.
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire will cause excessive
heat build-up and possibly a fire.
607
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Tire pressure
Check tires
Check tires
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*:
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
왘
Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as
required (컄 page 514).
왘
If necessary, change the wheel (컄 page 514).
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
The pressure is too low in one or more tires.
Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*:
The pressure is too low in one or more tires.
The respective tire is shown in the multi왘 Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as
function display.
required (컄 page 514).
왘
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
608
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire will cause excessive
heat build-up and possibly a fire.
If necessary, change the wheel (컄 page 514).
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Wheel sensor(s)
missing
Possible solution
One or more sensors malfunction (e.g. bat- 왘 Have the Advanced TPMS* checked by an
tery in one or more wheel sensor is empty).
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
One or more wheels without wheel sensors 왘 Have the wheel sensors installed by an
mounted (e.g. spare tire).
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
No pressure value is shown on the multifunction display for the tire in question.
Tire pressure
Please rectify
Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*:
The pressure is too low in one or more tires.
Or the tire pressures of the individual
wheels differ too radically from one another.
The tire pressure for the respective tire is
shown in the multifunction display after a few
minutes driving.
왘
Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as
required (컄 page 514).
609
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause/consequence
Shift to 'P'
Washer fluid,
please refill
610
Possible solution
You have attempted to turn off the engine 왘 Shift the automatic transmission to P
with the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
(컄 page 367).
and opened the driver’s door with the autoor
matic transmission not shift to position P.
왘 Close the driver’s door.
You are driving with the trunk open.
왘
Close the trunk (컄 page 437).
The water level has dropped to approx.
1.1 US qts (1.0 l).
왘
Add washer fluid (컄 page 498).
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
왔 Where will I find ...?
First aid kit
왘
Fold the covering forward in the direction of arrow.
! Always keep the storage compartment un-
왘
Remove the first aid kit.
der the front passenger seat closed while the vehicle is in motion.
i Check expiration dates and contents for
completeness at least once a year and replace
missing/expired items.
The first aid kit is located in the storage
compartment under the front passenger
seat.
Vehicle jack, vehicle tool kit, luggage
bowl, Minispare wheel
The vehicle jack, Minispare wheel, the vehicle tools, and the luggage bowl are
stored in the compartment underneath the
trunk floor.
왘
Lift up trunk floor cover and engage
trunk floor handle in upper edge of
trunk.
The vehicle tool kit includes:
앫
One towing eye bolt
앫
One wheel bolt wrench with socket
wrench
앫
One alignment bolt
앫
One pair of gloves
앫
One fuse extractor
앫
One fuse chart for the main fuse box
앫
Spare fuses
앫
Collapsible wheel chock
앫
Wheel bolts for Minispare wheel
You can now remove the tools and accessories.
! To prevent damage, always disengage trunk
floor handle from trunk lid and lower trunk floor
before closing the trunk.
1 Tab
2 Cover
왘
Pull tab 1 upward.
611
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Vehicle jack
Warning!
G
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
firmly set parking brake and block wheels
before raising vehicle with jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
always vertical (plumb line) when in use,
especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on level surface. Make sure the jack arm is
fully seated in the jack take-up bracket.
Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
capacity jackstands before working under
the vehicle.
612
Storage position
Operational position
왘
Remove vehicle jack from its
compartment.
왘
왘
Turn crank handle in direction of arrow
as far as it will go.
Turn crank handle clockwise.
Before storing the vehicle jack in its
compartment:
앫
It should be fully collapsed.
앫
The handle must be folded in (storage
position).
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Minispare wheel
Setting up the collapsible wheel chock
왘
Tilt both plates upward 1.
The Minispare wheel is stored in the compartment underneath the trunk floor.
The collapsible wheel chock serves to
additionally secure the vehicle, e.g. while
changing the wheel.
왘
Fold the lower plate outward 2.
왘
Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the
way into the openings of the base
plate 3.
1 Minispare wheel with spare wheel bolts
in container on wheel rim
2 Luggage bowl
3 Vehicle tool kit, jack and collapsible
wheel chock
Removing the Minispare wheel
왘
Turn luggage bowl 2 counterclockwise.
왘
Remove Minispare wheel 1.
1 Tilt the plates upward
2 Fold the lower plate outward
3 Insert the plate
613
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking the vehicle
Removing the mechanical key
Unlocking the driver’s door
1 Mechanical key locking tab
2 Mechanical key
1 Unlocking
2 Mechanical key
왘
Move locking tab 1 in the direction of
arrow.
왘
Insert mechanical key 2 into the driver’s door lock until it stops.
왘
Slide mechanical key 2 out of the
housing.
왘
Turn mechanical key 2 counterclockwise to position 1.
If you are unable to unlock the vehicle with
the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, open the
driver’s door and the trunk using the mechanical key.
i Unlocking the driver’s door and/or the trunk
with the mechanical key will trigger the anti-theft
alarm system (컄 page 75).
To cancel the alarm, insert the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* in the starter
switch.
The driver’s door is unlocked.
왘
Pull door handle quickly.
The locking knob moves up.
614
왘
Turn back mechanical key 2 and remove.
왘
Pull door handle again.
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking the trunk
A minimum height clearance of 5.9 ft.
(1.80 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
1 Trunk lid lock
왘
왘
Insert the mechanical key into the
trunk lid lock 1 until it stops.
Turn mechanical key all the way to the
left.
The trunk opens.
Locking the vehicle
If you cannot lock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, do the following:
왘
Exit the vehicle.
왘
Close the driver’s door.
왘
Enter the vehicle through the rear left
door.
Press down the locking knob of the
driver’s door.
왘
Close the front passenger door, the
rear right door and the trunk.
왘
왘
Open the driver’s door and the rear left
door.
왘
Press the central locking switch on the
driver’s door (컄 page 314).
! To prevent inadvertent lockout, make sure
to have the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you before proceeding with the
next step. The next step will lock the vehicle.
The locking knobs of the front passenger door and the rear doors move
down.
왘
Exit the vehicle.
왘
Close the rear left door.
The vehicle is locked.
If the vehicle battery is disconnected or
drained:
왘
Press down the locking knobs of
the front passenger door and the
rear doors manually.
! The trunk lid swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure that there is sufficient
overhead clearance.
왘
Turn the mechanical key back and remove it from the trunk lid lock.
615
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
왘
Mechanically releasing the electric
parking brake
The electric parking brake is released.
The red indicator lamp 0 (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) in the instrument cluster for the electric parking
brake flashes. The message “Parking
brake See Oper. Manual” appears on
the driver’s display.
The mechanical release device for the
electric parking brake is underneath the
fuel filler flap next to the fuel cap.
Warning!
G
If you mechanically release the electric
parking brake, the vehicle may start to move
on its own. Make sure that no one is in front
of or behind the vehicle. Otherwise, an accident could occur resulting in injury or fatality. Shift the automatic transmission to P and
secure your vehicle in place using the chock
from the vehicle tool kit.
616
Pull release tool 2 in direction of arrow.
1 Fuel filler flap
2 Release tool
3 Protective cap
After it has been unlocked, you can engage
the electric parking brake again from the
driver’s seat.
왘
Shift the automatic transmission to P
(컄 page 367).
왘
왘
Place chock from vehicle tool kit
(컄 page 611) under a rear wheel.
왘
Open fuel filler flap 1.
왘
Remove protective cap 3.
왘
Screw release tool 2 from vehicle tool
kit clockwise 2 to 3 rotations onto release lever.
Press the electric parking brake handle
(컄 page 364).
i You must pull the release tool with more
force if the electric parking brake cannot be released.
! Reattach protective cap 3 after you have
mechanically released the electric parking
brake.
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
왔 Opening/closing in an emergency
왘
Power tilt/sliding sunroof or panorama
roof with power tilt/sliding panel*
You can open or close the tilt/sliding sunroof or tilt/sliding panel manually should
an electrical malfunction occur.
Turn crank 3 counterclockwise to:
앫
slide roof panel/sunroof open
앫
lower roof panel/sunroof at the
rear
i Turn crank 2 slowly and smoothly.
The drive mechanism is behind the left sun
visor.
The tilt/sliding sunroof (컄 page 442) or tilt/sliding panel (컄 page 446) must be synchronized after being operated manually.
2 Crank
왘
Take crank 2 from the Operator’s
Manual pouch.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
왘
Insert crank 2 through the hole.
왘
Turn crank 2 clockwise to:
1 Cover
앫
slide roof panel/sunroof closed
왘
앫
raise roof panel/sunroof at the rear
Remove cover 1.
617
Practical hints
Resetting activated head restraints (S 600 only)
If the luxury active head restraints
(front seats) have been triggered in an accident, the active head restraints must be
reset. Otherwise, the active head restraints cannot offer any additional protection in the event of another rear-end
collision.
i For your convenience, we recommend that
왘
왘
Take reset tool 1 out of the
Mercedes-Benz vehicle literature
pouch.
Guide reset tool 1 into center of head
restraint between head restraint cushion and rear head restraint cover.
! Be careful not to damage upholstery.
you have this work carried out by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Press reset tool 1 forward in direction
of arrow.
You will find the reset tool for manually operating
the head restraints in the Mercedes-Benz vehicle
literature pouch.
왘
Press reset tool downward until you
hear the head restraint release
mechanism audibly engage.
618
왘
Pull out reset tool 1.
왘
Firmly press head restraint cushion
backward towards the rear of the vehicle until it engages.
Warning!
G
When pushing back the head restraint cushion, take care that your fingers do not become caught between the head restraint
cushion and the cover. Failing to do so may
lead to injury.
왘
Repeat this procedure on the active
head restraints for second head restraint.
For information on active head restraints,
see “Luxury active head restraints
(S 600 only)” (컄 page 59).
For information on head restraint adjustment, see “Head restraints” (컄 page 324).
Practical hints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
왔 Replacing SmartKey batteries
If the batteries in the SmartKey or the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* are discharged, the vehicle can no longer be
locked or unlocked. It is recommended to
have the batteries replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
G
Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive
substances. Therefore keep the batteries
out of reach of children.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
SmartKey/SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
CR 2025 or equivalent.
왘
i When inserting the batteries, make sure
they are clean and free of lint.
Remove the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* (컄 page 614).
i When changing batteries, always replace
both batteries.
The required replacement batteries are available
at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately.
1 Mechanical key
2 Battery compartment
왘
Insert mechanical key 1 into opening.
왘
Press mechanical key 1 in direction of
arrow.
The battery compartment is unlatched.컄컄
619
Practical hints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
컄컄 왘
Pull battery compartment 2 out of the
housing.
3 Batteries
4 Contact springs
왘
Pull out batteries 3.
620
왘
Using a line-free cloth, insert new batteries 3 under contact springs 4 with
the positive terminal (+) side facing up.
왘
Return battery compartment 2
(컄 page 619) into housing until it locks
into place.
왘
Slide the mechanical key back into the
SmartKey/SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*.
왘
Check the operation of the SmartKey/
KEYLESS-GO*.
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
왔 Replacing bulbs
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper
exterior lighting and signaling. It is therefore essential that all bulbs and lamp assemblies are in good working order at all
times.
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. Have headlamps checked and
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. See an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for headlamp adjustment.
i If the headlamps or front fog lamps are
i Substitute bulbs will be brought into use
fogged up on the inside as a result of high humidity, driving the vehicle a distance with the lights
on should clear up the fogging.
when the following lamps malfunction:
앫
Brake lamps
앫
Rear fog lamps
앫
Front parking lamps
앫
Tail lamps
앫
Turn signal lamps
Observe the messages in the multifunction display (컄 page 557).
621
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Bulbs
Front lamps
Lamp
Rear lamps
Type
Type
1 Bi-Xenon headlamp:
Low and high beam1
D1S-35 W
9 High mounted brake
lamp
LED
2 Additional turn signal
lamp
LED
a Turn signal lamp
HiP 16 W
W5W
b Brake lamp/tail lamp
and standing lamp
LED
3 Parking and standing
lamp
c License plate lamp
W5W
4 Side marker lamp
W5W
d Backup lamp
HiP 16 W
e Side marker lamp
LED
5 Bi-Xenon headlamp:
H7-55 W
High beam flasher lamp
IR emitter* (for Night
View Assist*)
H11-55 W
6 Corner-illuminating
lamp
H7-55 W
7 Fog lamp
H11-55 W
8 Turn signal lamp
PY 24 W
1
622
Lamp
Bi-Xenon headlamps: Low beam and high beam
use the same D1S-35W lamp. Do not replace the
Bi-Xenon bulbs yourself. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
f Rear fog lamp (driver’s HiP 16 W
side only)
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Notes on bulb replacement
Warning!
G
Keep bulbs out of reach of children.
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Allow the lamp to cool down before changing
a bulb.
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A
bulb can explode if you:
앫
touch or move it when hot
앫
drop the bulb
앫
scratch the bulb
Wear eye and hand protection.
Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the
lamp and its components. We recommend
that you have such work done by a qualified
technician.
앫
Only use 12-volt-bulbs of the same
type and with the specified watt rating.
앫
Switch lights off before changing a bulb
to prevent short circuits.
앫
Always use a clean lint-free cloth when
handling bulbs.
앫
the high mounted brake lamps
앫
the brake, tail and rear standing lamps
앫
the rear side marker lamps
앫
the rear fog lamp
앫
the rear turn signal lamps
앫
Your hands should be dry and free of oil
and grease.
앫
the rear side marker lamps
앫
the license plate lamps
앫
If the newly installed bulb does not
come on, visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
i Have the headlamp adjustment checked
Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following
lamps replaced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫
the Bi-Xenon lamps
앫
the front turn signal lamps
앫
the front fog lamps
앫
the additional turn signal lamps in the
exterior rear view mirrors
앫
the parking and standing lamps
앫
the front side marker lamps
regularly.
Replacing bulbs for front lamps
Before you start to replace a bulb for a
front lamp, do the following first:
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to M
(컄 page 342).
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 492) (except
for side marker lamps).
623
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Installing
왘
Guide washer fluid reservoir into
mounting so that the bottom retaining
lug slides into the rubber sleeve on the
longitudinal member.
왘
Turn retaining screw 1 clockwise.
Bi-Xenon headlamps
G
1 Cover 1
2 Cover 2
3 Cover 3
Washer fluid reservoir (example illustration
from S 550)
Warning!
1 Retaining screw
Removing and installing washer fluid
reservoir on left-hand side
Removing
Do not remove the cover for the Bi-Xenon
headlamp. Because of high voltage in Xenon
lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or
repair the lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such work done by a
qualified technician.
왘
Turn retaining screw 1 counterclockwise.
왘
Take washer fluid reservoir out of
mounting.
왘
Place washer fluid reservoir to the side
and do not disconnect any wires or cables.
Vehicles with Airmatic*
You must remove the washer fluid reservoir in order to change the bulbs of the
front headlamp on the left-hand side. The
washer fluid reservoir is on the front
left-hand side of the engine compartment.
624
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
High beam flasher lamp
왘
In vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlamps, you
can only change the halogen bulb for the
high-beam flasher lamp.
Turn cover 2 (컄 page 624) counterclockwise and remove it.
왘
Turn bulb holder 1 counterclockwise
until it disengages.
왘
Take out bulb holder 1.
왘
Take bulb out of holder.
왘
Insert new bulb into holder and press it
all the way down.
1 Bulb holder
2 Wire position
3 Grip
The tab of the bulb holder must be positioned on the upper left-hand side
and wire 2 must point upward and to
the right for the left headlamp, downward and to the left for the right headlamp.
왘
Turn bulb holder clockwise until it engages and grip 3 is in a vertical position.
IR emitter*
1 Bulb
2 Wire position
왘
Turn cover 2 (컄 page 624) counterclockwise and remove it.
왘
Turn bulb holder 1 counterclockwise
until it disengages.
왘
Take out bulb holder 1.
왘
Press both catches on left and right
sides of bulb holder 1 and take bulb
out of holder.
왘
Insert new bulb into holder until it engages.
컄컄
625
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
컄컄 왘
왘
Insert bulb holder 1 into guide in
headlamp. Wire 2 must point downward and to the right.
Turn bulb holder 1 clockwise until it
engages and wire 2 points downward
and to the left.
Corner-illuminating lamp
왘
Turn cover 3 (컄 page 624) counterclockwise and remove it.
왘
Turn bulb holder 1 counterclockwise
until it disengages.
왘
Take out bulb holder 1.
왘
Take bulb out of holder.
왘
Insert new bulb into holder and press it
all the way down.
왘
Insert bulb holder 1 into guide in
headlamp.
The tab of the bulb holder must be positioned on the upper left-hand side
and wire 3 must point downward and
to the left for the left headlamp, upward and to the right for the right headlamp.
1 Bulb holder
2 Grip
3 Wire position
626
왘
Turn bulb holder 1 clockwise until it
engages and grip 2 is in a horizontal
position.
Additional turn signal lamp bulbs
The additional turn signal lamps in the exterior rear view mirrors have LEDs.
If a malfunction occurs or LEDs fail to function, the entire turn signal unit must be replaced. Have the turn signal unit replaced
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Front side marker lamp bulbs
Since replacing the side marker lamp bulbs
is a technically highly demanding process,
we recommend you have the side marker
lamp bulbs replaced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
왔 Replacing wiper blades
Warning!
G
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the
vehicle’s on-board electronics have
status 0) before replacing a wiper blade.
Otherwise, the wiper motor could suddenly
turn on and cause injury.
! To avoid damage to the hood:
앫
The wiper arms should only be folded forward when in the vertical position.
앫
Never open the hood when the wiper arm is
folded forward.
Placing wiper arms in vertical position
! Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper
arm back. If released, the force of the impact
from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield.
Do not allow the wiper arms to contact the windshield glass without a wiper blade inserted.
Warning!
G
Wiper blades are components that are subject to wear and tear. Change the wiper
blades twice a year, preferably in the spring
and fall. Otherwise the windows will not be
properly wiped. As a result, you may not be
able to observe surrounding traffic conditions and could cause an accident.
Make certain that the wiper blades are properly
installed. Improperly installed wiper blades may
cause windshield damage.
Wiper blades in vertical position
For your convenience, we recommend that you
have this work carried out by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Turn SmartKey in starter switch
position 1.
왘
Turn combination switch to wiper
setting u (컄 page 351).
왘
With wiper arm in vertical position, turn
the SmartKey in starter switch to
position 0.
Vehicles with SmartKey
627
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*
왘
Turn off the engine (컄 page 366).
왘
Take foot off brake pedal.
왘
Turn combination switch to wiper
setting u (컄 page 351).
왘
Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
(컄 page 317) repeatedly until windshield wipers start.
왘
Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
(컄 page 317) when the wiper arms are
in a vertical position.
628
Removing wiper blades
Installing wiper blades
왘
Fold the wiper arm forward until it
snaps into place.
왘
Slide the wiper blade onto wiper arm
until it locks in place.
! To do so, only touch the wiper arm so as not
to damage the wiper blade inserts.
왘
Rotate the wiper blade into position
parallel to wiper arm.
왘
Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on
the windshield. Make sure you hold
onto the wiper when folding the wiper
arm back.
왘
Turn the wiper blade at a right angle to
wiper arm (arrow 1).
왘
Slide the wiper blade sideways out of
the retainer in the direction of
arrow 2.
Practical hints
Flat tire
왔 Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle
왘
왘
Park the vehicle in a safe distance from
moving traffic on a hard, flat surface
when possible.
왘
Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
왘
Turn the steering wheel so that the
front wheels are in a straight ahead
position.
왘
Shift the automatic transmission to P.
왘
Turn off the engine (컄 page 365).
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
Vehicles with SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*:
왘
Turn off the engine by pressing the
KEYLESS-GO* button once
(컄 page 366).
왘
Open the driver’s door (this puts
the starter switch in position 0,
same as with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch). The
driver’s door then can be closed
again.
i Open the door only when conditions are safe
to do so.
왘
Have any passenger exit the vehicle at
a safe distance from the roadway.
Mounting the Minispare wheel
Warning!
G
The dimensions of the Minispare wheel are
different from those of the road wheels. As
a result, the vehicle handling characteristics
change when driving with a Minispare wheel
mounted. Adapt your driving style accordingly.
The Minispare wheel is for temporary use
only. When driving with Minispare wheel
mounted, ensure proper tire inflation
pressure and do not exceed a vehicle speed
of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Drive to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible to have the Minispare
wheel replaced with a regular road wheel.
Never operate the vehicle with more than
one Minispare wheel mounted.
Do not switch off the ESP® when a Minispare wheel is mounted.
629
Practical hints
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle
왘
Prepare the vehicle as described
(컄 page 629).
왘
Take vehicle tool kit tray and vehicle
jack out of trunk (컄 page 611).
왘
Take the Minispare wheel from the
wheel well under the trunk floor
(컄 page 613).
Lifting the vehicle
왘
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away
by blocking wheels with wheel chocks
or other sizeable objects.
One wheel chock is included with the
vehicle tool kit (컄 page 613).
When changing wheel on a level surface:
왘
Place the wheel chock in front of and
another sizeable suitable object behind
the wheel that is diagonally opposite to
the wheel being changed.
Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack
on a level surface. However, should circumstances require you to do so on a hill,
place the wheel chock and another sizeable suitable object as follows:
왘
Place the wheel chock and another
sizeable suitable object on the downhill
side blocking both wheels of the axle
not being worked on.
Warning!
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
always vertical (plumb line) when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on level surface. Make sure the jack arm is
fully seated in the jack take-up bracket.
Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working under the
vehicle.
G
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
firmly set parking brake and block wheels
before raising vehicle with jack.
왘
Take two-piece wheel wrench 1 out of
the vehicle tool kit tray.
The jack take-up brackets are located directly behind the front wheel housings and
in front of the rear wheel housings.
630
Practical hints
Flat tire
Warning!
G
The jack is intended only for lifting the
vehicle briefly for wheel changes. It is not
suited for performing maintenance work
under the vehicle.
1 Jack take-up bracket
2 Jack
3 Crank
왘
Place jack 2 on firm ground.
왘
Position jack 2 under take-up
bracket 1 so that it is always vertical
(plumb-line) as seen from the side,
even if the vehicle is parked on an
incline.
왘
Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a
maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the
ground. Never start engine while
vehicle is raised.
Warning!
앫
Never start the engine when the vehicle
is raised.
앫
Never lie down under the raised vehicle.
Removing the wheel
G
Position the jack only on the jack take-up
brackets designed for this purpose.
If the jack is not properly positioned, the vehicle may slip off of the jack.
1 Alignment bolt
왘
Unscrew upper-most wheel bolt and remove.
컄컄
631
Practical hints
Flat tire
컄컄 왘
왘
Replace this wheel bolt with alignment
bolt 1 supplied in the tool kit.
Remove the remaining bolts.
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. This
could result in damage to the bolt and wheel hub
threads.
왘
! Wheel bolts 2 must be used when mounting the Minispare wheel. The use of any wheel
bolts other than wheel bolts 2 for the Minispare
wheel will physically damage the vehicle’s
brakes.
Warning!
G
Remove the wheel.
Mounting the Minispare wheel
Make sure to use the original length wheel
bolts when remounting the original wheel
after it has been repaired.
왘
Clean contact surfaces of wheel and
wheel hub.
! To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
against hub and hold it there while installing first
wheel bolt.
1 Wheel bolt for light alloy rims
2 Wheel bolt for Minispare wheel
(located in trunk with spare wheel)
632
Warning!
G
Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or rusted.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be repaired immediately. Do not continue to drive
under these circumstances! Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Roadside Assistance.
Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tightened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to
come off. This could cause an accident.
Make sure you are using the correct wheel
bolts.
왘
Guide the Minispare wheel onto the
alignment bolt and push it on.
왘
Insert wheel bolts 2 and tighten them
slightly.
Practical hints
Flat tire
Lowering the vehicle
왘
왘
왘
Lower vehicle by turning crank counterclockwise until vehicle is resting fully on its own weight.
Remove the jack.
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could
fall off the jack.
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. The wheels could come
loose if they are not tightened to a torque of
110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
왘
G
Only use Genuine equipment
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. Other wheel
bolts may come loose.
G
Before storing the jack, it should be fully
collapsed, with handle folded in (storage
position).
Unscrew the alignment bolt, install the
last wheel bolt and tighten slightly.
Warning!
Warning!
1 - 5 Wheel bolts
왘
Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, following the diagonal sequence illustrated (1 to 5), until all bolts are tight.
Observe a tightening torque of
110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
Store the jack and the other vehicle
tools in the designated storage space
underneath the trunk floor
(컄 page 611).
i Do not activate the tire inflation pressure
monitor (컄 page 511) until the depressurized
tire has been removed from the trunk.
633
Practical hints
Batteries
Your vehicle is equipped with two batteries:
앫
The starter battery (located in the engine compartment)
앫
The battery for electrical consumers
(located in the trunk)
G
Warning!
Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries.
If you use your vehicle mostly for short-distance trips, you will need to have the battery charge checked more frequently.
When replacing the batteries, always use
batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
for an extended period of time, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about
steps you need to observe.
634
Rinse any acid spills immediately with clear water. Contact a
physician if necessary.
Risk of explosion.
Keep children away.
! Do not tow-start the vehicle.
The batteries should always be sufficiently
charged in order to achieve its rated service life. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for
battery maintenance intervals.
Wear eye protection.
Fire, open flames and smoking
are prohibited when handling
batteries. Avoid creating sparks.
Battery acid is caustic. Do not
allow it to come into contact
with skin, eyes or clothing.
Wear suitable protective clothing, especially gloves, apron and
faceguard.
Follow the instructions in this
Operator’s Manual.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Large 12-volt storage batteries contain
lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
Practical hints
Batteries
! The consumer battery located in the trunk is
a valve-regulated lead acid (VRLA) battery, also
referred to as “fleece” battery. Such batteries do
not require topping-up of the electrolyte level.
VRLA batteries therefore do not have cell caps
and the battery cover is non-removable. Do not
attempt to open the consumer battery as otherwise the battery will be damaged.
Even though VRLA batteries do not require topping-up of the electrolyte level and cannot be
opened to check the electrolyte level, the battery condition must be checked periodically by
performing a battery conductance test. Refer to
Maintenance Booklet for battery condition testing intervals.
As with any other battery, disconnect the consumer battery if you do not intend to operate
your vehicle for an extended period of time to
prevent battery discharge or connect an accessory battery charge unit expressly approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model to maintain the battery charge. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for further information.
! The factory-equipped VRLA battery is
leak-proofed. Only use a battery as replacement
that has the same security features and is of
identical size, voltage, and capacity as the factory-equipped battery.
The battery, the battery ventilation and the lateral plug must always be securely installed when
the vehicle is in operation.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking, etc.
Warning!
Warning!
G
Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting,
you might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water and seek
medical help if necessary.
G
Do not place metal objects on the battery as
this could result in a short circuit.
Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk
of acid burns in the event of an accident.
Take care that you do not become statically
charged, e.g. by wearing synthetic clothing
or rubbing against textiles. For this reason,
you also should not pull or push the battery
over carpets or other synthetic materials.
Never touch the battery first. First touch the
outside body of the vehicle in order to release any possible electrostatic charges.
컄컄
635
Practical hints
Batteries
컄컄
Do not rub the battery with rags or cloths.
The battery could explode if touched due to
electrostatic charge or due to spark formation.
! Switch off the engine and switch off the ve-
i Remove SmartKey from starter switch (vehi- Disconnecting starter battery
cles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the vehicle’s
on-board electronics have status 0)
(컄 page 315) when you turn off the engine and
no longer require any electrical consumers. The
vehicle then uses very little power and the consumer battery is spared.
Have the battery checked regularly by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for maintenance intervals or
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
further information.
Starter battery (example illustration from
S 550)
i Only replace a discharged battery with a bat- 1 Negative terminal
tery recommended by Mercedes-Benz. The consumer battery is installed in the trunk in such a
way that it is safeguarded as much as possible
against mechanical destruction in the event of
an accident.
636
order described below. You could otherwise
damage the vehicle’s electronics.
! Switch off the vehicle’s internal electrical
functions before disconnecting the starter battery. If the vehicle is stationary for more than one
hour with the SmartKey removed, you do not
need to switch off the vehicle’s internal electrical
functions.
hicle’s internal electrical functions (컄 page 637)
before you disconnect or remove the battery’s
terminal clamps. You could otherwise destroy
electronic assemblies such as the generator.
! Do not connect any consumers directly to
the starter battery. The starter battery will otherwise be discharged.
! Always disconnect the starter battery in the
2 Positive terminal
i If the consumer battery is discharged, you
must use the mechanical key to unlock the vehicle (컄 page 614). Since the vehicle has a separate starter battery, however, you can still start
the vehicle.
Practical hints
Batteries
Switching off vehicle’s internal electrical functions
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the
KEYLESS-GO button (컄 page 316) and use the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO like a normal
SmartKey.
Disconnecting starter battery
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 492).
왘
Use a 10-mm open-end wrench to disconnect the battery negative lead.
Warning!
왘
Remove cover 2 (컄 page 636) from
the positive terminal.
왘
Disconnect the battery positive lead.
Never charge a battery while still installed in
the vehicle unless the accessory battery
charge unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is
being used. Gases may escape during charging and cause explosions that may result in
paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.
왘
Shift the automatic transmission to P.
왘
Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘
Turn SmartKey in starter switch to position 0.
Removing starter battery
왘
Turn SmartKey in starter switch to position 1.
i For your convenience, have the starter bat-
왘
Wait for 30 seconds.
tery removed by a Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Pull out the battery ventilation hose
from the battery (depending on battery
arrangement in your vehicle model, the
ventilation hose is located either on the
left or right side of the battery).
왘
Fold bar on starter battery up.
왘
Take out the starter battery.
The vehicle’s internal electrical functions are switched off.
왘
Turn SmartKey in starter switch to position 0.
! Do not remove the SmartKey!
Charging battery
G
An accessory battery charge unit specially
adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is
available, permitting the charging of the battery in its installed position. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
information and availability. Charge battery
in accordance with the separate instructions for the accessory battery charger.
i Have the batteries charged by a
Mercedes-Benz Center. If you charge the batteries yourself, follow the operating instructions for
your charging device.
637
Practical hints
Batteries
! Only use charging devices with a maximum
charging voltage of 14.8 V.
Reinstalling starter battery
왘
Install starter battery in engine compartment.
왘
Swing retaining bar down.
Starter battery
Warning!
G
During the charge procedure, there is a risk
of acid burns due to gases escaping from
the battery. Do not bend over the battery
during the charge procedure.
! The battery and the battery ventilation hose
must always be securely installed when the vehicle is in operation.
Connect the switched-off charging device to the terminals of the starter battery. Observe the operating
instructions in the manual for the
charging device while doing so.
der described below. Otherwise, the vehicle’s
electronics could be damaged.
Warning!
G
Do not drive without a properly installed and
connected consumer battery.
Have any work on the consumer battery carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
638
Make sure that the consumer battery in
the trunk is correctly installed and connected.
왘
Turn SmartKey in starter switch to position 0 and remove.
왘
Connect the positive lead and fasten its
cover 2 (컄 page 636).
왘
Connect negative lead 1
(컄 page 636).
왘
Attach ventilation tube.
Reconnecting starter battery
! Always connect the starter battery in the or왘
왘
! Never invert the terminal connections.
! Make sure that the battery has a plug where
the ventilation tube is attached to it.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 315).
왘
Start the engine (컄 page 359).
왘
Check vehicle functions.
Practical hints
Jump starting
왔 Jump starting
Warning!
G
Failure to follow these directions will cause
damage to the electronic components, and
can lead to a battery explosion and severe
injury or death.
! Do not tow-start the vehicle.
If the starter battery is discharged, the engine can be started with jumper cables and
the battery of another vehicle. Observe the
following:
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and very explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking, etc.
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery
can result in it exploding, causing personal
injury.
Read all instructions before proceeding.
the starter battery installed in the engine compartment.
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts.
Do not attempt to start the engine using a battery quick charge unit.
앫
Jump starting should only be performed
when the engine and catalytic converter are cold.
If engine does not run after several unsuccessful
starting attempts, have it checked at the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫
Do not start the engine if the battery is
frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.
앫
Excessive unburned fuel generated by repeated
failed starting attempts may damage the catalytic converter and may present a fire risk.
Only use 12-volt battery to jump start
your vehicle. Jump starting with a more
powerful battery could damage the vehicle’s electrical system, which will not
be covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Never lean over batteries while connecting
or jump starting, you might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water, and seek
medical help if necessary.
! Jump starting should only be performed on
앫
Only use jumper cables with sufficient
cross-section and insulated terminal
clamps.
앫
Always make sure that the jumper cables are not on or near pulleys, fans or
other parts that move when an engine
is started or running.
Make sure the jumper cables do not have loose
or missing insulation.
Make sure the cable clamps do not touch any
other metal part while the other end is still attached to a battery.
639
Practical hints
Jump starting
Warning!
G
Keep flames or sparks away from battery.
Do not smoke.
Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries
(컄 page 634).
Jump starting should only be performed on
the starter battery. The starter battery is
located in the engine compartment on the
passenger side (컄 page 634).
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the
KEYLESS-GO button (컄 page 316) and use the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO like a normal
SmartKey.
640
왘
Make sure the two vehicles do not
touch.
왘
Secure vehicle in place with electric
parking brake.
왘
Shift the automatic transmission to P.
왘
Turn off all electrical consumers, except hazard warning flashers or work
lights.
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 492).
왘
Start the engine of the vehicle with the
charged battery and run at idle speed.
1 Positive terminal of your vehicle’s
battery
2 Positive terminal of other vehicle’s
battery
3 Negative terminal of other vehicle’s
battery
4 Negative clamp
Practical hints
Jump starting
왘
Remove red cover from positive
terminal 1.
왘
Connect positive terminal 2 of the
charged battery with positive
terminal 1 of the discharged battery
with the jumper cable. Clamp cable to
charged battery 2 first.
! Never invert the terminal connections.
왘
Connect negative terminal 3 of
charged battery to jumper cables and
attach other end 4 to a suitable
ground point on the vehicle.
왘
Get into vehicle and start engine within
30 seconds.
If the starting attempt does not succeed:
왘
Turn the SmartKey in starter switch
to position 0.
왘
Take out the SmartKey.
왘
Turn off engine of donor vehicle, restart it and let it run at idle speed
for several minutes.
왘
Disconnect the jumper cable during
this time.
왘
Reconnect jumper cable as described before.
왘
Restart engine.
왘
While the engine is running, switch off
several electrical consumers such as
the blower.
왘
Disconnect jumper cables first from
ground point 4 and negative
terminal 3, then from positive
terminals 1 and 2.
왘
Have the battery checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
641
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the
ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel
lift/dolly equipment. This method is preferable to other types of towing.
! Do not tow-start the vehicle.
! Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equipment
with SmartKey in starter switch turned to position 0.
Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Towing
with sling-type equipment over bumpy roads will
damage radiator and supports.
To prevent damage during transport, do not tie
down vehicle by its chassis or suspension parts.
® (컄
page 73), the tow-away
Switch off the ESP
alarm (컄 page 76) and the automatic central
locking (컄 page 313).
If the vehicle’s transmission is damaged, only
have it towed with the drive shaft disconnected.
When circumstances do not permit the
recommended towing methods, the vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the
ground or front wheels raised only so far as
642
necessary to have the vehicle moved to a
safe location where the recommended
towing methods can be employed.
! Make sure that the electric parking brake is
released. If the electric parking brake is malfunctioning, release it mechanically (컄 page 616).
! In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, insert the
SmartKey into the starter switch under the
KEYLESS-GO button and turn the SmartKey in
the starter switch to 0.
! If the vehicle is towed with the front axle
raised, the engine must be shut off (SmartKey in
starter switch starter switch position 0 or 1).
Otherwise the ESP®/ETS will immediately be engaged and will apply the rear wheel brakes.
While towing, the battery must be connected and
charged. Otherwise:
앫
you will not be able to switch on the ignition
앫
you will not be able to engage the automatic
transmission in position N
When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the
ground, the automatic transmission must be
shifted to N and the SmartKey must be in starter
switch position 2.
In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*, you must use the
starter switch under the KEYLESS-GO* button
(컄 page 315).
When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the
ground or the front axle raised, the vehicle may
be towed only for distances up to 30 miles
(50 km) and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph
(50 km/h).
! To be certain to avoid a possibility of damage to the drivetrain, however, we recommend
the drive shaft be disconnected at the rear axle
drive flange for any towing beyond a short tow to
a nearby garage.
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Warning!
G
If circumstances require towing the vehicle
with all wheels on the ground, always tow
with a tow bar if:
앫
the engine will not run
앫
there is a malfunction in the brake system
앫
there is a malfunction in the power supply or in the vehicle’s electrical system
as that will be necessary to adequately control the towed vehicle.
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on
the ground, make sure the SmartKey is in
starter switch position 2 and automatic
locking is deactivated (컄 page 223).
G
! When towing the vehicle with all wheels on
the ground, please note the following:
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
With the automatic central locking activated and
the SmartKey in starter switch position 2, or
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (컄 page 317)
in position 2, the vehicle doors lock if the left
front wheel as well as the right rear wheel are
turning at vehicle speeds of approximately
9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
Warning!
Switch off the tow-away alarm (컄 page 76).
i The automatic transmission will remain
locked in position P and the SmartKey will not
turn in the starter switch if the consumer battery
is disconnected or discharged. See information
on the battery (컄 page 634) or on jump starting
(컄 page 639).
i To signal turns while being towed with the
To prevent the vehicle doors from locking, deactivate the automatic central locking
(컄 page 313).
Towing of the vehicle should only be done using
the properly installed towing eye bolt. Never attach tow cable, tow rope or tow rod to vehicle
chassis, frame or suspension parts.
hazard warning flasher in use, turn SmartKey in
starter switch to position 2 and activate the combination switch for the left or right turn signal in
the usual manner – only the selected turn signal
will operate.
Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard warning flasher will operate again.
643
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Installing towing eye bolt
Removing cover
Removing towing eye bolt
왘
Press mark on cover 1 in the direction
of arrow.
왘
Loosen towing eye bolt counterclockwise with wheel wrench.
왘
Lift cover off to reveal the threaded
hole for towing eye bolt.
왘
Unscrew towing eye bolt.
왘
Store towing eye bolt and wheel
wrench in the vehicle tool kit in the
trunk.
Installing towing eye bolt
왘
1 Cover on right side of front bumper
1 Cover on right side of rear bumper
644
왘
Take towing eye bolt and wheel wrench
out of the vehicle tool kit in the trunk
(컄 page 611).
Screw towing eye bolt clockwise into
its stop and tighten with wheel wrench.
Installing cover
왘
Fit cover 1 and snap into place.
Practical hints
Fuses
왔 Fuses
The electrical fuses in your vehicle serve to
switch off malfunctioning power circuits.
If a fuse is blown, the component(s) and
systems secured by that fuse will stop operating.
The following aids are available to help you
replace fuses (컄 page 646):
앫
Fuse chart
앫
Spare fuses
앫
Special fuse extractor
i Blown fuses must be replaced by like fuses
(recognizable by the color and amperage) with
the amperage recommended in the fuse allocation chart. A Mercedes-Benz Center will be happy to advise you.
Only change fuses while the vehicle is parked.
First switch off all electrical consumers and turn
off the ignition.
Warning!
G
Only use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benz
with the specified amperage for the system
in question. Using other fuses may cause an
overload leading to a fire, and/or cause
damage to electrical components and/or
systems.
! Keep the fuse boxes free by contamination
and wetness. Otherwise, electrical parts or systems could be damaged.
! Never attempt to repair or bridge a blown
fuse. Have the cause determined and remedied
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The electrical fuses are located in different
fuse boxes:
앫
In the dashboard on the passenger side
(컄 page 647)
앫
In the dashboard on t